How to test a multimeter

How to test a multimeter

A multimeter is a tool that is used to take measurements of electrical circuits. No matter what type of multimeter you own, you can probably test resistance and voltage with it. When your multimeter seems like it is not working correctly, there are a number of things you can do to test it. If your multimeter fails any of these tests it is probably defective and will need to be replaced.

Set your multimeter to the lowest setting for resistance (the word “ohms” or an “Ω” symbol can also denote resistance). Touch the red probe to the black probe. Check the display to make sure that it reads “0,” as there should not be any resistance between the two probes.

Find a resistor of known value. Purchase one from a store that sells electronics components if you don’t have one handy. Set the multimeter to the correct factor of 10; set the multimeter to the 100Ω mark to test a resistor known to be a 500Ω resistor, for instance. Place one probe at each end of the resistor. Check the display to make sure it shows a value very close to the resistor value. Perform this check with more than one resistor if the multimeter does not measure the first resistor correctly.

Purchase a new 9V battery. Turn the dial on your multimeter to set it to measure voltage rather than resistance. Place the red probe against the positive terminal of the battery. Touch the black probe to the negative terminal. Ensure that the multimeter provides a reading of 9V or very close to it.

How to test a multimeter

Multimeters are a super handy piece of electrical test equipment and as the name suggests, they can measure a variety of parameters such as voltage, resistance, current, and many more. Apart from this, it can also be used to debug faulty circuits, learn about other people’s electronic designs, and even test a battery. Hence the ‘multi’-‘meter’ name. But how do you use a multimeter? This tutorial will show you how you can test if your multimeter is working, and if it is working, I will also give you a few tips on how to use this device. So, let’s first start with testing whether the multimeter is working or not.

Step1: Check the Battery. Try to Power-On the Electronic Multimeter

So, the first thing to check if your multimeter is working is just to turn your dial from the off position to any other position and you should see some display over there. There are two things that you have to check one if your display is working, it means your multimeter is powered.

Now, if your display is not showing anything, then there are two chances. One, your battery might have been drained, so open the casing and you have to replace the battery. Second thing is, your fuse might have blown out. So, you have to open the casing again and replace your fuse. After checking the battery, the other thing that you can possibly check is if your leads are working properly.

Step2: Test the Probe Leads

So, to do that, put your multimeter in continuity mode. Every multimeter will have a continuity mode which you can identify using a continuity symbol (something like a sound wave) over there. Once you put the multimeter in continuity mode, take these two probes and connect them together. When you do that, you should hear a continuous beep sound. This means there is proper connectivity between both the leads and your Multimeter is working. So once you’ve done that, you can be almost 90% sure that your meter is working fine, and you can go ahead with measuring your voltage, current, resistor, or whatever it is.

If your display is working. And if you’re not able to hear the continuity sound, it means there is a problem with your leads and you need to change the leads. Now, assuming your multimeter is working, here are a few tips that you can use to make sure that you’re always using this device safely.

How to Use a Multimeter Safely?

In this section, we will discuss how to use a multimeter for different applications safely.

  • When measuring AC voltage, avoid touching the probe tips while they are still connected to their corresponding points on the electrical circuit. This is to prevent the circuit from being short, which could result in a spark or a ball of flame that could harm you.
  • Do not use your test leads if the protective insulation on the leads or probes is fractured or damaged. Your fingers may come in contact with the probe conductor, and this might result in a shock.
  • Know that not all the multimeters support AC current measurement. So, never, ever measure AC current with a multimeter that doesn’t support AC current measurement otherwise you will damage your meter.
  • You should always be careful with where you put your probes while measuring current. The black probe should always go in the com port. Now for the red probe, you can use it in these two places. One can be used to measure voltage and current in milliamp amps value. And if you’re measuring current more than in milliamps, if you’re measuring it in amps, then you have to use your probe to another port as shown in the image.

How to test a multimeter

So that is it, guys, this is just a basic introduction on how to test if your meter is working and some tips on how to use it properly. And I’m planning a continuous series tutorial to teach you how to use this multimeter to measure voltage, to measure current, to measure resistor, and whatnot? These all things are also explained in the video given below:

A multimeter is a highly efficient, electronic measuring device that is used to take measurements of electrical circuits, helping you identify and troubleshoot any problem with your electrical device.

A multimeter has numerous measurement functions integrated into it and it can be expertly used to detect faults in the home, commercial, and industrial electrical devices.

A multimeter can help you measure voltage, resistance, current, the capacitance of capacitors etc. In addition to that, there are several multimeters that have sensors built into them to help take measurements such as sound pressure level, wind speed, relative humidity, light level, and acidity/alkalinity etc.

There are commonly two types of multimeter available for purchase in the market—analog multimeters and digital multimeters. While digital multimeters showcase a numeric display, analog multimeters provide readings through the use of a microammeter with a moving pointer.

How to test a multimeter is working

It is of paramount importance for you to have your multimeter checked and calibrated at least once a year. It is not necessary for you to hire the services of a professional to have your multimeter checked. It is completely safe and feasible for you to test your multimeter yourself.

One way to test if a multimeter is capable of measuring resistance is as follows:

First, you will need to purchase a resistor of a known value. Then, you need to set the multimeter to the correct factor of 10.

Now, you need to set the multimeter to the 100 ohms mark to test a resistor known to be, for example, a 500 ohms resistor.

You will then need to place one probe at each end of the resistor. Does the multimeter display the correct resistor value? If so, you can be assured that your multimeter measures resistance correctly.

How to test a multimeter

If you want to check if your multimeter works and is capable of measuring voltage, you should again correctly wire your leads. At the same time, you should also ensure that your battery is good. You should then proceed to short-circuit both leads.

The reading on the multimeter should read O volts. Then, you should select the appropriate range and plug both the leads into mains. The readings on the multimeter should now read something in the range of your voltage (220 or 110 volts).

There is also another way to examine if a multimeter is capable of measuring voltage. All you will need to do is to purchase a new 9 V battery. Now, you should carefully place the red probe to the positive terminal of the battery and the black probe to the negative terminal. If the multimeter provides a reading of 9 V or very close to it, the multimeter works!

If you want to find out if your multimeter works at measuring current, you will first need to have a loaded circuit. You could have a battery connected to the resistance. Then, you should place the multimeter in the series to the circuit. If it shows a reading, it works. If it doesn´t show a proper reading, it doesn´t work.

By the way, this video might help you to fix a problem with your multimeter:

However, you should be extremely careful when testing your multimeter. You need to first identify the maximum allowed limits and see to it that the leads are placed correctly.

It is ill-advised for you to connect the multimeter directly to a voltage source especially if it is in the current measurement mode. If you do so, the fuse inside the device will most likely blow due to high current.

If your multimeter fails to perform the aforementioned functions, you should investigate the inside of the battery compartment and see if a fuse has been blown. If you can´t find any fault in the battery compartment, you should get your multimeter repaired or replaced immediately.

If you want your multimeter to be operable for a long period of time, it is imperative for you to store it well, clean it regularly, and maintain it. Hence, the multimeter should be stored in a toolbox when it is not used. You should also provide cover to the exposed metal probes of your multimeter. It is also advisable for you to wipe the device with a damp (not wet) cloth every once a while.

If you think it’s time to buy a new multimeter, then do that. For example, Fluke 87V is a great option. Find out more on


We are of the opinion that everyone should own a multimeter. Having a multimeter can be beneficial in numerous ways. A multimeter can be expertly used to help measure voltage, current, and resistance.

In addition to that, it can also help diagnose and troubleshoot electrical problems in the power supplies, wiring systems, and electronic equipment etc.

However, in order to use the features of a multimeter, it is imperative for you to ensure that it works. We would recommend you to have your multimeter checked, maintained, and calibrated at least once a year. You need not hire the services of a professional to have your multimeter checked.

It is completely safe and feasible for you to test your multimeter yourself. It is advisable for you to change batteries and fuses when required. You should also consider removing the batteries if you don´t plan to use the multimeter for a long time.

This test, using a digital multimeter, determines whether:

  • an electrical circuit is complete or broken
  • the resistance of a component matches the manufacturer’s specification

Figure 4: Ohm Test of a Load

How to test a multimeter

Follow these steps to complete the resistance test procedure:

  1. Make sure all power is off on the circuit you are testing.
  2. Make sure that the component that you are testing is isolated from the complete circuit. Either remove the component from the circuit or isolate it with an open switch.
  3. Set the selector dial to Ω.
  4. Connect the test lead and probes to the component terminals as shown (Figure 4).
  5. Observe the readout window to obtain the Ω reading.
  6. Compare the results to the manufacturer’s Ω specifications. If the readings match the component, then resistance is not a problem. If the component is a load, there should be resistance that matches the manufacturer’s specs.
  7. If the reading is infinite (I) or overloaded (OL), then the component is open.
  8. If the reading is zero, then the component is closed (if it is a load then this is an internal short).
  9. If this is the last test you are doing, turn the meter to “off” and store it in a safe place.

Video: Testing Resistance

Multimeters are devices that combine multiple electrical measurement functions in one unit. These instruments typically measure voltage, electric current and resistance. In order to get the most from a multimeter, you have to check it before to see if it’s working properly.

Sales and Service Engineer Larry Rambeaux demonstrates how to pre-check a meter and how it applies to every day electrical diagnostics. Before you can accurately use a multimeter, you have to make sure it’s working properly.

Purkeys has developed multiple training programs to help technicians better understand the proper use of a multimeter. Learn more about Purkeys’ training programs by clicking here.

Are you dealing with battery issues? Are you looking for advice? We welcome your comments and questions below.

Learn More about Purkeys and Our Battery Program

Click here to listen to our radio show Hey! Sparky and learn more about Electrical Audits

Click here to subscribe to our free weekly e-newsletter to receive more information about our electrical solutions. Our e-newsletter will help you reduce costs, avoid driver downtime and stay ahead of your competition.


Since 1990, Purkeys has made an impact in the commercial trucking industry through electrical advisement and solutions.

Arkansas Headquarters
823 S. Lincoln St.
Lowell, AR 72745
(800) 219-1269
(479) 419-4800

This article explains how to manually test a power supply with a multimeter. The process is risky due to the voltages involved and not for the casual user. This information applies to a standard ATX power supply. Almost all modern consumer power supplies are ATX power supplies.

How to Manually Test a Power Supply With a Multimeter

Testing a power supply manually with a multimeter is one of two ways to test a power supply in a computer.

A properly executed PSU test using a multimeter should confirm whether the power supply is in good working order or should be replaced.

Before you begin, read some important PC repair safety tips because of the dangers involved with the process. Manually testing a power supply involves working closely with high voltage electricity.

Don't skip this step! Safety should be your primary concern during a power supply test and there are several points you should be aware of before starting this process.

Open your computer’s case. In short, this involves turning off the computer, removing the power cable, and unplugging anything else connected to the outside of your computer.

To make testing your power supply easier, you should also move your disconnected and open computer case somewhere easy to work like on a table or other flat, non-static surface.

Unplug the power connectors from each and every internal device.

An easy way to confirm that each power connector is unplugged is to work from the bundle of power cables coming from the power supply inside the PC. Each group of wires should terminate to one or more power connectors.

There is no need to remove the actual power supply unit from the computer nor is there any reason to disconnect any data cables or other cables not originating from the power supply.

Group all of the power cables and connectors together for easy testing.

As you're organizing the power cables, we highly recommend rerouting them and pulling them as far away from the computer case as possible. This will make it as easy as possible to test the power supply connections.

Short out pins 15 and 16 on the 24-pin motherboard power connector with a small piece of wire.

You’ll probably need to take a look at the ATX 24-pin 12V Power Supply Pinout table to determine the locations of these two pins.

Confirm that the power supply voltage switch located on the power supply is properly set for your country.

In the US, the voltage should be set to 110V/115V. Check the Foreign Outlet Guide for voltage settings in other countries.

Plug the PSU into a live outlet and flip the switch on the back of the power supply. Assuming that the power supply is at least minimally functional and that you've properly shorted the pins in Step 5, you should hear the fan begin to run.

Some power supplies don't have a switch on the back of the unit. If the PSU you're testing doesn't, the fan should begin to run immediately after plugging the unit into the wall.

Just because the fan is running doesn't mean that your power supply is supplying power to your devices properly. You'll need to continue testing to confirm that.

Turn on your multimeter and turn the dial to the VDC (Volts DC) setting.

If the multimeter you're using doesn't have an auto-ranging feature, set the range to 10.00V.

Test the 24-pin motherboard power connector:

Connect the negative probe on the multimeter (black) to any ground wired pin and connect the positive probe (red) to the first power line you want to test. The 24-pin main power connector has +3.3 VDC, +5 VDC, -5 VDC (optional), +12 VDC, and -12 VDC lines across multiple pins.

You'll need to reference the ATX 24-pin 12V Power Supply Pinout for the locations of these pins.

We recommend testing every pin on the 24-pin connector that carries a voltage. This will confirm that each line is supplying the proper voltage and that each pin is properly terminated.

Document the number that the multimeter shows for each voltage tested and confirm that the reported voltage is within approved tolerance. You can reference power supply voltage tolerances for a list of proper ranges for each voltage.

Are any voltages outside the approved tolerance? If yes, replace the power supply. If all voltages are within tolerance, your power supply isn't defective.

If your power supply passes your tests, it's highly recommended that you continue testing to confirm that it can operate properly under a load. If you're not interested in testing your PSU further, skip to Step 15.

Turn off the switch on the back of the power supply and unplug it from the wall.

Reconnect all of your internal devices to power. Also, don't forget to remove the short you created in Step 5 before plugging back in the 24-pin motherboard power connector.

The biggest mistake made at this point is forgetting to plug everything back in. Aside from the main power connector to the motherboard, don’t forget to provide power to your hard drive(s), optical drive(s), and floppy drive. Some motherboards require an additional 4, 6, or 8-pin power connector, and some video cards need dedicated power, too.

Plug in your power supply, flip the switch on the back if you have one, and then turn on your computer as you normally do with the power switch on the front of the PC.

Yes, you'll be running your computer with the case cover removed, which is perfectly safe as long as you're careful.

It’s not common, but if your PC doesn’t turn on with the cover removed, you may have to move the appropriate jumper on the motherboard to allow this. Your computer or motherboard manual should explain how to do this.

Repeat Step 9 and Step 10, testing and documenting the voltages for other power connectors like the 4-pin peripheral power connector, the 15-pin SATA power connector, and the 4-pin floppy power connector.

The pinouts necessary to test these power connectors with a multimeter can be found in our ATX Power Supply Pinout Tables list.

Just as with the 24-pin motherboard power connector, if any voltages fall too far outside the listed voltage, you should replace the power supply.

Once your testing is complete, turn off and unplug the PC and then put the cover back on the case.

Assuming your power supply tested good or you've replaced your power supply with a new one, you can now turn your computer back on and/or continue troubleshooting the problem you're having.

Did your power supply pass your tests but your computer still isn’t turning on properly? There are several reasons a computer won’t start other than a bad power supply. See our How to Fix a Computer That Won’t Turn On guide for more help.

All in one pocket sized waterproof test meter for pH, conductivity, TDS, salinity and temperature! Tester stands up to everyday use, harsh environments, and the test of time. The tester can even stand upright when the cap is used as the stabilizing base. Great for water, wastewater, laboratory or plant use, the tester features long-life pH electrodes with a wide range of sample compatibility. Pin-style conductivity sensors feature stainless steel electrodes for chemical resistance and durability. Replaceable sensor module saves you money by reusing the meter body.

  • Description
  • Additional information
  • Reviews (0)
  • Questions & Answers


The PCTSTestr50 combines 5 measurements in one pocket-sized meter. The large upright display is easy to read. The IP67-rated waterproof, dustproof housing protects your instrument from rugged field or plant environments. A large volume of polymer gel reference gives long, clog-free, sensor lifespan. The waterproof battery compartment is easy to use; simply unscrew cover to replace batteries; no tools required. The automatic temperature compensation function gives you accurate readings even with fluctuating temperatures. Additional features include push-button calibration, hold function and auto shut-off function. The PCTSTestr50 is ideal for water quality applications such as hydroponics/agriculture, research labs and industrial process checks.
Test Modes: pH, Conductivity, TDS, Salinity and Temperature.

How to test a multimeter

It’s wise for you to learn how to test a circuit breaker with a digital multimeter. If you know how to do that, you can do basic troubleshooting without calling an electrician, thus saving you time and money.

Table of Contents

Tools You Need

The tools you need to test your circuit breaker are:

  • Digital multimeter
  • Flathead screwdriver to uncover the circuit breaker box

You can use any type or brand of a digital multimeter to measure any current. What is important is that you know the right setting for your application to prevent breaking the multimeter. You can watch this video tutorial by Ratchets and Wrenches to learn about testing an AC voltage using a digital multimeter.

How to Test a Circuit Breaker Using a Digital Multimeter

How to test a multimeter

You can check your circuit breaker using a digital multimeter in two ways.

  • Voltage Testing

You can check the voltage of your circuit breaker directly in the panel. You should be careful when doing this as you will be working with live electricity. If the voltage reads zero or below the standard, then your circuit breaker might be faulty.

  • Test the Resistance

You can also find a faulty circuit breaker by checking its resistance using your digital multimeter. This method is best recommended for circuit breaker replacements before you install it in your panel. This is also a safer way to check circuit breakers since you don’t need live power to test them.

Step-By-step Instructions to Check Circuit Breaker Voltage

How to test a multimeter

Step 1: Open your Circuit Breaker

Unscrew the circuit breaker cover using your flathead screwdriver. Make sure to hold it before you remove the last screw to prevent accidents. It is better to have some assistance when uncovering your circuit breaker panel to keep it from falling.

Step 2: Set the Multimeter to AC Voltage

Rotate the dial of your multimeter to AC voltage, then put your black test lead in the common socket terminal and red test lead in the voltage socket terminal. Please note that some digital multimeters require setting the appropriate voltage. If that is the case, set the multimeter’s dial to a higher voltage than what you have (usually 120 V).

After setting up your device correctly, you can go to the next step.

Step 3: Testing Your Circuit Breaker

To test the voltage of your single pole circuit breaker, you need to put your black or common lead to the ground of your breaker panel. After that, put your red lead in the hot wire of the circuit breaker you want to test. The reading should be around 120-volts for a single-pole breaker.

If your reading is very low or zero voltage, your circuit breaker is bad and needs to be replaced.

To test a 220-volt double pole circuit breaker, you need to put your digital multimeter’s red and black lead directly to the breaker terminal. The reading should be around 240-volt, and you must test your double pole breaker one by one.

To test one side of your double pole circuit breaker, put your common lead to the ground of your panel and the hot lead directly to one side of the terminal of the circuit breaker, then transfer to the other terminal to test the other side of the double pole breaker. They should both be near 125 volts.

If the other side of your double pole breaker is zero, you have a bad circuit breaker, and you require a replacement.

For more information, you can watch this video tutorial made by TheElectricalDoctor to see how to test your circuit breaker with your digital multimeter.

How to Check the Resistance of a Circuit Breaker

To check the resistance of a circuit breaker, set your multimeter in ohms or resistance settings.

Then put one lead in the clip or supply terminal and the other to the screw terminal. It should have a resistance reading when you turn on the breaker and no rating when you turn it off.

Follow the same procedure when you test a double pole breaker. If it doesn’t have resistance when turned on or no resistance when switched off, your circuit breaker is bad and needs to be replaced.

You may consider these ten best circuit breakers I’ve used on projects before buying a new one. In this article, I state the pros and cons of each type of circuit breaker to give you an idea of the best circuit breaker for yourself.


Did you find this procedure on how to test a circuit breaker with a digital multimeter useful? Knowing how to test your circuit breaker will allow you to save money by finding out what’s wrong with your breaker, even before calling an electrician.

And if you need to buy a new circuit breaker, I highly recommend these ten most trusted circuit breakers I’ve used on my past projects.

Did you find something interesting in this article? What is it? Please share it in the comments section below.

No more scratching your head at malfunctioning appliances. With this guide, you’ll learn the ins and outs of troubleshooting your home and household electronics using one of your toolkit’s handiest instrument.

By Glenda Taylor and Bob Vila | Updated Mar 15, 2021 1:34 PM

How to test a multimeter

Once reserved for engineers and electronic technicians, multimeters—sometimes called “multitesters”—have come down in price and size, making them indispensable for homeowners who have basic knowledge of circuitry. When troubleshooting problems with small appliances, smart-home modules, speaker systems, or just about any other electronic item, a multimeter will be among the most valued tools in your arsenal.

If you’re new to multimeters, these gadgets may seem daunting at first. Learn the basics, however, and you’ll soon be able to perform a number of diagnostic tests on your own. Because multimeters vary from model to model, be sure to study your specific unit’s operating manual before you get started.

How to test a multimeter

Two Types of Multimeters

Analog multimeters, or volt-ohm-milliammeters (VOM), have been around for decades and can still be found, affordably, at any do-it-yourself-type store. The new kids on the block—digital multimeters (DMM)—offer greater precision with decimal point readouts, even enhanced functions, such as the ability to auto-detect alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC).

Applications and Limitations

Both VOM and DMM models measure voltage, resistance, and current, replacing the need for individual voltmeters, ohmmeters, and ammeters. While you can test household voltage with a multimeter, electrical-current-testing is limited to low-voltage circuits, such as small direct current (DC) motors or low-voltage alternating current (AC) appliances—your thermostats and doorbells, for example. To avoid blowing a fuse, destroying the multimeter, or risking injury, do not attempt to test current higher than the maximum allowed for your unit.

Among other things, multimeters can determine:

  • Available battery charge
  • Voltage at an outlet or switch
  • Damage in cables and cords
  • Viability of fuses, diodes and resisters
  • Conductive ability of an electrical pathway

Measuring Voltage

With a multimeter, you can measure both AC and DC voltage—particularly useful for locating short circuits or determining if a rechargeable battery is holding a charge. Start by selecting the corresponding current on the multimeter and a voltage range higher than the current you’re testing. For example, if you’re measuring the voltage in a 120-volt wall outlet, turn the multimeter knob to the next highest option—200 ACV. If you’re testing a 12-volt car battery, select the next highest option—20 DCV.

Then make sure to connect your test leads to the proper jacks before testing: For voltage testing, plug the red lead in to the port labeled “V.” For this and all multimeter tests, the black lead plugs into the common (COM) port.

To test a battery’s DC charge, touch the red probe to its positive terminal and the black probe to its negative terminal; the multimeter will display the existing charge in the battery. Since polarity isn’t an issue in AC voltage, it doesn’t matter which probe you insert in either hole of a wall outlet; insert both probes, and the multimeter will display the voltage at the outlet.

Safety Tip: Hold probes by their insulated handles. Do not touch the metal part of the probes to avoid electrical shock.

How to test a multimeter

Testing Resistance and Continuity

In electronics, “resistance,” is the amount of hindrance to the flow of electricity, and less is more—or, rather, good for the operation of your appliances. Multimeter in hand, you can test resistance in circuit board components and appliance elements throughout the house. If, for example, a microwave isn’t operating as it should, this checkup could help you you determine if you should replace a single non-functioning component on the circuit board or buy a new microwave outright.

First, make sure the appliance is unplugged before testing. Plug the red lead into the port with the ohm’s symbol, “Ω,” and select the lowest ohms’ function on the dial. While you can test individual capacitors and components directly on a circuit board, you’ll get a more accurate reading if you remove a component and then test it. When you touch the black and red probes to both ends of a component, simultaneously, you’ll get a reading. The lower the reading, the less the resistance to electrical flow. By comparing the readings from other components on the circuit board, you can determine whether or not to replace a component with an unusually high reading.

To test the continuity, or continuous flow, of an electrical path between two points, plug the red lead into the “Ω” jack and turn the dial to the continuity symbol. A small reading—or a beep—indicates there is a continuous path between the two points. No reading or beep, however, indicates a problem. For example, if you’ve just put a new bulb in your lamp but it still doesn’t turn on, running this test at both ends of its power cord can confirm that an internally broken cord is to blame for your dim room.

Testing Low-voltage Current

In order to measure low-voltage current, the multimeter must become part of the circuit, allowing the current to actually run through the multimeter. This is handy for determining whether a low-voltage circuit, such as a looped set of solar-powered landscape lights, is getting power to all the lights. For this test, plug the red lead into the port labeled, “A,” for Amps, and select the next-highest Amps function on the dial.

Your operating manual may provide a chart, but if not, you can test a simple circuit by connecting the live feed from the power-supply (usually black) to the multimeter’s red probe. The multimeter’s black probe then connects to the positive wire (usually black) on the appliance you’re testing. Finally, the neutral power-supply lead (usually white) connects to negative appliance wire (also white). When you’ve hooked up the circuit correctly, turn on the power source to measure the electrical flow rate, or amps, through the circuit.

Safety Tip: As previously mentioned, do not test a circuit that exceeds your multimeter’s capability. Multimeters are “fused” at a maximum amount of voltage, which is typically lower than household current. If a multimeter bears the words, “10A MAX FUSED,” do not test any current you suspect might be higher than 10 Amps.

How to test a multimeter How to test a multimeter

Need to troubleshoot a dead outlet? Purchasing a multimeter, the go-to tool for diagnosing electrical problems, could allow you to investigate and address outlet issues. Not sure how to test an outlet? Read on, and the experts at Mr. Electric® will help you learn how to use a multimeter to test an outlet.

What Can a Multimeter Tell You?

A multimeter can help you determine:

  • If power is actually reaching an outlet
  • If the outlet is properly grounded
  • Whether wiring within the outlet is reversed

How to Test an Outlet with a Multimeter in 8 Simple Steps

  1. Learn the essentials of outlet testing safety.
    Because you will be performing these tests on a live outlet, ensure safety by holding both meter probes in the same hand. This will prevent shock from passing through your body. Never allow the metal portion of the probes to brush each other or touch, as this can create a dangerous short circuit.
  2. Get to know outlet geography.
    Modern outlets have three slots: one for hot, one for neutral, and one for ground. The rounded half circle is the ground, the longer slot (left) is the neutral and the shorter slot (right) is hot. Remember that any of the three wires can carry current, so treat each one with caution.
  3. Adjust your multimeter.
    Set your meter to measure voltage. Select the alternating current (AC) function on the multimeter, which is often depicted with a wavy line. The DC function will have a solid and a dashed line.
  4. Connect the leads.
    Push the short, thick connector (called a ‘banana plug’) of the BLACK lead into the connector labeled ‘COM’ (it may have a minus “-” sign beside it). Then, plug in the RED connector labeled with a “+” or horseshoe symbol (the Greek letter Omega).
  5. Measure the voltage to determine if the outlet has power.
    Using one hand, insert a probe into each vertical slot on the outlet. Red goes in the smaller slot, black into the larger one. A properly functioning outlet will give a reading of 110-120 volts. If there is no reading, either something is wrong with the wiring in the outlet or the circuit breaker is tripped.
  6. Determine if the outlet is properly grounded.
    Keep the red lead in the small slot and move the black lead and place it in the ground (Uu-shaped) outlet slot. The reading should remain the same. If it doesn’t, the outlet is improperly grounded.
  7. Check if the wiring is reversed.
    Place the red lead into the large slot and the black lead into small slot. If you get a reading, the wiring is reversed. This won’t affect simple equipment like lamps but can cause issues for more sophisticated appliances and electronics.
  8. Determine problems with a particular appliance.
    Learn “How to Make Electrical Tests” with the help of Mr. Appliance, a fellow Neighborly® home services company.

Count On Mr. Electric for Safe, Prompt Electrical Service

Need to resolve your outlet issue? Avoid a hair-raising electrical experience. Your local Mr. Electric will be happy to help with any electrical projects you’ve been putting off. Schedule an appointment online or call us at (844) 866-1367. Contact Mr. Electric today.

This blog is made available by Mr. Electric for educational purposes only to give the reader general information and a general understanding on the specific subject above. The blog should not be used as a substitute for a licensed electrical professional in your state or region. Check with city and state laws before performing any household project.

Ideas, explanations and examples about electrical topics and issues.

How To Test A Circuit Breaker With A Multimeter?

How to test a multimeter

They say, “Don’t play with the fire,” and not paying attention to the electrical faults in your home is exactly the same. The circuit breaker in your home is like the “head” of the electrical supply. A broken circuit breaker may cause electrical overload in your house. Ultimately, this overload can lead to short-circuiting and trigger a fire. So, does that mean you have to keep calling an electrician to make sure that the circuit breaker in your home is working fine?

Well, the good news is, you can do that on your own with the help of a multimeter. Quick Spark cares for your safety and your hard-earned money. We have made a step by step guide to testing your circuit breaker with the help of a multimeter. Let’s begin.

Tools You Will Need For Testing A Circuit Breaker

Here are two essential tools you will need to conduct the test

  • Flathead Screwdriver that you will use to uncover the circuit breaker box.
  • Digital multimeter (of any reliable brand).

The selection of the brand is not that important but make sure you have the right setting on your multimeter to avoid breaking it.

How To Test The Circuit Breaker- Step By Step Guide

Alright, here is something you need to know. You can check your circuit breaker in two ways.

  • Voltage testing
  • Resistance testing

However, in this article, we will discuss testing the circuit breaker voltage.

Steps To Check Circuit Breaker Voltage

Step 1: Opening The Circuit Breaker

It is time to use that flathead screwdriver to open the circuit breaker cover. You may want to get some help so that it (circuit breaker panel) doesn’t fall while opening.

Step 2: Setting Your Multimeter To AC Voltage

Here is how you do this step;

  • Rotating the dial of the multimeter to AC voltage
  • Insert the red test lead in voltage socket terminal and black test lead in common socket terminal

It is possible that your multimeter may need an appropriate voltage setting. If it needs setting, rotate the multimeter’s dial to a voltage higher than what you usually have (120V).

Step 3: Circuit Breaker Testing

Testing Single Pole Circuit Breaker

  • Put the common or black lead into the breaker panel’s ground.
  • Put the red lead into the circuit breaker’s (which you wish to test) hot wire.

For a single-pole circuit breaker, the standard reading is 120V. If the multimeter is showing zero or a lower voltage, it means the circuit breaker is bad, and you need to call an expert electrical service, such as Quick Spark.

Testing Double Pole Circuit Breaker

Insert the black and red lead of the multimeter directly into the breaker terminal. The standard reading for a double pole circuit breaker is 240V (approximately).

Moreover, you have to test both sides of the double circuit pole breaker separately. Just insert the hot lead to one side of the circuit breaker’s terminal, and the common lead to the panel’s ground. Do this with the other side as well.

Ideally, both sides should have 125 volts (or near) each. If the double pole breaker’s other side is showing zero voltage, it means you have a bad circuit breaker that needs replacement.

How to test a multimeter

Multimeter and circuit boards are two things that go hand in hand. While the former is used for troubleshooting, circuit boards, on the other hand, are used in varied electrical equipment. One of the main reasons why Multimeter are widely used today is because they can find faults within a piece of electrical equipment very easily.

Multimeter today come in two variants, i.e., one is analog and the other digital. However, when it comes to test a circuit board with a multimeter, there are many discrepancies. Not many people know this, but before using a multimeter for finding faults in a circuit, it is necessary to have a little knowledge about electrical types of equipment.

Only then you can track down the faults and adopt a logical approach for doing so. But the main question that arises is how to test a circuit board using a multimeter. Today the advent of science and technology has introduced many types of equipment, which gradually lessens our work.

Even if you don’t know the basics of an electrical circuit board and multimeter, you can easily learn the same using this blog. Below we have outlined the different steps that can be used to test a circuit board with the help of a multimeter.

Guide To Test A Circuit Board Using Multimeter:

Step-1: Plugging :

This is the first and basic step in circuit board testing. For this step to work out, you first need to observe the polarity and then probe in the multimeter. Every multimeter device comes with two types of probes, namely red and black. While the red one is the positive probe, the black one is the jack at the end of the probe wire.

Step-2: Testing :

Here comes the critical step wherein you need to select the multimeter function first to check a circuit board. Multimeters are modeled in such a way that they can measure both voltage and resistance. In case you have to test the power or voltage, turn the function knob or select the AC or DC voltage. The circuit board and the overall voltage will then be displayed on the device.

Step-3: Checking :

We all know that circuit boards are made up of many components in general and are placed inside an electrical device. Thus, to know if all parts are working in sync with each other, you first need to unplug the device and the housing. Then switch it on and make sure that you do not touch any of the wirings.

Step-4: Measure Voltage and Resistance:

The next thing to do using a multimeter is to check for voltage and resistance. For this step to work out smoothly, you need to do a basic test first. To test circuit board properly, touch the multimeter probes to the test points present on the board.

Make sure while playing out this step you have your hands on the plastic portion of the probes. You can then go on to check either the voltage or resistance. When measuring the resistors’ resistance, connect one probe to the end of each resistor.

Step-5: Check The Final Result

We all know that multimeters are used for checking the working functionality of the circuit board. Thus, to check and see if all the components are working properly repeats the step 1 to 4 for every component present on the board.

In this way, you can single out all the faulty components on the board. Always remember that you have to proceed systematically for all things to work out. From the first instance, when the incorrect voltage is found to check the preceding component’s output pins, every step has to be followed very keenly.

Troubleshooting a PCB is very important nowadays. It is because, with the rising demand for electrical appliances, the supply for circuit boards has also increased. Thus, a minor distraction in the board can make it non-functional or damage the components. This can be easily traced with the help of a multimeter.

As the device is blessed with two probes, it makes the overall process to troubleshoot a circuit board very easy.

Conclusion :

The testing of a circuit board is primarily significant for electrical devices. It is because, with the help of a multimeter, comprehensive testing can be done without any damage. Moreover, all the components such as resistors, capacitors, and transistors can be checked without removing them physically from the board.

The introduction of millimeters has simplified this process for the technicians. Thus, for all those aiming for an elaborate solution while testing the PCB’s the above steps will help you in every way. Check out all the points listed above and make the overall testing of the printed circuit board easy.

Whilst it is easy to visually inspect the element in a glass fuse to see if it has blown, the majority of fuses have solid, non-transparent bodies that hide the element from view. To test if the fuse is blown, we require a multimeter. Once configured, a multimeter can measure the resistance of the fuse element. Resistance is measured in Ohms ‘Ω’. The following tutorial uses a digital multimeter, however the same principles apply when using an analogue multimeter (ie. one with a needle display). If you are using an analogue meter, firstly read the tutorial and then refer to the additional notes at the end.

Connecting the Test Leads.

The black lead should be connected to the Common socket.
The red lead should be connected to the Ω or Ohms socket.

Not sure what fuse you need? We can help.

How do you set the ohms on a multimeter.

Move the dial to the lowest range of the Ohms scale (200 ohms is the lowest setting on this mulitmeter). This should also power the meter ON. If there is a seperate ON switch, please turn the meter ON. You can see in the picture that the Ohms range is illustrated by a light green band in lower left area.

The 5 different Ohms range settings on this multimeter are;
2M = 2,000,000 ohms or 2 Megaohms (highest resistance setting)
200k = 200,000 ohms
20k = 20,000 ohms
2k = 2,000 ohms
200 = 200 ohms (lowest resistance setting)

Our comprehensive Fuse Size Guide can help you find a replacement fuse.

How to test if your multimeter is working.

Touch the metal tips of the 2 testing leads and whilst holding them together, the meter display should change to show that little or no resistance is present. Power will simply flow from one lead back through the other. When you seperate the two tips, the meter display will return to a 100% resistance state.

Measure Resistance of the Fuse.

Important! Place the fuse on a non-conducting surface such as wood, laminate or plastic. Touch the metal caps at each end of the fuse with the metal tips of the testing leads. There is no polarity so you can use any lead for either fuse cap. Ensure to make good contact by touching a clean metal surface on each cap. Whilst the leads are firmly connected to the fuse, look at the reading displayed on the multimeter.

Note: If you wish to test a fuse still located in a circuit. Please ensure that you have turned off power and disconnected the power source to avoid possibility of electric shock.

Understanding a Digital Multimeter Reading.

Fuse is OK: If the multimeter reading changes to a low resistance value (similar to the result of touching the 2 leads together).

Fuse is Blown: If the meter reading does not change and display still shows the original 100% resistance state.

Don’t forget to turn the multimeter OFF when you have finished testing.

How to use an Analogue Multimeter.

Analogue multimeters provide readings by moving a needle over a fixed scale. The testing process is exactly the same.

Choose the correct Ohms range & touch the metal tips of the testing leads together. The needle will ‘sweep’ across the scale to show little to no resistance. A good fuse will generate the same reading.

When the tips are seperated, the needle will show 100% resistance state. A blown fuse will generate the same reading. Make sure that the testing lead tips make a good connection to the metal end caps or blades of the fuse and the fuse is tested on a non-conducting surface.

Same day processing of orders received before 2pm Australian Eastern Standard Time.

Can a Car Fuse Go Bad Without Blowing?

If your car fuse is not functioning and doesn’t appear to have blown, here are some reasons why that may happen;

  • 1. The fuse has a manufacturing defect. Is it a quality fuse or a cheap replacement?
  • 2. A blown fuse has been replaced incorrectly with a lower rated fuse.
  • 3. The device powered by the fuse is faulty, drawing a higher current.
  • 4. The fuse is OK, but something went wrong in the testing process.

A car fuse wouldn’t commonly fail because of overuse or ageing. Automotive fuses are designed to function for a very long period of time when operated within the manufacturer’s specified parameters.

Electrical circuits in modern vehicles are designed by qualified electrical engineers and subjected to rigorous testing in extreme environments so they are usually very reliable. Additionally, car manufacturers use high quality fuses which are manufactured and tested to strict standards. Want to learn more about fuses? View all fuse tutorials.

How to test a multimeter

How to tell if a Car Fuse is blown?

There are a few ways to quickly check if a car fuse is blown. Firstly, you need to find the fuse that controls whatever device isn’t working. There may be a diagram inside the fuse box lid or owner’s manual or you can find it online. Then, remove the fuse using fuse pullers – make sure your car is completely switched off before you do this! Next, inspect the fuse for visual signs of discoloration or broken filaments. You can then install a replacement car fuse.

Shop our range of car fuses.

How to test a multimeter

Need a Replacement Fuse?

Swe-Check are the Fuse Specialists.

We carry a massive stock range of high quality fuses which you can buy on our website.

If you are unable to find the fuse you require, our expert staff can cross reference fuses between the many different brands. Contact us.

We service all requirements from small retail customers to large OEM companies and distributors and can organise special pricing and credit accounts.

If you are not sure how to identify a fuse, we have created this fuse identification guide.

We only sell quality approved products by globally recognised manufacturers.

How to test a multimeterOnly a few decades ago, if you knew how to use a multimeter, you were probably an electronics technician or an engineer. But, today, the handy test equipment known as a Digital Multimeter should be in the toolbox of every handy person. The multimeter is great for determining the working status of many appliances. Multimeters are available in either digital or analog models. Digital multimeters will display readings in numbers. Analog multimeters indicate the value with a needle over a scale.

Have you ever wondered why a light doesn’t turn-on? If the lightbulb is not bad, is the lamp out of order? Is the lamp cord bad? Here is one simple example of where a digital multimeter comes in handy. A useful function of a multimeter is the resistance, or “continuity” test function. To avoid the chance of electrical shock, it is important to never use the continuity test function on any appliance that has live voltage connected. Always make sure the appliance is first NOT connected to any power source.

How to test a multimeter

Now with the power disconnected, set the multimeter dial to Resistance (Ohms). Touch the two test probes together (one is Red “positive”, the other is Black “negative”). The OHM meter reading will indicate zero resistance. When there is zero resistance, you have continuity. A reading of zero indicates the circuit is closed and the circuit can conduct current. Now for an easy first test, take a standard lightbulb out of a lamp socket. Touch one test probe to the bottom of the lightbulb, and touch the other test probe to the threaded side of the lightbulb socket. If you read continuity, or zero resistance, the lightbulb is good. If the meter does not indicate continuity, then you know the lightbulb interior filament is broken (current can not pass thru). The same test can be performed on two ends of a simple electrical cord. If the meter does not indicate continuity, then there is a break in the circuit, and the cord is probably cut. Remember to never test the continuity of any cord or appliance with the power on. Always first disconnect any power or current source.

To test a switch, place a test probe on each side (pole) of the switch. When you move the switch from the off to on position, the multimeter reading should change from zero to infinity. If not, then the switch is not working properly. To test a motor, touch a test probe to each pole. Again, a reading of zero indicates that the motor has continuity, current can pass through, and the motor windings are good.

After carefully studying the instructions of the digital multimeter, you will be able to move on to more detailed electrical tests. A multimeter can measure alternating current (AC or household current) or direct current (DC or battery current) in a live circuit. It can also check voltage. A multimeter can test 120 volts AC in a home circuit, or it can test DC batteries to learn if they are weak or fully charged.

Take the time now to learn how to properly use a basic multimeter. You will be glad you did when someday you would like to verify the cause of an everyday electrical problem.

How to test a multimeter

What is a multimeter? It’s a multifunctional device that measures electronics and electrical components and can perform a variety of tests without requiring that users buy another unit. Essentially, it’s an amalgam of an AC/DC voltmeter, ammeter, and ohmmeter, so it can be used to measure voltage, current measured in amperes, and resistance. Wondering how to test a cable with a multimeter? Gateway Cable Company can help! Read on for a quick guide to checking the resistance of your cables.

Tip to Tip Test

  • Set the multimeter to resistance (ohms/Ω) and a select a small scale.
  • Choose a flat wooden surface on which to perform the test. Position both of the cable’s plugs on the table.
  • Use the probes to touch the tips of the plugs. Place the red probe on one tip and the black probe on the other.

Ideally, the reading should be about one ohm, but two or three ohms is allowable. If one of your cables gets a higher reading, however, you’ll want to check its conductors and their connections to the terminals in the plugs.

Sleeve to Sleeve Test

  • Turn the multimeter’s dial to resistance and choose a small scale.
  • Place the cable and its plugs on a flat wooden surface.
  • This time, check the sleeves, i.e. the longer parts of the plug.
  • Use the probes to hold the plug sleeves down — red on one plug and black on the other.

Readings should be identical to the readings you received when testing the cable tip to tip. Again, if the cable’s reading is higher than three ohms, double-check the conductors and whether or not they make contact with the terminals in the plugs.

Tip to Sleeve Test

  • Turn the multimeter’s dial to resistance and select a small scale.
  • Place the cable and its plugs on a flat wooden surface.
  • Place one of the multimeter’s probes on the tip of plug A and place the second probe on the sleeve of plug B.

In this case, resistance should be infinite. The multimeter shouldn’t give an ohm reading at all.

Learn More from Gateway Cable Company!

Do you have additional questions about how to test a ribbon cable with a multimeter or how to test an RCA cable with a multimeter? Or maybe you’re curious about how to test voltage in a hook-up wire, how to test a fuse, or how to install an in-line fuse? Contact us at Gateway Cable Company or get a quote online! We offer a wide selection of high-quality cables, including slave cables and MIL-SPEC components, for a range of operations.

Perform three different tests on all the cables you’ve made:

1) Tip to tip (hot)

  • Set your multimeter to resistance (ohms; symbol: Ω), choosing a very small scale.
  • Place both plugs of the same cable on the wooden surface of your table. Don’t touch the plugs, use the multimeter’s probes to keep them down. If you want, you can also place a towel (or a piece of cloth) underneath the plugs.
  • Touch both plug tips with the probes – the red one going to one plug, the black one to the other.

2) Sleeve to sleeve (ground/earth)

  • Set your multimeter to resistance (ohms; symbol: Ω), choosing a very small scale.
  • Place both plugs of the same cable on the wooden surface of your table. Don’t touch the plugs, use the multimeter’s probes to keep them down.
  • Touch both plug sleeves (the long parts of the plug) with the probes – the red one going to one plug, the black one to the other.

3) Resistance between tip (hot) and sleeve (ground)

  • Set your multimeter to resistance (ohms; symbol: Ω), choosing again a very small scale.
  • Place both plugs of the same cable on the wooden surface of your table. Don’t touch the plugs, use the multimeter’s probes to keep them down.
  • Touch both plugs with one probe touching the tip of the first plug, and the second probe making contact with the sleeve of the second plug.

This test shouldn’t give you an ohm reading at all, as the resistance should be infinite.

Measuring the capacitance of signal cables

For this test you will need a genuine capacitance meter. Most multimeters feature a capacitance setting, but the measurements wouldn’t be precise enough for our purposes, because we need to measure very specific values. At Custom Boards we use an Agilent U1732B.

  • Set your meter to C for capacitance.
  • Push one of the cable’s plugs firmly against the wooden table. Don’t use your hand, use the meter’s probes instead.
  • Touch both contacts of the same plug with the probes; one on the tip, the other on the sleeve.

A proper cable should measure a capacitance value of 100 pF per metre.

This means a 20 cm long patch cable should give you a reading around 20 pF.

The reading can be quite a bit higher, without it meaning that there’s anything wrong with the cable. Capacitance values are frequency-dependent – we’ve found that 1 kHz generally gives you reliable readings.

  • Look for discrepancies between different cables, and make sure that changes in capacity are in the correct relation to the cable’s length.
  • If you’ve made your cables correctly, you will be able to guess fairly accurately a cable’s capacitance value, after you’ve been measuring for a little while.
  • You could also make notes of the capacitance values for your guitar cable, and all the signal cables in your cable loom. These values can later be compared with the measurements taken from your other cables.

Repeat the same tests for all of your signal leads, meaning all patch cables, your guitar lead, and all signal cables connected to your amp. There is no need to measure capacitance with AC-power cables. Resistance measurements, on the other hand, are very important. The resistance between the different conductors in an AC cord should always read infinite. Any other reading suggests a short circuit somewhere, and should prompt serious investigation.


If you have purchased all the parts and components but get a feeling that you might not be up to the task after all, we can make your pedalboard for you, using the components you have bought from us. Don’t worry, we won’t let anything go to waste.

Digital Multimeters have many functions that are useful. One of the things Digital multimeters are very capable of performing is testing components. This article will show you how to use your digital multimeter to test a resistor.

Resistors are typically 2 terminal components whose main purposed is to limit current to other components. A voltage drop occurs between the two terminals and resistance can be calculated using Ohm’ s Law R=V/I; where R = resistance, V = voltage, and I = current.

Connect the probes to the digital multimeter.

Connect the black probe to the com (common) port and the red probe to the port marked with the Ohm symbol which looks like an upside down horseshoe. For those of you who remember Greek, the Ohm symbol is the Greek letter Omega.

This digital multimeter has banana jacks for the port plugs. Other digital multimeters may have screw in terminals or BNC plugs.

Use alligator clips to attach to the digital multimeter probes. The alligator clips will allow you to work more hands-free and provide a better connection to the component. Use a red and black alligator clip to match the probes.

Connect the alligator clips to each terminal of the resistor.

Most common resistors are the 4 color band type. The first two colors indicate values, the 3rd band indicates a multiplier, and the 4th band indicates % tolerance of the resistor value.

The pictured resistor is red (2), violet (7), orange (x 1000), and gold (5%). This resistor should then theoretically have a value of 2700 Ohms with 5% tolerance of the value. The lower the tolerance value, the better the resistor. 5% tolerance is about as good as a standard resistor as you can buy at stores like Radio Shack.

Turn the digital multimeter dial setting to Ohms (Omega).

Some less expensive digital multimeters have Ohm settings with multipliers (x 100, x 1000, etc). The digital multimeter shown is auto ranging so the multiplier will be shown in the screen with the reading.

Take the digital multimeter reading. The pictured test shows a value of 27.02 k Ohms. The resistor value is therefore 2702 Ohms. This value is well within the 5% tolerance variance from 2700 Ohms. The resistor is ready for your project.

To test an in-circuit resistor with a digital multimeter, use steps 1 and 4 above. Make sure there is no voltage active in the circuit board. You will probably have to use the probe tips unless you have really small alligator clips. Touch each probe to a terminal of the resistor. For resistor testing you can touch either terminal with the black or red probes.

Take the digital multimeter reading. This resistor has the color code green, brown, brown, gold, and should therefore have the value of 510 Ohms. The digital multimeter reads 509 Ohms. The digital multimeter test shows a good resistor.

A multimeter or digital multimeter (DMM) is one of the most essential and common pieces of lab equipment. Multimeters are used for taking basic electrical measurements related to Ohm’s Law. This includes measurements like voltage, current, resistance, etc. Multimeters can be both handheld or benchtop units. Benchtop multimeters tend to offer higher precision than their smaller handheld counterparts. For this purpose of this article, we’ll assume a benchtop multimeter is being used.

Ohm’s Law Multimeter measurements

Let’s start with DC voltage, one of the simplest and most-used multimeter measurements. The DC voltage measurement is used to determine the difference in electrical potential between two points in a DC or “direct current” circuit. That difference in potential is measured in units of [volts, DC]. To measure DC voltage using a benchtop multimeter, once you’ve turned it on, select “DC V” mode.

Connect your probes to your multimeter; the positive probe should be connected to the “INPUT HI” port, while the negative probe should be connected to the “INPUT LO” port. Apply power to the circuit or device under test and probe points on circuit.

Measuring AC voltage is almost identical to measuring DC voltage, however this mode is used for measuring the voltage potential between two points of an AC or “alternating current” circuit. The unit of measure for AC voltage is [volts, AC]. To measure AC voltage using a benchtop multimeter, select the “AC V” mode and connect your probes. The positive probe should be connected to the “INPUT HI” port, while the negative probe should be connected to the “INPUT LO” port. Apply power to the circuit or device under test and probe points on circuit

Measuring resistance with a multimeter can be done a couple of different ways, depending on the level of accuracy needed in the measurement. Multimeters measure resistance by injecting a small current into the circuit, and then measuring the voltage drop across those points in the circuit. The known current, and the resulting voltage drop are then used to calculate the resistance using Ohm’s Law, V=I^2*R. Since even wires have resistance, the wires of the probes can actually add to the observed resistance measurement. For this reason, there are two different modes for measuring resistance: 2-wire mode and 4-wire mode.

If you’re not worried about the added resistance of the probe wires, taking a 2-wire resistance measurement will be sufficient. This is a simpler measurement to make and the probes are less complicated and expensive. For a 2-wire measurement, the injected current and the observed voltage are both done through the same probes.

To take a 2-wire resistance measurement with a benchtop multimeter, select the “ohm” or “Ω” mode, and connect the probes to the “INPUT HI” and “INPUT LO” ports. Ensure the circuit or device under test is powered off. Then probe the desired area of the circuit.

If you want the most accurate resistance measurement possible, you’ll want to take a 4-wire resistance measurement. The 4-wire measurement uses 2 additional probes, hence the term “4-wire.” Two of the wires are used to inject the current, while the other two are used to measure the voltage. Doing so removes the effective voltage drop across the resistance of the probe wires, thus making the voltage and therefore resulting resistance measurement more accurate.

To make a 4-wire resistance measurement with a benchtop multimeter, select the “ohm” or “Ω” mode on your multimeter (you may have to press this button more than once to ensure 4-wire mode is selected). Connect the first set of probes to the “INPUT HI” and “INPUT LO” ports, and the second set of probes to the “SENSE HI” and “SENSE LO” ports. Ensure the circuit or device under test is powered off, then probe the desired area of the circuit using both “HI” probes on one side of the component, and both “LO” probes on the other side of the component being measured

It is important not to have the circuit powered on while measuring resistance. Since the multimeter is measuring resistance as a calculation of an observed voltage drop due to an injected current, having the circuit powered on will cause interference with the resistance measurement and will cause bad readings.

DC current or direct current measures the one-directional flow of electrons in a circuit, and the unit of measure is [amps, DC]. In order to make any current measurement, there must be an ‘open’ in the circuit that is then closed by the multimeter, thus allowing the current to flow through the multimeter itself. To state another way, measuring current must be done in series with the circuit; whereas voltage and resistance measurements are done in parallel with the circuit.

To measure DC current with a benchtop multimeter, select the “I DC” mode on the multimeter. Connect the positive probe to the “mA” port for measuring small currents or the “10A” port for measuring large currents. Connect the negative probe to the “INPUT LO” port. Apply the probes to the appropriate points in series with the circuit, then apply power to the circuit or device under test and record the DC current measurement.

AC current or alternating current is the measurement of current that periodically changes directions. The unit of measure for AC current is [amps, AC]. Like DC current measurements, AC current must be measured in series with the circuit to allow the electrons to flow through the multimeter in order to take the measurement.

Are you familiar with the multimeter? The go-to tool for diagnosing electrical problems, a multimeter is an extremely useful and versatile outlet tester. It can help you find out what’s going on with your electrical system by testing whether an electrical outlet is actually receiving power, whether it’s grounded and whether the wiring is reversed within the outlet. Read on for more information about this tool and how to use it.

First, a note about safety. When you’re using a multimeter, you’re working with live wires, and that’s a situation that should always be approached with caution. If you’re not careful, you can burn, shock, or electrocute yourself. Holding the probes in one hand will reduce the chance that you’ll create a full circuit and harm yourself. Any time you’re going to use your multimeter, check it out to make sure it’s not damaged and has no loose connections. If it does, don’t use it.

Multimeters can be analog or digital. An analog multimeter is inexpensive and uses a needle on a graduated scale to display readings. Analog multimeters may not be as accurate as digital multimeters, and they’re harder to read. Digital multimeters give a reading on an LCD screen, so their slightly higher cost may be outweighed by their easier and more accurate readings.

  • How to Measure Voltage with a Multimeter: Simply set the multimeter to measure voltage, insert a probe into each slot of the outlet, with the red lead in the smaller slot and the black lead in the wider one. Read the line voltage measurement. If your outlet is working properly, you should see a reading of 110 to 120 volts on the voltage meter.
  • How to Check that Your Outlet is Properly Grounded: Put one probe into the small outlet slot and the other probe on the receptacle’s center screw. Your voltage tester should light up, If the light doesn’t turn on, the outlet is not properly grounded, and you’ll need to do a polarity test.
  • How to Test the Polarity of Your Electrical Outlet: First, make sure there’s no paint on the screw of the outlet to inhibit a good contact. Insert one probe into the large slot of the outlet and the other against the screw. If the voltage detector lights up, that means the hot and neutral wires are reversed. If it doesn’t light up, place the probe in the other slot. If it still doesn’t light up, have your wiring checked.

If your multimeter indicates a problem, it’s time to call the experts at Hoover Electric. Established in 1980, Hoover Electric, Plumbing, Heating, and Cooling has been serving customers in Southeast Michigan ever since, offering courteous, professional service. Because we offer all the services you need for residential maintenance under one roof, we’re able to offer extremely competitive pricing while maintaining great customer service and guaranteed satisfaction. When you’re looking for top-quality electrical, plumbing, heating, or cooling services in Clinton Township, contact Hoover through our website or call 586-232-9204 today.

How to gut a trout

How to gut a trout

While many anglers release trout back into the water after it is hooked, some choose to enjoy a delicious feast after reeling in a catch. If you prefer to do the latter, you must learn how to gut a trout and prepare it for any cooking method you prefer.

To prepare a delicious meal out of trout, you need to clean and gut it properly, which will help in getting rid of foul smell and taste. Otherwise, it will not only be disgusting, but there is also a risk of suffering from health problems.

If you want to learn how to clean a trout, we got you covered in the rest of this post. Read on and we’ll let you know how to do it like a pro.

Catching a Trout

Before we go to the specifics of how to clean a trout, let us start this article by giving you some tips on how to catch trout.

The first thing that you need to do is to figure out where you have to go fishing for trout. Look for rivers that are easily accessible from where you live. Take note of the local laws and regulations. Find a specific portion of the river with a converging current or patches of slow-moving deep water. You might also want to try trout fishing in streams.

Now that you know where to go, prepare the things that you need. Your fishing trip checklist should include rods, baits, lures, fishing line, and fishing rods and reels, among others that you will need. Prepare the best trout lures and baits. We recommend live baits, including grasshoppers, crickets, and worms. Also, make sure that the fishing rod and reel is ideal for trout. The best trout spinning reel is also a must-have.

Prepare for Cleaning

After catching the trout, keep it in a fishing cooler during the rest of the fishing trip. This way, you can keep it fresh before cleaning and gutting.

Especially for novice anglers with a soft heart for fish, one of the most important is to kill the fish in the most humane way possible. Put the fish in a bowl filled with fresh water from the river. The goal is to keep it alive until you are ready to gut it.

Gather the tools that you will need to complete the task. At the most basic, you will need a chopping board, fishing knives, and water.

You need to have a clean space to work to avoid contaminating the fish. You also need access to clean water. Plus, you need to plan what to do when it is time to throw the waste after gutting the trout.

Clean the trout as soon as possible after catching it. Otherwise, there is a risk of bacterial growth, which attacks the internal organs. This can cause the fish to have an unpleasant taste.

How to Clean a Trout

As noted above, you need to start by killing the fish in the most humane way possible. To do this, lay the trout flat on the chopping board while holding the fish in its tail. Using a sharp knife, slice right behind the gills and cut the head abruptly. Be as gentle as possible to avoid torturing the trout.

After killing the trout, the next thing you need to do is to descale it. The best way to do this is to use a butter knife. Hold the fish firmly in its tail. Use the blunt end of the butter knife. Scrape in a back and forth motion. Do this slowly so that the scales won’t end up flying everywhere. Keep on doing the same motion until the scales are all removed. Wash the fish after.

How to Gut a Trout

Now that you know how to clean a trout, the next thing to learn is gutting it the right way. After cleaning the outer surface of the trout, you are now all set for gutting. Learning how to gut a fish, including trout, is crucial so that you can enjoy the best flavor. The internal organs can impart an undesirable taste and odor on the fish, so you have to get rid of it.

Open the fish with a sharp knife. You can use a fillet knife. While the fish is laid flat on the chopping board, hold it with your non-dominant hand. Use your dominant hand to open the fish starting on the bottom part just a bit above the tail. Cut towards the upper part until you reach the gills.

At this point, the fish is already open, so you can remove the guts using your hand. Take out the internal organs of the fish, including the heart and the intestines. You can pull it out manually using only your hand or you can also use a spoon to scoop it out. Do this gently to avoid damaging the flesh. Also, make sure that the organs will not break as you remove them to prevent the disease from spreading.

Aside from the organs, you also have to get rid of the gills. Otherwise, the fish will easily spoil and will also have a bitter flavor. Open the flap to remove the gills. You can use a knife or scissors.

The next part that you have to remove is the spine, especially if you plan to fillet the trout. It is the blood-red line that you can trace from the head of the trout all the way to its tail. Using your thumb or your spoon, you can easily scrape off the spine. This is also the chance to get rid of any remaining gut on the fish.

Now that you have removed the internal organs of the trout, the next thing to do is to wash it using clean water and cook immediately. Otherwise, make sure that it is iced and handled properly so that it won’t spoil.

How to gut a trout

Tips and Tricks

How to gut a trout

Before we end this post about how to gut a trout, allow us to leave you with practical tips that will make the task a lot easier.

If you find it gross to handle the internal organs of the fish, it is best to wear rubber gloves. They are different from traditional fishing gloves. These gloves are designed to easily hold the fish and remove the gut.

Cook the fish right away once you are done gutting or cleaning. Fish, including trout, is best enjoyed when it is still fresh. Especially when you are out in the wild and you have no freezer, cooking it immediately prevents the fish from spoiling.

Make sure to also properly throw everything you have earlier removed. They are not only stinky, but they can also attract animals, which is one thing that you would not want, especially when you are camping. Put the organs in a Ziploc and bring it out of the campsite. You also have the option to bury it deep into the ground.

Globo Surf Overview

Learning how to clean a trout is important for novice anglers. By following the steps above, you will find it easy to get rid of the internal organs and make the fish ready for a feast. Regardless of the way you intend to cook the fish, proper cleaning and gutting are necessary to enjoy its best flavor!

How to gut a trout

Today many anglers choose to release trout they catch, carefully twisting their fishing hooks free and watching as the quarry swims back into the stream with a flick of its tail-fin. That’s a marvelous experience and leaves more trout available for all of us the next time we venture out. That’s the approach I take almost all the time. But every now and then it’s nice to eat a few of these delicious fish.

Clean Trout Quick

When you do decide to keep a few trout for the pan, it’s important that they don’t go to waste and are cared for in a manner that provides the best table fare possible. To ensure the freshest, sweetest meals, they should be dressed out on the stream or lake, immediately after they are caught or a short while afterwards. Fortunately, they are actually among the simplest fish to clean.

Trout deteriorate quickly in the warm weather typical of most fishing seasons if they are not cleaned quickly. One source of deterioration is bacterial growth which attacks the fish’s internal organs, then spreads to the flesh. The second source of decay is the digestive enzymes in the fish which continue to act after the trout dies.

How to gut a trout Rapala Soft Grip 7.5″ Fillet Knife

Removing the entrails immediately after the fish is caught eliminates both of these sources of unappetizing trout.

Steps for Cleaning Trout

Step 1: Using a sharp fillet knife, insert the point into the *** opening.

Step 2: Slit up the center of the trout’s belly in a straight line. Do not cut deeply — just through the skin is sufficient. Avoid cutting the internal organs any more than necessary.

Step 3: Cut up to the gills. Stop before you get to the v-shaped point below the fish’s jaws.

Step 4: Insert a finger inside the fish’s mouth and press down on the tongue to extend the v-shaped tab on the bottom side of the fish’s lower jaw. This tab is thick in the middle and thin on each side. Stick the knife through the thin part, from one side through the other, freeing the v-shaped tab.

How to gut a trout White River Fly Shop Creel

Step 5: Hold the lower jaw of the trout in one hand with your thumb and forefinger and grasp the v-shaped tab you just freed with the other hand. Pull down on this piece.

Step 6: As you pull steadily downward the entire gill structure and entrails will come out with one pull.

Step 7: To remove the remaining dark-colored blood sac along the backbone, hold trout in one hand and run the thumb nail of the other hand up the length of the backbone.

Step 8: Wipe the fish with paper towels or clean ferns or rinse in water. If you use water, be sure to pat the fish dry with paper towels. Clean

Step 9: Place in a creel or cooler.

How to gut a trout White River Fly Shop Creel Bag

Step 10: Or better yet, slip immediately into a frying pan with sizzling butter and lemon juice!

Tips on Fishing Creels

Canvas creels like the popular White River Fly Shop Creel Bag or wicker creels will keep trout fresh for several hours if temperatures do not go above 70 degrees. Canvas creels should be periodically dipped in water to facilitate the evaporation process which keeps the fish cool inside. Wicker creels are best lined with wet leaves or ferns. If you have a cooler handy, place the fish on ice after dressing them.

Any beginner fisherman will jump with joy when they go trout fishing. They can be one of the most abundant fish in stock to catch in many states and areas all across the globe.

You can be sat out on a lake and learning how to use fish finder, yet catch too many, and they can spoil if you keep too many.

However, as with any fish, the quicker you can remove the intestines and get the fish on ice, the better it is.

How to gut a trout

Even if you don’t have ice, you do need to know how to gut and clean a fish to stop the taste becoming too fishy.

It can be easy to learn how to fish, how to gut fish, or how to filet a trout is necessary and not much harder to do with useful instructions.

Here you can learn all you need to know about what to do with fresh caught trout, and preparing trout to cook.

Tools to Clean, Gut and Fillet Trout

One tool you may wish to get is a skinning board. The board holds a fish firmly from the tail while skinning and descaling using a clip.

Try to keep fresh caught trout alive until ready to gut and clean, or put it on ice or cook it.

A sharp knife is necessary. Any good filleting knife will be razor sharp and hold its edge nicely.

More folks are injured using dull knives as they use lots of extra force when working on the fish. A high-quality fillet knife will fillet any fish with little effort.

A pot of very cold water or ice water to put the fillets in helps to keep fish fresh. If fish warm, it changes the flesh texture and affects the taste.

If saving fillets for later, a good freezer bag is an ideal way to keep them. Place the fillets in the freezer bag and top off with water.

Make sure the water covers the fish. Doing this helps stop freezer burn and keeps fish tasting fresher.

When ready to cook the fillets, place the entire bag in cold water. Doing this will help thaw the fish slower while maintaining freshness.

How to gut a trout

How to Gut a Trout

  1. Use your board, or grab the trout using its tail. Scrape firmly from the tail toward the head a few times on both sides using a spoon or the back of your knife until you remove all the scales.
  2. Second, you need to remove the head. Cut the head off at a slight angle behind the gill. It may take some force to slice through the backbone. You can remove the lower front fin using this one cut.
  3. Turn the fish onto its back, so its belly facing up. You can see its waste hole a little above its tail fin.
  4. Start your knife cut by inserting the tip in the hole and slice the belly toward where the head used to be.
  5. Spread the belly, and you will reveal the innards. Grab these and pull them with your hand, as they remove quickly.
  6. When removed, you can see a membrane covering the blood vein that runs up the backbone. Take your knife and cut the membrane open.
  7. Using your thumb, scrape out the blood until it’s clean and rinse in water.

Filleting Trout

  1. The first fillet cut is along the backbone. Put the trout on its side and its belly pointing away from you. Start a knife cut on the top of the backbone where you removed the head.
  2. Insert your blade in the groove and cut down the length of the fish, and above the backbone. You should now have a clean, meaty fillet.
  3. Flip over and do the same for the other side.
  4. Remove the bones. Place fillets with the skin facing down and pluck out every pin bone you see. Scrape the flesh with a knife to expose any bones, which are lodged deep.
  5. Now your trout is filleted and deboned; it takes one more cut if you want to remove the skin.
  6. Hold the tail end and with your filleting knife, cut into the flesh at an angle until it comes to the outer layer of skin.
  7. Run your knife down the bottom of the fillet as you pull gently in the other direction with the skin.
  8. Rinse the trout to remove any scales or small bones you may miss.

How to Prepare Trout

If you have a rainbow trout that is too small to fillet or you want to pan-fry, there is no reason to remove the skin.

Clean trout inside and out. Prepare to cook by tossing some salt and pepper inside the fish

Pat dry the fish skin (rolling in seasoned flour is optional)

Place in a frying pan with a bit of oil on medium heat, or campfire for about 4-6 minutes on each side. The fish should flake with a fork when cooked.

How to gut a trout

Remove Fish Smell

Once you have prepped your fish, you may be wondering how to get fish smell off hands. It
is easy if you have some lemon or vinegar around.

If not, you can quickly run your hands on some stainless steel surfaces for approximately one or two minutes. These metals contain molecules that help remove the smell.

You can find one other way of cooking your fish, and that is smoked trout. You follow some of the cleaning methods, yet the preparation is very different, but it is worth checking out if you can catch many fish. Either that or you can skip to primary cleaning above and stick to pan cooking.

Next time you are on a fishing trip, don’t practice catch and release, cook what you catch! Processing a trout (and most fish) is easy and is easily done in under 60 seconds. Smaller fish are easier to clean and they taste better! Their shorter lifespans give them less time to accumulate mercury and other toxins. Their small size also allows them to fit inside camping stoves. Trout less than 15 inches long are most likely living on a diet of insects, which don’t contain mercury.

I recommend keeping trout between 8 and 15 inches. If the fish is too big to fit inside your pot, simply cut it in half after cleaning and cook each piece separately.

1. Use A Sharp Knife Without Serrated Edges

This is all you need.

2. Clean All Dirt Off The Fish

Protects your blade from dulling and makes cutting the fish easier

3. Cut From The Anus To The Gill Plate

Insert blade .5 – 1” into the fish, starting near the anus, located on the fish’s stomach. You don’t want to cut the intestines, only cut deep enough to separate the flesh. Continue the cut along the belly and up to the gill plate on the fish’s underside.

4. Separate The Tongue

Take the blade and cut underneath the jawbone of the fish, severing the flesh near the base of the tongue. Pushing the lower jaw away from the head will reveal the skin that needs to be cut.

5. Grab the Tongue and Pull Out The Gills and Guts

Grip the fish’s tongue with your thumb firmly. Your thumb should be gripping the entire gill plate. Pull down hard enough to rip out the gills. Continue pulling with downward momentum – the intestines will stay attached to the gills – completely remove the guts and intestines.

6. Remove The Blood From The Spine

Along the inside of the spine is a membrane holding blood against the vertebrate. Run your thumb underneath the membrane to break it open. Scrape the bones clean of blood. I recommend submerging the fish for this step, it will make the blood easier to remove.

7. Skin The Fish

Grab onto the head firmly. Bend it backward, breaking the spine but keeping the skull attached to the skin. With one hand, grip the body of the fish while the other hand pulls the head and skin toward the tail. The skin should peel off the fish in one piece.

8. Remove The Fins and Tail

Using a knife, cut off any remaining fins. Leave the tail on or remove it by cutting through the vertebrate.

Cooking Tips

This method of field cleaning allows for more meat than a fillet. I recommend boiling or frying the fish completely. After the flesh is cooked, the meat falls right off the bones. The skeleton stays in one piece letting you enjoy a bone-free fish meal.

When catching trout to keep, one of the most common questions that come up is, “how do you keep trout fresh after catching it?“. After all, you might have a long hike or drive ahead of you before you can make it home. The fresher it is, the better it will taste. So, what’s the answer?

The best way to keep trout fresh while fishing is to kill it swiftly and keep it cool. Wrapping the trout in vegetation such as grass or plants from the stream will help keep the temperature down. The guts will spoil the fish faster than the heat, so it’s important to gut it as soon as you can.

But what if you’re going to be out fishing longer? What equipment can help keep trout cool? Let’s take a further look.

Where to keep trout after catching it

While fishing, you can store trout in a cooler, plastic bag, or any container that will help reduce its body temperature. The colder the better.

Even though you can try to keep trout alive in a container, it’s better to kill and gut it as the decay and digestive process from the organs can set in quickly.

How to kill trout quickly

Killing a trout quickly and humanely can be done in many ways. A common method is to use a knife and insert it into the trout’s brain, right behind the eyes. After that, you can gut it before placing it in the cooler.

Keep in mind to gut trout in the same body of water you fished it from. Clean it where you found it.

For more on how to kill and clean trout, check out the video below.

If for some reason you can’t kill or gut your catch (like if you’re using someone else’s boat), then keeping the trout on ice will still keep it fresh. Ideally, they should be gutted within 10 hours.

Equipment to help keep trout fresh

  • Fishing stringer
  • Cooler
  • Knife
  • Ice

Remember, these items are optional. Pick and choose the ones you think could help you keep your trout fresher longer, depending on how you’re fishing.

While on a boat

Trout spoil quickly, especially in the warmer seasons, and it can get hot on boats.

The best way to keep trout fresh while on a boat is to use a cooler. You can use either ice or water from the stream or lake.

Also, try to keep the cooler in the shade and add some cover in it if possible. By shading the cooler and the water, you should be able to reduce the temperature drastically.

While wading

Most times, keeping trout while wading involves using a stringer. Although, if you didn’t pack one and are feeling resourceful, you can use a small tree branch.

When wading, it can be tough to keep a cooler with you. But, although they can be a bit pricey, a good solution is to bring a backpack cooler with ice (check out this backpack cooler on Amazon).

You can also use a fish bag, but stringers still work better if you’re covering a large area. However, if the water is warm, you might want to avoid using a stringer altogether.

Either way, it’s hard to go wrong. However, keep an eye on your catch! Trout have been known to get stolen by predators. Watch out for hawks and other fish-lovers.

While on the shore

If you can fish for trout along the shore, it will probably be worth it. You’re likely going to have plenty of trees for shade and can gut and clean trout right on the bank.

Also, keeping a cooler next to you on the shore is much easier than if you’re wading.

Pro tip: grass makes for a great insulator, so once you clean the trout, try bundling it with some leaves to keep the temperature down.

Once you get home, you can prepare it for the fridge. Wash it in cold water and dry with clean cloths or paper towels. Next, wrap the trout in any kitchen-grade wrap (aluminum foil, wax paper, etc) and store it for up to two days.

Remember, properly gutting a draining trout sooner will help it stay fresh longer and prevent its digestive system from ruining the meat. Dispose of the guts where you caught the fish, and let nature take care of the rest.

Related questions:

Will putting trout on ice kill them?

No, putting trout on ice won’t kill them, although they might go into shock. Many times, they’ll continue living for a while, which stresses the meat. For this reason, most prefer to kill and gut the trout before storing it.

How long will fresh trout keep in the fridge?

Depending on the temperature, and how soon it was cooled, trout will stay good in the fridge for up to several days. If you’re not planning on cooking it soon, it should be moved to the freezer for up to three months.

One of the best parts about trout fishing is getting to enjoy what you catch. If you plan to eat what you catch that you need to know how to clean trout. There are two ways to approach cleaning the trout. You can clean your trout streamside or you can clean your trout at home. There are benefits to either one of these choices.

Most anglers these days let trout go when they catch them. This keeps the sport viable and fun for everyone. The trout live another day and get to reproduce and increase the population. You still get the fun of catching the trout, and the challenge of hooking them. Still, every so often, it’s hard to resist eating what you catch.

The benefit to cleaning trout when you catch it is the freshness. The biggest selling point for any fish is freshness. But no store can ever match a trout you just pulled from a lake or stream. This will be the best fish you ever eat, most likely. For many anglers, this is the reason they love to fish.

Streamside Cleaning

How to gut a trout

Cleaning trout immediately after catching them ensures the freshest meat possible. Trout begin to decompose quickly out of water and in the warmth. This decomposition comes from the internal organs and digestive juices. These parts of any animal begin to decompose almost immediately upon death. Luckily, cleaning trout is not that difficult once you get the hang of it. You can pluck them from the water and get them cleaned quickly and easily. From there it can go right into the pan. It’s always best to get cooking soon after cleaning fish.

To start, you’ll need some tools handy. Pack these items with your fishing gear ahead of time if you know you plan to be cleaning the fish:

  • A sharp filet knife
  • Paper towels
  • A frying pan. Cast iron is often best
  • Olive Oil or butter
  • Seasoning like salt, pepper, and lemon slices
  • Utensils like plates, knives, and forks

Make sure you have a clean and level area to clean the fish. This is just a matter of safety. If you don’t have a table handy, the back of your car may work. The process of cleaning a trout is smooth and efficient once you get the hang of it.

Step 1: Using a sharp fillet knife, slit the trout from the anus up through its belly. Slice in a straight line. Only use the tip of the knife, deep enough to cut the skin. You don’t want to cut too deeply. Avoid the internal organs as much as possible. If you cut into anything you risk making a big mess. It won’t ruin the fish, but it will make it a harder clean up. Take your time if you are unsure. Safety is always your main concern. Second is keeping your cuts neat and clean.

Step 2: Slice until you reach the fish’s gills. You want to stop before you hit the jawline. Trout have a V-shaped point under the jaw. If you hit that you have gone too far.

Step 3: You can insert your finger in the trout’s mouth. Push down and extend that V-shaped section. Use the blade to slice the thin segments of flesh on either side of the V..

Step 4: Hold the trout’s lower jaw between your thumb and forefinger. Grip it firmly and pull down, tearing the V-shaped segment free. This should remove the gills and entrails. With some practice, this will come free in one fluid movement.

Step 5: Inside the fish you will see a dark red sac. You can find it along the fish’s spine. It’s covered in a thin membrane. This is the blood vein or kidney. You can use the knife to slice into the membrane. If you’re more old school you can use your finger.

Step 6: Scrape the fish’s spine clean. Rinse the fish clean inside. If you don’t have any water, use a paper towel. The kidney and the fluids in it can make you very sick if you don’t clean it properly.

Step 7: Remove the head and fins if you plan to cook the fish right away. If it’s going to be stored, you can leave the head on to prevent spoilage.

Step 8: At this point you can store the fish in the fridge or freezer or proceed to cooking it. If you want to cook it you can cook it as is, or filet it. If you want to store it, seal it in a bag as air tight.

How to Skin and Filet a Trout

How to gut a trout

Unlike some fish, you don’t need to skin a trout to cook it. Many people prefer to fry a rainbow trout with skin off. It adds crispy texture and more flavor. Still, you can skin the trout if you’d like. The process takes a delicate hand and some patience.

Step 1: If your trout still has the head, insert your knife behind the gill line. If the head has been removed, just do it where the gills would have been.

Step 2: Cut in until you reach the backbone. This will require a small bit of pressure, but not too much. You don’t want to go through the bone. You’ll be able to feel when you touch it through the blade of the knife.

Step 3: Use the fish’s backbone as a guide and cut towards the tail. Your knife should be sharp enough to do this in a single slice. Stop when you reach the tail.

Step 4: Flip the fish over and repeat the same cut on the other side. If the head is still on, make sure you have a firm grip on it to do this. Otherwise you’ll need to be careful gripping the end of the filet.

Step 5: Open me inside of the fish. You can now clear out the bones from the inside. Run the knife along the inside to remove the large rib bones. You should be able to remove the bulk of the rib cage in one pull. You may need to pluck out the smaller ones later with your fingers or tweezers.

Step 6: Put the filet skin side down. Grip the fish by the tail. Slide the filet knife into the flesh just above the tail. Hold the blade at an angle and slide it down the length of the filet. The flesh should act as a guide. Repeat on the other side and you should have two perfect filets.

Preparing Your Filets

Many anglers will tell you the best time to cook fish is immediately after catching it. This is literally the freshest trout you will ever eat. A simple cast iron pan over an open flame is all you need as a heat source.

At home there are dozens of ways you can season trout. Once you’ve cleaned the trout streamside, you may want to keep it simple. A bag with some flour and salt and pepper works great to toss the filets in. Something like seasoning salt or garlic powder could work just as well.

Put a bit of butter or olive oil in your pan once you’ve got it hot. Lay in your seasoned fish fillets. You only need to cook them for about 4 to 6 minutes per side. You’ll know the meat is done when it starts to flake easily. From there you can simply serve it up with a little more salt and pepper. Maybe some lemon slices, or whatever you feel tastes best.

About Ian

My grandfather first took me fishing when I was too young to actually hold up a rod on my own. As an avid camper, hiker, and nature enthusiast I’m always looking for a new adventure.

How to gut a trout

Receive $50 off an eligible $100 purchase at the Outside Shop, where you’ll find a selection of brand-name products curated by our gear editors, when you >”,”name”:”in-content-cta”,”type”:”link”>>’>sign up for Outside+ today.

Backpacking food is often uninspiring. Because vegetables and meat are heavy and inconvenient, they often get left behind. And many easy-to-make, lightweight, dehydrated meals are bland or textureless. It’s a shame when you consider the wealth of free and delicious wild foods we’re surrounded by on so many backpacking trips. Plus, if you gather your meal at camp, it won’t weigh you down on the trail.

If you want to go this route, your options are: get a Ph.D.’s worth of knowledge and experience in order to find and eat wild mushrooms, berries, and plants with confidence, or, depending on the water near your camp and the local laws, pack a lightweight fishing rod (like the small-water ones we recommend here) and just a few other supplies, like a knife and spices. With even a little bit of practice and planning, odds are decent you’ll be able to pull a meal out of a nearby lake or stream, and often that dinner will be a delicious trout.

Trout are one of the better fish to catch and eat in the backcountry, not only because they’re plentiful in mountain waters all across the U.S., but they’re also a cinch to clean and prep no matter their size. That said, if you’re imagining a big fillet of pure meat like you pick up at the store, you’re going to be disappointed. In the backcountry, you’re almost always going to end up with a mess of meat, bones, and skin on your plate. But picking tidbits of freshly caught trout off the bones is only as hard as scavenging every delicious morsel off a chicken wing—and much more satisfying. Plus, it tastes way better than a bag of freeze-dried slop.


Once you’ve caught and killed your fish, you’ll want to clean it as quickly as possible—ideally immediately. Warm temperatures can cause trout to deteriorate and spoil fast, but removing the entrails will slow that process. Waiting until you get back to camp or when it’s time for dinner can result in a wasted fish.

A dedicated filleting utensil, like Morakniv’s rubber-handled Fishing Comfort Fillet 155 ($20) or Opinel’s folding No.08 Slim Stainless Steel Folding Fillet knife ($20), will deliver clean and easy cuts and prove much more effective than knives not built for this purpose. Trust us on this one. Begin by holding the fish by its lower jaw and making a cut up the belly from the anus (the small hole toward the tail) to between the gills. Use the tip of the knife to slice just through the skin. Avoid piercing the entrails or spine and spilling blood.

Cut two slits in the thin layer of skin just behind and under the bottom jaw of the fish, creating a V that points forward. (You can see this area better by sticking a finger in the fish’s mouth and pressing down on its tongue.) Slip your thumb into the V you just cut, and pull down toward the tail—this should remove the gills and guts in one clean stroke. Inspect the cavity for any remaining entrails, and remove anything that isn’t meat or bones. Check local regulations for how to dispose of the entrails: in most places, you can drop them into deep or moving water (not at the shoreline) or bury them in a cathole far away from camp and the water. When in doubt, pack them out in a sealed container.

Once the guts are gone, you should see a line of red along the spine at the back of the cavity. Run your thumbnail along this line from head to tail, squeezing out all the blood. This is the fish’s kidney, it doesn’t come out with the rest of the guts, and leaving it in can spoil the taste. If you want to remove the head, bend it back until you break the spine, then cut it away. (This is optional: if you do, you’ll be missing out on some secret stashes of meat later on.)

Clean the fish thoroughly inside and out with fresh water to wash off any blood or other guts, then dry it well with a clean towel. At this point, the fish is ready to cook. Seal it in a disposable zip-top bag or Stasher Silicone Reusable bag ($12), and keep it as cool as possible until you’re ready to eat. You can usually keep the bag in the water on the shoreline.


One of the easiest and most delicious ways to cook your trout is by seasoning it inside and out with olive oil, salt, and lemon pepper. I carry my oil in a reusable squeeze bottle like HumanGear’s GoToob+ ($25 for three). Pocket-size Stasher Reusable storage bags ($14 for two) or one-ounce Nalgene containers ($6) are good for packing spices. For those willing to haul in more fixings, a real lemon (save some for seasoning as you eat) intensifies the flavor, and butter (it should keep a day or two at moderate temperatures without refrigeration) is richer than oil. Dedicated backcountry chefs can pack the fish’s cavity with garlic, dried herbs like thyme and oregano, onions, and spices like cayenne. Keep in mind that adding veggies or other things to the fish will lengthen the cooking time.

Once you’ve seasoned the fish, wrap it in aluminum foil. If your fish are smaller than eight to ten inches, you might be able to combine a few into one sheet; otherwise, wrap them up individually. If you’re lucky enough to be able to cook your trout over a campfire, wait until you have a good bed of coals, then lay the foil-wrapped fish over them. If you have a grate—or an easy-packing grill and pit combo, like the UCO Flatpack ($34)—you can also raise them above the fire to better control the cooking temperature. Cook the fish for five to ten minutes (a general rule is eight minutes per inch of thickness, but exact numbers depend on the fish and your fire), flipping it halfway through.

If fires are a no-go due to local restrictions or fire danger, cut the fish into manageable lengths for your pot or pan, then fry them over your camp stove. While using foil isn’t necessary in this case, wrapping the fish can make cleanup easier.

You’ll know your fish is ready to eat when the meat is opaque and flakes easily.


If cooked properly, the meat should slide right off the bones, giving you a lot more than you’d get by filleting the fish prior to cooking (which is often tricky with smaller trout anyway). Pull the meat off carefully to limit the number of bones that end up in your mouth, but be prepared to spit a couple of small ones out.

The skin and fins are all OK to eat, as are the eyes and the cheeks—the latter are tiny scallop-like morsels that have long been prized for their rich, almost sweet flavor.

From hook to plate, you can be chowing down on a fresh, all-time backcountry meal in just 20 minutes, having carried little more than a rod, a few sheets of aluminum foil, a squeeze bottle of oil, and a few of your favorite spices.

  • Evergreen
  • Fishing
  • Food and Drink
  • Hiking and Backpacking
  • Recipes

When you buy something using the retail links in our stories, we may earn a small commission. Outside does not accept money for editorial gear reviews. Read more about our policy.

A quick guide to cleaning and storing the fish you catch.

Cleaning a fish

Many anglers like to simply clean the fish and cook it whole. This works best for fish that have very small to no scales, such as trout. Your catch should be cleaned and gutted as soon as possible. A safety reminder: fish are slippery and knives are sharp – be careful!

How to gut a trout

Freezing your catch

If you don’t plan to eat your fish in a day or two, you’ll want to freeze it. Most freezing methods work best if you quick freeze the fish first – place uncovered fish on a sheet of aluminum foil in the freezer to freeze it as quickly as possible.

The best method for keeping fish in the freezer is to vacuum seal it, which protects the fish from freezer burn. Quick freeze the fish, then seal it in a vacuum seal bag. Vacuum sealed frozen fish should be eaten within three or four months.

Another way to protect fish from freezer burn is to freeze it in a block of water. Quick freeze individual portions, place each in a zip lock freezer bag, fill with water and freeze.

Finally, if you’re going to be eating the fish within two weeks you can double wrap quick frozen fish tightly in plastic wrap (squeeze out as much air as possible) and then put in a freezer bag.

For this step, you will need a fish-board with a clip to hold the tail or you can hold the tail with your hand. You will also need a fish scaler or use the unsharpened side of a good sturdy knife (short blade is best). With the trout held firmly by the tail, scrape very firmly from the tail to the gills several times on both sides. This will remove the scales so you don’t have to deal with them later. No one wants to find them in a bite of grilled fish!

Gutting the trout.

To properly gut the trout without tearing into the stomach or intestines, you will need a sharp, short bladed knife. The short blade gives you better control. The first cut you want to make is just at gill level from the belly side. This results in a cut between the jawbone and the tongue. Do not cut through the spine. Next, place 1 or 2 fingers inside the trout’s mouth with the palm of your hand pressed firmly on the top of its head and your thumb in the gill to hold it solid. Then, carefully, begin to slit the trout’s belly starting at the anus and working your way up to the cut under the gills. You need to be careful not to cut into the guts themselves, as this will foul the flesh, making it inedible. Keep your knife just under the skin. To pull the guts out, hold the trout firmly with your thumb under the jaw and your index finger in the mouth. Then get a firm grip on the guts and pull them out. All that is left to do is to scrape your thumb along the spine in the gut cavity to clean out the bloodline.

To behead or not to behead.

This last step can be a matter of personal preference. Removing the head of the trout. Some people like it left on, but, personally, I don’t like my food looking back at me.
To do this, you need a good sturdy knife. The same one you used to cut the belly open will work. Just be sure to rinse it good first. To cut the head off, grasp the trout firmly in the middle with your thumb in the gut cavity and the rest of your hand wrapped around it. Hold the trout so that the head is pushed down on your cutting surface. With your knife, make a firm slicing motion through the spine at gill level, preferablywith the gut cavity up. Once this is complete, rinse the trout and you are ready to proceed with the rest of your trout cleaning.

I’ve been fishing since I was a little girl so I learned how to gut and clean a fish at a very young age. I learned how to bait a hook and catch a fish before I learned how to ride a bike. Fishing for food to feed our family was a way of life for us growing up. I didn’t realize it at the time, but I was learning some great self-sufficiency skills that would stay with me throughout my life. Now that I’m a mama, I feel honored to pass these skills on to Little A.

How to gut a trout

One of our favorite places to go fishing with Little A is a mountain lake about half an hour from home. We take our canoe and fish the lake for a while and then have dinner cooked over the campfire as the sun sets. This week’s trip up to this lake was our way to celebrate our anniversary. I had to laugh thinking about how most people would go out to eat at a fancy restaurant to celebrate an anniversary. Instead we prefer a simple meal cooked over the campfire in the mountains! (Here’s our post on how to cook on an open fire if you missed it!) We always catch fish when we visit this beautiful place. This week we harvested four nice sized cutbows (a cross between a rainbow trout and a cutthroat trout).

How to gut a trout

When catching trout, we don’t fillet them. Instead we gut and clean them to prepare them for cooking. Usually I prefer to gut a fish out in the wilds where it is caught. That way the innards can be left behind for another animal to feast on. Sometimes, like this week, the sun set so early that it got dark before we had time to clean the fish. Instead we put the fish on ice in our cooler and brought them home to gut and clean them. The good thing about gutting the fish at home is we can bury the fish innards in the dirt in our garden since it is an amazing natural fertilizer!

4 Steps to Gut and Clean a Fish

Before getting started with gutting your fish, find a flat surface. If you’re in the house this is easy since you can just use the counter top and cover it with newspaper or use a cutting board. When outside, look for a large flat rock or bank of the waterway that is relatively flat.

Step 1. We don’t keep the head on our fish when cooking them, that is just how I grew up eating wild fish. If you want to keep the head on, skip this step. Find the pectoral fin which is just on the back side of the head behind the gill. Place a sharp knife just behind the fin and cut straight down to cut the head clean off the fish.

Step 2. Find the little hole on the back underside of the fish where the poop comes out. Insert the tip of a sharp knife in this hole and slowly slice forward on the underbelly of the fish clean through the end where you cut the head off. (You can’t miss the fact that my husband is using a bright pink knife to gut and clean these fish- what a guy! This knife works amazing. If you want one for yourself, you can find them here)

Step 3. Remove the innards. Use the sharp tip of your knife to scrape the innards out of the crevice in the spine of the fish. Sometimes this will wash out under running water or if near a natural water source swish the fish in the water a few times.

Step 4. When cleaning a trout, there typically aren’t a lot of big scales that need to be scraped off. There is a natural protective film on the outer part of trout that I always refer to as fish slime. This is what makes fish so slippery and hard to pick up! Rub the outside of the fish while rinsing in water to remove the slime. Cut off any remaining fins.

Now your fish is ready to be grilled, baked, or fried in your favorite recipe! You can also freeze your fish to preserve it for a future meal. Growing up we always just put our fish in a plastic zip bag and put it in the freezer. My husband said he remembers cutting open a milk carton, putting the fish inside and filling with water to freeze. We actually didn’t do either of these! Now that we have this amazing new gamesaver vacuum sealer (you can find them here) we vacuum sealed two of our trout and put them in the freezer for a future meal. The other two we’re cooking up for dinner (recipe coming soon!)

How to gut a trout

The quickest way to clean specks — or most any fish

Admit it: The worst part of a fishing trip is not finding trout, but cleaning the day’s catch.

Yeah, we all say it’s part of the experience, but few people really like getting their hands full of slime and fish guts.

So it’s important to get the job done as quickly and as efficiently as possible.

That’s where these seven steps come in. I first learned it by watching guides in Venice, La., and soon discovered that it’s a way to work around the rough bellies of reds and specks.

Now it’s the only way I clean pretty much any fish but panfish (which, honestly, is not that difficult).

And once you get the steps down pat, they all seem to flow together almost as a single, continuous movement.

You’ll burn through the day’s catch, get the fish in the freezer and clean up in time for dinner.

1.) With the cutting edge of the knife turned towards the tail, insert the knife through the fish just below and slightly behind the pectoral fin.

How to gut a trout2.) Smoothly extend through the length of gut cavity to near the anal vent.

How to gut a trout3.) Lay the fish on its side and make a vertical cut to the backbone behind the head of the fish.

How to gut a trout4.) Turn the knife blade to face toward the tail and hugging the backbone cut down the length of the fish to separate the fillet from the carcass.

How to gut a trout5.) Remove the fillet and set it aside. Its edges should be smooth and straight. If it is raggedly, the knife needs honing.

How to gut a trout6.) Turn the fish over and repeat the filleting procedure for the remaining side. Then cut out and discard the rib cage from the fillet.

How to gut a trout7.) With a fingertip, pinch the fillet, skin-side down to the cleaning surface, and with the other hand use the Flex blade to gently cut-scrape the flesh from the skin.

Fresh-caught trout often taste best when lightly fried in butter. Rainbow trout are traditionally cooked and served with the skin on for added flavor.

How to gut a trout

  • 1 or 2 whole (1-pound) Trout, cleaned (head can be on or off), gills removed
  • 2 ounces butter*
  • 1 plate of all-purpose flour
  • Salt and pepper (to season the flour)

My husband cleaned the trout just after he caught them by gutting them, cutting off the gills, and most importantly, scraping off the blood line off the backbone. I also want the head cut off!

How To Clean Fresh-Caught Trout:

How to gut a trout

First you need to cut the head off just before the Pectoral fin (this fin can be nipped off or left on). This is an optional step, as some people want the head left on when cooking.

Hold fish with belly facing up. Using your fillet knife, cut from the anal hole forward towards where the head was or still is.

After pulling out the entrails, take an old tooth brush and clean the blood vein that runs along the spine. If that is not cleaned out it, will effect the taste. Rinse the trout thoroughly (inside and out ) and prepare to cook as you wish.

NOTE: If you like to eat the fish skin, make sure you remove all the fish scales before cooking. With the trout held firmly by the tail, scrape very firmly from the tail to the gills several times on both sides with a sharp knife. I, personally, like to have my trout scaled before cooking.

How To Cook Fresh-Caught Trout:

When ready to cook, rinse the cleaned fish under cold water and pat dry with paper towels. Drying will prevent the fish from steaming when you cook it . Cut a few diagonal slashes along each side of the fish. Roll the cleaned trout in flour seasoned with salt and pepper until covered.

How to gut a trout

Heat the butter in a frying pan until bubbling and then fry the trout for about 5 minutes on each side until golden brown.

To test for doneness when cooking the trout, insert a fork at the thickest point of the fish. Perfectly cooked fish is nearly opaque, should be very moist, and will flake easily with a fork. Fish that looks slightly dry is overcooked. Undercooked fish will look translucent and raw. If you have a digital meat thermometer, the internal temperature in the center of the fillet should reach 140 degrees F.

How to gut a trout

Serve with a slice of lemon for a slightly fresher, livelier taste.

Makes 2 servings.

* As they say, “everything tastes better with butter!”

alt=”Thermapen Internal Temperature Cooking Chart” width=”100″ height=”96″ />I get many readers asking what cooking/meat thermometer that I prefer and use in my cooking and baking. I, personally, use the Thermapen Thermometer . Originally designed for professional use, the Super-Fast Thermapen Thermometer is used by chefs all over the world. I only endorse a few products, on my web site, that I like and use regularly.

You can learn more or buy yours at: Super-Fast Thermapen Thermometer.

Sponsored Content

Comments from Readers:

Hi! Thank you for your Pan-Fried Trout recipe/guidance. I normally fillet some sea bass but the market had ran out so I ended up with trout and your recipe. That was awesome! Thanks from the UK. – Regards Simon Wheeler (Leicester) (2/28/16)

Used your Pan Fried Whole Rainbow Trout recipe last night and my husband said “Who could ask for anything better?”… and he is very picky about his food. – Ellen Giles Wheeler (6/21/15)

I tried your easy trout recipe, which also covered scaling and the preparation instructions. Voila – a hit! My dad and I so enjoyed the meal – using butter for frying adds a different – better tastes. We awoke to fond memories of a meal well-enjoyed meal. – Sheryl (3/13/11)

Write a how-to article about how to clean trout. This article will provide the reader with step-by-step instructions on how to properly clean and gut any trout species following fishing or buying from the grocery store.

Trout are a popular fish, especially for fishing enthusiasts. It is best to clean the fish as quickly as possible after the catch. Read on to learn everything you need to know about how to clean trout.

How soon after catching a trout should it be cleaned?

There is a risk of bacterial contamination if the fish are left to sit at room temperature too long, but how soon should you clean a trout after the catch? Ideally, as quickly as possible. However, the key is maintaining a cold internal temprature. Wash off the fish in cold water so that no sand or dirt remains stuck to it. Keep in mind, if you freeze the fish, it will definitely affect the flavor.

How to gut a trout

How do you kill trout after catching?

Once you have caught the trout and transported it home, how do you kill a trout to clean? It is not humane to kill a fish in any way not necessary for cleaning. You need to hold the trout by the lower lip or under its belly, and then use a sharp knife (a fillet blade works well) to cut the spine at the base of the skull. Cut through quickly from head to tail so that no sensation is felt by the fish. The trout will die immediately once the spine is severed.

How to gut the fish

The next step in how to clean trout is how to gut the fish. This process is effective and efficient, but it may seem a little gross if you are not used to cleaning fish. Slice along the belly of the trout. Then reach inside the stomach cavity and remove what remains. The guts are generally where most bacteria growth occurs, so removing them is very important. Finally, run your hand along the backbone to remove anything remaining from the fish. That’s how to gut trout!

How to gut a trout

How to scale the trout

The next step is how to scale the trout. Insert the flat edge of your knife (the blade should face toward you) below a scale and scrape up towards the head. Repeat this with each scale, running the knife in one direction around the body of the fish. Finally, clean off any remaining scales or tissue by rubbing the dull side of the blade against it. You can also use a descaler tool like this one to make this process even easier.

How to cut off the head and fins

Now you’re ready to cut off the head and fins of the trout. This is an essential step, as it makes filleting much easier. After cutting the head away from the gills, take your knife and gut hook up along the spine until your reach near where the tail begins. The center is where the spine meets the top of the fin and is the best place to start cutting. Make sure to keep your thumb overtop of the knife and use it as a guide so you do not cut yourself!

How how to fillet

Filleting a trout is how you will actually remove the meat from the bones. You must first cut the flesh away from the bone. Begin by using your fingers to get a feel for how close you are getting to the bone and how hard you need to press. You can use your knife as a guide, but do not cut into the bone! This means you should not leave more than 1/4 inch of meat between where you start cutting and where the bone ends. Once you remove the section with meat from the bone, turn it over and continue cutting along the next row of flesh until you reach where there is no more meat. Finally, repeat this process on your other side. When you have finished filleting both sides, look over the meat for any pieces of remaining skin, tissue or bones.

How to remove pin bones

Pin bones are sharp and protrude from inside the fish and cause a lot of people problems. Actually, this process is very simple. Just run your finger along the rib cage and you should feel them. Just remove them with tweezers or pliers.

In Conlusion – How to Clean Trout

Trout is a wonderful fish to eat. It’s low in mercury, high in protein and contains many nutrients that are beneficial for your health like Vitamin B12, Omega-3 Fatty Acids and Selenium. And while it may seem intimidating how to clean trout at first glance, this guide should help you get started. Like any fish, cleaning aand filteting trout takes practice. Follow this guide about how to clean trout and you should be a pro in no time!

Tags How to Clean Trout report this ad

Want to discuss? Check out the Troutster forums!

report this ad

Check your local streams water level

How to gut a trout

Recent Posts

  • Frogg Toggs Waders Review – Top 5 Best Frog Toggs Waders
  • What is a Mop Fly and How Do You Fly Fish with It?
  • Frostbite Ice Fishing Facts & Information
  • Best Image Stabilized Binoculars
  • Best Fly Fishing Vests

Learn How to Fly Fish for Trout

How to gut a trout

report this ad

It’s no secret that fishing has a special place in my heart and (likely) always will! I’ve fished mountain creeks and rivers of the Oregon coast, experienced both open lake and ice fishing in northern Canada. I can even brag on ocean fishing in Mexico! But my favorite? Fishing for middle-size beauties on moving water! After a day’s good catch, here’s how to clean a trout.

Why This Method?

When it comes to large trout (2 lb+), flaying can be a good option. However, when cleaning smaller trout, no one wants to waste even the tiniest bit of meat! This method allows you to leave the bone in and after frying, barbecuing or baking your fish, the skeleton is easy to peel out.

How to gut a trout

How to Clean a Trout

Once you are ready to clean your fish, hold it belly-side up. Beginning at the vent, slice the belly open, until you’ve reached the head.

How to gut a trout

How to gut a trout

Flip the fish over and, just behind the gills, begin slicing through the fish’s head. Once you’ve cut through the backbone, stop, and put your knife away.

How to gut a trout

Hook your finger in the trout’s mouth and pull downward. Head and guts will come out as one piece.

How to gut a trout

How to gut a trout

Once the innards have been removed, you’ll notice a dark blood vein running the length of your fish’s backbone.

How to gut a trout

Use your thumb to scrape the blood out, until all is clean.

How to gut a trout

Rinse the fish clean under cold water and then prepare it in the desired manner!

How to gut a trout

Want to learn how to fillet a speckled trout the quick and easy way?

In this video, we’ve got Capt. Mark “Hollywood” Johnson from cleaning up one of the trout we caught during a trip with him.

You’ll learn how to clean trout, as well as how to remove the skin and bones so you don’t have any surprises during dinner.

Check out the video below!

How To Fillet A Speckled Trout [VIDEO]

Sign up for FREE to receive the latest saltwater fishing videos, tutorials, product reviews, and fishing product discounts!

Before starting the process, make sure that you have a sharp knife, as that will make this job a lot easier.

Now, here’s how to clean a seatrout, step by step:

Step 1: Cut the trout diagonally behind the head.

Cut down to (but not through) the backbone.

Step 2: Slide the knife toward the tail parallel to the backbone.

Keep the knife blade down so you don’t miss out on meat along the stomach, and stop cutting right before you get to the tail.

Be sure to not cut through the skin, as that will make the next step much harder.

Step 3: Flip the fillet over and skin it.

Slide the blade parallel to the table between the meat and the skin.

Keep the knife handle off of the table so you can get as close to the skin as possible.

Step 4: Do the same thing on the other side of the fish.

Repeat steps 1-3 to get two skinless fillets.

Step 5: Remove the rib cage.

Slide your knife underneath the rib cage at an angle to remove the rib bones.

Step 6: Remove the top of the rib cage

Cut out about 3-4 inches up the bloodline to remove the rest of the bones from the fish.


How to gut a trout

There you have it!

The easy way to clean a seatrout for a delicious fish dinner.

Have any questions about filleting trout?

Let us know down in the comments!

If you’re in the Florida Keys and want to book a trip with Capt. Hollywood and his crew, you can find them at

And if you know someone who wants to learn how to fillet trout better, please TAG or SHARE this with them!

Trout is a delicately flavored species of fish that’s easy to prepare. If you’ve just caught trout or bought a whole fish at the market, you need to clean it and cut out the fillets. Luckily, trout are easy to gut and clean with just a fillet knife. Once you have your fillets, you’re ready to make a delicious meal!.

How long after catching trout should it be cleaned?

Anglers often keep fish alive while fishing for as long as possible to avoid the task of keeping dead fish cold on ice. Once fish are dead, it’s best to clean them within two hours and eat them within 24 hours.

Do you eat trout skin?

And provided the fish is properly sourced, fish skin is safe to eat, one of the reasons that chefs tend to shy away from some farm-raised species. These days, a good rule of thumb is that if your snapper, bass, trout, or salmon is plated that way, the flavorful skin is intended to be eaten.

Do you need to gut trout?

First, you’ll need to gut your fish. In most cases, this will have been done for you, unless you’ve caught the fish yourself. Fresh fish doesn’t smell, but can be very ‘slimy’! This mucus coating helps protect the fish’s skin and scales, in life, and helps it move smoothly through the water.

Can you eat trout raw?

The quick answer is that yes, you can eat trout raw if you’re desperate – but otherwise, you should not. Freshwater fish (including trout) have a higher chance of carrying parasites that could harm you. On the other hand, saltwater fish are less likely to have harmful parasites in them – and are safer to eat raw.

Where do I cut my trout head off?

First you need to cut the head off just before the Pectoral fin (this fin can be nipped off or left on). This is an optional step, as some people want the head left on when cooking. Hold fish with belly facing up. Using your fillet knife, cut from the anal hole forward towards where the head was or still is.

How do you cut open a rainbow trout?

Hold the tail and then use your knife to gently push the meat down. The cooked trout will split into two parts with the bones sticking to one side. Flip the fish over so that the bones are facing up and then starting near the tail grab the spine and gently lift – you will be able to remove all the bones at once.

How do you store trout while fishing?

While fishing, you can store trout in a cooler, plastic bag, or any container that will help reduce its body temperature. The colder the better. Even though you can try to keep trout alive in a container, it’s better to kill and gut it as the decay and digestive process from the organs can set in quickly.

Does trout taste like salmon?

While trout and salmon are closely related and typically interchangeable in recipes, they do have slightly different flavors. Compared with the mild taste of most trout, salmon has a bigger flavor, sometimes described as sweeter.

What size trout is worth keeping?

It should now make sense, keep them alive by not using bait, and trout around 10-12 inches are the best eating size, and by leaving most fish in the river, they can grow bigger.

What size of trout is a keeper?

A CALIFORNIA FISHING LICENSE IS REQUIRED FOR ALL FISHERMEN OVER AGE 15 Species Limit Size Large Mouth Bass 5 12 Inches Striped Bass 10 No Size Crappie/Bluegill/Sunfish 25 No Size Trout 5 No Size.

Why do you leave the head on trout?

The jelly around the scales permits the trout to be breaded or coated without using any type of liquid. This allows for easy, all-natural cooking. Next, leave the head or tail on while cooking. This minimizes skin breakage, and foreign flavors.

Do you have to fillet fish right away?

Final remarks. So in conclusion, it’s always best to bleed and fish right after catching them, and then to gut them as fast as possible. And following that, you should try to eat or freeze the fish as fast as possible to maintain the quality.

Should you gut a fish right away?

Your catch should be cleaned and gutted as soon as possible. Fish are slippery and knives are sharp – be careful! 1. Rinse the slime off the fish, lay it on a cutting board, and insert the knife tip into the fish’s anus.

What’s the worst fish to eat?

Here are some examples of the worst fish to eat, or species you may want to avoid due to consumption advisories or unsustainable fishing methods: Bluefin Tuna. Chilean Sea Bass. Shark. King Mackerel. Tilefish.

Can you eat the small bones in trout?

Trout Fillets One thing that I’ve never liked about eating trout is picking through all the tiny bones present in their meat. These are called the pin bones and are present in all trout, salmon and other related species. With large trout or salmon you can actually pull out the pin bones with a pair of pliers.

Does trout have alot of bones?

Unfortunately, trout does have a lot of fine bones, but with a little patience you should be able to remove them.

Do trout have parasites?

These parasites are in a group known as parasitic copepods. This parasitic species found on the body of lake trout and splake is known as Salmincola siscowet with other species of Salmincola occurring on other salmonid fishes. On the fish they mate, the males die and the females develop into adults.

Can you get sick from undercooked trout?

Foodborne illness can result in severe vomiting, diarrhea and abdominal pain, among other symptoms. Major types of food poisoning that can result from eating raw or undercooked fish and shellfish include Salmonella and Vibrio vulnificus. Vibrio vulnificus is a bacterium that lives in warm seawater.

What does trout taste like?

Freshwater trout is considerably more bland and has a catfish-like flavor. Some fish aficionados have described the trout flavor to be that of a gamey fish that is otherwise considered as the ‘chicken of fish”. For most fish taste charts, trout is known for its mild flavor and a delicate texture.

My awesome friend, Scott McIntosh, gave me some beautiful trout from Strawberry Reservoir. Strawberry reservoir is located in the Uinta National Forest in Utah and has the best trout! He was so kind to clean them before he gave them to me, but I couldn’t write those instructions. To learn how to clean trout click on this website for detailed instructions.
Click here for instructions on how to clean a trout.

Cut the head off just before the Pectoral fin. This is an optional step, as some people want the head left on when cooking.

Hold fish with belly facing up. Using your fillet knife, cut from the anal hole forward towards where the head was or still is.

After pulling out the entrails. Take an old tooth brush or a spoon and clean the blood vein that runs along the spine. Brush or scrap the vein until it is cleaned out. If that is not cleaned out it, will affect the taste.

Rinse the trout thoroughly (inside and out) and prepare to cook as you wish.

How to clean the skin
If you like to eat the fish skin, make sure you remove all the fish scales before cooking. With the trout held firmly by the tail, scrape very firmly from the tail to the gills several times on both sides with a sharp knife. Scrap until all the gills are removed.

Debone freshly caught trout

How to remove the bones

There are a couple of methods to debone a trout.
A search on the internet found a lot of websites teaching how to remove the bones from trout differently than I follow. Most of the methods were similar to this website link

That method of deboning wastes a lot of meat. Everyone I know debones trout the way I do but maybe we have a unique or old fashioned way of removing bones so I decided to post the instructions. These instructions take a little bit more time but it leaves most of the meat.

This printable file has more pictures and instructions than this web page.

Start by inserting the knife at the anal hole on the belly of the fish and cut the skin towards the tail.
Use a sharp knife to removing all of the fins except the fin on the top/back of the fish.
The back fin will be removed after the bones are taken out.
Cut the tail off
At the end of the fish where the head was attached, insert a sharp knife against the spine under the bone line. You will be able to see the knife under the bones. Bring the knife up from the spine towards the belly outside edge of the fish. Keep repeating along the spine and bones towards the tail of the fish.

There is another row of bones below the meat. Take the sharp edge of the knife and scrap along the next layer of bones pushing the meat back off the bones. As you did the first time, insert the knife under this next row of bones and lift the bones out of the meat.
Again, scrap the meat back to see the next row of bones. You should be at the spine center of the fish, and finished with that side of the fish.
Do the other side of the fish by following the same instructions above, or you can continue in the direction you have been working, as pictured at the left. Change the direction of the knife to match the direction the bones are running in.
Lift the bones out and sit aside to discard.

Run a knife under the bones along the middle where the spine used to be and cut away the fat and bones. This is when the back fin needs to be removed.
Hold the fish in one hand. With your other hand feel for any bones with your fingers. Pull the bones out one by one as you find them. While feeling around in the meat move the fish with your hand that is holding it because the movement pushes the bones up so you can feel them better.

How to gut a trout

Yesterday I did some trout fishing with the Emmrod fishing pole that I bought for my bug out bag, so today I’m going to show you how to clean a trout. If you want to see the rod in action check out the video below or check out my Emmrod PackRod review. Be Warned! This post contains a graphic step-by-step decapitation and the gutting of a real trout. With that being said continue on with the rest of the article below.

Step 1: If you’re not going to eat the skin you can skip this part, but I like my trout pan fried. Grab the fish by the tail and scrape firmly from the tail to the head several times on both sides with a spoon or knife until all the scales are removed.

How to gut a trout

Step 2: Next remove the head by cutting at a slight angle just behind his gill, it will take a little force to cut through its backbone. I like to remove the lower front fin with this cut also.

How to gut a trout

How to gut a trout

Step 3: Once the head is removed turn the fish over so you can see its belly. You should see its exit hole just a little bit above the tail.

How to gut a trout

Step 4: Insert your knife or scissors into the exit hole and slice the belly all the way up to where the head once was.

How to gut a trout

Step 5: Spreading the belly that you just sliced open will reveal the innards. Grab the innards and pull them out with your hand, they should come out fairly easy.

How to gut a trout

Step 6: Once the innards are out you should see a membrane that covers the blood vein running up the fishes backbone. Take a knife and slice the membrane open.

How to gut a trout

Step 7: Next take your thumb or a toothbrush and scrape or brush out the blood vein until its clean like the picture below. I’ve always heard that not cleaning this will affect the taste of the fish.

How to gut a trout

How to gut a trout

Step 8: Rinse the trout (inside & out) thoroughly and prepare to cook as you like. To pan fry rinse the fish and pat dry, then roll the fish in flour that is seasoned with salt and pepper. Pan fry in olive oil (about 2-3 tablespoons) on medium heat for 4-6 minutes on each side or until meat flakes with a fork.

How to gut a trout

Here is the video of the Emmrod in action.

All my life I shied away from buying and cooking whole fish because I didn’t know how to clean them. I didn’t know what to do with the skin, leave it on, leave it off? How to take off the scales? How do I cook it? What about the bones? So if I bought fish, it was already filleted.

Now that I have started fishing, obviously I had to learn how to clean them. I’ve been mostly catching trout so by now I’m very comfortable cleaning it and this lead to enjoying cooking fish and experimenting with new recipes. which is a motivating factor for me to go and catch more fish. However because it was very hard to find useful websites or videos about cleaning it, I thought I write it up here and also made a video.

On YouTube there are 1000s of videos but these were the issues I’ve had:

  • half of them were about filleting the fish (that’s very different from cleaning and gutting it). I don’t prefer that method, because you end up losing a lot of meat
  • the ones that clean it the way I want to, cut the head off, which alters the way you gut it (I like to keep the head on)
  • a lot of the videos are not from a good angle, or are somewhat confusing, and don’t focus on the one crucial part. Because of that, I have messed up gutting my fish so many times, which resulted my sink looking like a massacre.

in addition to reading the step by step directions here, you should watch me video as it will make it a lot easier to understand.

So here are the things you need

  • butter knife (for taking the scales off and the clean the kidneyHow to gut a trout
  • a sharp knife. A fish – fillet knife or hunting knife is great, but any sharp knife will work as long as it’s not serrated
  • it is best to do it in the sink under running water (less messy) but not mandatory
  • you want to do this as soon as you can, so ideally you would clean the fish at the lake or river, after you caught it

Step 1. take off the scales using the butter knife. Stick the knife under the scales and to a How to gut a troutsweeping motion, going in a forward direction. Make sure you get it from the entire fish. (I like that the scales of trout are very small and they’re easily flake off. When I was scaling a bass, those scales were big and hard and jumped all over the place)

step 2. Hold the fish upside down. Using your sharp knife you will cut along the bottom from How to gut a troutthe anus (a small whole towards the end of the fish), all the way up front, and stop in between the gills. It is very important that you don’t cut too deep, because you do not want to slice or puncture the intestines. You’re only cutting through the skin and the flesh. Depending on the size of the fish, this cut could be as small as 1/5 of an inch.

Step 3. Run your finger through the cut to make sure you do cut deep enough. If not, fix it.

How to gut a troutStep 4. Under the head of the fish, between the gills, you will find 2 sets of lines that look almost How to gut a troutlike a V, except for they do not meet. Ignore the bottom one, look at the one that is directly under the mouth. Cut along the lines that are already open and finish the V shape. Put the knife underneath it and cut it away from the chin.

Step 5. With one hand, hold the fish’ mouth. With your other hand grab what now looks like a How to gut a troutsecond mouth. Get a good hold on it, put your thumb inside it and slowly tear it away. You have to actually tear through some meat, so forcefully pull it, but if it’s done right, it will pull out all the intestines and everything connected to it. There will be some blood, but nothing form the insides will be broken. Discard all that.

How to gut a troutStep 6. Look inside the fish, and on the inside, where the spine is, you will see a dark blood-line, attached to the spine. This is actually the kidney. The bigger the fish, the wider and bigger this is. Using the butter knife (or a spoon), scrape it all off, leaving nothing on. Rinse everything off and you are finished.

This gets easier with practice, but after you do it for the first time, it will all make sense. I highly recommend watching my video, it is easier to understand.

Now you can bake it, fry or make my Hungarian Fisherman Soup. Check out the recipe here

How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

In this article, I’ll give you a detailed description of how to care for African dwarf frog eggs, from egg to froglet.

Table of Contents

What Happens After Spawning

How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

African dwarf frogs (Hymenochirus) are not the kind of animal that will lovingly raise their babies.

Nope, not even close.

In fact, African dwarf frog parents will quickly gobble up their young.

They’re more like the Manson family than the Brady Bunch.

So, the most important thing to do is to separate the eggs and parents.

You’ll need to collect the eggs and move them to a suitable enclosure to raise them.

Most of the eggs will be floating on the surface of the tank and can be gently scooped up with a jar.

The eggs will be insanely sticky and some will probably adhere to the sides of the jar as you collect them.

If this happens, just put the jar into the new tank where you plan to raise your tadpoles. A few days after the tadpoles hatch, you can simply remove the jar.

Don’t worry about collecting eggs that have sunk to the bottom of the tank. These eggs likely will not hatch. Your best bet is to grab the ones floating on the water’s surface.

Setting Up a Tank for African Dwarf Frog Eggs

Tank Size

It’s best to raise your baby African dwarf frogs in a 10 gallon (39 liter) or larger. The bigger the water volume, the easier it is to maintain ideal water conditions.


Your frog eggs will need to be kept nice and warm. The water temperature should stay at a steady 80°F (27°C).

This means that you’ll need to add an aquarium heater so you can keep the water at the right temp.

The tadpoles can survive cooler temperatures, but keeping the water warmer will help them develop more quickly.

Water Parameters

African dwarf frog eggs do best in slightly hard water with a pH between 7.5-8.0.

It’s also very important that you keep the water very clean. Expect to change out water frequently to keep deadly ammonia from building up in the water column.


There is some debate about filtration when it comes to African dwarf frogs.

Some argue that power filters and airstones create too much “vibration” in the water that can stress and kill the frogs.

Others will tell you that they’ve raised African dwarf frogs for years in tanks with power filters with zero issues.

I would definitely recommend that you do filter the water in any African dwarf frog tank. Filters don’t simply move water around. Beneficial bacteria that live inside of the filter media help to process harmful ammonia from frog feces and urine.

For more information about how filters can help reduce biological wastes in the water column, please see our article about the Aquarium Nitrogen Cycle.

But instead of using a conventional power filter that can suck in frogs and tadpoles, I’d recommend using a sponge filter.

An air-driven sponge filter will provide great mechanical and biological filtration, but there’s no danger of frogs being sucked in.

If you decide not to add a filter, you will need to do 10% water changes at least twice a day everyday to get rid of built up wastes.

Substrate and Decor

At this stage, when your frogs are just eggs or tadpoles, it’s best to just skip both substrate and decor in the tank.

A bare bottom tank is much easier to clean. And tadpoles can get stuck inside of decor.

Live plants are good once your eggs have hatched and you’re raising the tadpoles, but it’s best to just keep things really simple while you’re waiting for the eggs to hatch and the tadpoles to become free-swimming.

Hatching African Dwarf Eggs

Once you’ve got the environment all set up, your eggs should be all set to hatch.

Be prepared for losses. African dwarf frog eggs have a very high mortality rate. You could have 100 eggs but only end up with 10 frogs when they reach maturity.

Newborn Tadpoles

2-7 days after the eggs are laid, they will hatch and tiny tadpoles will emerge.

For the first 5 days or so, they will remain stationary. The tadpoles have an “adhesive gland” that will keep them glued to surfaces in the tank.

The tadpoles will not eat during this time.

Feeding Tadpoles

Once the tadpoles become free-swimming, the challenge is finding food that’s small enough for them to eat.

A commercially prepared liquid or powdered fry food works best. You can also offer them infusoria, but it would have to be cultured ahead of time.

After 2-3 weeks, you can start to offer the tadpoles baby brine shrimp.

Once the tadpoles have developed hind legs, you should be able to feed them just as you would an adult African dwarf frog: brine shrimp, bloodworms, finely chopped California blackworms, daphnia, etc.

African Dwarf Tadpole Development

The speed at which your tadpoles develop will depend on a few factors:

  • Water temperature
  • Water quality
  • Food availability
  • Individual genetics

Tadpoles kept at warmer temperatures will develop more quickly than those kept in cooler conditions.

It is crucial that you keep the tank water as clean as possible. You should do a 10% water change every other day if you are using a filter.

If you do not use a filter, you should change out 10% of the water twice daily.

As with any large brood of baby animals, there will be those that grow big and strong but there will also be some stunted, runty ones that just don’t seem to do as well.

This all has to do with the genetics of the individual tadpole, similar to how there is almost always a runt in a litter of puppies.

Final Thought On African Dwarf Eggs

Breeding and raising African dwarf frogs is a really rewarding project.

You don’t have to break the bank to raise up a group of tadpoles. All you need is a 10 gallon tank, a heater and a simple sponge filter.

And probably the single most important factor is patience. The tadpoles will need special care and attention everyday in order to get them to adult size.

You should prepare yourself for some losses. I know it’s a total bummer, but it’s just a fact of life.

The more robust tadpoles will often eat the runts. Even experienced frog breeders expect that only about 10% of the eggs they get to hatch will grow to be adult frogs.

So don’t beat yourself up if you lose some tadpoles, it happens to everyone.

In the end, all your careful feeding and tank cleaning should result in some adorable new frogs that you and the whole family can enjoy… on crackers with mustard.

Just kidding!! Please, don’t eat any of the adorable little amphibians.

I wish you and your frogs the very best.

Katherine Morgan

Hey, there! I’m Katherine from Northwest Florida. A nunchuck specialist, I’ve kept aquariums for over two decades, enjoy experimenting with low-tech planted setups and an avid South American cichlid enthusiast. If You’d like to see more of my tanks, check out my Instagram

How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

African clawed frogs are native to eastern and southern Africa and parts of western Africa. They have been used extensively used for research, and are considered an invasive species on four continents, due to their release into the wild from research laboratories. African clawed frogs prefer to spend all of their time in stagnant water where they live, feed and reproduce.

Fun Facts

  1. At times, when its pond dries up, the African clawed frog can burrow in the mud and may lay dormant for up to a year.
  2. The African clawed frog was the first vertebrate cloned in a laboratory.
  3. Their skin produces a type of antibiotic that heals wounds rapidly, presumably a useful adaptation in the stagnant, microbe-filled waters where they live.

Conservation Status

  • Least Concern
  • Near Threatened
  • Vulnerable
  • Endangered
  • Critically Endangered
  • Extinct in the Wild
  • Extinct
  • Data Deficient
  • Not Evaluated

An African clawed frog’s body is flattened with a smaller, wedge-shaped head. The positioning of the eyes and nostrils on the top of the head, along with camouflaged skin, help this species hide from predators, such as herons. The smooth skin is often multicolored with blotches of greenish-gray or brown on its back. The underside is off-white with a yellow hue. African clawed frogs have the ability to change their appearance to match their background, becoming darker, lighter or mottled.

The frogs’ front limbs are small with non-webbed fingers used to push food into the mouth. Their hind legs are large and webbed, and the three inside toes on either foot have “claws,” which are not true claws but cornified tips. Although an adept swimmer, the African clawed frog is clumsy on land and crawls rather than hops.

African clawed frogs also have a lateral line system that is very sensitive to vibrations, enabling them to detect predators and prey in murky water. The lateral line is visible as a series of white stitch marks along each side of the frog.

The Pipidae family of frogs is unique in that members lack a tongue and a visible ear. The males also lack vocal cords. Instead of moveable eyelids, a horny, transparent covering protects their eyes.

Males weigh 2 ounces (60 grams), and are about 2 to 2.5 inches (5 to 6 centimeters) long. Females are much larger, weighing approximately 7 ounces (200 grams) and are about 4 to 4.5 inches (10 to 12 centimeters) long. Females also have cloacal extensions at the end of their abdomen.

These frogs live along the African Rift Valley south of the Sahara Desert in east and southern Africa, as well as in South Africa, Namibia and Angola. As an invasive species, they are now found in freshwater areas all over the world, including the United States, Chile, France, Indonesia, Portugal, United Kingdom and Italy. Rarely found in running streams, the African clawed frog prefers warm, stagnant pools and quiet streams, thriving in temperatures from 60 to 80 degrees Fahrenheit. Almost totally aquatic, it only leaves the water when forced to migrate to another pond. It is a highly opportunistic species and can easily colonize newly created water bodies.

Despite their lack of vocal cords, males can vocalize to attract females. Rapid muscle contractions in the throat produce a clicking noise, to which the female responds with either an acceptance call (a rapping sound) or a rejection call (slow ticking sound). A female only rarely answers the male’s call.

As tadpoles, African clawed frogs are exclusively filter feeders. Adult frogs become scavengers, eating living, dead or dying arthropods and other pieces of organic waste, including aquatic insect larvae, water insects, crustaceans, small fish, tadpoles, worms and freshwater snails. They have a voracious appetite and will attack anything that passes by. Extremely sensitive fingers, an acute sense of smell and its lateral line system help to locate food. A special pump helps individuals suck food into their mouths. The claws on their hind feet tear apart larger pieces of food.

These frogs are sexually mature in 10 to 12 months. Mating can take place during any time of year but is most common from early spring to late summer, depending on location, and can take place up to four times a year. Despite their lack of vocal cords, males vocalize to attract females.

Mating usually occurs at night in stagnant water, and lasts three to four hours. The males clasps a female around the pelvic region, a form of amplexus (a common mating position in which the male grabs the female from behind), in opposition to the normal axillary, or front limb, amplexus. As amplexus is formed, the female lays 500 to 2,000 eggs. Sticky jelly around the eggs causes them to adhere to objects such as sticks, stones and other substrate underwater. Eggs hatch within one week and tadpoles are slightly less than 1/5 of an inch (2/5 of a centimeter) long. The total change from egg to small frog takes about six to eight weeks. Adults exhibit no parental care.

African clawed frogs can live up to 15 years.

African clawed frogs are a very successful and adaptable species with a wide distribution and presumed large population.

These frogs have been used extensively as laboratory research animals, mostly in the field of vertebrate embryology because females are prolific egg layers and the embryos are transparent, making it easy to observe its development.

During the 1940s, female African clawed frogs were used as indicators of human pregnancy. Female frogs were injected with urine of a human female, and the injected frog would start producing eggs if the woman was pregnant. With the adoption of modern-day pregnancy tests, many African clawed frogs were released all over the world, creating an invasive species problem in some areas and possibly spreading the chytrid fungus. Seemingly, the disease does not detrimentally affect populations of African clawed frogs.

African dwarf frog eggs are very delicate; they require warm water and a slightly higher pH than adult African dwarf frogs. Adult African dwarf frogs are very prolific egg layers, laying up to 8,000 eggs each year, but they are not parental animals. These frogs will eat their eggs, if you don't remove them from the aquarium quickly.

Breeding African Dwarf Frogs

African dwarf frogs become sexually active between 9 months and 12 months of age. Female African dwarf frogs will lay several clutches of 500 to 2,000 eggs throughout the year.

Video of the Day

They will lay eggs throughout the aquarium. The eggs may float on the water surface or they may sink. The sticky jelly surrounding eggs causes them to stick to rocks, decor and aquarium walls.

Hatching the Eggs

Siphon the eggs into a separate hatching aquarium as soon as they are laid. The hatching aquarium should be at least 10 gallons.

The hatching aquarium should have pH of 7.5 and 8.0. Tap water has average pH between 6.6 and 7.4, so test the hatching aquarium water with pH test strips before adding the eggs. If the pH is too low, add 1 teaspoon of baking soda per 5 gallons of water.

Use an underwater aquarium heater to maintain the water temperature at 80 degrees Fahrenheit, which is slightly warmer than the 70 to 75 degrees Fahrenheit an adult African dwarf frog habitat should be.

Have the hatching aquarium set up before the eggs are laid so you can have the water pH and temperature stabilized.

Typically, African dwarfeggs will hatch about 48 hours after being laid, but they may take up to a week.

Raising Tadpoles

African dwarf frog tadpoles are delicate; they have an 80 percent mortality rate, affected by many factors:

  • Hatchlings are tiny, hatching at about 0.14 inch long.
  • Dropsy — a common sign is body swelling.
  • Fungal infections — common signs includes white thread or white, cottonlike patches on the skin.
  • Bacterial infections — common signs are lethargy and reluctance to eat.
  • Cannibalism.
  • Low oxygen levels in the water.

Feed newly hatched tadpoles a daily diet of liquid fry food or powder/flake fish food. When the hind legs are fully developed, begin to offer frozen Cyclops and daphnia. When the front legs are fully developed, offer frozen Artemia and mosquito larvae. Once the tail has been completely absorbed, you can begin feeding an adult frog diet, which can include brine shrimp, bloodworms, small fish and commercial pellets.

Do not use an aquarium filter when raising newly hatched African dwarf frogs. These tadpoles are so small that the filter will easily suck them into the filter tubing, so manually change about 10 percent of the water at least twice a day to remove waste and keep the water clean.

Daily water changes help reduce fungal and bacterial infections, as well as maintain low stress levels. Daily water changes will also help maintain the dissolved oxygen level in the water.

After 10 days, the hind legs will become visible. After 19 days, tadpoles will be able to move their hind legs. After 24 to 25 days, the front legs will begin to form, and after 30 days, the tail will have mostly absorbed. It takes four to eight weeks for a tadpole to become a frog.


Tadpoles grow at different rates — remove tadpoles at advanced stages of metamorphosis to prevent cannibalism. Place them in a separate tadpole habitat similar to the hatchling habitat.

In the wild, African Clawed Frogs are known from lakes, ponds, rivers, and wetlands in arid and sub-arid African climes. This species is a voracious predator and easily adapts to a wide range of habitats, from stagnant waters to clear flowing streams. Despite being classed as fully aquatic, under favourable conditions they have been known to travel short distances to other bodies of water, and as such, in some areas are regarded invasive. Nevertheless, they remain a popular aquarium pet for those wishing to keep a species-only frog tank. Indeed, kept in the right environment, this is a large, characterful species that can live for two decades or more. African Clawed Frogs are fully aquatic, but they do need to come up and take warm air from above the water’s surface periodically. It is therefore essential that the tank is not too deep and you should leave a small gap between the surface of the water and the coverslides/lid. Substrate choice is important: it either needs to be too large (pebbles) or too fine (aquatic sand) to swallow, so that the frogs are unable to accidentally ingest it when lunging for food. Ingestion of gravel can be fatal. Sand is the preferred choice as not only should it pose no problems for the frogs when feeding, it is much easier to keep clean, as it is all too easy for uneaten food and other waste products to build up amongst coarse grained substrates. Having said this, some people prefer to use pebbles (or even keep the tank substrate free) because these frogs do like to dig and sand can be disturbed rather easily; however, this should not be an issue if the sand bed is not particularly deep. Filtration should be efficient, but water movement fairly gentle. Hiding places should be provided amongst smooth rocks, driftwood, flowerpots turned on their sides, and sturdy aquatic plants such as Anubias spp. trained to grow on the decor (plants in the substrate may be uprooted). Bear in mind that adults have powerful back legs and can be quite destructive where aquarium decor is concerned; be sure everything is safe and secure. African Clawed Frogs are sociable with their own kind – as long as all specimens are of similar size – and should be kept in small groups. They arepredators that will prey on anything they can fit in their mouths, including fish that are of similar size to themselves, so they are best maintained in a species-only environment. Ensure there are no escape holes in the top of the tank as these frogs, unsurprisingly, are expert jumpers and they cannot survive out of water for long. Every few weeks, the frogs will shed their old skin, and when this happens, they usually eat it afterwards. This species is sometimes confused with the African Dwarf Frog (Hymenochirus spp.) which is a smaller and more peaceful species. To tell the difference: African Clawed Frogs have webbed hind feet and autonomous digits on the front feet, whereas African Dwarf Frogs have four webbed feet. Furthermore, the eyes of the African Clawed Frog are set on the top of the head, and those of the African Dwarf Frog are positioned on the sides of the head. Finally, the snouts of African Clawed Frogs are flat and gently curved, with those of the African Dwarf Frogs being more pointed. The albino variety of the African Clawed Frog is the most commonly encountered.

Carnivorous. Offer a variety of foods including sinking pellets/granules (such as Tetra ReptoMin) and meaty frozen foods such as white mosquito larvae, bloodworm, vitamin-enriched brineshrimp, mysis shrimp, krill, and prawns. These frogs can tear prey with their claws. Be sure not to overfeed as these frogs tend to be very greedy.

African Clawed Frogs mate in what is known as amplexus (Latin for ’embrace’). This is a type of direct contact mating behaviour exhibited by some externally fertilising species, including amphibians. The male African Clawed Frog grasps the female’s abdomen just in front of her hind legs using his front legs, and at the same time, or with a little delay, he fertilises the eggs as the female releases them. Amplexus usually happens at night, after one or more nights of courtship ‘singing’ and excited moving about by the male. Once in the amplexus position, the male will change the tone of his call and will hold onto the female for several hours. If the female is receptive, she will repeatedly spin about on the spot, or swim short distances, whilst towing the male. In this position, the female releases between 1-5 eggs at a time, which are simultaneously fertilised by the male. The adults will predate on the eggs so are best acclimatised to another aquarium once the female is spent of eggs. Hatching should occur within 2-4 days (temperature dependent) and the resulting 4mm tadpoles will require feeding with infusoria, moving on to baby brineshrimp and microworms when large enough. Approximately 6-8 weeks post hatch, the tadpoles will metamorphose into tiny frogs.

How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles


Original Distribution: The African clawed frog is native to the cooler regions of sub-Saharan Africa. Its range includes the highlands between the African Cape and the plateau of Cameroon and Nigeria, and excludes the Zaire Basin and the hotter lowlands of East Africa. The African clawed frog is an air breathing aquatic frog that occurs in virtually every body of water in its native range. It inhabits natural waters, such as rivers, lakes, ponds, marshes, rainpools, and swamps, as well as manmade waters, including reservoirs, dams, flooded pits, ditches, and wells. This frog is most commonly found in stagnant or still waters of ponds or sluggish streams, but may also inhabit fast flowing water.

Current Distribution: Feral populations of African clawed frogs outside their original distribution were first documented in the 1960’s. They currently inhabit three of the world’s five Mediterranean climate regions, including the Cape of Africa, Southern California, and Chile. In the United States, African clawed frog populations have been reported in 11 states, including Arizona, California, Colorado, Florida, Louisiana, Nevada, New Mexico, North Carolina, Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. There are also known populations in the United Kingdom, Germany, the Netherlands and Ascension Island.

Site and Date of Introduction: The African clawed frog was shipped around the world in the 1940’s and 1950’s for use in human pregnancy tests after it was discovered that female African clawed frogs begin laying eggs when injected with a pregnant women�s urine. To supply the high demand for African clawed frogs in pregnancy assays, techniques were developed to breed and rear large numbers of African clawed frogs in captivity. With the success of captive breeding techniques and because African clawed frogs are easy to care for and resistant to disease, a significant pet trade developed in the 1950’s and 1960’s. The African clawed frog is now the research vertebrate most widely used for developmental, cell and molecular biology.

Mode(s) of Introduction: The frogs were intentionally released from laboratories around the world when new technologies for pregnancy diagnosis were developed in the late 1950’s. Other modes of introduction include intentional releases of unwanted pets and pet escapes from aquariums. With the ongoing use of the African clawed frog in cell and molecular biology research, laboratory escapes are another potential introduction pathway.

Reason(s) Why it has Become Established: The African clawed frog became established because of its affinity for disturbed or artificial habitats, habitat adaptability, dietary diversity, effective defense mechanisms, disease resistance, high reproductive rate, long life span, and overland dispersal ability.

Affinity for disturbed or artificial habitats
Known invaded sites of the African clawed frog are generally manmade bodies of water and natural waterways subject to disturbance or high environmental variability. Populations have been documented in a beaver pond in Colorado, drainage ditches in California, canals in the Netherlands, ephemeral ponds and underground cisterns in the UK, and artificial ponds in Arizona, California, North Carolina, Virginia, Wisconsin and Ascension Island .

Habitat adaptability
The African clawed frog is extremely salt tolerant (40% sea water) and has successfully established populations near sea cliffs in the UK that are subject to high sea spray. Ideal conditions for the African clawed frog are Mediterranean climates, but adults can tolerate temperature ranges of 0-30 o C and tadpoles can survive temperature ranges of 10-30 o C. Populations persist under winter ice in Wisconsin, North Carolina, and Virginia, and in climates near the frog’s upper viable temperature range in Arizona. The species can aestivate for up to eight months during periods when ponds completely dry up and can tolerate periods of total starvation lasting up to one year. It can breed successfully in both acidic and alkaline waters with pH ranges of 5 to 9.

Dietary diversity
The African clawed frog is a relatively non-specific predator that hunts on the surface and forages on the bottom for a wide taxonomic range of prey. It feeds preferentially on acquatic insects, although it will eat fish, amphibians and birds, will scavenge on decaying debris, and will resort to cannibalism, taking its own larvae as food. Cannibalism enables it to survive food shortages and to quickly establish in newly formed ponds before prey is available and predators and resource competitors appear. The degree of cannibalism will be self regulating on population size .

Effective defense mechanisms and disease resistance
African clawed frogs have a number of effective defense mechanisms, including rapid reverse movements, synchronized aerial breathing, and secreted skin toxins that deter predators such as snakes. The species also secretes antimicrobial compounds that contain antibiotic, antifungal, antiparasitic and antiviral actions that prevent skin and other types of infections.

High reproductive rate and long life span
The African clawed frog reaches sexual maturity in 6-10 months after metamorphosis and can live 10 to 15 years in the wild. A female can produce up to 27,000 eggs per reproductive session and can produce multiple clutches per season in favorable conditions. In its native range, its breeding season can last for up to 10 months and in California its breeding season is year round.

Benefit(s): In captivity, the African clawed frog is an extremely useful laboratory species. Feral populations of African clawed frogs occupy many habitats that are inhospitable to most species and can survive effectively in depauperate habitats.

Threat(s): In California, virtually ideal climate conditions have enabled the African clawed frog to establish large and extremely dense populations. It has been identified as an exotic predator of the endangered California red-legged frog (Rana aurora draytonii) and may also threaten the endangered unarmored threespine stickleback (Gasterosteus aculeatus williamson). The African clawed frog is also thought to be a threat to native fish and amphibians in the American Southwest.

Control Level Diagnosis: The control level for this species varies by climate conditions. Regions where seasonal temperatures exceed the African clawed frog’s tolerable limits can place a “Minimal Priority” on control since temperature extremes will prevent establishment of persistent populations. In California and other areas with favorable Mediterranean climate conditions, the species should be considered a “High Priority” for control.

While many species of amphibians have been studied by scientists, the one that stands out in genetics is the African clawed frog, Xenopus laevis.

As a model organism Xenopus laevis has a number of key benefits, from the ease in which they can be kept, to their abundant supply of large, robust eggs that can be simply manipulated in the lab.

The early years

The history of experimental embryology using amphibians stretches back to the 1880s, when German embryologist Wilhelm Roux removed one cell of a two-cell frog embryo. Unviable half-embryos resulted, left or right side only, indicating that the two original cells had different fates.

German scientists were the undeniable world experts in embryology at this time.

At this time, German scientists were undeniably the world experts in embryology, the science of the development from fertilisation to embryo. During these early years they were using newts, salamanders, frogs and sea urchins to understand early development.

However, embryological research before the Second World War was hampered by a lack of eggs, which had to be collected in the wild. Researchers would have to rush to find the eggs of frogs or newts during the spawning season, and then work quickly to do their experiments. They would then spend the rest of the year working out what they had found out from their experiments and what they needed to do next.

From bedside to bench

In the 1930s, it was discovered that a female Xenopus laevis would ovulate if injected with the urine from a pregnant woman.

Xenopus laevis was to be the saviour of the egg-starved scientists, but it rose to prominence for another reason altogether. In the 1930s, it was discovered that a female X. laevis would ovulate if injected with the urine from a pregnant woman due to the presence of the hormone chorionic gonadotropin. For a while in the 1940s and 1950s, this was the only available pregnancy test, and many hospitals kept X. laevis for this purpose. However, not all hospitals were vigilant in keeping the frogs and many escaped! Unlike today, in these early years there were no clear guidelines for the care and treatment of animals in research.

From the 1950s onwards X. laevis gradually became the organism of choice for developmental studies. Important embryological techniques, such as grafting, which involves taking a piece of tissue and putting it somewhere else in the embryo, are very easy to do with high precision in X. laevis embryos because of their large size (usually 1mm to 1.3mm in diameter).

Using X. laevis embryos in the mid-1980s, it was shown that ‘inducing factors’ called fibroblast growth factors and activins are secreted by signalling centres in the frog. This signalling leads to certain patterns of development in the X. laevis embryo. Following this, other major classes of signalling molecules found in the cells of animals have subsequently been identified, allowing scientists to learn even more about how the frog and other vertebrates develop from embryo to adult.

A new frog on the block

X. laevis is allotetraploid (four copies of each chromosome, rather than two like us) which makes it very difficult to knock out a gene to investigate its function. It also has a long generation time, it takes a year for females to reach sexual maturity, making breeding experiments impractical. Therefore, X. laevis researchers looked to develop a simpler method to investigate the functions of genes and proteins in the development of the frog.

The genome of Xenopus tropicalis was sequenced in 2010 – the first sequence of an amphibian.

The solution came in the form of a close cousin of Xenopus laevis, Xenopus tropicalis. X. tropicalis is smaller than X. laevis, has a shorter life cycle (it matures in about four months) and has a small diploid genome (two copies of each chromosome rather than four). There were high hopes that X. tropicalis would have all the advantages of X. laevis and simpler genetics as well.

The genome of Xenopus tropicalis was sequenced in 2010. It was the first sequence of an amphibian. The high quality sequence has aided researcher’s using Xenopus tropicalis, to have a better understanding of its embryo development and cell biology.

How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

Xenopus laevis female with egg batch and Xenopus tropicalis male

Image credit: Shields R (2011) Breaking the Hybrid–Species Barrier. PLoS Biol 9(11): e1001201. doi:10.1371/journal.pbio.1001201.

Without the contributions of the African clawed frog our understanding of early development would not have progressed at such a rapid rate.

Studying both X. laevis and X. tropicalis has enabled scientists to discover much about the early three-dimensional development of the embryo after initial fertilisation. It has been particularly useful for the analysis of events occurring very early in development, such as the formation of the neural plate, which gives rise to the entire nervous system. However, there is still much work to be done to help us understand how organs develop, how tadpoles become frogs and how limbs and tails regenerate.

There are still considerable questions that are waiting to be answered, however, it is certain that without the contributions from research of the African clawed frog our understanding of early development would not have progressed at such a rapid rate.

Our editors will review what you’ve submitted and determine whether to revise the article.

How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

clawed frog, (genus Xenopus), any member of 6 to 15 species of tongueless aquatic African frogs (family Pipidae) having small black claws on the inner three toes of the hind limbs.

How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

Xenopus species are generally dull-coloured. Their bodies are relatively flat and bear whitish fringelike mucous canals that serve as sensory organs. When feeding they hang just below the surface of stagnant or slow-flowing muddy waters with outspread forelimbs, waiting for prey to pass by. Because they are tongueless, they rely on the forelimbs to guide food to their mouths, with additional aid from the rapid forward thrust of their powerful hind limbs. Considered among the more primitive species of frogs, Xenopus species have a simple egg-laying strategy: eggs are scattered individually over submerged vegetation.

How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

Xenopus was once widely used for tests for human pregnancy because researchers found that young female clawed frogs would lay eggs when injected with minute quantities of a human hormone found in the urine of pregnant women. Though other types of pregnancy tests have since proved more reliable, Xenopus is still used in embryological and anatomical research.

One of the more important species is the African clawed frog, or platanna (X. laevis) of southern Africa, a smooth-skinned frog about 13 cm (5 inches) long. It is valuable for mosquito control, because it eats the eggs and young of those insects. Native to sub-Saharan Africa, X. laevis was introduced to the United States and Britain. Some evidence suggests that Batrachochytrium dendrobatidis (the fungus that causes amphibian chytridiomycosis, which has spread to many groups of amphibians throughout the world) originated in African clawed frogs; however, that evidence remains inconclusive.

How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

The African clawed frog is a semi-aquatic frog native to sub-Saharan Africa that readily acclimates to a wide range of habitats. These frogs can take over a habitat, and either out-compete or consume native species of frogs and fish. African clawed frogs are often carriers of diseases that are harmful to amphibians and fish. Their ability to rapidly reproduce and spread make them a significant conservation concern.

African clawed frogs were first identified in Washington in 2015 in King County and have since been confirmed in three cities in Puget Sound (Bothell, Issaquah, and Lacey).

It is important to limit handling of African clawed frogs, due to the diseases these frogs could carry. Anyone who comes into contact with African clawed frogs should thoroughly clean their hands.

Learn more about these invasive amphibians in this September 2021 blog post from WDFW staff.

Invasive species information

African clawed frogs are dispersed into the wild after escaping or being let go from pet owners, pet stores, and research facilities. African clawed frogs are classified as a prohibited species in Washington, meaning they may not be possessed, purchased, sold, propogated, transported, or released into state waters.

Threat of African clawed frogs

African clawed frogs harm native ecosystems by competing with and preying on native species. They also have the potential to introduce harmful pathogens that hurt native fish and amphibian populations.

How to help

  • Do not purchase or keep African clawed frogs as a pet – they are a prohibited species.
  • Never release an unwanted pet or scientific specimen into the wild, even if it is a native species.
    • To learn what to do with unwanted pets, visit the Washington Invasive Species Council’s “Don’t Let it Loose” campaign webpage.

    Report your sighting if you observe African clawed frogs or any other known or suspected aquatic invasive species in a previously unreported waterbody.

    Phone: 1-888-WDFW-AIS (1-888-933-9247)

    Description and Range

    Physical description

    African clawed frogs have olive to brown skin, often with blotches or spots. These frogs do not have eye lids, tongues, or vocal sacs. Their front feet are unwebbed while their back feet are fully webbed and have black, sharp claws. Mature females average larger than males, growing to larger than an adult human fist. Larvae (tadpoles) look like a small catfish, and their most prominent feature is a pair of long thing barbels that extend from each side of their chin.

    These frogs have a long life span, an extended breeding season, and are prolific reproducers. They are capable of surviving through severe drought and freezing conditions. Similar to bullfrogs, African clawed frogs will eat anything that will fit into their mouths including other frogs, fish, birds, and snails.

    Geographic range

    African clawed frogs are native to sub-Saharan Africa and were originally imported to the United States for laboratory use and as pets. Infestations of the species have been reported in California, Colorado, Arizona, Wisconsin and several states on the east coast.

    After receiving reports from contractors, people fishing, and other community members, WDFW has confirmed African clawed frogs in three cities in Puget Sound since 2015: Bothell (King County); Issaquah (King County); and Lacey (Thurston County). However, there has not been any broad-scale systematic survey to identify additional populations around the state.

    Although there is no direct evidence on how African clawed frogs have been introduced in Washington, the Department believes the frog populations were initially established from people dumping aquarium pets into ponds, which is a common practice with other aquatic invasive species. The distribution of the three known African clawed frog populations across the Puget Sound area suggests introductions were done by different individuals and that introductions may be more widespread that currently understood.

    For more details on confirmed populations of African clawed frogs in Washington, refer to the African Clawed Frog Risk Assessment, Strategic Plan, and Past Management publication.

    Several frog species available for purchase are not native to Maryland. This includes the popular grass frogs which are typically found in the southern United States. While it is likely that many of these species may not survive in Maryland, those that do may outcompete our native frog species for limited resources (like food) or, even worse, may harbor diseases. For a list of frogs native to Maryland, please check out our frog page.

    How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

    Purchasing frog species native to Maryland can also cause several problems. For one, any purchased animal can harbor a potentially hazardous disease. In addition, while the bull frog may be native, the genetics makeup of bull frogs which are found in pet stores can be very different from that of bull frogs found around Maryland.

    Emerging Diseases

    Releasing any frogs into the wild that have been purchased also comes with the possibility of introducing emerging diseases like chytridiomycosis or ranavirus.

    Batrachochytrium dendrobatidis. Chytridiomycosis has been linked to dramatic declines in populations of amphibians in the western United States, Central America and South America. It is believed that 30% of global amphibian populations have been affected by the chytrid fungus, with some populations experiencing 100% mortality.

    The oldest reports of chytrid fungus have been linked to the African clawed frog, a popular frog found in the international pet trade. It is believed that African clawed frogs as well as other amphibians exported for the pet and scientific trades are responsible for the global transport of chytrid fungus. Many tadpoles sold by biological companies have been found to be infected How to care for african clawed frog tadpolesby the chytrid fungus. So, if any infected tadpoles are released into the wild, then they can spread the disease

    Ranavirus is another serious infectious disease that affects both amphibian and reptile species. Ranaviral disease, infection and mortality have now been reported on every continent except Africa. In Maryland, larval wood frogs, spotted salamanders and marbled salamanders have experienced the most mortality due to ranavirus. In addition, the eastern box turtle has also been found to be affected by this virus. Similar to the chytrid fungus, ranaviruses have been spread by the movement of infected animals through the trade in amphibians for pets, food and research.

    Alternatives to Purchasing Tadpoles

    How to care for african clawed frog tadpolesOne alternative to purchasing tadpoles online is to collect some of your own. Legally, you are allowed to collect and possess 25 tadpoles of any one species at one time. Look for tadpoles in a local stormwater management pond or other small waterbody. Be sure to note where you found the tadpoles, so you can release them back to the same site once they have metamorphosed.

    To limit the spread of disease, always remember to sterilize aquaria and dipnets prior to catching tadpoles. This can be accomplished by soaking nets and aquaria in a 10% bleach solution for at least 10 minutes. After sterilizing materials, rinse equipment with clean water. In addition, wash hands thoroughly before and after handling any amphibians or reptile. This precaution helps keep your germs from being passed to the animal or germs from an animal you may have previously held.

    While the tadpoles and frogs remain in your care, be sure to isolate them from other animals, particularly any other amphibians or reptiles. Be sure that the animals are healthy and disease-free before releasing them back into the wild.

    By collecting your own tadpoles from a local source, you can still enjoy the educational aspects of watching the miracle of metamorphic animals while also protecting local populations from the spread of disease. Additionally, the educational experience can be greatly enhanced by allowing the students to collect and release tadpoles and frogs.


    Cope’s gray treefrog tadpole by: John White
    Tadpole with ranavirus by: Scott Farnsworth
    Box turtle with ranavirus by: Scott Farnsworth|
    Bullfrog by: John W hite

    Once your pet has settled in, be sure to contact a vet if you notice any of these symptoms of illness or distress:

    • Thinness or decreased appetite
    • Swollen joints
    • Excessive shedding of the skin
    • Inflamed or discolored skin
    • Abdominal swelling


    • Fish and aquatic animals can transmit disease to humans. Wash your hands with soap and water before and after interacting with your frog. Children, pregnant women, elderly people and people with immune-system problems should take extra care.
    • Do not clean habitats or equipment in the kitchen sink or near food-preparation areas.
    • Do not release frogs into the wild. They likely will not survive, but they may transmit diseases to wild animals or otherwise harm the environment.
    • Adults should assist children with hand washing after contact with a pet, its habitat or aquarium water.


    Pets purchased at PetSmart are part of our exclusive Vet Assured™ program, designed by PetSmart veterinarians to help improve the health and well being of our pets.

    Our vendors meet a high standard in caring for pets and screening them for common illnesses. This program also includes specific standards for in-store pet care.


    If your pet becomes ill during the initial 14-day period, or if you’re not satisfied for any reason, PetSmart will gladly replace the pet or refund the purchase price.

    new pets

    new pets

    Turtle and Tortoise Checklist

    new pets

    So You Want a Pet Reptile?

    How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

    10,021,409 lives saved.

    Are you a California resident?

    These rights are available only to California residents at this time.

    Are you a California resident?

    Are you a California resident?

    Are you a California resident?

    Save 35% on your first Autoship order up to a maximum savings of $20.00 and 5% on all recurring orders. Certain products and brands are not eligible for sitewide offers or promotions and specifically excludes, select products from The Pharmacy at PetSmart, all Royal Canin and Eukanuba products, all services, gift cards, gift certificates, previous purchases and charitable donations. Must be signed in to your Treats account to receive discount. Savings will automatically reflect in shopping cart with purchase of qualifying product and enrollment in Autoship. Offer may not be combinable with other promotional offers or discounts. Treats members receive free shipping on orders over $49.00, prior to taxes & after discounts are applied. Recurring Autoship orders will be charged the online price of the date the order ships. Prices & selection may vary. While supplies last. Quantities may be limited and deliveries may be delayed.

    DNA, voice recordings, CT scanning of internal anatomy, and chromosome analysis determined the species were new to science.

    McMaster University researchers have discovered and described six new African clawed frog species (Xenopus sp.) that reside in west and sub-Saharan Africa. The researchers determined the frogs were new species using a variety of analyses, including DNA, voice recordings, CT scanning of internal anatomy, and chromosome analysis.

    How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

    Xenopus calcaratus is one of six new species of African clawed frog recently described.

    “Because the African clawed frog is used as a model organism for biological research, it would be understandable to think that scientists had already pinned down the number of species and other aspects of their diversity such as where they live and how they are related to one another,” Ben Evans, lead author of the study and an associate professor in the Department of Biology at McMaster University said in a statement released to the media. “But this isn’t the case.”

    Their research also determined that all the new species are polyploid, a trait unique in African clawed frogs in which their DNA doubles during evolution. Two of the new species are dodecaploid, as their genomes have duplicated six times over the course of their evolution.

    The new species are X. calcaratus, X. mellotropicalis, X. allofraseri, X. eysoole, X. kobeli, and X. parafraseri. Evans and his team of researchers will visit Ghana in 2016 to obtain more genetic data and to look for what he says are “lost ancestors” of the clawed frog.

    The full paper including individual descriptions, colorations, and even call recordings, can be read on the PLOS One Journal.

    The African clawed frog (Xenopus laevis) was widely used in U.S. human pregnancy tests in the 1960s and were released into the wild when they were no longer needed. The frogs became invasive in Southern California and elsewhere in the country. In Southern California during the 1970s, they could be easily found in dark drainage ditches under city streets. African clawed frogs are highly resistant to the Chytrid fungus that is devastating other amphibian populations and research published in the PLOS One Journal says that the chytrid fungus was introduced by the research specimens, and were never tested prior to their released into bodies of water in the United States.

    Xenopus laevis is known for its voracious appetite, eating virtually any animal that it can fit into its mouth. It is highly resistant to disease, and spends the majority of its life, if not all of its life, in the water. It has a smooth skin that is slimy to the touch and claws on its hind legs. It grows to about five inches in length. Xenopus laevis is currently regulated in Arizona, California, Kentucky, Louisiana, New Jersey, North Carolina, Oregon, Virginia, Hawaii, Nevada, and Washington.

    Moderator Join Date May 2010 Nationality Location North Providence, Rhode Island, United States Age 34 Posts 1,317 Picture Albums:

    African Clawed Frog Tadpole Stages of Development

    From the day the eggs are laid, to the day where they absorb the last bit of their tail.
    Morphing process can take any where from 8 weeks to 14 weeks.
    Each batch is different – depending on genetics and environment factors, you may find yourself with tadpoles morphing at 6 weeks, or 18 weeks!
    The average is around 12 weeks.

    Every tadpole will morph at it’s own rate!

    Stage 1 – Eggs Laid.
    The tadpoles will develop in the eggs for 24-72 hours.
    You will see the egg turn into a "c" shape if the egg has been fertilized and is viable.
    If the egg develops mold or looks fuzzy then it was not fertilized and should be removed before the mold spreads to nearby developing tadpoles and before it begins to rot and fouls the water.

    Stage 2 – Clingers.
    The tadpoles now resemble small silver tear drops and will cling to surfaces in the tank – decor, walls, plants etc.
    They will stay in this stage for 24-48 hours. They are not yet able to swim and will at most flutter to another surface if they feel disturbed. They are not feeding at this stage.

    Stage 3 – Free Swimming.
    The tadpoles no longer cling to surfaces and have built up the strength to swim. They will be in a heads down position with the tail raised above their heads. They are now able to feed.
    Feed a small amount of powdered food 2-3 times a day. Tadpoles are filter feeders and will not hunt micro-organisms in the water like other species of tadpole. The best type of food is HBH or Zoomed frog/tadpole bites or Reptomin sticks ground up with a mortar and pestle. (What they will be eating whole as adults).
    Another great food to supplement feedings with, if you can stomach it, is to take earthworms (best to do bait store bought or raise your own, not catch them wild as you don’t know of any pesticides/chemicals they may have come in contact with) – take a few worms and put them in a blender with a cup of water, making a worm broth. Can also be done with frozen bloodworms but do this sparingly. Always plan your worm broth feedings a couple hours before your water changes, this will give the tadpoles sufficient time to filter feed their fill and you can remove the worms from the water before they begin to foul it.
    * It is common for about 30% of tadpoles to not survive. Remove any passed tadpoles as soon as you see them so they do not foul the water. Do not consider this a personal failure – on average only about 60-70% of tadpoles become froglets.

    Stage 4 – Growth, whiskers.
    The whiskers develop to help them interact with their environment. The internal organs can be seen developing – heart, brain, lungs, stomach are all visible at this stage.

    Stage 5 – Growth, back legs bud.
    This is a huge turning point for the tadpole!
    Slightly increase feedings to reflect the extra energy they are using to being their morphing process.

    Stage 6 – Back legs fully develop.
    You will see them learning how to use their legs, kicking themselves around the tank in short bursts. They will still primarily use their tails to move around while they build up their leg muscles.

    Stage 7- Front arms emerge.
    Soon after this the tadpole will begin to absorb their tail.
    Remember that tadpoles morph at their own rate and some may behind/ahead of their siblings. Be prepared with another tank to separate fully morphed froglets from their tadpole siblings as they will have different dietary requirements and you don’t need a froglet to mistake a sibling’s limb for food!

    Stage 8- Condensing to froglet body shape.
    The wide tadpole body begins to slim down to become more frog shaped. It is about to begin the process of absorbing their tail.

    Stage 9- Tail Absorption.
    When you see some tadpoles entering this stage, reduce feeding. They do not eat while absorbing their tail – they will absorb nutrients from their tail and not seek out food in the environment. They will also begin to absorb their gills and start going to the surface for gulps of air. By the end of this stage the tail will be absorbed and they will strictly be air breathers at the surface.

    Stage 10- Froglet!
    Congratulations! You now have a froglet! Remember that froglets need to be removed from their tadpole siblings.
    Feed the froglet 2x a day, a couple HBH or Zoomed tadpole Bites or the smallest Reptomin you can find (you may have to break it into bite size pieces).

    72 Gallon Bow – ACF and GF tank.
    26 Gallon Bow – ACF tank.
    20 Gallon Long – ACF tank.

    How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

    November 6, 2002 — A University of Utah biologist used a high-speed video camera to identify a tiny tadpole’s distinct way of eating dinner. Instead of filtering food from water like other species of frog larvae, the petite polliwog extends its tube-shaped mouth, and then sucks in immature shrimp, water fleas or other prey in a mere six one-thousandths of a second.

    “They first track individual prey organisms visually, and then chase and capture them by mouth using a suction mechanism. This feeding behavior is unique among frogs” and similar to what many fish do, scientists wrote in the Nov. 7 issue of the British journal Nature .

    Why should anyone care about such unusual dining behavior?

    “These animals tell us something about how aquatic animals that are really tiny function, how they face different physical challenges than animals of our size,” says biologist Stephen Deban, a postdoctoral researcher at the University of Utah. “There is incredible diversity in organisms, and organisms have tried all sorts of things to survive and reproduce. I just like to appreciate the diversity, and to see what kinds of bizarre solutions animals come up with to solve problems they face. In this case, the tadpoles have come up with a solution almost identical to what fish have come up with, and it evolved independently.”

    Deban conducted the study with Wendy M. Olson, a biologist at Dalhousie University in Halifax, Nova Scotia, Canada, when both worked at the University of California, Berkeley.

    Deban currently is spending a few weeks at Wageningen University, The Netherlands, where he is studying salamanders that can shoot their tongues out as much as 80 percent of their body lengths at high speeds.

    The Nature study involved larvae or tadpoles of the frog species Hymenochirus boettgeri , the African dwarf clawed frog. They are native to Africa, but are sold in many pet stores as “skin-diving frogs” and raised along with fish in home aquariums.

    When they begin feeding, the tadpoles are only 1 millimeter to 3 millimeters long, or roughly one-tenth of an inch, among the smallest known frog larvae, Deban said. He believes their unusual way of eating is a result of their tiny size.

    For a tadpole so small, water has a high viscosity, or “sticky, syrupy quality,” Deban says. So pumping water through the mouth to filter out organic debris would be like “running honey through a strainer,” he adds. “But engulfing a whole blob of water with the prey included is easier.”

    Other tadpole species use their tiny beaks to scrape organic material from surfaces so they can filter it through their mouths – something the African dwarf clawed frog tadpole cannot do because it lacks a beak.

    Deban says scientists have known for decades that the tadpoles are predatory, eating prey such as shrimp larvae, daphnia (water fleas), invertebrate freshwater organisms called rotifers and even other tadpoles of the same species. The new study, using a high-speed video camera and a powerful lens, revealed previously unknown details of the tadpoles’ “really weird” behavior, particularly how they extend their mouths and suck in their prey.

    “There is at least one other species of suction-feeding tadpole, but it doesn’t have this goofy mouth that shoots out like a fish [mouth],” Deban says.

    “Most other tadpoles swim around and scrape surfaces with their beaks and then filter the resulting cloud of organic stuff that gets kicked up,” he says. “ Hymenochirus is unusual in a number of ways. First, it is very small. Second, it is a hunter and chases down its prey. The fact that it’s predatory is highly unusual for tadpoles. Third, when it does catch up to its prey, it sucks it in very quickly with a mechanism that is extremely similar to the mechanism [about half of bony species of] fish use and very unlike anything other tadpoles do.”

    Deban got involved in the study because of earlier research in which he used the high-speed video camera to videotape feeding behavior of frogs, salamanders and other amphibians. Olson, meanwhile, was studying the development of African dwarf clawed frogs. Deban and Olson decided to study their feeding behavior.

    Deban videotaped the tadpoles by using glass microscope slides to make a tiny aquarium measuring about 3 inches wide, an inch high and one-fifth-inch from front to back. That kept the tadpoles within the camera’s depth of field. Deban says the same kind of high-speed video camera is used in industry to study fast-moving machinery and identify production-line problems.

    To suck in prey, the tadpole quickly and simultaneously drops the floor of its mouth, extends its mouth forward and raises its head, increasing the size of its mouth cavity to create suction, he says.

    Adult African dwarf clawed frogs – which are a species distinct from African clawed frogs – also use suction to eat their prey, Deban adds.

    While most frogs are semiaquatic (or semi-terrestrial, whichever way you choose to describe it), the African dwarf frogs (sometimes referred to as dwarf clawed frogs) are one of the few fully aquatic types of frog. Part of the Pipidae family, they can thrive and thier care is fairly easy under the correct conditions.

    There are actually four different African dwarf frogs in the Hymenochiris genus, but the major difference in all of these is primarily where they originate. The African Dwarf Frog, often referred to as ADF, is confused frequently with the African Clawed Frog, but they’re different. The Clawed Frog is larger and more aggressive; its eyes are on the top of its head rather than on the sides; and the front feet are not webbed.


    These frogs are olive to greenish brown in color, with small black spots speckled randomly along their bodies.

    The ADF can grow to a maximum size of 3 inches, though many will remain smaller.

    Life Span

    With proper care, these frogs can live up to 5 years in captivity; sometimes longer.


    Occasionally, these frogs will be seen singly in a small container or aquarium, but this isn’t how they should be housed. To begin with, these are very social creatures and will appreciate being with other ADFs. Additionally, more space makes it easier to have good water quality and is better for their overall health and well-being. While some sources specify at least 2 gallons per frog, Josh’s Frogs recommends at least 5 gallons per frog. This provides more swimming space, contributes to better water quality, and offers higher protection against potential water problems.

    As with all aquatic pets, more water volume means the water stays cleaner longer. Recommended water parameters for the ADF is as follows:

    • pH – 6.5 to 7.5
    • Temp – 75-82
    • The bottom of the aquarium can be covered with gravel that is too large for the frogs to ingest (but not large enough for them to get stuck between. However, sand is a safer bet and won’t cause either of these issues.
    • African dwarf frogs don’t require UVB light, but do need a day/night cycle that would mimic their natural environment. (If you add live plants to your aquarium, you’ll want to be sure you provide proper lighting for the plants).
    Plants and decorations
      of fake plants can be beneficial additions. The frogs will use the top parts of the plants to rest on; this is helpful because these frogs will need to reach the surface of the water to breathe air occasionally. A log, branch, or rock that is close to the water’s surface can also provide easier access to the air. African dwarf frogs are not great swimmers and can sometimes struggle to swim to the surface, so they will appreciate the help. They may also use the space beneath the leaves as hiding places.
    • Because they aren’t strong swimmers, it’s helpful to keep the water level low – around 12 inches or a little less is a typical practice. If using more than 12 inches of water, it is suggested to keep the level at no more than 24″ maximum.
    • Logs, caves, or aquarium decorations should also be added. Having a number of hiding places of some kind is important; this will help the frogs feel more secure and less stressed, and it will provide a place for them to seek more subdued light if they wish, since they are generally more active at night and sometimes like a dimmer space.
    • There is some controversy when it comes to filtering your frogs’ water. Since they are sensitive to water vibrations, canister filters are often used; alternatively, sponge filters are popular choices for these frogs. In their natural environment, ADFs are used to still or very slow-moving water, so a slow, gentle filter will be appreciated by these amphibians. 10-20% of the water needs to be removed each week and replaced with dechlorinated water.

    How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

    Other factors to consider
    • Using a tightly-fitting lid is a must, as these frogs are skilled escape artists and may jump out of the tank if able to do so. Once outside of water, they aren’t able to stay alive very long.
    • Using an air stone can help keep up water quality as well.


    African dwarf frogs are known to enjoy many kinds of food items, including live or frozen blood worms, brine shrimp, or black worms. You can also offer fish food pellets and specialized frog and tadpole pellets, though if using these, it is often recommended to add them alongside live or frozen foods. They may not take the pellets at all – it depends on the individual frog. A varied diet is a key element to the health of your dwarf frogs.

    Many owners will spot-feed their frogs by placing food close to them with tongs or by placing the food in the same spot at every feeding. I have had success with using a very small ceramic feeding dish and putting blood worms and other food items inside it, so they frogs quickly discovered a regular feeding spot.

    Tank Mates

    While some ADF keepers house these frogs with fish successfully, many keep these in a species-only tank for several reasons:

    1. These frogs can be quite timid and can sometimes be outcompeted for food, and

    2. This is the best way to ensure the frogs don’t become fish food and vice versa.

    We recommend keeping these in a species only tank for the above reasons. However, should you decide to keep them with fish, you should choose species with a similar temperament because of the peaceful nature of ADFs. Some livestock commonly kept with these frogs include guppies, nerite snails, and corydoras catfish; however, if keeping ADFs with other species, you should still keep an eye on your frogs during feeding time initially to make sure they are able to get their fair share of food.

    Scientists describe a process by which African clawed frogs can regrow an imperfect but functional lost limb.

    How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

    African clawed frogs are masters of putting themselves back together, handily regenerating lost tails and hind limbs, when they are tadpoles. But these powers dim with maturity. Wait for an adult frog to regrow a lopped-off limb and you’ll see only a tapered spike, more like a talon than a leg.

    Now, a group of scientists have found a way to harness the adult frog’s own cells to regrow an imperfect but functional limb. The researchers placed a silicone cap laden with a mixture of regenerative drugs onto an amputation wound for 24 hours. Over the next 18 months, the frogs gradually regrew what was lost, forming a new leglike structure with nerves, muscles, bones and even toelike projections.

    The researchers describe this approach, which builds on earlier research, in a paper published Wednesday in the journal Science Advances. The process could guide future research on limb regeneration in humans, but it will be challenging to replicate the results in mammals.

    “It was a total surprise,” Nirosha Murugan, a researcher at Algoma University in Ontario, Canada, and an author of the paper, said of the complexity of the regrown limb. “I didn’t think we would get the patterning that we did.”

    “It’s not a full limb that’s regrown,” said Kelly Tseng, a biologist studying regeneration at the University of Nevada, Las Vegas, who was not involved with the research. “But it’s certainly a robust response.”

    “It is particularly promising that only a daylong treatment can have such a positive effect on an adult animal,” Can Aztekin, a researcher studying limb regeneration at the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology in Lausanne who was not involved with the research, wrote in an email.

    Some aquatic animals, such as the salamander, have impressive regeneration skills, allowing them to regrow tissue, parts of major organs and even whole limbs. But glassy-eyed, meaty-bodied adults of the African clawed frog, or Xenopus laevis, have none of this regeneration prowess. “They face some of the same limitations as humans do,” said Michael Levin, a biologist who directs the Allen Discovery Center at Tufts University and is an author on the paper. Dr. Murugan conducted the research in Dr. Levin’s lab.

    Adult African clawed frogs and humans are both capable of tissue renewal — for example, wounded skin can make more skin. But a wounded leg cannot make more leg. Rather, it creates scar tissue to prevent infection or blood loss.

    To spur regrowth in a creature that does not naturally regenerate, such as an adult frog or human, researchers have experimented with stem cell implants or gene therapy. But these methods can be extremely complicated to implement, Dr. Murugan said.

    An easier approach, Dr. Levin suggested, is to trigger the animal’s own body and cells to regenerate the limb.

    To do this, the researchers needed to create a protected environment around the wound to inhibit scarring in the early stages of tissue repair — “to convince every cell in there that, ‘OK, we’re on the leg-growing program,’” Dr. Levin said.

    They made a wearable silicone cap called the BioDome, which was filled with a silk protein hydrogel. Dr. Murugan researched all the commercially-available drugs known to encourage regeneration before settling on a mixture of five to be loaded into the BioDome and released on the wound.

    In 2017, the researchers started what would become an 18-month experiment. On the first day of the experiment, a graduate student at the time, Annie Golding, and a researcher, Quang L. Pham, created the cocktail of drugs and BioDomes. Dr. Murugan — along with a technician, Kelsie Miller, and an undergraduate student, Hannah Vigran — performed 13 hours of surgery on 115 anesthetized female frogs.

    For the next year and a half, the frogs ate and swam under the care of an aquaculture technician, Erin Switzer, while the researchers waited patiently.

    At about the four-month mark, the frogs’ limbs began to diverge, depending on which of three experimental groups they were in, Dr. Murugan said.

    A group of frogs that received no treatment began developing stubby little spikes. And the frogs that wore the BioDome for 24 hours with no medication showed slightly more growth. But the batch of frogs that wore the BioDome laden with the drug mixture, also for just 24 hours, gradually developed something thicker and complex, with nerves, bone and cartilage. The limb even developed protrusions that resembled toes.

    “Cosmetically, it’s not perfect,” Dr. Levin said, adding that the toes are stubby, the webbing is a little off and there are no nails. “But functionally, it’s great.”

    Unlike the floppy cartilaginous spikes, the regrown limbs responded to a stimulus. And the frogs used their limbs much more effectively than their spiky brethren: “More purposeful swimming, rather than just kind of, like, flailing about,” Dr. Murugan said.

    Much more research needs to be done before any treatment like this is administered to human patients, Dr. Levin said, adding that he has begun trials in mice. Mammalian trials will most likely be more challenging, Dr. Tseng said, because rodents would be expected to produce almost no growth in response to amputation, unlike the frogs.

    But the leglike structure — with bone, nerves and the hint of a toe — is more complex and more leggy than Dr. Murugan expected for a first try. “It’s just the first of many,” Dr. Levin said.

    RENO — Authorities who seized scores of illegal African clawed frogs from Nevada residents say they have traced the creatures to a company that sells tadpoles over the Internet. The animals are banned because of their potential for ecological damage.

    How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

    RENO — Authorities who seized scores of illegal African clawed frogs from Nevada residents say they have traced the creatures to a company that sells tadpoles over the Internet. The animals are banned because of their potential for ecological damage.

    It turns out the tadpoles from Florida-based Grow-a-Frog, which markets them as an educational tool, are illegal in Nevada and at least 10 other states, authorities said.

    Agents seized 119 of the frogs from three Reno homes last month and publicized the raids to get the word out that the animals are illegal. Inundated with calls, they recovered another 68 this week in seven Nevada counties.

    Florida-based Grow-a-Frog called the shipments to Nevada a mistake and agreed to pay a $3,600 fine and stop sending the unwelcome guests, said Capt. Cameron Waithman, a Nevada Department of Wildlife warden.

    Banned as an illegal invasive species, the creatures live mostly in the water and grow as large as bullfrogs. They can destroy ecosystems if they escape by voraciously eating native fish, Waithman said.

    Nevadans who knowingly possess Africa clawed frogs are subject to six months in jail and a $500 fine.

    African clawed frogs are voracious aquatic creatures. They eat all manner of smaller pond-dwelling creatures and can reach about 4 inches in body length.

    History and Origin

    The African clawed frog, Xenopus laevis, is a thoroughly aquatic amphibian of moderate size. It ranges widely through much of tropical and subtropical Africa. This frog may be more readily available at aquarium departments than in the reptile and amphibian sections of pet stores. Aquarists often purchase it as an aquarium oddity. This poses no problem when the frogs are babies, but problems arise as the frogs grow and start wolfing down prized tropical fish intended as companions and not food.

    Although entirely aquatic, clawed frogs have lungs and periodically rise to the water surface to gulp a breath of atmospheric air. Their water must be clean and chemical free. Almost all in the pet trade are captive bred.

    When kept in a filtered aquarium and fed a varied diet, these are very hardy, usually trouble-free amphibians that are suitable for beginning hobbyists. They were once used in human pregnancy tests. If injected with the urine of a woman who was pregnant, a female frog would spontaneously ovulate.


    The body and head of the African clawed frog are flattened, but not to the extreme of the related Suriname toad. The hind limbs are flattened but very strong and the hind feet are broad and fully webbed. The three toes are tipped with black claws. The forelimbs are weak; the fingers are clustered and unwebbed.

    Clawed frogs lack eyelids. A row of “stitch-like” lateral organs are present on each side. Normally, these frogs are mud-colored with irregular blotches of darker pigment. Albinos, pieds, leucistic, and gold phases have been developed and are now firmly established.

    This frog species also lacks a tongue. The forefeet help stuff prey items into the sizable mouth. The tadpoles have long, motile, tails and a pair of barbels near the mouth. They appear superficially like diminutive catfish.


    Clawed frogs are tropical and subtropical creatures that are active throughout the year. They are voracious feeders that quickly shovel food into their mouth with their forefeet. Food seems to be located primarily by scent and, perhaps, by touch. The eyes are small, directed dorsally, and vision seems weak. These aquatic frogs have well developed lungs and must surface periodically to gulp a breath of fresh air. They thrive in most chemical-free tap waters. Do not keep them in distilled water.


    The diet of a clawed frog can include earthworms, crickets, freshly killed minnows, any small fish they can catch, tadpoles, and glass (grass) shrimp. You may also offer these frogs Reptomin®, pelleted trout chow, catfish chow, and koi pellets. Most will accept these prepared foods. Since uneaten animal-protein based dietary items can quickly sour your water, you must feed your clawed frogs prudently.


    The slimy skin of the clawed frog makes it very difficult to grasp them by hand. It is better to use a soft, wet net. Scoop up the frog and cover the mouth of the net with your free hand to prevent the frog from leaping free. Get him back into the water as quickly as possible.


    Certainly not brightly colored, clawed frogs are, nonetheless, interesting aquarium inhabitants. They can be kept either in a planted or a non-planted aquarium. If in the former, suitable lighting will need to be provided to stimulate plant survival and growth. Only plants with a strong root system should be used. From one to four clawed frogs can be kept in a 10-gallon tank, but a group of four to six should be kept in a 20-gallon long aquarium.

    Most tap waters are suitable for these frogs. The water should be chemical-free and filtered. Periodic changing is necessary. The more and larger your clawed frogs, the more often the water will require changing. Clawed frogs do best at a temperature between 76 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit.

    How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

    Add frogs with claws to the list of usual animals you might find in Florida. Residents may soon be facing off with another invasive pest as the nonnative tropical clawed frog has been identified in the Tampa area.

    The African amphibian threatens to unbalance the state’s fragile aquatic ecosystems as the invasive frogs compete with native species for food and other resources.

    “The Tropical clawed frog invasion represents yet another disturbance to Florida’s aquatic ecosystems, particularly those in southern Florida, which are already vulnerable due to habitat destruction, pollution, invasive species and disease,” said Christina Romagosa, a University of Florida research associate professor of wildlife ecology and conservation.

    Here are few things to know about the tropical clawed frog:

    The first clawed frogs were found in 2014

    A Tampa resident found unusual frogs on her property in 2014. At the time, researchers believed the animals were African clawed frogs. But new research from the University of Florida shows the amphibian was instead the tropical clawed frog, also known as the western clawed frog.

    This marks the first report of this species of frog outside its native range in West Africa. Experts aren’t sure whether they will continue to spread into other parts of the state.

    Scientists worry invasive frogs will outcompete native species

    Tropical clawed frogs are voracious eaters, mostly snacking on insects. However, they will sometimes eat tadpoles and young frogs of other species. Scientists are concerned that, besides the direct threat of predation, the invasive frogs will outcompete native frogs for food and habitat resources.

    Additionally, tropical clawed frogs can carry fungal and viral pathogens that are potentially dangerous to other frog species.

    Tropical clawed frogs are not dangerous to humans

    While frogs with claws might be a worrisome idea, tropical clawed frogs are not a threat to Florida’s human inhabitants. Unlike the toxic, invasive bufo toad, these nonnative frogs spend most of their time in the water and people rarely encounter them. They primarily use their claws to tear apart larger prey.

    It’s important to report exotic species if you find them

    If you spot a clawed frog, or any animal that looks like it doesn’t belong in Florida, it’s important to report it. The Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission tracks reports of invasive and nonnative species around the state.

    You can report an exotic animal sighting by calling the exotic species hotline at 888-Ive-Got1 (483-4681) or by visiting The FWC asks that residents report any sighting of a high-priority nonnative species, including all exotic frogs and snakes.

    How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

    Researchers at the University of Rochester School of Medicine and Dentistry are using frogs as a model to study human diseases. These frogs, called South African clawed frogs or Xenopus laevis, may not resemble humans on the outside, but they are very similar on a genetic level.

    The School of Medicine and Dentistry houses the largest X. laevis research resource in the world, with many genetically modified animals that have undergone special testing that makes them well suited for research on the immune system. Jacques Robert, Ph.D., professor of Microbiology and Immunology, coordinates the Xenopus Research Resource, which provides materials, animals, and training for researchers across the globe.

    Robert uses the X. laevis model to better understand the minute details of how tumors grow and how the body reacts. “We still have a lack of understanding of the environment inside tumors. A tumor is not just tumor cells, there are a lot of normal cells from the invaded organ and immune cells that infiltrate the tumor – and all of this changes as the tumor grows. We need to analyze this in real time,” says Robert. The tadpoles’ transparent skin makes them an advantageous model for imaging tumors as they grow.

    In a paper recently published in Developmental Biology, Robert and his colleagues transplanted tumor cells into tadpoles, which developed into semi-solid tumors that spread throughout the tadpole over the course of a few weeks. In mammals, growth and spread of tumors requires reorganization of the structural supports that surround the cells. Robert plans to use his new semi-solid tumor model in tadpoles to understand how these supports are modified and how that promotes tumor growth and spread.

    How to care for african clawed frog tadpoles

    Tumors also recruit and exploit immune cells for their own protection. “Tumors are very good at modifying whatever immune cells come at them,” says Robert. He plans to use the X. laevis model to view the interaction between tumor cells and immune cells to understand how the tumor induces certain immune cells to suppress the rest of the immune system.

    Robert’s research in X. laevis may also shed new light on how tumors grow blood vessels, which help the tumor grow and thrive by delivering essential nutrients through the bloodstream. In tadpoles, large blood vessels from the body enter the tumors and branch into smaller disorganized vessels – similar to what happens in mammals. Robert believes the disorganization of tumor vessels may be the reason chemotherapies delivered in the bloodstream are not fully effective. Understanding how tumor vessels grow may uncover ways to inhibit vessel growth and starve the tumor, or better ways to deliver chemotherapies.

How to cook asparagus

Learn how to prepare and cook asparagus in a range of tasty dishes. The delicate spears of this seasonal vegetable can be blanched, griddled, roasted or served raw.

We get asparagus for as little as two months of the year, so it’s well worth making the most of it when it appears, which is somewhere from around the end of April into June.

The earliest shoots are called ‘sprue’. They’re thinner and usually tender all the way through. The later and thicker shoots can have very woody ends that need to be removed. Simply bend each stalk with both hands, gently, until it snaps – the break will happen where the woody part meets the tender. Sometimes what needs to be discarded can be quite substantial, but you can use these ends to make a stock for soups and stews.

Get the best from your asparagus by cooking it as soon after it’s picked as you can. You can cook it in a number of ways – try roasting asparagus to serve in a salad or griddling as a side for a roast chicken dinner.

Watch our video on how to prepare and cook asparagus:

Top ways to cook asparagus

Blanch & refresh

A method we’ve gleaned from restaurant cooking is called blanch and refresh. This is actually useful for lots of vegetables (particularly green veg), as it helps them to retain their bright colour and flavour after cooking.

  1. Fill a bowl with water and ice cubes and set aside.
  2. Plunge your asparagus spears into a pan of boiling water.
  3. Cook for 1-2 mins or until tender.
  4. Remove the asparagus with tongs or a slotted spoon and place directly in the bowl of ice water.

Store in the fridge until needed, then simply drain and reheat in a pan with a little butter when you want to serve.


Another way to cook asparagus is to char it, either on a griddle pan or on a barbecue – if you dare brave the weather. Slightly scorching the asparagus brings out a nutty flavour while keeping its distinct texture and vibrancy.

  1. Coat the asparagus spears in a little olive oil.
  2. Put your griddle pan over a high heat. When it’s heated through, add the asparagus spears and season with salt and black pepper.
  3. Cook for 1-2 mins, turning occasionally until tender.

Check if the asparagus is done by lifting a spear out of the griddle pan with a pair of tongs. If it bends slightly, it’s ready.

Roasted asparagus

Roasting asparagus is one of the easiest ways to cook this vegetable. Simply drizzle with olive oil and pop in the oven.

  1. Heat the oven to 200C/180C fan/gas 6.
  2. Snap any woody tips off the asparagus where they naturally break apart. Put on a roasting tray, drizzle with oil and season with salt and pepper.
  3. Roast for 12 mins until they are tender.

Peel raw ribbons

Asparagus can be eaten raw, too, as part of a salad. It works very well sliced into ribbons using a vegetable peeler.

  1. Start by removing the tougher outer skin and discarding it.
  2. Peel off long ribbons until you get to the middle, then turn over and repeat on the other side.

Our best asparagus recipes:

Asparagus fries with baconnaise

How to cook asparagus

An indulgent celebration of asparagus, the coating of crisp breadcrumbs adds texture without distracting from the flavour and pairs wonderfully with the rich bacon mayo.

Asparagus pancakes & smoked salmon

How to cook asparagus

Frame your asparagus spears in these golden pancakes for a picture-perfect brunch dish.

Asparagus, avocado & quinoa tabbouleh

How to cook asparagus

This stunning platter of fresh greens makes a lovely side dish for sharing and it’s a great way to serve asparagus raw.

Sesame grilled asparagus rafts

How to cook asparagus

Here’s a simple recipe for grilling or barbecuing your asparagus. Fixing a row of spears together makes them much easier to work with.

White asparagus with Serrano ham & chive dressing

How to cook asparagus

White asparagus cooks in the same way as the green variety, but the thicker spears take a little longer to soften. Try this recipe to make the most of their rich, nutty flavour.

Try more awesome asparagus recipes.

Have you tried any of our asparagus recipes? Leave a comment below.

While asparagus is luckily usually found year round in grocery stores, like most produce it still has a peak season. You’ll find the best asparagus during spring. Asparagus season usually starts around late February and goes clear until June, but the peak is in April. Here, we give you a primer on the myriad ways to cook it to its utmost potential!

Asparagus is a versatile spring vegetable that can be cooked however your heart desires. But it’s also perfect when cooked on its own, with just a little salt and pepper. Which method you decide to choose depends on your mood and circumstance.

First, trim them. There are two methods for trimming asparagus. 1. You can simply snap off the woody ends wherever they naturally break. This is super easy, but there is some waste. 2. Peel the woody outer bits with a vegetable peeler. Not only will they look beautiful, but you’ll be saving some of the asparagus you would otherwise be throwing away!

If you’re lazy AF, you should roast it. It’s a no prep situation and in the end, the asparagus will be perfectly tender and charred (which is always a good thing). We <3 roasted asparagus, whether it comes in the form of caprese asparagus or dreamy roasted asparagus carbonara.

If you’re in a hurry, sauté it. All you need is a hot skillet + EVOO + salt + pepper. Just stir ’em around occasionally and in 5 to 7 minutes they’ll be tender in delicious! We like using this method in our ridiculously good lemon, asparagus & chicken pasta.

Trying to eat healthy? Blanch it. It takes 3 minutes and doesn’t require any oil or butter. Plus, the stalks will be the prettiest shade of bright green. We use this method in our cream of aspargaus soup and it makes the puree the most beautiful color.

If it’s nice out, grill it. Grilled asparagus is one of life’s greatest snacks. Make our caesar grilled asparagus and never look back.

Gadget Guru? Air Fry those stalks! Air frying combines the convenience of roasting with the speed of sautéing. It takes only 7 minutes in the air fryer to make asparagus crispy and delicious.

Leftovers? If properly stored in an airtight container in the fridge, asparagus can keep up to 5 days. AND you can freeze the stalks in plastic bags for up to 8 months.

The ultimate asparagus topping: You can obviously just grate some parmesan over your asparagus but our favorite (and most indulgent) topper for asparagus is buttery, lemony hollandaise.

Regardless of which route you go, make sure to CUT OFF THE WOODY ENDS FIRST! The bottom tips of asparagus are extremely tough, so you want to remove where the asparagus starts to turn white, usually about the bottom inch. Refer to tip #1 for methods. 

Learn how to cook asparagus with this 3-part guide! Blanched, grilled, raw, or roasted, it’s a delicious spring side dish or fresh ingredient.

How to cook asparagus

What’s your favorite method for how to cook asparagus? For me, choosing just one is impossible, because asparagus totally transforms depending on how you prepare it. When you roast it in the oven, its tips turn perfectly crisp and golden brown. When you blanch it, it comes out vibrant green and fresh, and when you grill it, it becomes wonderfully charred and juicy. Can I pick all three?

Below, you’ll find my best tips on these techniques for how to cook asparagus. If you already love asparagus, I hope you also love this handy guide. If you don’t love it, I encourage you to try preparing it in a new way. Who knows, if you’ve always had it steamed, you might like it grilled, roasted, or even raw!

Roasted Asparagus

Oven roasted asparagus is one of the key ingredients in my mom’s spring breakfast casserole, but it’s also delicious on its own as a spring side. It couldn’t be easier to make! These 4 steps will yield perfect baked asparagus:

  1. Preheat the oven to 425 degrees.
  2. Cut the tough woody ends off the bottom of the spears – these guys are not easy to eat, and even roasting won’t make them tender enough to chew.
  3. Toss the whole spears with olive oil, salt, and pepper, and spread them in a single layer on a parchment-lined baking sheet, leaving an inch or so of space between each one. The space ensures that they’ll crisp up – and not steam – in the oven.
  4. Bake for 12 minutes, until the spears are lightly crisp and tender. Enjoy them whole with a squeeze of lemon, or chop them and toss them into eggs, pastas, salads, and more!

Grilled Asparagus

If you’ve never grilled asparagus before, you’re going to love it! The spears come out tender and lightly charred, and the process is really simple:

  1. First, snap off the woody ends.
  2. Then, lightly toss the trimmed spears with olive oil, salt, and pepper.
  3. Grill for 6 to 8 minutes on a grill preheated to medium, flipping halfway through.
  4. Your asparagus is ready when it’s tender and lightly charred.

Use grilled asparagus in this spring farro salad, or serve it on its own as a simple side dish. I love to grill lemon halves along with the veggies (pictured at the bottom of this post). I’ll serve grilled asparagus with generous squeezes of juice from the charred lemons!

Blanched Asparagus

I love adding chopped blanched asparagus to spring salads or folding it into scrambled eggs. To make it, follow these easy steps:

  1. Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil, and set a bowl of ice water nearby.
  2. Chop your spears into 1-inch chunks, discarding any tough, woody ends.
  3. Drop the chopped veggies into the boiling water, and blanch them for about 1 minute, until tender but still bright green.
  4. Use a slotted spoon to transfer the blanched veggies from the pot to the ice water, and let it chill for 1 minute.
  5. Drain, pat dry, and enjoy!

But wait, there are more ways to cook asparagus!

Blanching, roasting, and grilling are my three go-to cooking methods, but you can also sauté asparagus for a frittata or pasta or poach whole spears for a quick dinner side dish. I even like it simmered into soup. Alternatively, don’t cook it at all! Use a vegetable peeler to shave thick spears into ribbons to make a salad with olive oil and lemon, or use the ribbons on pizza or toast.

Try roasting, sauteing, grilling and more to bring out the flavor in this crowd-pleasing vegetable.

Related To:

The harbinger of very early spring, asparagus stays in season through the summer. Its elegant, snappy stalks stand up well to a variety of preparations, including roasting, steaming, sautéing and grilling. You can even eat asparagus raw: shave it into ribbons with a vegetable peeler and toss into dishes like Shaved Asparagus Salad with Lemon and Parmesan or Asparagus Fettuccine Carbonara. Because of its delicate grassy flavor, asparagus is often paired with buttery sauces and mild tangy flavors like lemon juice or mustard. If you’re as excited about asparagus season as we are, cook your way to perfection with the following tips and techniques.

How to Prep Asparagus

First things first, you’ll need to remove the tough, woody ends on your asparagus. We prefer to do this by quickly snapping off the ends. If you’re working with thick stalks, peel the ends first with a vegetable peeler to make them easier to snap. Next, place one hand on the end of the stalk and one on the middle and snap the asparagus — it will miraculously break where the tough part of the stem meets the tender part of the stem. Don’t worry, you won’t snap off too much. If you’d rather achieve a more even look, snap one stalk, line up the rest and slice them at the same point with your chef’s knife (we call this the snap and slice method). Now you’re ready to cook your asparagus, so choose your own adventure below: roasting, steaming, sauteing or grilling.

How to cook asparagus

Spring is here, and very shortly we’ll see the start of the short British asparagus season in the UK. Of course, asparagus is commonplace these days at the supermarket, but it is always worth hunting out those fresh green spears from a local food market or even fresh from the field.

Once they’re in-hand, however, the question then turns to how to eat or cook them. Here is everything you will ever need to know about how to cook asparagus.


When cooking asparagus, you can tie them into little bundles, which makes them easier to remove. Drop these bundles or individual spears into some boiling water, cover and cook for three to five minutes, depending on the thickness of the spears. Take them out, drain and plunge into some ice-cold water, or serve straight away.


To steam, place the spears in a steaming basket with a little water underneath. Cover and cook for three minutes.


Asparagus loves to be griddled in a pan – simply drizzle with a little olive oil and turn occasionally or try Jamie’s recipe for griddled asparagus with olive oil, lemon and Parmesan.

How to cook asparagus

If you’ve got a barbecue going, lightly coat the spears in oil and cook on a medium heat, turning often so that the spears do not burn.


Asparagus develops a lovely, rich flavour when roasted and this is probably my favourite method of cooking it. Simply pre-heat the oven to 220°C, gas mark 7, line a tray with foil or baking paper, lay the asparagus spears onto the tray, drizzle with olive oil and season with salt and pepper. I also like to add a couple of fresh cloves of garlic and a little freshly grated of lemon zest. Roast for ten minutes. You can use your roasted asparagus to stir through a risotto, or a creamy pasta dish.

How to cook asparagus

If you’re serving the roasted asparagus on its own, you can stay simple but go big on flavour with Jamie’s pancetta, anchovy and cherry tomato version.

Stir fried

Asparagus is often used in Asian cooking, either in salads or in stir-fries. It needs only a minute or so in a hot wok, so always remember to add it in towards the end of cooking the rest of your dish. A splash of soy and a sprinkle of sesame seeds work well.

You can, in fact, eat asparagus raw. One of my favourite raw asparagus recipes is Miss Foodwise’s Asparagus ribbons and pomegranate pearls salad.

Raw asparagus is also great with feta cheese and radish. I occasionally add a spear or two to a fresh green smoothie, too.

How to cook asparagus


The best accompaniments for asparagus are olive oil or a little butter – in both cases, season with a little sea salt and fresh black pepper, too. As mentioned, freshly-shaved Parmesan or crumbled feta cheese are great partners, as are little goat’s cheese, or strong cheddars. My British asparagus Westcombe cheddar tart makes for the perfect centrepiece for a spring picnic or lunch. I also make a simple Polish recipe at home called Asparagus á la Polonaise by cooking the asparagus in water seasoned with sugar and salt and then topping it with butter, slightly browned in a pan mixed with fresh breadcrumbs.

How to cook asparagus

Asparagus and eggs are a timeless spring combination too. Try dipping fresh spears into a softly boiled egg, or make asparagus soup and top it with a poached egg and a drizzle of olive oil.

It would be a crime not to mention hollandaise – a classic French sauce made of melted butter, fresh egg yolks, lemon juice and a little mustard or a pinch of cayenne – the pairing of which with asparagus is simply heavenly. Follow Izi’s step-by-step guide to making hollandaise sauce here or try my blender hollandaise version for a speedy alternative.

How to cook asparagus

Notes on asparagus

Thin spears of asparagus tend to be younger and fresher in flavour, whilst thicker spears will have been left to grow for longer and have a more pronounced flavour.

Try and use your asparagus as soon as possible, but if you don’t use it straight away, a good tip is to store it standing up in a jug of water in the fridge.

To learn all about how to store asparagus, when it’s in season and more, head to the Vegepedia.

Here’s the quickest and easiest way to cook asparagus on the stovetop! Takes only 10 minutes tops.

Elise founded Simply Recipes in 2003 and led the site until 2019. She has an MA in Food Research from Stanford University.

  • Pin
  • Share
  • Email

Hello spring and hello asparagus! What’s your favorite way to cook asparagus?

I love them grilled, roasted, baked in to a frittata, or made into soup. But if I’m honest with you, the method I use most often to cook asparagus is to shallow boil them on the stovetop.

What’s shallow boiling (or shallow poaching)? It’s is sort of a cross between boiling and steaming. You don’t use much water, so it hardly takes any time for the water to heat to a boil.

You don’t have to submerge the asparagus completely in the water. If the water doesn’t cover the asparagus, use a lid to cover the pan to capture the heat of the steam.

How to cook asparagus

You can season the water with salt, garlic, herbs, or lemon zest. I usually use a large pinch of salt, a unpeeled garlic clove cut in half, and a strip of lemon zest.

You could add some thyme, oregano, or bay leaf, or just skip the seasoning and use plain water (I do recommend adding salt at least).

How to cook asparagus

You can of course use more water if you want, it just takes longer for the water to heat up, and any flavoring agents you add will not be as concentrated.

That said, if you already have a pot of boiling water going, for example for pasta dish that will be using the asparagus, you can easily boil the asparagus in that.

How Long Should You Cook Asparagus?

How long you cook the asparagus depends on their size and how old they are. Skinny asparagus spears will cook up in only a minute or two.

Your average asparagus will take about 5 minutes. Large asparagus can take 6 to 7 minutes, and if they are a bit old and tough, even longer.

How to Keep Cooked Asparagus Vibrant Green

Cook the asparagus no longer than 6 minutes, then rinse them with cool water for a few seconds to stop the cooking. Vegetables will go from vibrant green to olive green at about the 7 minute mark of cooking.

How to cook asparagus

It’s asparagus season, and I can’t get enough of it. Roasting asparagus brings out its best. The tips get a little crispy in the oven, which I love, and the flavor is more concentrated than it would be if you steamed or sautéed it.

Roasted asparagus is the perfect springtime side dish, whether for brunch or dinner. As a bonus, it’s simple to throw together while your main dish cooks on the stove.

How to cook asparagus

For these photos, I decked out my asparagus with lemon, mint, red pepper flakes and the lightest shaving of Parmesan.

You can keep your roasted asparagus as simple as you’d like. I included the basic recipe below, plus ideas for changing up the seasonings!

How to cook asparagus

How to Store Asparagus

Pro tip: Place your asparagus in a heavy-bottomed jar or drinking glass when you get home, and add a couple inches of water. You can place a plastic bag over the top to retain maximum freshness.

Then, store the asparagus like this in your refrigerator. It will stay fresh for several days longer this way!

How to Prep Asparagus

The ends of asparagus can be unpleasantly tough and woody. To remove those parts, sharply bend the asparagus near the base.

The asparagus will snap in the right place. This would be a fun dinnertime project for kids, I think.

How to cook asparagus

How to Roast Asparagus

Roasting asparagus is super easy and quick! Simply toss your prepared asparagus with a light drizzle of olive oil, and a sprinkle of salt and pepper. I like to do this on a large, rimmed baking sheet (affiliate link) lined with parchment paper for easy clean-up.

Bake until the asparagus is easily pierced through by a fork, which will vary depending on the thickness of your asparagus. Pencil-thin asparagus, like the kind shown here, will be done in as little as 10 minutes. Thicker asparagus will need between 15 to 20 minutes. You’ll find all of these details in the recipe below.

How to cook asparagus

How to Season Asparagus

Here are some ideas for flavors that will complement your roasted asparagus. Keep it simple and choose just one or two. Or go all-out like I did, and use all four of the first ideas.

  • Lemon zest and/or lemon wedges
  • Sprinkle of finely grated Parmesan cheese
  • Small handful of fresh mint or parsley, finely chopped
  • Light sprinkle of red pepper flakes
  • Pat or two of butter
  • Light drizzle of balsamic reduction or thick balsamic vinegar
  • Toasted sliced almonds

Watch How to Roast Asparagus

How to cook asparagus

Extra asparagus? Here are some recipes that will use it up:

Looking more simple roasted side dishes? Try these:

Please let me know how your roasted asparagus turns out in the comments! I’m really looking forward to hearing how you serve it.

How to cook asparagus

Perfect Roasted Asparagus

  • Author: Cookie and Kate
  • Prep Time: 5 mins
  • Cook Time: 10 mins
  • Total Time: 15 minutes
  • Yield: 2 to 4 servings 1 x
  • Category: Side Dish
  • Method: Roasted
  • Cuisine: Italian

4.7 from 43 reviews

Learn how to make perfectly roasted asparagus here! This roasted asparagus recipe is a fantastic springtime side dish that everyone will love. You can season it however you’d like. You’ll find my seasoning suggestions below. Recipe yields 2 large or 4 modest side servings.


Basic roasted asparagus

  • 1 large bunch (about 1 pound) fresh asparagus
  • 1 to 2 teaspoons olive oil
  • Salt, to taste
  • Freshly ground black pepper, to taste

My seasonings (use one or all, like I did)

  • Zest and juice of ½ medium lemon, preferably organic
  • Lemon wedges, from the remaining ½ lemon
  • Sprinkle of finely grated Parmesan cheese
  • Small handful of fresh mint or parsley, finely chopped
  • Light sprinkle of red pepper flakes

Other options

  • Pat or two of butter
  • Light drizzle of balsamic reduction or thick balsamic vinegar
  • Toasted sliced almonds


  1. Preheat the oven to 425 degrees Fahrenheit and line a large, rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper for easy cleanup. Snap off the woody ends of the asparagus (if you sharply bend the asparagus near the base, it will snap in the right place). Discard the ends.
  2. Place the asparagus on the sheet and drizzle with 1 to 2 teaspoons olive oil, just enough to lightly coat the asparagus. Sprinkle salt and pepper over the asparagus, and toss until the spears are lightly coated in oil. Arrange the spears in a single layer on the pan.
  3. Bake just until the base of the asparagus is easily pierced through by a fork. Very thin asparagus, like the kind shown here, will take as little as 9 to 12 minutes, whereas thicker asparagus will need 15 to 20 minutes.
  4. Transfer the roasted asparagus to a serving platter and season however you’d like. You could keep it simple with a squeeze of lemon juice, or a sprinkle of Parmesan, or add a pat of butter or drizzle of balsamic vinegar.
  5. Roasted asparagus is best served when it’s fresh out of the oven, but it will keep at room temperature for up to 1 hour or up to 4 days in the refrigerator (gently reheat before serving).


Make it dairy free/vegan: Don’t add Parmesan or butter.
Make it nut free: Don’t add almonds.

How to cook asparagus

Spring is in the air, which means our favorite slender green vegetable is hitting the farmers market…asparagus! While asparagus is great as a component to many dishes, it’s also delicious all on it’s on. So today we’re laying down the basics for how to cook asparagus (5 different ways!) Click the links below to jump around the post:

  1. Roast Asparagus
  2. Steam Asparagus
  3. Microwave Asparagus
  4. Blanch Asparagus
  5. Sauté Asparagus

Not sure how to select the perfect bunch of asparagus, or how to store it properly? This asparagus rundown has you covered. Now let’s cook!

How to Roast Asparagus

Cooking asparagus in the oven, while taking the longest of all the methods, is my favorite way to prepare it. The asparagus tips get a little charred and the stalks become tender and full of flavor! With this method, you can also cook your asparagus with lemon and garlic, which makes for an even tastier dish. Here’s how to roast asparagus:

Step 1: Preheat oven to 425 degrees F (220 C). Prep your asparagus by rinsing and breaking the woody bottom inch off of each spear. Spread onto a parchment-lined baking sheet.

Step 2: Drizzle asparagus with a tablespoon or so of olive oil and a pinch of salt and pepper. Optionally throw on a few cloves of crushed garlic, lemon juice, and lemon zest.

Step 3: Roast for 10 to 15 minutes, or until tips are slightly charred and stalks are tender.

How to cook asparagus

How to Steam Asparagus

Steaming asparagus is a healthy way to cook this veggie because it preserves many of the water-soluble vitamins (which are generally destroyed by boiling). Here’s how to steam asparagus:

Step 1: Prep your asparagus by rinsing and breaking the woody bottom inch off of each spear. You may need to cut the asparagus into pieces to fit in your steamer basket.

Step 2: Bring a large pot of water to a boil with a steamer basket fit above it. You can use a wire mesh sieve if you don’t have a steamer basket!

Step 3: Place asparagus in the steamer basket over boiling water. Cover and let cook for about 5 minutes, or until tender.

How to cook asparagus

How to Microwave Asparagus

One of the easiest ways to cook asparagus is to microwave it! Microwaving your asparagus spears is pretty similar to steaming in that we’ll cover them and let them steam into tender perfection (making this a great alternative for cooking asparagus without a steam basket set). Here’s how to microwave asparagus:

Step 1: Prep your asparagus by rinsing and breaking the woody bottom inch off of each spear.

Step 2: Place asparagus on a microwave-safe dish and add a few tablespoons of water. Cover tightly with plastic wrap.

Step 3: Microwave on high for 3 minutes, then let sit, still covered, to continue steaming for 3 more minutes.

How to cook asparagus

How to Blanch Asparagus

Blanching is the fastest way to prepare asparagus! You’ll basically dunk it in boiling water briefly, then dunk it in a bath of cold water. Blanching asparagus helps to preserve nutrients and maintain higher quality if you’ll be freezing your veggies.

Step 1: Prep your asparagus by rinsing and breaking the woody bottom inch off of each spear.

Step 2: Bring a large pot of water to a boil, adding a pinch of salt to the water for seasoning. Prep an ice bath by combining very cold water and a handful of ice in a large bowl.

Step 3: Plunge asparagus into the boiling water for 3 to 4 minutes, until bright green and tender. Immediately transfer to the ice bath to stop the cooking process.

How to cook asparagus

How to Sauté Asparagus

Cooking asparagus in a pan on the stove is a quick method that give you a lot of the charred flavor that comes with roasting (in much less time). Here’s how to make sautéed asparagus:

Step 1: Prep your asparagus by rinsing and breaking the woody bottom inch off of each spear. You may need to cut the asparagus into pieces to fit in your sauté pan.

Step 2: Heat a splash of oil in a large sauté pan over medium/high heat. Add asparagus and cook for 3 to 5 minutes until bright green and tender, jostling the pan often to promote even cooking.

Our favorite method for making perfectly roasted asparagus. Simple, quick, and delicious! Jump to the Tender Roasted Asparagus Recipe or read on to see our tips for making it.

How to cook asparagus

How To Roast Asparagus

Roasted asparagus is one of our favorite side dishes. It is ridiculously quick and simple to make. We love it served alone, added to omelets, and even served on top of crostini for a simple appetizer (or lunch). Roasting your own bunch of asparagus is easy and can be done in three steps.

  1. Rinse, pat dry, and trim the ends of each stem. Peel thicker stems as needed (see below).
  2. Toss with olive oil, salt, and pepper. Or add your favorite seasonings. We often add a little fresh lemon zest and garlic. Here’s our garlic roasted asparagus for you to look at.
  3. Bake in a 400 degree oven until the tips brown slightly and the stalks are tender.

Depending on how thick the asparagus is, it will take between 15 and 25 minutes to bake. We try to buy thin-stalked asparagus when we can find it. If you can only find asparagus that’s got thick, woody stems we recommend using a vegetable peeler to peel away the thick outer peel of the stalks.

How to cook asparagus

More Roasted Vegetable Recipes

    — See how we turn boring cauliflower into perfectly tender and browned cauliflower. — Smoky, creamy, and perfectly golden brown potatoes served with a ridiculously tasty potato salad inspired dipping sauce. — Easy roasted carrots recipe with a garlic parsley butter. The carrots are sweet, tender and completely delicious. — How to make deeply flavored oven roasted mushrooms that are perfectly golden brown. — Learn our tricks for tender Brussels sprouts that are caramelized and delicious.

Recipe updated, originally posted May 2010. Since posting this in 2010, we have tweaked the recipe to be more clear. – Adam and Joanne

How to cook asparagus

Make Valerie Bertinelli’s asparagus and goat cheese tart

Looking to up your veggie game in the kitchen? Now is the time to banish overcooked asparagus forever.

The dean of one of America’s top cooking schools shared his top tips with TODAY Food for how to cook asparagus perfectly every time.

“First, it’s very important to prep the asparagus by cutting off about one inch of the tough and fibrous white part at the bottom and then peeling just a little bit of the outer layer of the bottom,” Brendan Walsh, dean of the School of Culinary Arts at The Culinary Institute of America, told TODAY.


Food 7 spring vegetables to buy now — and how to cook them

Then, head for the heat, whether it’s on the stove, in the oven, on the grill or even . in the microwave?

According to Walsh, these are the absolute best ways to cook asparagus:

How to cook asparagus perfectly

1. How to blanch asparagus

In a large sauce pan, add the asparagus and as little water as possible to just cover them. Cook over high heat for about 4 to 5 minutes, until the rapidly boiling water is reduced to about a tablespoon. Add some butter, salt, pepper and fresh thyme or dill.

“The goal is to literally boil out the excess water and then use the small amount of remaining water to create a sauce,” said Walsh. “This way all the nutrients from the asparagus water are in the sauce instead of down the sink.”

How to cook asparagus

Asparagus with Prosciutto and Brown Butter

2. How to boil asparagus

In a large pot filled with lightly salted boiling water, add 10 asparagus stalks and cook them for 3 minutes, until they are bright green. Remove the boiled asparagus from the pot and cool them immediately by running them under cold water or dropping them into a bowl filled with ice water — but don’t leave them in there for a long time. Pat dry and serve cold or at room temperature. The boiled asparagus can also be quickly grilled, sauteed or stir-fried.

3. How to steam asparagus

Place the asparagus flat in a bamboo steamer. For medium asparagus, steam for about 6½ to 7 minutes, until the vegetable becomes vibrantly colored. For thinner asparagus, steam for 4 to 5 minutes. Remove the asparagus from the steamer and serve them right away.

If the plan is to serve the steamed asparagus later, shock them by placing in an ice bath so they cool quickly. Reheat them in a pan with some butter or oil and seasoning, like shallots and fresh dill.

How to cook asparagus

Make chef John Seymour’s scrumptious fillet of sole

4. How to sauté asparagus

Trim the asparagus so they will fit inside a large pan. Preheat the pan until it is very hot — this is key, said Walsh. Add the trimmed asparagus and 1/2 cup water, and cook for about 4½ to 5 minutes. You’ll hear a little hiss when you add the water, and that’s a good thing. The water will immediately come to a boil and will semi-steam and boil the asparagus in the same moment. When the water has almost evaporated, add a drizzle of extra-virgin olive oil and a little bit of salt and pepper — and some fresh herbs and shallots, if you’re in the mood.

How to cook asparagus

Lidia Bastianich’s Asparagus Frittata

5. How to stir-fry asparagus

In a large, very hot pan, add 1/2 tablespoon vegetable oil and very thin, whole asparagus stalks. Using very thin asparagus is key for this cooking method, said Walsh. Toss the asparagus six times to sear them evenly. Add 2 tablespoons of water and toss the veggies six more times until the water evaporates. Season with salt and pepper and serve right away.


Food 7 fresh recipe ideas to celebrate the start of spring

6. How to cook asparagus in the oven

Preheat the oven to 425 degrees. Toss the asparagus with olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Roast in the center of the oven for about 10 minutes, until the asparagus is tender and charred in spots.

How to cook asparagus

Quick-Roasted Asparagus with Pistachio Pesto

7. How to grill asparagus

For thin asparagus, preheat the grill to 550 degrees. For medium or thicker asparagus, preheat the grill to 425 degrees. Coat the asparagus with olive oil to keep them from sticking to the grill, and season with salt and pepper. For one pound of asparagus, use less than 1/2 teaspoon.

Place the asparagus on the grill. For thin asparagus, cook for 3 minutes before turning, then for another 3 minutes. For medium or thicker asparagus, cook for 4 minutes before turning, then for another 4 minutes. Before serving, sprinkle them with extra-virgin olive oil or butter and fresh herbs and/or salt.

How to cook asparagus

Asparagus season is here, and I’m super excited. Asparagus is one of my favorite springtime vegetables, and it’s so easy to cook in the oven. Baked asparagus is a healthy, easy side dish that pairs well with pretty much anything.

Can you roast asparagus in the oven? Yes, you can roast asparagus in the oven. In fact, roasting it brings out its very best flavor. Cooking it at high heat helps caramelize the asparagus’s skin and crisps up the tips while the insides stay juicy and tender.

If you’re looking for nutrition, oven-baked asparagus is a great source for:

  • Healthy carbohydrates
  • Calcium
  • Potassium
  • Vitamin A
  • Vitamin C
  • And so much more!

Roasting asparagus is an easy, yummy way to get your nutritious veggies! Plus, it’s gluten-free.

Throw asparagus on your shopping list and start making this flavorful spring delight today. Looking for other cooking methods? Check out my recipe for making air fryer asparagus.

How to cook asparagus

Roasted Asparagus Ingredients

Roast asparagus is so simple to make with just four basic ingredients and very little prep time. Here are the 4 ingredients you’ll need to make this roasted asparagus recipe:

  1. Fresh Asparagus: While asparagus is available year-round, it’s at its best in the spring, starting around Easter. There are other colors, like purple or white asparagus, but green is the most common and suited for this recipe.
  2. Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Or you can use your preferred cooking oil.
  3. Fine Sea Salt: Salt helps pop the roasted asparagus flavor.
  4. Freshly Ground Black Pepper: Use freshly ground pepper for seasoning.

Asparagus varies in thickness, and any thickness will work here. Just look for bright, firm asparagus stalks with tightly closed ends. I recommend buying organic or locally grown from a source known to use organic growing methods, if at all possible.

How to cook asparagus

How to Cook Asparagus in the Oven Instructions

Ready to cook? Here’s what to do to get perfect oven-roasted asparagus:

  • Prep: Heat the oven to 425 degrees Fahrenheit. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Trim the Asparagus: You’ll want to clean up your asparagus by snapping or cutting off the dry, woody ends of the asparagus spears. If you’re using large asparagus spears, you can also peel off the tough ends on the lower portion of the stalks with a vegetable peeler (optional).
  • Season the Asparagus: Toss the asparagus in olive oil, salt, and pepper and spread them onto your prepared baking sheet. Arrange the spears in a single layer.
  • Roast the Asparagus: Roast until the spears are lightly browned and easily pierced by a fork—about 10-15 minutes of total time, depending on the thickness of the asparagus spears. Mine cooked to tender, crispy perfection in just 10 minutes.
  • Serve the Asparagus: Transfer the roasted asparagus onto a serving platter. Add any additional seasonings. Enjoy these healthy carbs!

How to cook asparagus

Best Asparagus Seasoning Options

Asparagus is not only super simple to make, but it’s also a very versatile dish. There are lots of ways to add more flavor if you’d like. Here are some of my favorites:

  • Garlic: Toss in some fresh finely chopped garlic to the asparagus before cooking.
  • Lemon: Sprinkle cooked asparagus with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice or fresh lemon zest.
  • Fresh Herbs: Top your roasted asparagus with your favorite fresh herbs like parsley or chives.
  • Parmesan Cheese: Add some freshly grated Parmesan cheese before serving your asparagus—or in the final moments of cooking to melt the Parm cheese.
  • Toasted Nuts: Sprinkle some chopped, toasted nuts, like almonds or walnuts, on the asparagus before serving.
  • Savory: Drizzle your asparagus with a balsamic vinegar reduction before serving to contrast with the caramelized flavor.

How to cook asparagus

A Few More Recipe Tips

Here are a few more helpful tips on how to cook asparagus in the oven, as well as a couple FAQs:

  • How to Store Raw Asparagus: Keep your raw asparagus perky and fresh by storing it end-side down in a vase or drinking glass filled with a few inches of water (like you would fresh flowers). Cover with a plastic bag, then refrigerate for up to 5 days.
  • Storing Cooked Asparagus: Roasted asparagus tastes best when eaten shortly after cooking—it can get soggy quickly. But it can be stored in an air-tight container in the refrigerator for a day or two, then reheated before serving. I suggest reheating it in the oven.
  • Using Leftover Asparagus: One of my favorite ways to use leftover asparagus is to add it to other dishes like omelets, frittatas, or soup.
  • How long do you cook asparagus in the oven? You cook asparagus in the oven for 10-15 minutes at 425 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Can I freeze oven-roasted asparagus? It’s not a good idea to freeze oven-roasted asparagus. It will become mushy.

More Easy Vegetable Dishes Here:

cutlery cutlery icon

folder folder icon

instagram instagram icon

pinterest pinterest icon

facebook facebook icon

print print icon

squares squares icon

heart heart icon

heart solid heart solid icon

How to cook asparagus

How to Cook Asparagus in the Oven

  • Author: Elizabeth Rider
  • Prep Time: 5 minutes
  • Cook Time: 10-15 minutes
  • Total Time: 20 minutes
  • Yield: 4 to 6 servings 1 x
  • Category: Side
  • Method: Roast
  • Cuisine: Vegetable
  • Diet: Vegan


Get all my best tips on how to cook asparagus in the oven! Plus, my go-to seasoning and serving ideas.

Myth-Buster Recipe Extra-virgin olive oil adds great flavor to this simple side dish, and sautéing with it doesn’t burn away the oil’s healthful antioxidants.


Recipe Summary


  • 4 teaspoons extra-virgin olive oil
  • 1 pound medium asparagus spears, trimmed
  • ½ teaspoon grated lemon rind
  • 1 teaspoon fresh lemon juice
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • Step 1

Heat a large cast-iron or nonstick skillet over medium-high heat. Add oil to pan; swirl to coat. Add asparagus to pan; cook 3 minutes or until asparagus is crisp-tender and browned, stirring frequently. Transfer to a serving platter. Add rind, juice, and salt, tossing to coat.

Reviews ( 7 )

We love our veggies with a little browning/charring on them, and this hits the mark. I added several minutes to the cook time because we like them nice and tender. Because we don’t love lemon flavor in our food, I only used some lemon rind and left out the juice.

This is a really simple and delicious way to make asparagus. It’s especially good if you are just looking for a quick side dish with fresh vegetables. Yum!

Wow. the asparagus was so tender and flavorful with just a hint of lemon and sea salt. I used bottled lemon juice and left out the grated lemon rind since I didn’t have any fresh lemons on hand. This will be my new go-to recipe for asparagus. It’s so simple and delicious!

This recipe is delicious, simple and quick, and a nice way to dress-up asparagus for company, or just for a change of pace. I doubled the amount of zest and lemon juice to be tossed with the cooked spears, and served it with Cooking Light’s Double-Sesame Grilled Tuna recipe (Sept 2009) from this site and a green salad. I’ll definitely be making this again.

This makes a great side dish! Easy to prepare and has a wonderful, fresh flavor. Although I really dislike cleaning my grater, this is worth it.

I really liked it. Super easy to prepare. Supposedly it makes four servings, but my husband and I easily finished the whole thing in one night. I tend to kind of stink at cooking “basic” recipes, so knowing how to make a simple but flavorful side green was helpful.

This is a perfect easy asparagus recipe. Don’t use the big asparagus – this recipe is for the fresher, more tender medium asparagus. Really, when it comes to asparagus, this is about all you need to do to enjoy them.

If bright green spears of asparagus are your go-to restaurant side dish, you are in for a treat. It's just as easy to make delicious, crisp-tender asparagus right in your kitchen. (Crisp-tender refers to the ability to sink your teeth into cooked asparagus, but it's not mushy and still hasn't lost its firm shape.) With our Test Kitchen's best tips and tricks, you'll learn how to cook asparagus in no time. Whether it's on the grill, stovetop, or oven, here you'll find all the best ways to make asparagus for your best (and fast!) veggie side dish yet. From there, you can use our best asparagus recipes as a guide to your next comforting meal at home.

Buying and Storing Asparagus

Asparagus is in peak season from March through June, but you'll find this popular vegetable in markets year-round. Look for firm, bright green spears with compact, closed tips that are not mushy. Spear size ranges from fat (older plants) to pencil-thin. Whether you choose skinny or thick asparagus spears is a personal preference, but be sure to select uniform spears for even cooking.

Plan on cooking asparagus the day you purchase if possible. If not, store asparagus in a damp paper towel, place in a plastic bag, and refrigerate for up to three days. You can also stand asparagus spears upright in a container filled with 1 inch of water. Cover the asparagus and the container with a plastic bag. Then you just have to choose how to cook asparagus your favorite way. Wondering how much asparagus to buy for your next meal? One pound of asparagus equals 18 to 24 spears or four servings.

One of the most common questions we get asked is: Should I choose thick or thin asparagus spears? And lucky for you, there is no wrong answer. Each of these types of asparagus has its fans. Thin asparagus is tender with a slightly crisp center; thick asparagus has a meatier center and therefore more crunch and texture. For thick asparagus spears, peel off the woody outer part (about 2 inches up the stem end) with a vegetable peeler.

How to cook asparagusPhotos: Scott Phillips

Add to List


Grilled Asparagus with Fresh Tarragon Mayonnaise

Roasted Asparagus with Buttery Breadcrumbs

Boiled Asparagus with Salsa Verde

Sautéed Asparagus with Butter & Parmesan

Just about the time I get tired of kale and parsnips, the first asparagus shows up in the markets. Its arrival signals that the seasons are shifting and the cold ground is coming back to life. Throughout the spring, I prepare asparagus several times a week, but I vary the cooking method. By alternating techniques, I can serve asparagus again and again without anyone growing bored.

To cook asparagus, I use both dry- and moist-heat methods. Grilling, roasting, and sautéing, all dry-heat methods, help preserve flavor because little or none is lost to the cooking liquid. But for large, meaty asparagus spears, I do like boiling, which is, of course, a wet-heat method. All four ways to cook asparagus give delicious results, and the technique I choose depends on the size of the spears and the accompanying flavors I have in mind.

How to cook asparagusGrilling. How to cook asparagusSautéing. How to cook asparagusBoiling. How to cook asparagusRoasting.

To cut or to snap?

Opinions vary about how to prepare asparagus for cooking. Unless you buy spears that have already been trimmed to the top four or five inches, you’ll need to remove the tough ends. Some people simply cut the spears where the green color fades, but I prefer to snap off the ends. I hold each spear, one at a time, in both hands and bend it until it breaks naturally at the point at which it becomes tough. I think this is a more reliable trimming method, and I don’t mind that the snapped spears aren’t all exactly the same length.

Many cooks peel asparagus, especially large spears, but I never do. If you’ve snapped it properly, the entire spear will be tender, so peeling doesn’t enhance tenderness—it just removes flavor.

Size has little impact on tenderness

Every asparagus crown—as the root system is called—produces both thick and thin spears over the course of its 10- to 15-year life. Healthy plants in the prime of life will produce relatively more thick spears; new and old plants tend to yield more thin ones. I like asparagus at every size, and I think that jumbo spears can be just as tender as skinny ones.


I first encountered grilled asparagus years ago in a tapas bar in Spain. The sizzling spears, charred in spots, were served with aïoli (garlic mayonnaise), and they were a revelation. So that they’re cooked evenly through, I first blanch the spears briefly, which can be done ahead. Then I pat them dry, roll them in olive oil, season with salt, and grill them close to the coals. When they’re lightly charred on one side, I turn them to sear the other. This method works with spears of any size.

How to cook asparagusGrilled Asparagus with Fresh Tarragon Mayonnaise.


Roasting amps up the taste of asparagus because none of the flavor is lost to boiling water. This method works best with thin or medium asparagus and is the easiest preparation of all. After snapping the spears, I roll them in olive oil, sprinkle them with salt, and arrange them in a single layer on a baking sheet. Then I roast them in a hot oven until they’re tender, lightly blistered, and sizzling.

How to cook asparagusRoasted Asparagus with Buttery Breadcrumbs.


Asparagus cooked in rapidly boiling water has a clean, mild flavor that invites a rich sauce, like an herbed vinaigrette, a piquant Italian salsa verde, or a mayonnaise. Boiling is also good for thick, meaty spears, which take a long time to cook thoroughly with a dry-heat method.

Boil spears in a large pot of generously salted water and remove them as soon as they lose their crispness—taste one to be sure. Drain on clean dishtowels; dress and serve warm. To serve asparagus cool, shock the spears in ice water after boiling; pat dry, dress, and serve. I think serving them actually cold mutes their flavor.

I don’t advocate steaming asparagus. A covered steamer traps gases that dull the spears’ bright green color, while boiling in salted water preserves the color and lightly salts the spears at the same time.

How to cook asparagusBoiled Asparagus with Salsa Verde.


Sautéing works well on medium to large asparagus. The spears should be thinly sliced on the diagonal to expose the most flesh. Although I sauté the slices in butter, you could use olive oil, adjusting the heat so they cook rapidly but without browning. Like roasting, sautéing preserves and intensifies flavor because the spears are never blanched.

How to cook asparagusSautéed Asparagus with Butter and Parmesan.

Last updated: Aug 27, 2021 · Recipes developed by Vered DeLeeuw and nutritionally reviewed by Rachel Benight MS, RD · This website generates income via ads and uses cookies · Terms of Use · Privacy Policy · Accessibility

Microwaving asparagus is the fastest and easiest way to cook this delectable vegetable. It’s ready in just a few minutes, and it comes out perfectly cooked!

You simply microwave it on high until it’s tender-crisp. Depending on how thick the spears are, this should take around 3 minutes.

How to cook asparagus

Asparagus is probably one of those vegetables that one either really likes or really doesn’t. I happen to love it! I even like it in its canned form. But when fresh and in season, it’s a true delicacy.

Cooking asparagus in the microwave is so easy, that I often default to this cooking method. Roasted asparagus is wonderful, but it requires heating up the oven. Microwave cooking is perfect for summer – quick, easy, and doesn’t heat up your kitchen.


The very basic recipe has just one ingredient – asparagus. Once the asparagus is cooked, you can dress it however you like.

So depending on what you’ll do with it, other ingredients might include melted butter, olive oil, lemon juice or vinegar, salt and pepper, garlic powder, and perhaps onion powder.


Cooking asparagus in the microwave truly couldn’t be easier! The detailed steps are included in the recipe card below. Here’s an overview:

Your first step is to wash and trim the asparagus. Depending on how big your microwave-safe bowl is, you might need to trim quite a lot of the ends, or you could also chop each spear in half to avoid waste.

The next step is to place the spears in a large microwave-safe bowl, add a tablespoon of water, and cover the bowl with a microwave-safe plate.

Now let’s get cooking! Microwave on high until the vegetable is tender-crisp. Depending on how thick the spears are, this should take around 3 minutes.

Now carefully remove the bowl from the microwave using oven mitts. And be even more careful when removing the lid – hot steam will escape.

That’s it! Now dress the asparagus. The section “serving suggestions” below contains a few ideas.

How to cook asparagus

Frequently asked questions

Hands down, the fastest way is the microwave. Roasting takes a total of 25 minutes (including prepping the vegetable). Steaming takes about 15 minutes. Microwaving takes less than 10 minutes, including prep time.

Generally speaking, there’s no need to peel asparagus. You should, however, trim the ends, which are very fibrous, and perhaps also peel the very bottom of the spears after you’ve trimmed them.

No. It should be tender-crisp, meaning it shouldn’t be limp and mushy. But you want it tender and creamy, not crunchy. It’s definitely a balancing act, but the more you do it, the better you’ll be at it (like everything in life).

Serving suggestions

If you’ve used young, fresh, in-season asparagus, all it needs is a light sprinkle of kosher salt to be delicious. But if you want to be a bit more elaborate, here are a few more ideas:

1. Drizzle it with melted butter and sprinkle it with salt, pepper, and garlic powder.

2. Make a quick dressing of olive oil (1 tablespoon), white wine vinegar (1 tablespoon), a pinch of salt, pepper, garlic powder, and a teaspoon of Dijon mustard (to help emulsify the dressing). Whisk the dressing and then drizzle it over the asparagus.

3. Chop the asparagus and use it in this tasty asparagus salad.

Recommended main dishes

Microwave asparagus is such a versatile side dish, it goes with anything. I do like to serve it with rich meat-based dishes since I feel it nicely balances them out. So I often serve it with one of the following:

Storing leftovers

Leftovers keep reasonably well in the fridge, in an airtight container, for 3-4 days. I like to chop them and add them cold to salads – they make a very nice addition to this arugula salad and also to this avocado chicken salad.

How to cook asparagus

Related recipes

‍ I typically publish a new or an updated recipe once a week. Want these recipes in your inbox? Subscribe! You can unsubscribe at any time.

Tender, smoky, and sweet, the best grilled asparagus is tossed in olive oil with salt and pepper for the perfect, healthy 15-minute side dish.

How to cook asparagus

Easiest Grilled Asparagus

Side dishes are the connectors of the dinner table, the unifiers that bring the meal together. And because there’s usually more than one side dish to your dinner menu, it’s a good idea to keep the recipes easy.

So when I have a main dish that calls for a few ingredients and techniques to employ, I turn to my tried and true simple recipes.

This 15-minute, 2-ingredient grilled asparagus (plus salt and pepper) is definitely at the top of that list.

The best grilled asparagus becomes smoky and sweetly caramelized when the grill does its job it does so well, when the outside of these bright green spears become lightly charred and crisped, and the interior soft and tender.

Behold, these are the simple steps for making this vegetable side dish creation the easy way.

How to cook asparagus

How to Prepare Asparagus for Grilling

Get rid of the woody ends. The ends of asparagus are woody and tough to eat. Be gone, woody ends!

Trim asparagus with a snap. To prepare the asparagus, simply snap the ends to trim by bending each stalk gently about 2/3 of the way down the stalk. The asparagus will naturally break where the woody part begins, leaving tender stalks perfect for eating.

Or, line them up and cut all at once. If patience is not your virtue and snapping asparagus sounds blasé, line up a handful of the asparagus in a row and use a sharp knife to cut the asparagus 2/3 of the way down the stalk. Likewise, use a knife to tidy up the ends of the snapped asparagus if desired.

Season simply. Because the fire and grill adds so much flavor to grilled vegetables, olive oil, kosher salt, and freshly ground black pepper are the only flavorings you’ll need for dynamite grilled asparagus.

How to cook asparagus

How to Grill Asparagus

Keep it simple. Cooking asparagus on the grill couldn’t be easier! Simply drizzle the asparagus with olive oil and toss the spears with your hands to coat. Season with kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper and toss again.

You can do this step right before putting the asparagus on the grill, or any time before cooking. Asparagus is sturdy so it won’t wilt or soften with the addition of the oil or kosher salt.

No need for grilled asparagus on foil. Preheat the grill to medium heat (between 350°- 400°F) and brush the grill grates clean. Place the asparagus across the grill grates perpendicular to the bars so they don’t fall through—forget the foil! Grill with the lid closed until the spears are tender and crisp.

Use tongs to roll the spears for even grill marks. Tongs make it easier to maneuver the spears than a flipper or fork.

How Long to Grill Asparagus?

You’ll need to grill thick asparagus spears for roughly 6 to 10 minutes over medium heat.

How to cook asparagus

What’s the Best Asparagus to Grill?

While I love pencil-thin spears for roasting in the oven, when it comes to grilling I buy thick asparagus spears. Thick asparagus spears won’t overcook or char to a crisp, and you won’t have the challenge of losing them through the grill grates as they cook on the fire.

Look for thick spears that are firm and green with ends that aren’t withered.

Grilled Asparagus Topping Ideas

I like my grilled asparagus simple with a squeeze of lemon. But if you’re looking for more ways to jazz up this simple green, try one of these ideas:

  • Add browned butter and nuts, like in my recipe for Roasted Asparagus.
  • Drizzle the grilled asparagus with balsamic vinegar then sprinkle with goat cheese and toasted pine nuts
  • Top with smoky cooked bacon and Parmesan cheese
  • Go Mediterranean style and top with feta cheese, sun-dried tomatoes, and chopped kalamata olives
  • Try it Asian style with ponzu sauce and toasted sesame seeds

How to cook asparagus

Tips for the Best Grilled Asparagus

If you struggle to tell when asparagus is finished grilling, I recommend poking it with a fork to test its doneness. The asparagus should be softened, but not mushy. It should also be bright green in color.

If using regular table salt, scale back the amount of salt you add to the grilled asparagus. Kosher salt has larger flakes, so it’s not as potent as table salt.

Leftover grilled asparagus can be repurposed so many ways — on sandwiches, in frittatas and egg bakes, in salads, and more. It’s delicious cold or room temperature!

What to Serve With Grilled Asparagus

If you make this recipe, please let me know! Leave a rating on this recipe below and leave a comment, take a photo and tag me on Instagram with #foodiecrusheats.

All you need is a skillet and a little butter to make this foolproof asparagus recipe from Chef Edna Lewis.

Published Apr 14, 2020 6:04 PM

How to cook asparagus

One of our best recipes for how to cook asparagus on the stove comes from the late, great Southern chef, Edna Lewis. She learned this method from her mother, who taught her that cooking asparagus in the skillet concentrates its flavor rather than diluting it, as steaming or boiling can. This stovetop asparagus recipe requires very few ingredients and seasonings, making it a quick and easy side dish to cook and enjoy within minutes.

Get seasonal recipes, methods and techniques sent right to your inbox—sign up here to receive Saveur newsletters. And don’t forget to follow us on Instagram at @SaveurMag.


Skillet Asparagus How to cook asparagus


  • 2 lb. asparagus
  • 2 Tbsp. unsalted butter
  • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper


  1. Rinse the asparagus well in cold water and trim the tough ends of the stalks. In a heavy skillet with a tight-fitting lid, melt the butter over medium heat. When the butter is foaming, add the asparagus and shake the skillet from side to side a few times to coat the stalks. Cover and cook until the asparagus begins to steam, shaking the skillet occasionally to prevent burning, about 3 minutes. Uncover and continue cooking until the asparagus is tender but still crisp and bright green, 5–10 minutes more. Season to taste with salt and pepper and serve hot.

More Asparagus Recipes

  • How to cook asparagusOf all the vegetables that start to fill the markets come spring, asparagus is one of our favorites. The tender, crisp stalks are one of the first to arrive on spring produce baskets. Asparagus is also one of the most versatile ingredients—you can enjoy it raw in a chopped salad, tossed with pasta, or pureed in a sauce. We also love to blend into refreshing spring soup recipes. We’ve rounded up our favorite asparagus recipes here.
  • How to cook asparagusCooking asparagus in the skillet concentrates its flavor rather than diluting it, as steaming or boiling can. Skillet Asparagus
  • How to cook asparagusUnlike its green-skinned counterpart, white asparagus has a tough, bitter peel that must be removed before cooking. The following is the classic way of preparing the treasured vegetable in Germany (though simple steaming is also popular). Get the recipe for White Asparagus
  • How to cook asparagusBlanched asparagus is flavored with a sprinkling of celery salt and a splash of cream before being perched atop rye toast. Get the recipe for Asparagus on Toast with Cream
  • How to cook asparagusA hot skillet and a little oil are all you to bring out the flavor of spring asparagus. Get the recipe for Stir-Fried Asparagus
  • How to cook asparagusAsparagus is cooked on a preheated baking sheet in the oven until tender yet toothsome, then served with a tahini-yogurt sauce packed with fresh herbs for dipping. Roasted Asparagus with Tahini Ranch
  • How to cook asparagusCrisp-tender asparagus and a sweet, earthy mixture of beets and citrus are tossed in an herb-packed, umami-rich salsa verde. Get the recipe for Grilled Asparagus with Citrus-Beet Salad and Whipped Ricotta
  • How to cook asparagusA deceptively simple vinaigrette of olive oil, white wine vinegar, chopped parsley, and crushed tomato transforms simple steamed asparagus into a sumptuous and well-turned-out dish—exactly what a great dressing should do. Catalan Asparagus Vinagrette (Espàrrecs Amb Vinagreta)
  • How to cook asparagusAsparagus is used two ways in this puréed cold soup: it adds a grassy note to the potato-leek base and is left raw for the shrimp salad garnish. Get the recipe for Chilled Asparagus Soup with Herbed Shrimp
  • How to cook asparagusSweet macadamia nuts, toasted to deepen their flavor, give a creamy base to this creative chilled gazpacho with asparagus. Get the recipe for Chilled Macadamia Gazpacho with Cured Asparagus
  • How to cook asparagusChef José Andrés likes to cook these calçots, here served with asparagus, in the traditional manner: in a newspaper. The newspaper traps in steam from the cooling calçots, making them more tender and soaking up any excess oil. These tender Spanish green onions, always served with Romesco sauce, are a classic springtime treat. Grilled Calçots and Asparagus with Romesco Sauce


Efo Riro (Nigerian-Style Chicken Stew with Greens, Spinach, and Iru)

Fermented locust beans lend their particular savory richness to this traditional West African dish.

Grillades and Grits

A savory, warming Creole breakfast fit for a Mardi Gras crowd.

Creole Seasoning

Potent with alliums, oregano, mustard, pepper, and thyme, the classic Southern spice blend is the secret to exceptional red beans.

Roasting asparagus is a simple, quick, and delicious way to prepare this nutritious vegetable. This recipe requires little prep and fast cooking time. It’s an ideal way to get a vegetable on the table during the week without a ton of fuss. Roasted asparagus yields a robust and delicious flavor. The high heat allows for the perfect char and crispiness, while the garlic and Parmesan add an extra layer of deliciousness.

Asparagus is naturally low in calories, fat, and carbohydrates and rich in fiber. It is a key source of inulin, a type of fiber that supports healthy gut bacteria. Asparagus is also rich in vitamin K and C, folate, and potassium. It exerts mild diuretic properties and has been associated with helping to reduce blood pressure. Whip some up tonight; you won’t be disappointed.


  • 1 pound asparagus (about 1 bunch or 20 spears)
  • 1 tbsp olive oil
  • 1/2 tsp garlic powder
  • 1/8 tsp salt
  • 1/8 tsp pepper
  • 1/4 tsp dried thyme
  • 1 tbsp Parmesan cheese, shredded or grated


Heat oven to 400F.

Wash asparagus thoroughly and break off the tough ends. If the spears are thick, you may need to peel them with a vegetable peeler.

Place asparagus in a single layer on a cookie sheet or baking pan. Don’t overcrowd the pan or layer them on top of one another; otherwise, they will not roast properly.

Drizzle the oil over the asparagus and sprinkle with garlic powder, salt, pepper, thyme, and Parmesan cheese.

Bake for 15 minutes; the spears should be tender but still crisp. Depending on your oven and how thick the spears are, the cooking time may vary.

Variations and Substitutions

To make this dish dairy free, substitute the Parmesan cheese with nutritional yeast, which has a pleasantly cheesy flavor and is rich in B vitamins, including vitamin B12. Nutritional yeast is also naturally low in sodium.

You can try other cheeses as well such as feta, blue cheese, or chevre. Also, try topping with toasted walnuts or pinenuts.

Teaspoon for teaspoon, garlic powder yields a stronger garlicky flavor than fresh garlic. If you’d prefer to have a less garlicky taste, substitute garlic powder for fresh minced garlic. In this recipe, you can use one to two cloves.

While thyme adds a great flavor, you can substitute any of your favorite dried herbs. You can also add some heat by adding chili powder or red pepper flakes.

Or try topping with fresh parsley and lemon wedges for a refreshing taste and appealing look—the mixture of green and yellow is a beautifully presented side dish. A drizzle of balsamic reduction is also a delicious topping for asparagus.

Asparagus comes in multiple varieties. While green asparagus is the most common, you may also find white and purple varieties. White asparagus tend to have a milder flavor, while the purple variety has a nuttier flavor and turns green when cooking. White asparagus is more fibrous than green and should be cut before cooking. White and purple asparagus can be hard to find but can be available at farmers markets in the springtime when they are in season.

How to cook asparagus

Rinse asparagus under cold running water to remove any dirt or sand from the stalks and tips before beginning preparation. Do not wash until ready to use.

Begin preparing the asparagus by simply trimming off the bottom ends of the stalks. Find the area where the green color begins to fade. This is where the tough woody end begins and is where the stalk should be trimmed off. Do not remove the spears at the top of the stalk. How to cook asparagus
An alternative method is to snap off the asparagus ends. Hold an asparagus spear firmly towards the end and bend it until it breaks naturally. The spear should break at the point where it becomes tough. How to cook asparagus
After removing the ends, the stalks will be varying lengths. Keep this in mind when considering your presentation. If it is important that the spears be the same length, line them up flush at the top and trim them off at the bottom so that they are all the same length. If appearance is not critical, do not trim to even lengths because this ends up wasting some of the good asparagus spear. How to cook asparagus
To prepare spears that are thick and have tough skin, cut off the ends as shown above and peel the skin with an asparagus peeler. How to cook asparagus
A regular vegetable peeler can also be used to peel the stalks. Do not peel the tips. Younger, thinner asparagus generally are tender enough that they do not require peeling. White asparagus have a tougher stem and should always be peeled. How to cook asparagus

Grilling Asparagus

When grilling asparagus, avoid using the spears with thick stalks. The thicker spears tend to burn on the outside before they are cooked to the proper tenderness. If the asparagus is fairly thick, it may be a good idea to blanch the spears before grilling so that the outsides do not burn before the inside of the stalk is done. To blanch, place asparagus into boiling salt water for 1 minute. Remove the asparagus. Submerge asparagus into cold water and remove immediately to prevent further cooking. Pat it dry with a paper towel before applying oil.

Have the grill heated to a medium heat.

Clean the asparagus by rinsing under cold water and the pat dry with a paper towel.

How to cook asparagus Lay the asparagus out on a plate or cookie sheet and drizzle with 2 to 3 tablespoons of olive oil or vegetable oil. How to cook asparagus

Roll the spears back and forth so that the entire stalk is coated. Sprinkle the coated asparagus lightly with salt.

When it comes to nutrient-dense foods, asparagus is up there with the best of them. This crunchy, green vegetable is believed to belong to the lily family. Although most people recognize it by its green color, Spanish asparagus is often white and the French variety is purple. Regardless of which color asparagus you prefer, learn how to cook asparagus for its impressive list of nutrients and benefits.

How to cook asparagus

Health Benefits of Asparagus

There are only a handful of foods that contain as many nutrients as asparagus does. Asparagus carries almost every vitamin. It is a rich source of vitamins A, B, C, E and K. Its mineral profile includes calcium, magnesium, copper, iron, phosphorus, potassium, selenium and manganese. Asparagus is so healthy that many use it as an ingredient in medicines.

Asparagus is good for your intestines and digestion. It boasts high amounts of dietary fiber, which reduce the risk and symptoms of digestive and bowel conditions. It is highly recommended to diabetics for blood sugar management, and can prevent kidney stones.

How to Cook Asparagus the Right Way

Knowing how to cook asparagus properly is the secret to preserving its nutrients. You can choose between thin asparagus spears, which cook in less time, or thicker asparagus for bulky texture.


Prior to cooking, run the asparagus under cold water to remove sand and dirt. If your asparagus has tough stems, use a peeler to shave the outer layer off. Cut or break off the tough ends and chop the asparagus into smaller pieces starting about 2 inches from the bottom.

How to Cook Asparagus by Boiling

Step 1:

Pour 1-2 cups of water in a pot and boil.

Step 2:

Throw in the asparagus and cook until tender. Avoid boiling for more than 5 minutes.

Step 3:

To blanch asparagus, boil as instructed for 2-3 minutes. When crispy, remove from water and dunk into ice water to stop cooking. Serve chilled or warm.

How to Cook Asparagus by Sautéing

Step 1:

Rinse and cut asparagus into 2-inch pieces. Heat 1-2 tablespoons of olive, butter or ghee in a pan over medium heat.

Step 2:

Add asparagus pieces and sauté until it is soft and bright green. Season and serve.

How to Cook Asparagus by Roasting

Step 1:

Prep your asparagus and preheat oven to 400 F. Wait until oven is hot.

Step 2:

Arrange asparagus on a baking tray and drizzle with a bit of olive oil or melted butter. You can season the pieces with salt, pepper, garlic and even cheese if you like.

Step 3:

Roast asparagus until it is bright green, about 10-12 minutes. It should also have some charred bits on the skin. Be careful not to burn. Serve.

When seasoned and cooked the right way, asparagus is a tasty side to any dish. Be careful to cook until crispy and not burnt. Season it with olive oil, garlic butter and your own blend of spices for a better taste. Serve asparagus with salads and soups to give your meals a nutritional kick.

How to find out if someone is in jail

How to find out if someone is in jail

It happens everyday. People get arrested and put in jail. Sometimes it’s for something serious and a person will be locked up for months or years. Sometimes it’s only an overnight stay or a few days. But for friends and family of someone who seems to just disappear, if after checking local hospitals doesn’t turn up anything, checking with police and the jails should be the next step.

If you are concerned that a friend, family member or loved one has been arrested or incarcerated, you may be wondering how you can find out. Thanks to the internet, it has become much simpler in nearly every jurisdiction to find out if and where someone has been taken into custody, incarcerated or imprisoned.

Finding a Jail or Prison Inmate

Generally, the prison system is split up into a few different types of facilities. There are federal prisons, state prisons and county jails. Typically, the separation relates to the type of crime that an inmate is convicted on, as well as the duration of the sentence. Federal crimes result in incarceration in a federal prison, while state law felony convicts sentenced to more than one year will be housed in state prisons, and those convicted of misdemeanors and sentenced to less than one year are generally held in county jails.

The federal prison system provides an online inmate locator service which only requires you to know a person’s basic information, such as their name, age, race and sex. If the person you are searching for does not turn up in the federal system, next you’ll need to check your state’s online inmate locator system.

Finding an Arrestee

If someone has been arrested, it may be more difficult to track them down. Frequently, police stations and local courthouses utilize county jails to house arrestees that are pending arraignment and bond/bail hearings. Usually, to find out if someone has been arrested will require a call to the police department that made the arrest, or sheriff department in charge of housing pretrial detainees.

However, doing an online search for your specific location could be rather useful as some cities, such as New York City, provide services to find a recent arrestee.

    (FindLaw’s Lawyer Directory) (FindLaw Blotter) (FindLaw’s Law and Daily Life) (FindLaw’s Law and Daily Life)

You Don’t Have To Solve This on Your Own – Get a Lawyer’s Help

Meeting with a lawyer can help you understand your options and how to best protect your rights. Visit our attorney directory to find a lawyer near you who can help.

Find inmates incarcerated in State Prisons, Federals Prisons, County Jails, Department of Corrections, and Local Sheriff Departments using We have listed step by step instructions on how to look for any inmate across any state in the US. In addition, we’ve also listed every address, phone number, and fax number of each detention facility to help you make contact quickly and easily.

How to find out if someone is in jail

How To Find Out If Someone Is In Jail

If you’re trying to locate someone and think they might be in jail, you first want to start with a call to the local sheriff’s office. You can determine if someone has been recently arrested or is potentially awaiting trial. If they can’t assist you, directly, they should be able to tell you how to find someone in jail for their jurisdiction.

A person may be kept in a local jail before transferring to a county jail, state prison, or federal prison. Some states also offer arrest records online so you can check for people that were recently put in jail.

How to Look up Someone in Jail Online

If you believe someone is in jail, the Department of Corrections for most states offer a free inmate search by name. You simply need to put the first and last name in the inmate search in the correct for the state and you’ll get results. The DOC inmate search for each state is usually updated every couple of days. We provide direct links for all state DOC inmate locator services in the US with detailed instructions on how to use them.

A federal inmate search can be done through a Federal Bureau of Prisons (BOP) database search. You will need a full name and can narrow down the search by age, race, and sex.

Results from looking up people in jail or prison will include the facility where they’re located and may include the crimes committed, sentencing information, inmate pictures, physical descriptions, and more.

Free Inmate Search by Name

With just a name, you can find inmates located in:

1) State Prisons
2) Federal Prisons
3) County Jails
4) Department of Corrections
5) Local Sheriff’s Office/Jail Roster

Nationwide Inmate Search

Notice: We have tried our best to keep the data accurate and up-to-date. However, we can not guarantee any accuracy of the information presented on our website. All 3rd party trademarks are for reference purpose only. InmateSearchInfo is a privately owned website and is not owned and operated by any state government organization. Looking for other Public Records?

The Department of Correction (DOC) is committed to protecting the health and safety of those living and working in their facilities.

Need something else?

You can use the Inmate Lookup Service to get the following information about inmates in the Department of Correction (DOC) jail system:

  • Charges
  • Court date and location
  • Book and Case Number
  • Jail mailing address
  • New York State Identification Number (NYSID)
  • Holding location
  • Release date
  • Bail or bond amount

The Inmate Lookup Service may include information about the court where the trial will be held.

If it’s not listed, you can check the inmate’s Docket Number to find out which borough the court is in.

The Docket Number for a case includes a 2-letter code indicating the borough where the trial will be held:

  • NY: New York County (Manhattan)
  • KN: Kings County (Brooklyn)
  • QN: Queens County
  • BX: Bronx County
  • RI: Richmond County (Staten Island)

The Inmate Lookup Service lists the charges against an inmate. In some cases, the charge is abbreviated.

Below are explanations of some terms and abbreviations:

  • Offense: Conduct by an individual that violates state or local law, for which an individual can be sentenced to a term of imprisonment or to a fine.
  • Violation: An offense other than a traffic infraction, for which an individual may be sentenced to a term of imprisonment of fifteen days or less.
  • Misdemeanor: An offense other than a traffic infraction, for which an individual may be sentenced to a term of imprisonment of one year or less.
  • Felony: An offense for which an individual may be sentenced to a term of imprisonment of more than one year.
  • Crime: A misdemeanor or a felony.
  • POSS: An abbreviation for "possession of."
  • SUBST: An abbreviation for "substance."
  • AC UZ: Charge information is not currently available in the database.
  • CCW: Court Warrant.
  • OJCW: Other Jurisdiction Warrant.
  • VTL 509: Vehicle and Traffic Law 509 – Operating a motor vehicle without a license.
  • VTL 511: Vehicle and Traffic Law 511 – Driving with a suspended license.
  • VTL 1192: Vehicle and Traffic Law 1192 – Driving while intoxicated.

The Inmate Lookup Service lists when the inmate is scheduled to be released.

If the scheduled release date falls on a Friday, Saturday, or Sunday, the inmate will generally be released early that Friday morning, but it may vary on a case-by-case basis.

Inmates won’t be listed in the DOC Inmate Lookup Service if they are not in DOC’s custody or have been transferred to a State or Federal facility.

Inmates Arrested Within the Past 72 Hours

If it’s been fewer than 72 hours since the person has been arrested, he or she may still be in police custody.

For information about someone who was recently arrested, go to the Find an Arrested Person page.

Inmates Transferred to a State Facility

You can find out if an inmate is in a New York State facility by using the New York State Department of Corrections and Community Supervision (DOCCS) Inmate Locator. You can also call DOCCS for further assistance.

  • Agency: New York State Department of Corrections and Community Supervision
  • Phone Number: (518) 457-8126
  • Business Hours: Monday – Friday: 9 AM – 5 PM

Inmates Transferred to a Federal Facility

You can find out if an inmate is in a Federal facility by using the Federal Bureau of Prisons (BOP) Inmate Locator. You can also call BOP for further assistance.

If you wonder how you can find out whether someone was arrested and in jail in Maryland, you can take steps to learn whether that person faces charges and is currently detained. Since there are 24 major local jurisdictions within the state and 23 separate counties, it may be a challenge to figure out exactly where an arrested individual may be held.

What Is The First Step To Take If You Think Someone You Know Has Been Arrested?

The first step to take is to contact the people who may have last been in the company of the person who may have been arrested and put in jail in Maryland, such as their friends, family members, or an employer. These people would be able to provide details as to what may have happened and in what county. If you cannot find out if the person was arrested and brought into custody by contacting the people who last saw them, your next step is to start contacting local officials.

Will Local Law Enforcement Help Me Find An Arrest Record?

Following an arrest in Maryland, a defendant may be transported to local law enforcement for questioning or interrogation for a period of time. It is especially difficult to determine whether someone has been arrested in Maryland and is detained during this period, but local law enforcement is supposed to present the defendant to a commissioner within the 24 hours subsequent to the arrest.

At this point, the commissioner evaluates the arresting officer’s paperwork and determines whether to issue some or all of the requested charges. When the defendant appears before the commissioner, the commissioner will determine whether and how much bail should be imposed. If the person cannot pay the amount of bail requested and a judge refuses to decrease the bond, or if the person does not qualify to be released on bond, they will remain in county or city jail while their criminal case is pending.

If the person you are trying to locate is still within this stage of the process, the most straightforward way to find someone who was recently arrested and in custody in Maryland is to contact the commissioner in the county where you think they may be. You may have to call commissioners in more than one county to determine whether someone was arrested and in a local jail.

How Can The Maryland Department of Public Safety & Correctional Services Help?

Additionally, the Maryland Department of Public Safety & Correctional Services has an inmate locator on its website to help the public search for people who are incarcerated across the state. If you provide an individual’s name, the search will provide the detention location of inmates who have been put in Commissioner of Correction custody and are currently located in Division of Correction facilities, the Patuxent Institution, or Division of Pretrial and Detention Services facilities.

However, the search has limitations and does not include every individual who is within Maryland custody. For example, the inmate locator does not always include inmates who are currently serving short sentences at Division of Pretrial and Detention services facilities or any inmate who has escaped custody.

Speak to a Criminal Defense Attorney Today

If you still cannot locate the person you seek, it could be valuable to search nearby. Maryland is located close to many other jurisdictions, including Virginia, DC, Pennsylvania, and Delaware, so contacting local authorities and correctional facilities in those places can be another step you take.

For information concerning an inmate, search our online jail docket or call 662-469-8500. All bonding companies needing paperwork or information on inmates must visit the online jail docket to obtain that information.

  • All visitation takes place in our visitation center located at 2615 Panola Street Hernando. For visiting hours as well as rules for visiting, see our handout (PDF).
  • Stay in contact with an inmate via email by using Smart Jail Mail.
  • You can contact the jail's chaplain, Chaplain Curtis Pennington, at 662-469-8609.

GUARDIAN RFID® helps jails of all sizes maximize defensibility, compliance, and operational efficiency by managing, monitoring, and tracking in-custody inmates in real-time. Exclusively endorsed by National Sheriffs’ Association, GUARDIAN RFID is deployed by jails of all sizes throughout the United States.

Inmates are required to wear non-implantable devices at all times. Any incident of non-compliance will not be tolerated. Inmates will be subject to fines and disciplinary action, including prosecution.

All systems and devices using RFID technology are designed, tested, and manufactured to comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulations. RF energy levels generated are similar to those found in consumer electronics. Inmate-worn devices are hypoallergenic. RF-based inmate identification is the exclusive property of DeSoto County Sheriff's Office.

How to find out if someone is in jail

The Oceana County Sheriff’s Office operates a 66-bed correctional facility. The Oceana County Jail is staffed by certified corrections officers who monitor and supervise inmate activities. The corrections division is lead by Lt. Mark Schneider. Lt. Schneider is a West Shore Community College graduate and former Montague Wildcat. Lt. Schneider started his career at the sheriff’s office in 1997 as a road patrol deputy. Lt. Schneider has also served as a detective, tactical team member, and hostage negotiator.

The primary goal of the Oceana County Sheriff’s Office Corrections Division (Jail) is to ensure the safety of inmates, corrections personnel, and residents of Oceana County. This is accomplished by detaining inmates in a secure manner, in the least restrictive setting possible, given inmate classification. The Oceana County Sheriff’s Office Corrections Division strives to provide all inmates with humane living conditions and to protect inmate rights consistent with the United States Constitution, the Michigan Constitution, the laws of the State of Michigan and Department of Corrections guidelines.

Bail or Bond Payments

Bail or bond money for inmates can be posted online by visiting website 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Mastercard and Visa credit and debit cards are accepted. A nominal fee will be charged for using this service.

Inmate Lookup

If you wish to know if someone is currently housed in our correctional facility you may find out by searching VINELink.

If you do not have Internet access and would like to know if someone is currently housed in our correctional facility, you may call (231) 873-3967.

Inmate Visitation

All inmate visitation is now done by video. The weekly visits are a ½ hour per person. A weekly visit is made by appointment only. Appointments must be made by going to Schedule On-Site Visit or by coming into the sheriff’s office to use a terminal to schedule your on-site visit. Visits made on-site are free, but are limited to Wednesday’s, Thursday’s and Saturday’s from 1:00 p.m. to 4:00 p.m.

Video visits can be done from 8:00 a.m. – 11:00 p.m., seven days per week by scheduling an off-site visit. You must create an account to be approved by jail staff. After you have created your account and get approved, you may schedule and visit anytime during those hours. Go to: to create your account today!


Family and friends may purchase personal care products, stationery, postage, candy and snacks for inmates through Canteen Commissary Connections. Orders can be placed by calling 1-866-422-6833, Monday through Thursday between 8:00 am and 4:00 pm. There is a $50 limit on all orders. Payment can be made with VISA, Mastercard, and American Express credit cards.

Family and friends can also order commissary for an inmate online.

If you do not have the ability to send money directly through the above link, you may stop into the lobby of the sheriff’s office 24 hours a day, 7 days a week and use the kiosk to deposit cash into inmates accounts.
NOTE: A fee will be charged by the kiosk for using this service.

Attorney & Clergy Visiting

Attorneys of record and clergy members may schedule professional visits. Both must have proper department and organization identification, which must be presented at the time of their visit. Special arrangements can be made for professional visiting if necessary, but an attempt must be made to adhere to normal visiting hours. Special requests will be directed to jail supervision prior to for approval.

Inmate Mail


Effective January 2018

As of January 2018 Inmates of the Oceana County Jail will be limited to sending and receiving mail by postcard form only. Inmates will be allowed to receive one (1) form of publication during their stay. Attorney/Client mail will continue to be delivered.

Inmates are able to purchase pre-postage postcards in their commissary accounts. Any mail sent in non-postcard form will be returned to sender or discarded if no return address is indicated.

If you wish to send an inmate a postcard, please send them to:

Available Programs

The Corrections Division offers the following programs for the inmate populations at the Jail facility:

  • GED equivalency program
  • West Michigan Community Mental Health
  • Oceana County Jail Ministry
  • Weekly Bible Studies for Men and Women inmates
  • Anger Management
  • Substance Abuse Programs

The goal of these various programs is to assist inmates in becoming law-abiding, productive members of the community once they are released from incarceration.

Scheduling Fingerprints

Court Ordered Fingerprints

If you have been ordered to have your fingerprints taken by the Court after your court date, you must do the following:

Clark County Detention Center, Clark County or its courts shall not be liable for any discrepancies that may occur. In-Custody information is subject to change. Read full disclaimer below.

Instruction: Enter at least 2 letters of the Inmate’s last name, inmate’s ID, or Justice Court Case Number. For last name search, We recommend that you provide more than two letters to narrow the search. Click the Submit button to initiate the search.

Once you find the name, you may click Find w/ ID or Find w/ Case No to find the inmate’s in-custody status.

John / Jane Doe’s cannot post bail until properly identified through the Clark County Detention fingerprint process. Should you have legal identification for an individual arrested as a John / Jane Doe, please contact the Clark County Detention Center information line for instructions.


The Clark County Detention Center endeavors to respect the rights of all individuals. The inmate information you are accessing was developed to help agencies within the criminal justice system, and individuals within the community, to access public record inmate information.

These internet pages contain information about inmates who have been sentenced, who are being held for other jurisdictions, and who stand accused but are not convicted. We believe it is our responsibility to make notice of these facts to respect the rights of those who may be wrongfully accused.

Data obtained through this internet service is not for official use. Additionally, any commercial use of data obtained through this site is strictly prohibited. The information on these pages is periodically updated throughout the day and will only contain information about individuals currently in the custody of the Clark County Detention Center.

John/Jane Does cannot post bail. Should you have legal identification for an individual arrested as a John/Jane Doe, please contact the Clark County Detention Center information line for instructions on identifying the inmate in question.

Unless expressly provided to the contrary, communications through the Internet site by electronic mail or otherwise shall in no event constitute filing with, or legal notice to, Clark County or its courts, the Las Vegas Metropolitan Police Department and Clark County Detention Center, or any of their agencies, officers, employees, agents, or representatives.



Corrections Victoria collects personal information about prisoners, offenders, their families and prison visitors.

Personal information is managed in accordance with privacy laws.

Personal information recorded for the purpose of appropriate management of prisoners includes:

  • name
  • date and place of birth
  • address
  • nationality
  • ethnicity
  • religion
  • marital status
  • family details
  • medical conditions
  • drug/alcohol usage
  • criminal history
  • photographs
  • emergency contacts

Information may also be recorded for reasons relating to prison security. For example, telephone calls made by prisoners may be monitored or recorded.

Courts sometimes request a pre-sentence report or assessment to determine suitability for supervision in the community. This requires Corrections Victoria to collect personal information.

Prisoners provide information about persons close to them during interviews and case management.

When a family member or friend makes a representation on behalf of a prisoner – such as writing a letter to Corrections Victoria or contacting a staff member by telephone – personal information will be collected from them.

Respecting your privacy brochure explains your rights to information and health privacy as a remandee, prisoner or offender.

Why prisoner information is collected

This information is collected to ensure that:

  • a person is lawfully in custody or properly supervised in the community
  • security is maintained in Victoria’s prisons
  • appropriate programs and services are provided to prisoners

How prisoner information is collected

Corrections Victoria collects information personally from prisoners and offenders – for example, by personal interview. Corrections Victoria may also gather information from the following organisations and individuals:

  • the Adult Parole Board for information about the conditions of parole
  • police (state, territory and federal) for background information about the charges
  • case workers managing programs for prisoners
  • family members of prisoners seeking transfer under the interstate transfer provisions
  • courts, for information about the offence and sentence

How prisoner information is used

Personal information collected about a prisoner is used to ensure their appropriate placement within the prison system and their access to appropriate programs and services, including post-release services.

Personal information about an offender being supervised in the community is used to administer a court order and to ensure appropriate supervision in the community.

Prisoners are assigned a unique personal identity number known as a Corrections Reference Number (CRN) which is used to identify a prisoner.

Personal information will only be used in accordance with the Corrections Act 1986 or as required by any other law.

Disclosure of prisoner information

Corrections Victoria will confirm to any member of the public who enquires whether a person is currently imprisoned. It will not provide any further information or disclose whether a person is under supervision in the community or details of any previous contact with Corrections Victoria.

Generally, consent will be sought from a person before their information is disclosed to someone else. The exception to this is when someone acting on behalf of a prisoner such as their legal representative makes the request.

Personal information will be disclosed where:

  • it is authorised under the Corrections Act
  • it is reasonably necessary for law enforcement
  • it is allowed under the Privacy and Data Protection Act 2014
  • it is required or authorised under any other law
  • there is implied consent from the prisoner or offender; for example, Corrections Victoria will tell a person nominated by a prisoner as a visitor, of the prisoner’s location in order to facilitate a prison visit

Limited personal information can be disclosed to the following bodies or individuals:

  • a prisoner or offender’s lawyer or legal representative
  • the Adult Parole Board
  • the Australian Tax Office, Centrelink, Child Support Agency, Victorian Electoral Commission, Department of Human Services or Department of Immigration and Citizenship
  • the person nominated by a prisoner or offender as an emergency contact
  • the persons nominated by a prisoner as visitors
  • community and charity organisations providing assistance to prisoners, offenders or their families (for example, VACRO, Anglicare or Prison Fellowship)
  • a state or federal police force in cases where a warrant of apprehension is in existence or where an offender or prisoner is identified as a suspect in a criminal investigation
  • persons registered as victims on the Victims Register which enables those who are victims of a violent crime to be provided with specific information about the prisoner who committed the crime
  • a court which has requested an assessment of a person’s suitability for an order requiring their supervision in the community

Information disclosed by Corrections Victoria is used by the following three agencies for data matching purposes to update and to improve their records:

  • the VEC uses Corrections data to update a person’s eligibility to vote
  • Centrelink uses Corrections data to determine eligibility for benefits
  • Department of Immigration & Border Protection uses Corrections data to initiate a review of the status of non citizens

Amending or accessing personal information

If an offender wants to access or correct any personal or health information about them held by Corrections Victoria, they should consult their case worker to see whether their matter can be resolved at a local level.

A formal freedom of information request can be made to the Department of Justice and Community Safety’s Freedom of Information Unit. (External link)

Applications may also be made online via the freedom of information website (External link)

Offenders may also request health records from their treating clinician.

Prisoners may request their health records from the health service provider at their prison location. They can do this while they are in prison or after they have been released. For more information see Health care.

Disposal of personal information

The retention and disposal of any personal records held by Corrections Victoria is governed by the Public Records Act 1973. This Act requires that Corrections Victoria retains its records for a specified time. At the end of this period and as determined by this Act, these records will be either destroyed or transferred to Public Record Office Victoria for permanent storage.

The general public can search for people who may be incarcerated at the Clark County Detention Center (CCDC) in Las Vegas, Nevada, by internet or by calling (702) 671-3900.

In this article, our Las Vegas Nevada criminal defense attorneys provide information about how to search for people in custody at the CCDC. Click on a topic below to jump to that section.

How to find out if someone is in jail

1. Find a CCDC inmate online

To search online for a person in custody at the Clark County Detention Center, go to the CCDC Inmate Informa​tion Se​arch webpage. Internet users may search by either the person’s:

  • name
  • inmate ID number, or
  • Justice Court case number

The search results will look this:

It is recommended that internet users type in only the first couple of letters of the person’s last name instead of the whole name, and then scroll through the results to find the person they are looking for. The search feature is very temperamental and does not always match inputted data with an inmate.

Sometimes there is a delay between a detainee being booked at the CCDC and the online database being updated. For the most up-to-date information, call the CCDC information line at (702) 671-3900.

2. Find a CCDC inmate by phone

To find out by phone whether a person is in CCDC custody, phone the jail at (702) 671-3900. A warden or other jail staff member will help. Be prepared to provide the person’s name or inmate ID number or case number.

3. Find a CCDC inmate under protective custody

The CCDC internet search does not display information about detainees who are under protective custody. For more information, call the jail at (702) 671-3900.

4. Finding a CCDC inmate under 18-years-old

The CCDC internet search does not display information about juvenile detainees. For more information, call the jail at (702) 671-3900.

5. Finding a CCDC inmate currently identified as John- or Jane Doe

The CCDC internet search does not display information about John- or Jane Doe detainees. For more information, call the jail information line at (702) 671-3900.

6. Additional resources for friends and family of CCDC inmates

How to find out if someone is in jail

Call a Nevada criminal defense attorney…

Has your loved one been arrested in Nevada? Call our Las Vegas criminal defense attorneys today to discuss the case for free. We may be able to get your loved one released from custody, and we will fight to get their charges reduced or dismissed.

We represent clients throughout Nevada, including Las Vegas, Henderson, Clark County, Washoe County, Reno, Carson City, Laughlin, Mesquite, Bunkerville, Moapa, Elko, Pahrump, Searchlight, and Tonopah.

Nevada Clark County Detention Center Blog Posts:

Preexisting conditions in Nevada as an excuse against liability and large money damages. But judges understand that many people have preexisting conditions and that they should not bar recovery for accidents that may have worsened them. Examples of preexisting conditions Like it sounds, a preexisting condition is an illness or injury that a person has .

If a restraining order has been issued against you in Nevada, it is possible to get the restraining order lifted or dissolved. Only a Nevada court may lift or dissolve a Nevada restraining order, often referred to as a protection order in the state court system. A Nevada restraining order can only be lifted by .

Duress is a potential defense to charges of any Nevada crime except first-degree murder. Defendants may raise a duress defense if they committed a crime because they reasonably believed they would be killed or severely injured if they refused.[1] A classic example of duress is a thief holding up a random pedestrian with a gun .

If you are a budding Siegfried and Roy, you may be pleased to know that in many places of Nevada, you can legally own lions, tigers and other large cats without a permit. Other legal animals in some areas of Nevada are elephants, ostriches, monkeys, zebras and many other wild animals. But chances are, the .

How to find out if someone is in jail

How to find out if someone is in jail

How to find out if someone is in jail

How to find out if someone is in jail

How to find out if someone is in jail

How to find out if someone is in jail

The Stanislaus County Sheriff’s Department now provides an “In Custody Report” for those persons being held at the Sheriff’s Detention Center (SCE, SCW), R.E.A.C.T. (RC), and Minimum Housing Unit 1 or Unit 2 (UT).

This report only shows who is in custody at the time the report was run. You must manually refresh the In Custody PDF Report to see the most current available information. The report will be updated approximately every 10 minutes.

You will need Adobe Reader to view and print the In Custody Report PDF document.

Stanislaus County Sheriff’s Department
Jeff Dirkse, Sheriff-Coroner
250 E Hackett Road
Modesto CA 95358

Sheriff’s Detention Center
200 E Hackett Road
Modesto CA 95358
Phone: 209-525-5630
Fax: 209-567-4444


CALL 9-1-1

Non-Emergency Dispatch

Lobby Hours:
M – F 8:00am – 5:00pm
Closed Weekends and Holidays

If you believe that a family member or someone you know has been arrested in Virginia, there are avenues to find their location, as well as the charges. Arrests can happen quickly and sometimes without the knowledge of the suspect’s family members. This information may be hard to find in real-time, as things may change as a case progresses, however many of the state agencies have information available upon request online or in person. Knowing where to look for this information is important. So, how exactly do you find out if someone was arrested and is in jail in VA?

Can I Use an Online Database to Find an Arrest Record?

Yes, there are several online databases available that allow individuals to check arrest records and warrants. This can be a good place to start when trying to find out if someone has been arrested and may be in a Virginia jail. By searching the person’s first and last name as well as the county or city, they are able to see what is on the public file. While these tools may not be accurate down to the minute, they allow people to locate information about a loved one who may have been arrested. There are often online tools based on cities or locations. A search online will show the ones suited for your area that you can then use to locate who you are looking for.

Will a Local Law Enforcement Agency Help Me Find an Arrest Record?

Local law enforcement officers such as the sheriff or state police can help locate a person’s arrest record. Being able to locate information such as whether someone is in jail or if they have been arrested may be dependent on the crime at hand. There are several types of offenses, ranging from misdemeanors to felonies. This would indicate which agency is handling the arrest and where that person would be jailed while awaiting sentencing.

Finding information based on the specific county or portion of the state may be best sought out from the law enforcement agencies. Individuals can contact them or search on their websites to find information about specific inmates or warrants. In Virginia, the information of crimes and criminal records are available through these agencies, such as the sheriff or state police. Some of these agencies accept requests for records through the phone, while others require a visit to their office or website.

Contact an Experienced Criminal Attorney for Help Today

If you cannot find a person’s arrest record or warrant on your own, it may be a good time to contact a criminal defense attorney. Criminal lawyers have experience working with local authorities and could help you locate the information you need. They could also help you decide how to move forward. Having an attorney handle a criminal case while someone you know has been arrested and jailed can be essential. Acting quickly could help ensure that their rights are being protected and they can begin to fight their case.

A Virginia criminal attorney could help you locate the person you were looking for and help you understand the case being made against them. Criminal lawyers who have experience in and out of the courtroom are extremely valuable because they could evaluate the situation and advise the defendant of their legal options. Call today to learn more about the nuances of finding out whether someone you know has been arrested and jailed in Virginia.

The roster of persons currently held in Butler County jail facilities is available online. You can access the jail roster at any time by visiting BCSO Jail Roster.

How to find out if someone is in jail

General Information

More Information

The Corrections Section of the Sheriff’s Office is responsible for inmates and county jail facilities.

Inmate Information

I want to…

Butler County Sheriff’s Office

Follow Us

Call Us

Administration / Information

Jail / Corrections

Non-Emergency Dispatch

Jail Roster

The roster of persons currently held in Butler County jail facilities is available online.

Community Notifications

View current alerts, advisories and notifications from BCSO.

Register for notifications from the Butler County Sheriff’s Office through the Nixle service.

Learn about and subscribe to AMBER Alerts in Ohio.

Learn about and subscribe to Sex Offender notifications for your area.

Get BCSO press releases and website updates by following us on Twitter or liking our page on Facebook.

Offender Public Information Search / Inmate Locator – Search by name or inmate ID for up-to-date information on North Carolina state prison inmates, probationers, and parolees. This database from the NC Department of Public Safety and the former NC Department of Correction contains historical information back to 1972. Does not include county jail information. Includes special search tools for Escapes/Captures, Absconders, Inmate Releases and provides bulk downloads of data for statistical analysis.

Automated System Query (ASQ) – This search tool queries the same NCDPS database as the public offender search above, but allows you to create specialized reports based on criteria that you select. Returns counts and demographic information on offenders but not specific offender identities.

NC SAVAN Search – As part of North Carolina’s commitment to support victims of crime, NC SAVAN (North Carolina Statewide Automated Victim Assistance and Notification) provides free, confidential notifications about an offender’s custody status to victims, their families and their circles of support. County jail inmates, state prisoners, probationers, parolees, and registered sex offenders are all included in this service. Notifications can be received via phone call, email, text message or TTY for the hearing impaired.

NC Sex Offender Registry – This database shows residential locations of registered sex offenders in North Carolina. Maintained by the State Bureau of Investigation,

Interstate Compact Offender Tracking – This search tool from the Interstate Commission on Adult Offender Supervision provides information on probationers or parolees whose supervision has been transferred to another state.

Law Enforcement Search – Search NCDPS Adult Correction database by last name or ID for up-to-date information on North Carolina inmates, probationers and parolees. Create offender photo lineups and access offender information for law enforcement investigators.

Effective August 4, 2012, an offender will be removed from the Offender Search Web Page one year after the completion of their custodial term. Offenders will be removed one year after expiration of their maximum sentence date or their mandatory parole supervision date (MPS) if applicable. Offenders sentenced to Community Supervision for Life (CSL) or Parole Supervision for Life (PSL) will not be removed from the website as their custodial term does not have a completion date.

The purpose of the Offender Search Web Page is to promote public safety and welfare while providing community access to selected offender information, consistent with the spirit and intent of the New Jersey Open Public Records Act (OPRA).
The New Jersey Department of Corrections updates this information on a biweekly basis to ensure that it is complete and accurate as possible. This information, however, may change quickly. In addition, it is noted that offenders on Work Release, Furlough, or in a Residential Community Program are visible to the public and these types of releases are not necessarily reflected in their profile. Therefore, the information on this site may not reflect the true current location, status, release date or other information regarding an offender.
It should also be noted that the records of offenders who have been paroled or released are not updated after they leave the custody of the correctional facility, therefore, no presumption should be made that any offender listed as paroled from a correctional facility remains under active parole supervision.
Furthermore certain offenders, at the discretion of the New Jersey Department of Corrections and other law enforcement agencies, may be excluded from the web site.

NOTE : Questions/comments concerning offender information posted on this site must be addressed in writing to:
State of New Jersey
Department of Corrections
PO Box 863
ATTN: Correspondence Unit
Trenton, NJ 08625
Phone inquiries pertaining to offender information cannot be honored.

For technical problems or concerns please contact our Public Information Office

Any person who uses the information contained herein to threaten,
intimidate or harass another, or who otherwise misuses that information,
may be subject to criminal prosecution or civil liability.

This search feature for inmates at the Alachua County Sheriff’s Office Department of the Jail is hosted on another website. By utilizing the link provided, you are leaving the Alachua County Sheriff’s Office website.

The page allows you to see if a person is currently an inmate in the Alachua County Jail.

  • Enter the last name, first name and/or booking number.
  • Incomplete entries are allowed and are not case sensitive.
  • You can also search for all inmates in the Alachua County Jail.

Information on how you may contact, visit, provide care packages and/or funds for those inmates is available on the INMATE SERVICES section of our website.

Search Our Site:

Translate Our Site

Find Out More About:

Alachua County Sheriff’s Office Facebook Feed



How to Find the Alachua County Sheriff’s Office

The Alachua County Sheriff's Office Administration Building is located off SE Hawthorne Road in Gainesville, Florida.

For visitation at the Jail, that facility is located at 3333 NE 39th Avenue, Gainesville, Florida 32609.

Please note: our building lobbies are not staffed or equipped to handle emergencies 24 hours a day. If you need help right away, never hesitate to call 911.


This website was created to comply with the provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) to ensure accessibility for the community we serve.

If you require assistance or accommodations to have the material on this site read or otherwise provided to you, please contact our Combined Communications Center at (352) 955-1818. (TDD/translation services available)

ASO is committed to ensuring accessibility to our website. To report an accessibility issue, request accessibility assistance regarding our content, or to request a specific electronic format, please complete our Accessibility Feedback Form.

Please fill in the fields below to lookup inmates currently in custody of the San Luis Obispo County Jail.

Disclaimer: The data contained on this website should not be relied upon for any type of legal action.

For more information contact the Jail at (805) 781-4600.

Click here for visiting information.

Click here for visiting information.

** New Service **

Inmate Mail: You can now send friends and family letters and photographs via email, in lieu of the Postal Service. Here’s how:

  • Send email to: [email protected]
  • Email Subject Line must contain the following information:
    • Inmate Last Name, First Name and Inmate Identification Number
      • For example: Doe, John ID# 8675309
      • Money orders still must be sent via the Postal Service.
      • Acceptable attachments: JPEG, GIF or BMP image formats and PDF, TXT or DOC(x) document formats. We will NOT accept videos or non-standard file formats.
      • No more than 3 emails per sender, per day
      • No more than 6 pages per email
      • No manuals, publications, song lyrics or memes

      Inmate Lookup

      How to find out if someone is in jail How to find out if someone is in jail How to find out if someone is in jail How to find out if someone is in jail How to find out if someone is in jail How to find out if someone is in jail How to find out if someone is in jail How to find out if someone is in jail

      Latest News

      Thursday 02/10/2022 12:16 PM On 2-9-22, Sheriff’s Deputies responded to a report of shots fired near a residence in the area of the 1000 block of Summer Lane in Nipomo. Witnesses .

      Monday 01/24/2022 1:10 PM On 1-24-22, a Sheriff’s Office civilian employee with a concealed weapons (CCW) permit left his firearm in the bathroom of the jail lobby. The employe.

      Wednesday 01/19/2022 4:45 PM On 1-14-22, the Sheriff’s Office received a report of an at-risk missing person out of rural Arroyo Grande. Ronald Perry Isham is described as a 66-ye.

      Records of prisoners and prison staff are held in a number of different places, including The National Archives, prisons themselves and local archives. There is no national register of prisoners, so it is often best to start your search in local archives.

      What do I need to know before I start?

      Online records

      Criminals, convicts and prisoners (1770-1935)

      Search among the assorted records of criminals, convicts and prisoners on ( £ ). Records include:

      • registers of convicts in prison hulks 1818-1831 (ADM6)
      • after-trial calendars of prisoners 1855-1931 (CRIM 9)
      • Home Office calendars of prisoners 1868-1929 (HO 140)
      • Prison Commission prison records 1880-1885 (PCOM 2)
      • registers of criminal petitions 1797-1853 (HO 19)
      • printed lists of prisoners tried at Newgate 1782-1853 (HO 77)

      Prisons listed in census records (1841-1911)

      Search census records ( £ ) for England and Wales from 1841 to 1911 online. If you find a prison in the census, it will list the names of prisoners present at the time the census was taken.

      Prison hulk registers and letter books (1802-1849)

      Search by name for convicts held on prison hulks (HO 9) in England 1802-1849 on ( £ ). The registers contain personal information on the prisoners and where and when they were convicted.

      Prison hulks were ships moored near naval bases to house prisoners – often those awaiting transportation.

      Licences of parole for female convicts (1853-1871, 1883-1887)

      Search by name for licences of parole issued to female convicts (PCOM 4) on ( £ ). Their contents vary but can include a variety of personal details, reports on behaviour while in prison and (from 1871) photographs.

      Records available only at The National Archives in Kew

      Searches for the records in this section begin in our catalogue. To access these records you will either need to visit us or, where you can identify a specific record reference , order a copy ( £ ).

      Prison registers and calendars of prisoners (1770-1971)

      Although some registers and calendars of prisoners are available online at Findmypast ( £ ), others are not. Search our catalogue by date or place, in HO 23, HO 24, HO 140 and PCOM 2 for registers and calendars of prisoners. These are arranged by prison or by county and individual prisoners’ names do not usually appear in our catalogue.

      Most of these records are from the 19 th century. Calendars in HO 140 extend until 1971 but only those before 1930 are open.

      Often the best places to search for prison registers after 1878 are local county archives.

      Quarterly returns of convicts in prisons and prison hulks (1802-1876)

      Search our catalogue in HO 8, by name of prison or prison hulk and year, for records of prisoners held in these institutions. Search also T 38 for lists of crews and convicts on convict hulks.

      Petitions for clemency (1819-1853)

      Browse or search our catalogue in HO 17 (1819-1839) and HO 18 (1839-1853) for petitions for clemency. Petitions in HO 17 are described in some detail in our catalogue and a cataloguing project is adding descriptions to HO 18. Petitions were registered on receipt in a set of records now in HO 19.

      The registers and most of the petitions are available and name searchable online via Findmypast ( £ ).

      The registers provide a reference which can help you search for the actual petition. Read section 5 of our guide to criminal transportation for further help.

      You can also search for law officers’ reports relating to petitions by date in HO 48 and HO 49 (c1762-1871).

      Prisoners tried at the Old Bailey or the Central Criminal Court (1815-1849)

      Browse HO 16 for lists of prisoners arranged by date.

      Court orders (1842-1871)

      Consult PCOM 5 (which is indexed by PCOM 6) to find details of a prisoner’s movements from prison to prison, misconduct, physical description and next of kin.

      Indexes of prison licences for men (1853-1887)

      Consult the indexes of prison licences in PCOM 6 to locate male prison licences held in PCOM 3.

      Prison licences, popularly known as ‘tickets of leave’, allowed convicts of good behaviour to be released before the completion of their sentences.

      Registers of superannuation and retirement allowances for prison staff (1834-1925)

      You may be able to find mentions of prison staff details (such as name, age, religion or details of service) in PMG 28.

      Browse PMG 28 by date of retirement and then under ‘P’ for records of prison staff. The pensioners of the Convict Establishment and Convict Prisons are also generally entered in separate volumes.

      Prison staff appointment books (1887-1898)

      Browse HO 160 by date of appointment, transfer or dismissal of prison staff. These records are not complete and do not provide any additional personal information.

      Records in other archives and organisations

      Records held elsewhere

      The National Archives’ catalogue has details of collections held by over 2,500 archives across the UK. Search our catalogue and refine your results using the filters.

      Other resources


      Visit The National Archives’ bookshop for a range of publications on prisoners and prison staff.

      In criminal law, jail is imposed at sentencing for a municipal, county or state criminal offense. Generally speaking, county sheriffs are the caretakers of incarcerated people. Which means, if you want to know where a person served jail time, it’s key to know within which county a person committed the crime or was incarcerated. In addition, there are some websites that provide incarceration records for selected regions.

      Locate the County Where the Offence Occurred

      You need to know the county where the crime occurred. If you’re not sure, ask a mutual friend or a family member of the subject. If you don’t have such a contact, check the county jail in the county where the person resides or has resided.

      One way to find an address is to use a free people search engine, such as Pipl. Go to, enter the person’s name (and city/state, if known), and press the “Search” button (contact information, including addresses, displays for “hits” on that name). Once you know the city, you can look up its county through a city to county converter (See Resources).

      Contact the County Sheriff’s Office

      Some sheriff’s offices have websites that let people search for past and current incarcerated persons. Otherwise, call the sheriff’s office and request to speak to the jail or records clerk. Provide the person’s full name, date of birth and inquire if that person is serving or has served jail time at that facility. Some jails do not release this information over the phone – if this is the case, request the policy for obtaining such information.

      Check County Court Records

      If a person was sentenced to jail for a crime, that information will be in that person’s court records. Some counties have their court records online, in which case you can examine a summary of the person’s criminal court records and see it contains a sentence to jail time.

      If these records aren’t available online, go in person to the county courthouse and request the person’s criminal files from the clerk in the records department. Unless the case involved sexual assault or a minor, criminal files are public record. There is frequently a retrieval and/or copying charge.

      Check the Online Database

      Victim Information and Notification Everyday (VINE) database contains information about offenders as provided by correctional facilities across the United States. Because these facilities voluntarily supply this information, this service is better viewed as a supplemental resource in your search. Go to, select the state where you believe the person might have been incarcerated, and follow the instructions.

      Hire a Private Investigator

      If you’re having trouble finding incarceration records, or difficulty locating counties of residence for your subject, consider retaining a private investigator. Investigators have the experience and resources to quickly find such information. Contact your state professional private investigator association and ask for an investigator with experience in record retrieval.

      The Department of Justice manages more than 7,100 adults at 16 public prisons and 1 private prison in Western Australia.

      As part of its mission to ensure a safer community, the Department’s priorities at all prisons are:

      • security of prisoners
      • safety of our people
      • safety of prisoners
      • rehabilitation.

      By providing offenders with the skills they need to address their offending, the Department’s staff are committed to breaking the cycle of crime and reducing the number of prisoners who reoffend and return to custody.

      Public prisons

      The Department operates 16 public prisons, including prison farms, which provide a range of security classifications (minimum, medium and maximum) in metropolitan and regional locations.

      Female prisoners in the metropolitan area are placed at Bandyup Women’s Prison, Boronia Pre-release Centre for Women, Melaleuca Women’s Prison and Wandoo Rehabilitation Prison. Regional prisons in Albany, Greenough, Roebourne, West Kimberley, Broome and Eastern Goldfields hold male and female prisoners.

      In Perth, male prisoners are held at Casuarina Prison, Hakea Prison and at Karnet and Wooroloo prison farms. Bunbury and Pardelup Prison Farm regional prisons are male-only.

      Minimum-security prisoner work camps for men are located in Warburton, Wyndham, Walpole, Roebourne and Dowerin.

      Private prison

      Serco Australia is contracted to operate Acacia Prison, a medium-security facility accommodating male prisoners.

How to avoid genetically modified foods

How to avoid genetically modified foods

Although only ten GMO (genetically modified organisms) crops are commercially available in the US—corn, soybeans, cotton, canola, alfalfa, sugar beets, papaya, squash, potatoes, and apples—they contribute massively to the total food supply. This is most evident in the processed food industry, in which up to three-fourths of all foods contain GMO ingredients.

Still, in spite of the widespread use of GMOs, legislative efforts to mandate their uniform labeling have faced tremendous opposition. Perhaps the best example of that opposition is the $45 million contributed by giants of food and agribusiness such as Monsanto, PepsiCo, and Kraft to defeat California’s Proposition 37 in 2012, which would have mandated GMO labeling throughout the state.

Look for foods verified as GMO-free. The two most common verification programs are the Non-GMO Project and GMO Guard.

Since then, only a couple states have successfully passed labeling laws. On the federal level, a bipartisan bill introduced by Senators Pat Roberts and Debbie Stabenow in 2016 has given the USDA (United States Department of Agriculture) until 2020 to implement a uniform label for GMO foods. However, that bill is far from perfect. Many critics have protested that it allows for too many loopholes, and especially that food processors will be able to display a QR code instead of a clear, written label.

But even though change in this area has been slow and frustrating, there are many ways you can choose to avoid GMO foods. Here are some tips to help you reclaim control and navigate the store on your own terms.

1. Look for the USDA Organic Seal. Organic foods are strictly certified and not allowed to contain GMO ingredients.

2. Look for foods verified as GMO-free. The two most common verification programs are the Non-GMO Project and GMO Guard.

3. Avoid buying processed foods. Most processed foods contain GMOs.

4. Eats lots of fresh and frozen produce. With the exception of corn, beets, zucchini, summer squash, radicchio and Hawaiian papaya, most produce is GMO-free.

5. Try dried grains, beans, nuts and seeds, except for corn and soy.

6. Research and purchase imported food products—many countries prohibit the cultivation of GMO crops.

7. Grow your own food using non-GMO seeds.

8. Buy from a local farmers’ market or farm. If you’re not sure, ask whether they use GMO seeds or products on their farms.

Course dates are approaching fast! Sign up today for the Plant-Based Nutrition Certificate.

By now, you may have heard interesting arguments from both sides of the GMO debate. But no matter what side you support, it is ultimately your decision to make. And until the regulatory environment is strong enough to ensure transparency and greater access to information, you must empower yourself. Thankfully, there are many places to start. With these tips, you should soon be on your way toward a more confident, easy, and informed shopping experience.

Additional Resources:

You Might Also Like

How to avoid genetically modified foods

How to avoid genetically modified foods

How to avoid genetically modified foods

There is little if anything to suggest the ‘next generation’ GM technology will be any different.

Meanwhile, GM remains a distraction from the critical issues facing food and farming that can’t simply be solved by tweaking genes.

What does GM really look like?

Nearly all commercially released GM crops are produced by three chemical companies:

  1. Monsanto,
  2. Syngenta, and
  3. Bayer.

Despite the pro-GM lobby’s promises that these products would lead to decreased pesticide use, the truth has proven to be quite the opposite: The use of Monsanto’s glyphosate-based weedkiller, Round-up, has skyrocketed since the introduction of glyphosate-resistant GM crops, becoming the most used weed-killer in the world.

The blanket spraying of these weedkillers on GM crops is associated with environmental damage in North and South America, from degraded soils to the loss of food plants for wildlife such as the iconic Monarch butterfly.

And these crops create herbicide-resistant ‘superweeds’, trapping farmers into an increasingly expensive arms race where the only winners are the chemical companies.

There is also a long history of these GM crops contaminating other farms, which can be financially disastrous and poses a huge problem for organic farmers.

At present, there are no commercial GM crops grown in the United Kingdom

But we are still supporting these GM systems by importing them for much of our animal feed. If you buy:

  • non-organic eggs,
  • milk,
  • yoghurt,
  • cheese,
  • meat or
  • farmed fish

from UK supermarkets, the chances are the animals behind those products were fed GM feed.

We need a shift in priority to food security

We need to see a shift in priority to solving our underlying food problems. Techno-fixes like gene editing mustn’t distract from this.

  • regenerate soils,
  • diversify crops,
  • use fewer chemicals,
  • bring back wildlife and
  • switch to foods that are better for us and the planet.

This needs a dramatic shift towards farmer-led innovation and agroecology to create a climate and nature friendly future.

Currently farmer-led research sees less than 1% of public research and development funding.

Don’t believe the hype: New GM techniques

In July 2018, the European Court of Justice ruled that new genetic editing techniques count as GM and must be properly regulated. We welcomed this move.

These newer techniques, which include so-called ‘gene editing’, continue to be regulated as GM in the UK following Brexit. In 2019/20, the Government announced an aspiration to change this, particularly for new techniques which interfere with DNA, but do not insert genes from foreign species.

But GM has a track record of failing to deliver. We are told that GM foods are needed to feed our growing population and to meet the challenges of climate change and pests, yet real world experience has shown that GM crops have not lived up to their promises. This booklet from Claire Robinson (Editor of and produced by the Sheepdrove Trust (pdf, 20mb) debunks the myths spread by the producers of GM products and the chemicals they rely on.

These newer technologies, like ‘old GM’ are perfectly suited to distract from what is really needed, and to end up concentrating corporate control, putting big agribusiness firmly in the driving seat. We only have to look at the US and Brazil to see what direction GM takes us in – low food and environmental standards, farmers faced with degraded soils that are far from resilient to climate change, and wildlife in crisis.

What are the risks of genetic modification?

All GM techniques, new and old, should remain subject to risk assessment, traceability and labelling to ensure farmer choice, consumer choice and the safeguarding of health & environment. Regulation is needed not only for novel traits, but also for the process of DNA interference itself.

DNA interference is something all GM techniques do, including gene editing.

It raises a great deal of scientific uncertainty.

Recent research has raised more questions than answers, highlighting unexpected effects in all editing techniques, in the form of DNA errors and changes in gene expression. The repercussions are not well understood.

Newer ‘gene editing’ techniques raise another level of uncertainty given their completely novel ability to do a large number of different edits, allowing changes to quickly accumulate.

Organic food and farming

Organic standards adopt a precautionary approach to new technologies and prohibit GM.

The organic sector must be given the possibility and capacity to remain GMO-free.

To protect the income and livelihoods of organic farmers and processors, all contamination of non-GMO materials should be prevented by the GMO producer in line with the polluter pays principle.

Join us in saying ‘no’ to GM in the UK

Help us convince the Government to choose more economically and environmentally viable solutions, instead of GM’s false promises and industry interests.

There’s no evidence that genetically modified (GM) foods cause cancer in humans. And there aren’t any good explanations for how GM foods could cause cancer.

In the US, where GM foods are more common, we haven’t seen more cases of cancer linked to their introduction in the 1990s.

What are GM foods and GMOs?

Genetic modification is when the genes of a living thing have been changed or added to. Genes carry instructions for plants and animals to function.

Genetic modification means plants or animals can be changed to have a specific quality, such as being more resistant to disease. These plants and animals are called ‘genetically modified organisms’ (GMOs).

GM foods are foods that are made using genetically modified plants or animals (GMOs). They are not common in the UK. The main use of common GM crops, such as maize and soybean, is in animal feed.

Should I avoid eating GM foods and GMOs?

You don’t need to avoid GM foods to reduce your risk of cancer. But there are other ways to reduce the risk, including eating a healthy balanced diet .

Some people worry that GM foods are unnatural and might be harmful. But it’s useful to remember that we have been changing genes of living things for hundreds of years, by selecting plants and animals to breed. This process changes the genes of the things we eat, but it’s also not linked to cancer.

Because GM foods are relatively new, research continues to make sure that there aren’t any long-term health effects.

How do I know if my food contains GM ingredients?

In the UK, foods have to be labelled as GM if they contain genetically modified plants or animals.

GM foods can only be sold if the Food Standards Agency judges that they:

  • Do not present a risk to health
  • Do not mislead consumers
  • Do not have less nutritional value than their non-GM counterparts

GM foods are one of many cancer myths. But there are things that have been proven to cause cancer, and things you can do to reduce your risk.


How to avoid genetically modified foods

How does Cancer Research UK evaluate evidence

We regularly review new research on the causes of cancer to make sure our information is up to date and based on the best quality evidence. We develop our information by looking at lots of research carried out over many years. So, although new research comes out all the time, it is unlikely that one new study would change our position on a topic.

Some studies are better than others at telling us about how different factors affect cancer risk. These are some of the things we consider:

  • Did the study look at cells, animals or people?

Studies in animals and cells can help scientists understand how cancer works, but they can’t always tell us how it’s relevant to humans. So we focus on studies in people.

  • How big is the study and how long did it go on for?

Studies on small numbers of people aren’t as reliable, because results are more likely to happen by chance. And studies that only follow people for a short amount of time can miss long-term effects. So we mainly look at studies that follow thousands of people over many years.

  • Did the study account for other factors that could affect someone’s cancer risk?

There are lots of factors that can affect someone’s risk of cancer. Studies should take known risk factors into account. For example, if a study is looking at air pollution and lung cancer, it should also look at whether participants smoked.

  • Where is the study published and who funded it?

It’s important to see if a study is published in a peer-reviewed scientific journal. This means that other experts have checked the results. It’s also important to know who funded the study, as this can affect the findings. For example, Cancer Research UK disregards research funded by the tobacco industry.

How to find accurate information on cancer

Sometimes news outlets exaggerate stories about cancer. It’s helpful to think about some of the questions above to judge a news story. But the most important thing is to get information from a trusted source– for example our website and the NHS.

One way of knowing if you can trust health information is by checking if the Patient Information Forum (PIF) has accredited it. The PIF makes sure that information is based on up to date evidence and is high quality.

Reasons why consumers avoid foods that have been genetically modified/bioengineered (BE) in the U.S. as of 2018*

Characteristic Share of respondents

You need a Single Account for unlimited access.

  • Full access to 1m statistics
  • Incl. source references
  • Available to download in PNG, PDF, XLS format

Access to this and all other statistics on 80,000 topics from

$468 / Year
$708 / Year

Show sources information Show publisher information Use Ask Statista Research Service

May 18 to 27, 2018

The source adds the following information: “Why do you avoid BE foods?”
* Share of U.S. consumers who avoid genetically modified (GM)/bioengineered (BE) foods.


U.S. consumer willingness to pay more for natural products 2018, by generation


U.S. share of organic food consumers by state 2018


Factors influencing food purchase among consumers in the U.S. 2018


Cosmetics & Personal Care

Natural/organic beauty product consumption U.S. 2018, by generation

How to avoid genetically modified foods

How to avoid genetically modified foods

You can only download this statistic as a Premium user.

You can only download this statistic as a Premium user.

You can only download this statistic as a Premium user.

As a Premium user you get access to the detailed source references and background information about this statistic.

As a Premium user you get access to background information and details about the release of this statistic.

As soon as this statistic is updated, you will immediately be notified via e-mail.

. and make my research life easier.

You need at least a Single Account to use this feature.

Register in seconds and access exclusive features.

  • Full access:
    To this and over 1 million additional datasets
  • Save Time:
    Downloads allow integration with your project
  • Valid data:
    Access to all sources and background information

$39 per month*
(billed annually)

Get full access to all features within our Corporate Solutions.

  • Immediate access to statistics, forecasts, reports and outlooks
  • Usage and publication rights
  • Download in various formats

You only have access to basic statistics.
This statistic is not included in your account.

How to avoid genetically modified foods

Yes. There is no evidence that a crop is dangerous to eat just because it is GM. There could be risks associated with the specific new gene introduced, which is why each crop with a new characteristic introduced by GM is subject to close scrutiny. Since the first widespread commercialisation of GM produce 18 years ago there has been no evidence of ill effects linked to the consumption of any approved GM crop.

Before any food produced using GM technology is permitted onto the market, a variety of tests have to be completed. The results from these tests, including results from animal feeding trials, are considered by the authorities responsible for determining the safety of each new GM product (see Q18). This makes new GM crop varieties at least as safe to eat as new non GM varieties, which are not tested in this way.

There have been a few studies claiming damage to human or animal health from specific foods that have been developed using GM. The claims were not about the GM method itself, but about the specific gene introduced into the crop, or about agricultural practices associated with the crop, such as herbicide treatments. The statistical analysis and methodology of these studies have been challenged. All reliable evidence produced to date shows that currently available GM food is at least as safe to eat as non-GM food.

An animal feeding trial of GM tomatoes modified to produce high levels of antioxidants showed the GM tomatoes reduced the levels of cancer. This is not because the tomatoes are GM, but rather because they produce antioxidants, which are known to reduce cancer.

Most of us have heard about genetically modified food, as there has been much discussion about its inclusion in the food chain. Today, these products have to be clearly labeled as “genetically modified” but, did you know that there are other ways they can sneak into your food?

How to avoid genetically modified foods

Monsanto, the powerful U.S. multinational and leader in the cultivation of GM crops, says that “nearly 100% of feeding stuffs contain GMOs”. This is one way we can consume genetically modified organisms unknowingly.

If this is true, whenever we have chicken, veal or even farmed fish we may be eating GM food. Because these animals are fed with food stuffs made especially from GM soya and corn, once they have been consumed they enter the human food chain.

Another common way in which GM food sneaks into our diet is through processed food. Some brands tend to use GM food in their pre-cooked meal recipes (from cereals to ready meals), and this must be mentioned on the label, so we should always check the label if we don’t want to consume GM food.

How to avoid genetically modified foods

Even so, ideally we should avoid these brands if we want to be sure that they are “100% GM-free” since “the presence of GM food only appears on the label when it accounts for more than 0.9% of the product”.

There are regularly updated “lists” we can check to determine the companies that use GM food in their recipes and those that don’t.

How can we “get rid” of GM food?

The most effective way is to always select products labeled as “bio” or organic. This way we can make sure that there are no traces of GMO.

For example, these are products in which the animals have been fed naturally, with no chemicals or GMO. In fact, organic food producers are required to use only certain authorized agrochemicals and GM seeds or plants cannot be used in its production.

How to avoid genetically modified foods

If you decide to eliminate all traces of GM food from your diet you need to check the label carefully, avoid brands that use it in their recipes and start eating meat, milk, eggs and other food categorized as organic or bio. In the case of fish, better wild than farmed (also checking the label to avoid destructive fishing methods).

Did you know that you may be eating genetically modified food without realizing it?

Share on social media

How to avoid genetically modified foods

Malthus, food production and population growth

#LearnSustainability: Food production by 2050

How to avoid genetically modified foods

Tips to reduce food waste at home

How to avoid genetically modified foods

Processed meat: what it is and why WHO recommends not to eat

How to avoid genetically modified foods

The sustainability of the food system


. and stay informed with the latest news on innovation.

Información sobre protección de datos

En cumplimiento del Reglamento UE 2016/679 de Protección de Datos y demás normativa vigente en materia de Protección de Datos, se le informa de que sus datos de carácter personal serán tratados por Acciona, S.A. (en adelante, ACCIONA), con los siguientes datos identificativos NIF: A08001851, Dirección: Avenida de Europa, 18, Parque empresarial de la Moraleja, 28108 de Alcobendas (Madrid), Tel: +34 91 663 28 50, email: [email protected], con la finalidad de atender sus comentarios y gestionar sus consultas, solicitudes, reclamaciones o sugerencias, así como el envío, por medios electrónicos, de información sobre nuestros servicios y productos, a través del correo electrónico de contacto.

La base jurídica para el tratamiento de los datos es el consentimiento del usuario al comunicarse con nosotros.

Los datos se conservarán mientras se mantenga la relación y no se solicite su supresión y, en cualquier caso, nunca durante un plazo superior a doce meses.

En caso de que su petición no sea dirigida a ACCIONA, sino a una entidad que forma parte del Grupo Acciona, ésta comunicará los datos a la sociedad del Grupo que pueda atender su solicitud de servicio o información de forma más eficiente. En este sentido, la comunicación de estos datos puede constituir una transferencia internacional, por estar estas empresas ubicadas en países fuera del territorio de la Unión Europea, para poder atender las necesidades de comunicación entre las personas que forman parte del Grupo a nivel mundial. (Puede consultar un listado de empresas del Grupo en La aceptación de los términos de la privacidad supone el consentimiento para la transferencia internacional de sus datos necesaria para la correcta tramitación de su petición. No están previstas otras cesiones de datos, salvo obligación legal.

El interesado puede ejercitar sus derechos de acceso, rectificación, supresión, portabilidad y la limitación u oposición, ante Acciona, S.A. dirigiéndose por escrito al Departamento de Protección de datos sita en Avenida de Europa, 18, 28108 de Alcobendas (Madrid) o mediante el envío de un correo electrónico en la siguiente dirección: [email protected], adjuntando en ambos casos copia del DNI u otro documento identificativo. Asimismo, podrá en cualquier momento, retirar el consentimiento prestado dirigiéndose a la dirección arriba indicada, así como reclamar ante la Autoridad de Control (Agencia Española de Protección de Datos

Para más información ponemos a su disposición la Política de Privacidad de la Página.

Sustainability is understood as the development that meets the present needs without compromising the capacities of future generations, ensuring the balance between economic growth, environmental care and social welfare. In Sustainability for all we promote the awareness and difussion of good practices that allow to combine economic and social development with the preservation of natural resources.

Many people wonder what impacts GMO crops have on our world. “GMO” (genetically modified organism) is the common term consumers and popular media use to describe a plant, animal, or microorganism that has had its genetic material (DNA) changed using technology that generally involves the specific modification of DNA, including the transfer of specific DNA from one organism to another. Scientists often refer to this process as genetic engineering. Since the first genetically engineered crops, or GMOs, for sale to consumers were planted in the 1990s, researchers have tracked their impacts on and off the farm.

Why do farmers use GMO crops?

Most of the GMO crops grown today were developed to help farmers prevent crop loss. The three most common traits found in GMO crops are:

  • Resistance to insect damage
  • Tolerance to herbicides
  • Resistance to plant viruses

For GMO crops that are resistant to insect damage, farmers can apply fewer spray pesticides to protect the crops. GMO crops that are tolerant to herbicides help farmers control weeds without damaging the crops. When farmers use these herbicide-tolerant crops they do not need to till the soil, which they normally do to get rid of weeds. This no-till planting helps to maintain soil health and lower fuel and labor use. Taken together, studies have shown positive economic and environmental impacts.

The GMO papaya, called the Rainbow papaya, is an example of a GMO crop developed to be resistant to a virus. When the ringspot virus threatened the Hawaii papaya industry and the livelihoods of Hawaiian papaya farmers, plant scientists developed the ringspot virus-resistant Rainbow papaya. The Rainbow papaya was commercially planted in 1998, and today it is grown all over Hawaii and exported to Japan.

Do GMOs have impacts beyond the farm?

The most common GMO crops were developed to address the needs of farmers, but in turn they can help foods become more accessible and affordable for consumers. Some GMO crops were developed specifically to benefit consumers. For example, a GMO soybean that is used to create a healthier oil is commercially grown and available. GMO apples that do not brown when cut are now available for sale and may help reduce food waste. Plant scientists continue to develop GMO crops that they hope will benefit consumers.

Scientists are altering and augmenting the genetic make up of our food crops to increase crop yields by making the plants pest resistant, herbicide tolerant, disease resistant, cold, drought, salinity tolerant, etc and to improve the nutrition of the crop and/or to provide pharmaceutical properties via the crop to the end consumer. These crops are producing what is now commonly known as Genetically Modified (GM) food.

However the following two areas of concern have many people questioning and avoiding Genetically Modified (GM) food.

1. Human health risks
Research into the health risks associated with humans consuming GM food is surprisingly thin and has revealed the following health concerns:

Gene transfer
– the single study into the possibility of altered GM food genes transferring to genes of human gut bacteria has shown that they are transferring. The ramifications of the gene transfer from the DNA of our food to ourselves is largely unresearched and prudence alone would suggest that for GM food to be deemed safe the implication of these “gene transfers” will have to be thoroughly studied prior to further commercial release of GM products.

– by mixing genes to improve the nutritional value of plants, GM food appears to have increased the likelihood of increased allergies. For example, a year after the release of GM soy in the United Kingdom, it was found soy allergies increased by 10-15 per cent in a single year.

New diseases
– the introduction of a brand of GM amino acid supplements (L-Tryptophan) in the 1980’s resulted in a deadly epidemic, Eosinophilia-myalgia syndrome, that according to the Centre for Disease Control killed approximately 100 people, permanently disabled 1,500 and caused between 5,000 and 10,000 to fall ill.

2. Environmental hazards of GM crops
GM crops leave the labs where they are made, to be grown on farms across the world.

Unintended transfer of transgenes through cross-pollination
– plants cross-pollinate each other and GM plants are no different. However, the prospect of, for example, herbicide resistant GM crops cross breeding with weeds to create a herbicide resistant super weed, has many farmers and environmentalists concerned.

Unknown effects on other organisms (e.g. soil microbes)
– plants grown in an ecosystem consisting of many other (often inter-dependent) organisms. The impact on these organisms has largely been overlooked in studies of the environmental impact of GM crops.

Loss of flora and fauna biodiversity
– studies have show that pollen from pest resistant GM crops are drifting to surrounding plants and decimating insect species living on non-GM plants.

With the old adage “better to be safe than sorry” in mind, it would appear there are sufficient question marks about the production and consumption of GM foods to avoid them. This action explores how you can do this.

How to do it now!

Buy foods that are labelled ‘GM Free’
With the increased focus and concern about Genetically Modified (GM) and Genetically Engineered (GE) food, food producers need to decide if they allow GM or GE crop ingredients into their products and brands. Those companies that actively avoid GM and GE ingredients will often indicate this on their packaging.

The True Food Guide, an initiative of ‘Greenpeace’, provides a GE free food guide, including a full list of GE free brands.

Green brands are made by companies that have a clear non-GE policy and implement procedures to remove GE crop ingredients from their supply chain. This includes highly processed ingredients, like oils and lecithin, and animal products from animals feed GE feed. Click here to download the list (PDF).

Improve the food safety certification on GM crops grown and foods sold in Australia
Currently there is no way for consumers to ensure that their groceries are GM free, as labeling is not required for most products containing GM ingredients. Contact your political representatives and ask that:

GM crops are only approved if they are proven to be safe ‘beyond reasonable doubt‘ using evidence from independent, long-term, published studies – measuring indicators relevant to human health.

All GM foods are clearly labelled, including highly processed products such as oils, starches and sugars from GM crops and meat, milk, cheese and eggs from animals fed GM feed.

Get informed

True Food Network – provides you some pointers on how to take action.

Eat organic produce
Organic certification requires that no GM products are grown. So eating organic food ensures you are avoiding genetically modified food. See our action Eat Organic Produce for more information.

Why is this action important?

The quality of our food and our food production processes are critical for human survival. Mass introduction of genetically modified crops into our environment and GM food into our bodies without long term research by organisations free of pro-GM bias is critical. Quite simply, we don’t know enough about the impact that creating a new plant/food by mixing the DNA of a plant with that of bacteria has on the environment, let alone our bodies. It would be tragically ironic that in an attempt to feed more people we further damaged the eco-systems that already feed us while producing a food that causes a portion of the population to have allergic reactions.

Environmental benefit

Avoiding Genetically Modified (GM) food reduces the market and value of GM produce and will slow its introduction into our farming systems and food. GM food has been shown to reduce biodiversity in the eco-systems in which it is grown and has many questions about transgenic material seeping into and affecting the DNA of the surrounding flora and fauna with unknown consequences for the eco-system.

Wellbeing benefit

Eating well and giving your body its best chance to be healthy is a challenge in a world full of aggressively marketed sugar and fat rich foods of questionable nutritional value. By avoiding GM foods you remove the risk of transgenic DNA crossing into the bacteria in your gut, you avoid inadvertently trigging an allergic reaction to genes weaved into your soya or grains and remove the risk of a more severe reaction to your Genetically Modified meal. The question to ask is what are the health and wellbeing benefits of eating GM foods?

Some foods include ingredients (for example, soy beans ) that have been genetically modified (GM), or are made using ingredients derived from GM organisms (for example, GM yeast). GM ingredients come from organisms that have had their genetic material altered using non-traditional breeding methods known as gene technology.

Traditional methods of genetic modification have been used for centuries through conventional breeding practices (such as the selective crossing of plants for preferred traits) and since the 1930s, by exposing seeds to chemicals or radiation to generate new or enhanced traits.

Today’s genetic modification is a much more targeted process and can involve the transfer of genes from unrelated species. Genes used for genetic modification may come from a range of organisms, including bacteria, plant or animal species.

How genetic modification works

Gene technology, sometimes referred to as genetic engineering, is faster than traditional breeding and provides ways of introducing very precise changes to genetic material resulting in the expression of desirable traits.

These changes may involve the transfer of properties of a single gene from one organism to another. For instance, some genes may produce herbicide or insect resistance, or improve crop yields, and these can be transferred into food crops such as corn or canola.

Existing GM crops

The GM crops grown in Australia with approval from the relevant authorities are canola (also known as oilseed rape) and cotton. GM canola grown in Australia is resistant to certain types of herbicide. GM cotton has been modified to be resistant to certain types of cotton pests.

In other countries, several other GM crops with a wide range of new properties are being grown. New GM varieties are also currently being developed and tested nationally and internationally. For example, in Australia, GM crops are being developed to be able to withstand drought.

Sources of GM food and ingredients in Australia

GM whole foods such as soy, maize or sugar beet may be used as ingredients in food. None of these GM crops are grown in Australia, but some products for sale in Australia may contain imported GM ingredients.

The main sources of GM foods in Australia are:

  • Imported GM soya – can be found as an ingredient in a wide range of foods such as chocolate, potato chips, margarine, mayonnaise, biscuits and bread.
  • Cottonseed oil – made from GM cotton, is used by the food industry in Australia for frying, in mayonnaise and salad dressings.
  • Imported GM corn – can be found as an ingredient in imported foods such as breakfast cereals, bread, corn chips, gravy mixes, corn oil, corn flour and corn syrup.
  • Imported GM sugar beet – can be used to produce sugar.

There are currently no approved imports of fresh GM fruit or vegetables in Australia. Any application to import and sell products like this in Australia would have to go through a strict approval process.

Regulation of GM foods and ingredients in Australia

All GM foods available in Australia, which include products containing GM ingredients, must comply with the Australia New Zealand Food Standards Code (the Code).

GM foods and ingredients are subject to a mandatory pre-market safety assessment by the government food regulator called Food Standards Australia New Zealand (FSANZ) before they enter the country and before they are used in foods for human consumption.

GM foods and ingredients are regulated in the Code under Standard 1.5.2 – Food produced using gene technology

. The FSANZ assessment investigates:

  • nutritional content
  • toxicity (using similar methods to those used for conventional foods)
  • tendency to provoke any allergic reaction
  • stability of the inserted genetic material
  • whether there is any nutritional deficit or change in the GM food or ingredient
  • any other unintended effects of the gene insertion
  • a GM food will only be approved for sale if it is assessed as being safe and as nutritious as its conventional, non-GM counterpart.

Regulation of GM crops in Australia

The regulation of GM crops is the responsibility of both the Commonwealth and State Governments. There are currently suspensions on the commercial growing of GM crops in South Australia and Tasmania. Victoria lifted its suspension on the growing of GM crops in 2008.

All work related to GM organisms must be approved by the Commonwealth Office of the Gene Technology Regulator (OGTR). The OGTR carries out thorough risk assessments on any applications for work on or the release of GM organisms, including a focus on the environment, and human health and safety.

Two GM crops, in addition to their conventionally bred counterparts, are currently grown commercially in Australia (canola and cotton). The commercial cultivation of these crops has been approved by the OGTR. There is extensive research underway in Australia on potential new crop traits, in particular traits to adapt to climate variability (such as drought tolerance).

How to avoid genetically modified foods

Genetically modified organisms, or GMOs, surround us. In fact, more than half of all processed food in U.S. grocery stores—items like cereal, corn dogs and cookies—contain genetically-engineered (GE) ingredients.

Despite industry hype, these crops aren’t designed to increase yields or resist drought. Instead, most are designed to resist continuous doses of toxic herbicides like glyphosate. As a result, GE crops are responsible for increasing herbicide use by some 527 million pounds in the U.S. over the first 16 years of their commercial use. (Find out how Monsanto got its start)

Though the debate over the health effects of eating genetically modified food continues, one thing is certain. GE crops paired with their pesticide counterparts wreak havoc on the environment through:

  1. Increased herbicide use
  2. Increase of herbicide-resistant weeds
  3. The contamination of organic and conventional (non-GMO) crops

Despite these negative impacts, U.S. government regulators continue to approve GMO crops. Most recently, the EPA approved a toxic herbicide cocktail known as Enlist Duo, a blend of glyphosate and 2,4-D, to be used on genetically engineered corn and soybean crops in six Midwest states with consideration for adding ten more states. Earthjustice has challenged the agency’s approval under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), arguing that the EPA did not adequately analyze the impacts of 2,4-D on human health. Earthjustice is also arguing that the EPA’s approval violated the Endangered Species Act, as there was no consultation by the EPA with the Fish & Wildlife Service to determine the harm to imperiled plants and animals of the expected tremendous increase in 2,4-D use. (Engineering an Environmental Disaster: 2,4-D Resistant Crops)

Earthjustice is also representing communities in Hawai‘i that have enacted bans or restrictions on GE crops. For years, the companies that develop GE crops and the pesticides used on them have treated Hawai‘i as their open-air laboratory and production center. Year-round warm weather allows several crops per year, and the companies spray dozens of pesticides—also year-round—near schools, homes and hospitals.

The companies spray toxic pesticides such as chlorpyrifos, a developmental neurotoxin that causes brain damage in children; paraquat, linked to development of Parkinson’s disease; and atrazine, an endocrine disrupter that contaminates water sources. Schoolchildren have gone to the hospital on several occasions with symptoms of pesticide exposure, and organic and conventional farmers must take expensive measures to protect their crops from being contaminated by transgenic pollen drifting from the genetically engineered fields. Despite these impacts, Hawai‘i’s state government and federal regulators have turned a deaf ear to any and all complaints. (Read more in our feature, Pesticides in Paradise)

Over the last year, Hawai‘i has emerged as a leader in the movement towards local control of industries threatening public health and property.

In 1996, the first genetically modified organisms (GMOs) were introduced in Canada. Today, there are more than 81 genetically modified foods approved for sale and use in our food products — but you’d never know from reading their labels.

In Modified, a documentary from CBC Docs POV, filmmaker Aube Giroux goes on a personal journey to understand more about how GMOs have changed farming and why GMOs aren’t labelled on food products in Canada. “While many countries around the world were choosing to label them, Canada and the United States decided against it,” says Giroux in the film, remembering when the first GMOs came on the market. “So if you wanted to avoid GMOs, you had to become a bit of a detective.”

What are GMOs?

GMOs are plants, animals or microorganisms (e.g. bacteria and fungi) that have had their genetic code altered intentionally by humans. Unlike conventional breeding — selecting for desired traits in a species and breeding through generations — this is genetic engineering in the lab.

Essentially, GMOs are created when genes are transferred between organisms that cannot normally breed, creating brand new genetic sequences that do not exist in nature. A well-known example of genetic manipulation is when scientists inserted jellyfish DNA into rabbit embryos while studying hereditary illness, an experiment which made the rabbits glow in the dark.

Most genetically modified foods come from engineered plants, created to improve yield, be more resistant to disease or pests, and more tolerant to herbicides or harsh conditions like drought.

According to the World Health Organization, future genetic modification could be directed at making food more nutritious, reducing exposure to allergens and improving the efficiency of food production.

Opinions about GMO safety

Most genetically modified crops are used for animal feed, which, in turn, enter the food system through our meat, dairy and egg products. But GMOs are also found in almost 75 per cent of our processed foods, in everything from chips to soda.

Health Canada is responsible for monitoring all GMOs entering the Canadian marketplace and states that it is not aware of any evidence that suggests that genetically modified foods are unsafe for us to eat. However, Giroux remains skeptical of GMO safety, and concerns from the public still remain.

In a U.S. survey polling the public and scientists from the American Association for the Advancement of Science, subjects were asked whether they “think it is generally safe or unsafe to eat genetically modified foods.” Only 37 per cent of the public reported feeling “generally safe” about these foods compared to 88 per cent of scientists.

GMOs in Canada

Canada is the world’s fourth-largest producer of genetically modified crops and grows more than 27 million acres of canola, corn, soybeans, sugar beets and alfalfa.

Canada is also the first country to approve the world’s first and only genetically engineered animal for human consumption. One biotech company sold more than 4.5 tonnes of genetically modified Atlantic salmon in Canada in 2018, but since GMOs are not labelled in Canada, it’s difficult for consumers to know whether they’re buying this particular fish.

Food labels

There are 64 countries around the world that mandate the labelling of GMO foods, and some European countries have moved to ban them altogether.

While the Canadian government does not require foods to be labelled, more than 88 per cent of Canadians are in favour of labelling GMO products so they can be better informed.

  • MORE:
  • Canada doesn't label GMO foods even though 88% of us say we should
  • Recipe: Lilac coconut cream tarts
  • Recipe: Pear crisp with salted caramel
  • Recipe: Quebec-style yellow pea soup
Rise in pesticide use

80 per cent of the world’s genetically modified crops are engineered so they can survive being sprayed with herbicides, allowing competing weeds to die and increasing yields — at least, in theory.

As herbicide-resistant weeds have sprouted up, farmers have increased the amount of herbicide they use just to keep yields steady. Since the introduction of genetically modified crops, herbicide sales have increased by almost 200 per cent in Canada.

Traces of these chemicals end up in the food we eat. Between 2015 and 2016, the Canadian Food Inspection Agency found nearly one third of tested food samples contained glyphosate residues, the key ingredient of many herbicide products.

The federal government of Canada considers these traces safe if they don't exceed certain limits, and the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and European Food Authority agree. However, the American Cancer Society places glyphosate on a list of “probable carcinogens,” and some activists, as shown in Modified, are concerned about concentrations in water and our bodies.

Alternatives to GMOs

For Canadians who want to avoid GMOs, the lack of labelling is a challenge and involves some guesswork.

The Canadian Biotechnology Action Network, a group of 16 organizations that “monitors and raises awareness about issues relating to genetic engineering in food and farming,” suggests avoiding certain foods, including farmed salmon and processed food with corn, canola and soy ingredients. Meanwhile, consumers can seek out products labelled “organic” or that feature the Canada Organic logo (these must adhere to the Canadian Organic Standards, which prohibit the use of products and materials from genetic engineering).

Related Content

To encourage thoughtful and respectful conversations, first and last names will appear with each submission to CBC/Radio-Canada’s online communities (except in children and youth-oriented communities). Pseudonyms will no longer be permitted.

By submitting a comment, you accept that CBC has the right to reproduce and publish that comment in whole or in part, in any manner CBC chooses. Please note that CBC does not endorse the opinions expressed in comments. Comments on this story are moderated according to our Submission Guidelines. Comments are welcome while open. We reserve the right to close comments at any time.

Comments FAQ

Note: The CBC does not necessarily endorse any of the views posted. By submitting your comments, you acknowledge that CBC has the right to reproduce, broadcast and publicize those comments or any part thereof in any manner whatsoever. Please note that comments are moderated and published according to our submission guidelines.

Purdue News

WEST LAFAYETTE, Ind. – Scientists say that genetically modified foods are safe, but many people are still uncomfortable about eating them, saying they’re unnatural.

Others, especially those in the science community, become dismayed when discussing biotechnology with people who use such a vague term as “unnatural.”

Paul B. Thompson, the Purdue University Department of Philosophy Joyce and Edward E. Brewer Distinguished Professor in Applied Ethics, says even people who label foods as unnatural don’t always have an exact explanation for why they think the way they do.

“It’s not exactly a religious view, because it’s not something they would have learned in church,” he says. “It’s quasi-religious, because it’s a particular way of thinking about nature that’s not in the direction that science has gone.”

According to Thompson, there is a disparity between what people have believed since antiquity and what science is telling us about the world today. “Part of the anxiety about genetically engineered foods is that our view of how the world works is eroding away from underneath our feet,” Thompson says. “It’s a shame that this anxiety has been attached so strongly to genetically engineered foods, because the feeling really exists in many areas of life.”

Thompson, author of books on the ethics of food and agriculture, including “Food Biotechnology in Ethical Perspective,” says there are reasonable explanations for why people might think genetically modified foods are unnatural.

Pure, unadulterated foods have been important as long as people have been on earth, because contaminated foods are a danger to one’s health. The idea that a gene has been added to a food that wasn’t originally part of that food makes it seem impure, which, according to deep-rooted beliefs, makes it seem harmful, Thompson says.

But he points out that there is a problem with that type of reasoning. Scientists are finding that foods we might consider pure aren’t, at least with respect to their biochemistry.

“For me there’s nothing that connotes good food more than a late summer ripe tomato,” Thompson says. “But is it pure? The tomato was developed from a plant that was poisonous, and that same tomato I love to eat contains mutagens, which are biochemical substances that can induce changes in cell growth. But current scientific thinking is that mutagens in our food are counterbalanced by other compounds that are anti-mutagens. That’s what makes an ordinary tomato safe to eat.”

The idea that foods considered pure and natural may contain harmful or cancer-causing substances conflicts with deep-rooted moral and cultural notions about food, Thompson says, and simply adds to the anxiety about food.

Another reason that people might consider genetically modified foods to be unnatural has to do with an idea that all living things, including crops, have some kind of natural essence. This natural essence gives each living thing a level of moral standing that varies.

Although scientists and others may pooh-pooh the idea that foods contain life forces, Thompson challenges them to think about how they would respond if they were served a dish made from the meat of a dog or cat.

“There is nothing scientifically wrong with eating dog or cat meat,” Thompson says. “It is eaten routinely in some parts of the world, but few Americans would want to eat it. Now why is that?”

Dogs and cats have a special place in society as companion animals, and because of that they have a moral status that food animals do not have. “This belief that living things have a natural essence or life force – call it what you will, it is a character that makes them distinctively what they are – is deeply embedded in our outlook on the world,” Thompson says. “But it is a belief that is becoming less and less easy to interpret in scientific terms.”

Just as companion animals have a different essence or moral standing than food animals, some people seem to attribute a higher moral standing to crops that have been selectively bred using conventional means than to those that have had a gene inserted in a laboratory.

There is a general belief by some people that these conventional crops have been provided by nature or a Supreme Being to ensure the health of our bodies (scientists who have spent their careers cross breeding crops might dispute that), and that because genetically modified crops were not provided by nature, they have a lower moral standing.

Thompson says such an outlook has deep cultural and moral roots. “It drives me crazy when someone stands up and says that our food decisions have to be based on science,” he says. “It sounds like they’re saying that our culture and values are somehow irrelevant or illegitimate.”

Because beliefs about food are so entrenched, there will always be those who are opposed to genetically modified foods. “There’s one segment of people — they’re not nuts or crackpots — that is committed to a holistic way of understanding the world. They are not going to be easily persuaded by any scientifically reductive account that talks about molecules and building blocks of nature,” he says. “These people aren’t going to revise their beliefs just because science has a better theory.”

Thompson says society has a moral and ethical responsibility to make sure that these people aren’t forced by the marketplace to eat foods that they are opposed to.

“One of the mistakes people in the food systems have made is to think that everyone would accept genetically modified foods,” he says. “Let me be clear: I have no objection to them myself, but a minority out there won’t accept them under any circumstances. Does their right to hold that viewpoint have to be respected and protected? I think it does.”

Because the U.S. Department of Agriculture has issued guidelines that say that genetically modified foods cannot be labeled organic – despite protests from some in the scientific community who argue that there is nothing inorganic about genetically modifying the crops – an inadvertent system has been set up to allow people to avoid eating genetically modified foods.

“If this is enough to protect their right to opt out of genetically engineered foods, then perhaps we can have a productive conversation about genetically engineered food with the other 80 or 90 percent who basically want to know whether agricultural biotechnology is safe and environmentally sound,” Thompson says. “We need a food system that allows us to be informed by the best scientific thinking on food safety and environmental risk, but not one that requires people to take a 13-week course on molecular biology in order to plan a meal, or to sort out their feelings about genetic engineering.”

Labels are about to become mandatory, but what does that really mean?

By Sara Chodosh | Published Jun 1, 2018 4:00 PM

How to avoid genetically modified foods

While there’s currently no evidence that genetically modified organisms harm human health, that isn’t to say there aren’t legitimate reasons to avoid them.

Perhaps the most common is a simple preference for that which is natural and a general aversion to that which technology—especially technology developed by Big Ag—has meddled in. Others worry about long-term effects that haven’t appeared in scientific studies yet, or ecosystem-level impacts that we haven’t picked up on. A comprehensive 2016 report from the National Academies of Science, Engineering, and Medicine found no evidence that would support those concerns, but it also noted that caution is generally a good idea.

GM experts and proponents also have legitimate concerns that adding a label identifying GMOs gives the impression that there are scientifically proven risks to worry about. Studies on perception of GM food suggests that the public has a baseline aversion, and a label may increase wariness. Labeling advocates, of course, argue that if Americans want to avoid GMOs, they have a right to do so.

But really, a lot of the research on public opinion of GM food suggests that Americans don’t so much think negatively of it as that they don’t think much about it at all. Yes, there’s a baseline aversion, but the opinion of study subjects seems to vary wildly depending on the information provided. One study following up on that 2016 report found that the entire American public shifted their opinion measurably in the positive, likely because the report was well-publicized in its findings that GMOs are, as far as we can tell, perfectly safe for the human body.

So, it’s unclear how many Americans will actually be looking to avoid GM food in the future. But even if you want to keep your pantry GMO-free, doing so could prove challenging.

“Can people avoid them? The answer is certainly yes. Especially in the last few years there have been more products on the market that are non-GMO or organic,” says Jayson Lusk, an economist at Purdue University who studies the consumer side of GMOs. “Now, those products are more expensive—no one ever said you can avoid them for free. But they can if they’re willing and able to pay, and one way they’ll pay is in the time to find the products.”

Though very few fruits and vegetables are genetically engineered, he points out that almost anything with corn or soybeans will be difficult to get without a GM component. More than 90 percent of both crops are bioengineered in the U.S., and corn and soy derivatives go into many processed foods. Much of the sugar produced derives from sugar beets, nearly all of which are genetically engineered. Somewhere between 60 and 70 percent of processed foods on the market today have a GM ingredient, but many of those foods may not require a label according to the proposed rules.

Highly processed ingredients like high fructose corn syrup have little to no traceable DNA in them, and so the U.S. Department of Agriculture (which regulates food labels) doesn’t require manufacturers to add a label to indicate those bioengineered foods.

And then there’s that word—”bioengineered.” The USDA only just announced how they would require manufacturers to disclose GM ingredients, though the law was enacted back in 2016, and the new rules don’t use the term “GMO” or even “GM.” Instead, they opt for “BE” or “bioengineered,” perhaps to avoid using loaded terminology. “I’m not sure how much people will know that term,” says Dominique Brossard, a communications professor at University of Wisconsin-Madison specializing in life science issues like GMOs. “I don’t think it’s going to be very easy for people to find out [which foods are genetically modified].”

“I think this was actually the intent of the 2016 law,” says Glenn Stone, an environmental anthropologist who studies the GMO debate. “[It] was passed just in time to overrule a state-level law was taking effect requiring that GMO foods have clear labels.” Vermont had previously passed legislation that would have fined companies for failing to label food containing GM ingredients, including highly processed ones like corn syrup (though it excluded cheese, which often relies on a genetically engineered enzyme called chymosin). It also specified that the labels would include the phrase “genetic engineering,” not “bioengineered.”

In contrast, the USDA regulations allow companies to choose between three options: write out the warning (as in “contains a bioengineered food ingredient”), include a BE label, or use a QR code that would link the consumer to a page disclosing all the information.

Stone, along with other labeling proponents, argue that these options will make it harder for people to actually get the information the legislation is supposed to mandate. “This rule claims to label GMO foods, but it exempts the most common GMO food ingredients like soy oil and corn syrup while allowing the use of QR codes,” he says, “knowing perfectly well that few shoppers have the time or inclination to get out their phone, scan a code, and read a website over and over while shopping.”

Unless those regulations change, though, it could be quite hard to figure out exactly which foods contain GM ingredients and which do not. Many of the top GM crops grown for human consumption—maize, soybeans, canola, sugar beet, papaya, squash, eggplant, potato, and apples—get processed first, and wouldn’t require a label. The rest, if sold whole or as part of another food, would necessitate one. A recent overview of attitudes towards GM foods, published in the journal Annual Reviews, commented that “Since soybeans and corn (the most widely planted GE crops) are common ingredients in many food products (corn starch, corn syrup, corn oil, and soybean oil), it is likely that foods in the United States listing soybeans and corn as ingredients contain some GE ingredients unless it is specifically stated that they do not.”

Avoiding GM foods entirely could mean quite a drastic shift away from any processed food at all. Corn syrup and soybean oil are in a surprising number of foods, and they won’t carry a BE label. It’ll be up to you as the consumer to navigate those grocery store aisles on your own.

Sara is an associate editor at PopSci where she writes about everything from vaccine hesitancy to extreme animal sex. She got a master’s degree in science journalism at NYU’s Science Health and Environmental Reporting Program, as well as another one in data visualization from the University of Girona. Contact the author here.

Our ability to manipulate plants by introducing new genes promises innovative solutions to these and many other real-world problems. Yet there is considerable opposition to the use of genetically modified plants for food production and other uses.

Genetic engineering offers a time-saving method for producing larger, higher-quality crops with less effort and expense. Yet such benefits must be balanced against the risks of changing the genetic makeup of organisms.

What are those risks, and how likely are they to occur? In order to define them, we need to understand the science of plant genetic engineering.

How to avoid genetically modified foods

Genetically modified: what exactly are we talking about?

For thousands of years, humans have been genetically enhancing other organisms through the practice of selective breeding. Look around you: the sweet corn and seedless watermelons at the supermarket, the purebred dogs at the park, and your neighbor's prize rosebush are all examples of how humans have selectively enhanced desirable traits in other living things.

The type of genetic enhancement that generates the most concern goes a step beyond selective breeding, however. Technology now allows us to transfer genes between organisms. For example, the tomato plant's beetle resistance relies on a gene from a bacterium (Bacillus thuringiensis), which scientists inserted into the tomato plant's genome. This gene, calledcry1Ac, encodes a protein that is poisonous to certain types of insects, including the beetle.

How is this done? Gene transfer technology is simply a sophisticated version of a cut-and-paste operation. Once the desired gene is identified in the native organism's genome, it can be cut out, transferred to the target plant, and pasted into its genome. (The illustration to the right describes the "gene-gun" approach, which is one of several gene transfer methods.) Once the new gene has been introduced, the plant can be bred to create a new strain that passes the gene from generation to generation.

How to avoid genetically modified foods

Benefits versus risks of genetically modified plants

Can you think of some possible risks of growing plants that contain genes from other organisms? Let's examine our earlier examples: the beetle-resistant tomato, the vaccination banana, and the saltwater rice plant. We've already covered the potential advantages of these plants, but what are the concerns?

Cross-breeding with wild populations. For all of these examples, a primary concern is preventing genetically modified versions from mixing with the naturally existing populations of plants from which they're derived. Plants rely on the transfer of pollen, via insects or the air, to breed and produce offspring, and it's difficult to control how they cross-breed in the wild.

In most cases, it's not yet clear how introduction of the non-native gene would affect wild populations. Critics of genetically modified plant technology cite the need to learn more about the potential long-term impacts of genetically modified plants on the environment before mass-producing them.

Toxicity or allergic reactions. Many people suffer from allergies to various food items, including nuts, wheat, eggs, or dairy products. There is concern that the protein products of introduced genes may be toxic or allergenic to certain individuals.

When farmers start growing genetically modified crops, they stop growing the old varieties. These old varieties are important sources of diverse genes that give plants other desirable characteristics. For example, a new pest or disease could come along and destroy the genetically modified rice. If one of the old rice varieties has a gene that makes it resistant, it could be cross-bred to make the saltwater rice resistant as well. If we lose the old varieties, we also lose their useful genes.

It has been estimated that 70% of all processed foods in the United States contain at least one genetically modified ingredient—usually a product of soy plants. There are initiatives afoot to require food manufacturers to provide clear labeling on processed food products that contain genetically modified ingredients. This would make it easier for people with allergies to avoid foods that might pose a danger to them, and it would allow those who oppose genetically modified foods to opt out of buying them.

Unlike countries such as Australia and Japan, the United States currently has no laws requiring companies to label products containing genetically modified ingredients.

Despite the controversy surrounding them, genetically modified plants have taken root in our world. As with any new technology, members of society have the responsibility to become informed about genetically modified plants, in order to make decisions about their responsible use and regulation.

How to avoid genetically modified foods

Many people may wish to try and avoid genetically modified foods in their diet. GMO stands for genetically modified organisms , which means their genetic makeup has been altered through genetic engineering. This creates plants and organisms that are not found in nature. Most GMOs have been genetically modified to withstand the application of herbicides sprayed on crops.

Currently, there is an absence of credible, long-term research on the effects of consuming genetically modified organisms. For this reason, many people may prefer to avoid or limit the amount of GMO foods they consume in their diet. While not all genetically modified foods are labeled in the United States , there are lots of great GMO-free products and GMO-free snacks available! Here are five ways to better avoid GMO foods.

Look For a Label

Your first step should be to look for foods with a “Non-GMO Project Verified” label on their packaging. While GMOs aren’t currently required to be marked in the U.S., food manufacturers, such as Plant Snacks, have undergone independent review and certification to prove their products are GMO-free. The “Non-GMO Project Verified” logo means that GMO contamination has been avoided throughout the growth and harvesting of crops, their processing, storage and packaging.

Buy Organic

Another way to avoid GMOs is to look for foods labeled ‘100% organic.’ U.S. law prohibits genetically engineered food or ingredients in products labeled 100% organic. Even so, this label only applies to how a food is grown, not the content of the food itself. Food production is increasingly compromised by cross contamination from handling, so foods labelled organic may not be totally GMO-free.

Avoid Processed Snacks with GMOs

Many snacks contain GMOs from the processed sugars, preservatives, and sweeteners. To avoid GMOs in processed foods, enjoy GMO-free snacks ! You don’t have to limit your diet in an effort to avoid GMO products, as plenty of delicious snacks are made with thoughtful ingredients.

Say No to At-Risk Ingredients

Some ingredients are at a higher risk for being genetically modified than others, such as soy, corn, canola or sugar. A majority of GMO products are derived from these four ingredients, so it is best to avoid them when possible. Make sure to look at food labels for GMO-free snacks without these ingredients, and eat a diet full of whole foods.

Eat Locally Grown Foods

Support your local farms and businesses, and buy your produce and meats locally! Most genetically-engineered foods are grown and produced at large factory farms. Avoid purchasing your food from these manufacturers, and instead support your smaller, local farmers.

While it can be difficult to ensure that your diet is GMO-free, these are just some of the many strategies you can use to limit the amount of genetically modified foods you consume. At Plant Snacks, our GMO free snacks are also free of allergens and added-sugar. Look for a store that sells Plant Snacks near you!

1. Corn One of the most prominent GMO foods, avoiding corn is a no-brainer. If you’ve watched any food documentary, you know corn is highly modified. Monsanto’s GMO corn has been tied to many health issues, including weight gain and organ disruption.

2. Soy Found in tofu, vegetarian products, soybean oil, soy flour, and numerous other products, soy is also modified to resist herbicides. As of now, biotech giant Monsanto still has a tight grasp on the soybean market, with approximately 90 percent of soy being genetically engineered to resist Monsanto’s herbicide Roundup.

3. Sugar Genetically-modified sugar beets were introduced to the U.S. market in 2009. Like others, they’ve been modified by Monsanto to resist herbicides.

4. Aspartame Aspartame is a toxic additive used in numerous food products, and should be avoided for numerous reasons, including the fact that it is created with genetically modified bacteria.

5. Papayas GMO papayas have been grown in Hawaii for consumption since 1999. Though they can’t be sold to countries in the European Union, they are welcome with open arms in the U.S. and Canada.

6. Canola One of the most chemically altered foods in the U.S. diet, canola oil is obtained from rapeseed through a series of chemical actions.

7. Cotton Found in cotton oil, cotton originating in India and China in particular has serious risks.

8. Dairy Your dairy products may contain growth hormones, since as many as one-fifth of all dairy cows in America are pumped with these hormones. In fact, Monasnto’s health-hazardous rBGH has been banned in 27 countries, but is still in most US cows. If you must drink milk, buy organic.

9. and 10. Zucchini and Yellow Squash These two squash varieties are modified to resist viruses.

Poppies bloom in a wheat field near Rochester, England. Ministers are keen to allow gene editing on crops, a form of genetic modification that is heavily restricted in the EU. Photograph: Ian Waldie/Getty Images

Poppies bloom in a wheat field near Rochester, England. Ministers are keen to allow gene editing on crops, a form of genetic modification that is heavily restricted in the EU. Photograph: Ian Waldie/Getty Images

Last modified on Fri 29 Oct 2021 13.44 BST

The prospect of genetically modified foods being grown and sold in the UK has come a step closer after changes to farming regulations that will allow field trials of gene edited crops in England.

Companies or research organisations wishing to conduct field trials will still have to notify the Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs, the government announced on Wednesday, but existing costs and red tape will be removed so more trials are likely to go ahead.

The immediate change is small, and affects only England, but the government says it will be followed by plans for new primary legislation that will allow far greater use of gene editing in crops in the UK, and a redefinition in law of genetic modification.

That could open the way to the sale of gene-edited crops developed in the field trials, and to further steps such as gene editing in animals, and potentially the production and sale of genetically modified organisms in the UK.

George Eustice, the environment secretary, said: “Gene editing has the ability to harness the genetic resources that nature has provided. It is a tool that could help us in order to tackle some of the biggest challenges that we face – around food security, climate change and biodiversity loss.”

Ministers are keen to use Brexit to allow gene editing, a form of genetic modification that is heavily restricted in the EU, to be used in the UK, despite a public consultation that found 87% of people who responded viewed gene-edited crops as a greater risk than traditional crop breeding methods.

Gene editing involves using and modifying genes already found in an organism, unlike other forms of genetic modification, which can use genes imported from other plants or animals. Gene editing can be used to mimic the effects of traditional plant breeding but is accelerated as it is done in a laboratory instead of requiring years of repeated selective breeding.

Proponents say gene editing could safely be used to develop crops with increased yields or additional nutritional benefits, or that would be resistant to pests and disease and withstand drought, high temperatures or other effects of climate breakdown.

Scientists welcomed the changes. Angela Karp, the director and chief executive of Rothamsted Research, which had a field trial for gene-edited wheat approved before the changes, said: “Gene editing gives us a powerful new tool to accelerate the generation of plant varieties that can potentially be more nutritious, more resilient against climate change and grown with a reduced environmental impact.

“We look forward to building on our science in gene editing to help deliver the crops farmers will need to deliver on Cop26 emissions targets and beyond. We will now be able to scale up our field scale studies and accelerate the creation of new varieties that can future proof our farming.”

An anti-GM crop demonstrator from Earth First protesting in July 2000 at the site of Scotland’s only approved trial site for the crops near Daviot, Aberdeenshire. England plans to relax its GM crop rules. Photograph: Ben Curtis/PA

Guy Poppy, professor of ecology at the University of Southampton, also welcomed the development but said: “While I understand why Defra propose a proportionate step-by-step process, I do fear that the travel along that path will be slow, complex and fraught with continuing claims and counterclaims.”

However, campaigners said the government was overriding public concern on the issue. Liz O’Neill, director of umbrella group GM Freeze, said: “Genetic engineering – whatever you choose to call it – needs to be properly regulated. The government wants to swap the safety net of proper public protections for a hi-tech free-for-all – but our food, our farms and the natural environment deserve better.”

She added: “This announcement is described as a response to Defra’s consultation on the regulation of genetic technologies. However, no detail has been made available [at the time of writing] on what George Eustice actually learned from the exercise. The consultation submissions that GM Freeze has seen raised a wide range of concerns about Defra’s proposals for dismantling GM safeguards, but this announcement suggests the minister isn’t listening.”

Joanna Lewis, the director of policy and strategy at the Soil Association, said gene editing was the wrong approach and the government should instead focus on helping farmers become more sustainable.

“What would help is a reversal of the … lack of investment in agro-ecological, nature-friendly methods and farmer-led technology,” she said. “We should be investing in solutions that deal with the cause of disease and pests in the first place, including a lack of crop diversity, the decline in beneficial insects, and animal overcrowding. We must increase soil carbon, wildlife and animal welfare on farms to solve the climate and nature crises, and protect human health.”

Gideon Henderson, the chief scientific adviser at Defra, said the government was looking closely at the implications for any changes to the UK law on GM organisms for future trade deals. The EU and some other countries impose heavy restrictions.

Even if GM organisms and associated products were omitted from trade deals, there could be concerns that other agricultural goods could be affected – in crops, by potential cross-contamination, and in the case of meat by livestock consuming GM crops.

Where they are grown, GM crops occupy large surface areas and are linked to intensive monoculture systems that wipe out other crop and ecosystems. Growing only one kind of corn for human consumption will mean a reduction in flavors, traditional knowledge and food security.

Toxic Crops, Toxic Land

Most GM crops fall into one of two categories: either engineered to resist chemical herbicides, or engineered to produce insecticides themselves. When herbicides are used on resistant crops, over time the weeds develop resistance, leading to the use of even more chemicals. Crops engineered to produce insecticides on the other hand produce toxins that are not only harmful to pests but other insects such as butterflies, moths and insect pollinators.

Corporate Control

GM crops are patented, which allows a few multinational companies such as Monsanto, Bayer, Syngenta, DuPont and Dow to control the entire GM food chain – from research to breeding to commercialization of seeds. The multinational companies that patent and produce GMO seeds control the majority of the seed market and often also produce herbicides and fertilizers. Patenting genetic material has shifted the balance of economic power towards big business in their aggressive pursuit of profit.

Threat to Small-Scale Farmers

GM crops denature the role of farmers, who have always improved and selected their own seeds. GM seeds are owned by multinationals to whom the farmer must turn every new season, because, like all commercial hybrids, second-generation GMOs do not give good results. It is also forbidden for farmers to try to improve the variety without paying expensive royalties.

Furthermore, farmers risk being sued by big corporations if their crops are accidentally contaminated with patented GM crops. Pollen from crops like oilseed rape is easily spread via wind and insects to neighboring fields. Hundreds of these farmers in the US have been sued by Monsanto, Syngenta, BASF and DuPont for illegally growing patented crops.

The role of small-scale agriculture in food sovereignty and security, protection of local areas and economies, the preservation of landscape and the sustainability is becoming increasingly clear to consumers, governments and scientists. Governments should support these productions instead of heeding to the demands of big business.

Food Culture

GM products do not have historical or cultural links to a local area. In Italy for example, a significant part of its agricultural and food economy is based upon identity and the variety of local products. Introducing anonymous products with no history would weaken a system that also has close links to the tourism industry.

Health and Safety
Little is understood yet about the health effects of GMOs, but recent studies have shown animals fed with GM-containing feed can develop health problems. In many parts of the world including the EU, studies on GM crops can be carried out by the same companies who product them, casting doubt on the quality and bias of data.


Multinationals promise that GMOs will feed the world, but since they began to be marketed two decades ago, the number of starving people in the world has only grown, just like the profits of the companies that produce the seeds. In countries like Argentina and Brazil, GM soy has swept away energy-providing crops like potatoes, corn, wheat and millet on which the daily diet is based. The majority of GMO crops are not destined to human food, but rather for animal feed, textiles and biofuels. GMOs have not increased productivity: data from the USA’s Department of Agriculture shows that there has been no recorded increase in soya and corn yields since the introduction of GMOs.

Continued industry promises about the ability of GM crops to tackle the world’s growing social problems are a myth: They have reduced biodiversity, polluted landscapes, threatened the future of small-scale farming and reduced the food security of the world’s poorest people. They have not fed the world, but rather concentrated profits and power into the hands of a few ruthless companies. It’s time to stop the big scam.

Genetically modified foods can be defined as organisms (i.e. plants or animals) in which the genetic material (DNA) has been altered in a way that does not occur naturally by mating and/or natural recombination.

GM stands for ‘genetic modification’ or ‘genetically modified’. It’s the process of altering the genes of a living thing. Genes carry the instructions for all the characteristics that a living thing inherits. Genetic modification allows us to produce plants, animals and micro-organisms with specific qualities.

People have been breeding animals and new varieties of plants for hundreds of years to develop or avoid certain qualities. Traditional methods of breeding involve mixing thousands of genes.

Genetic modification allows just one individual gene, or a small number of genes, to be inserted into a plant or animal. This enables them to be used in new and very precise ways. Such plants or animals are known as genetically modified organisms (GMOs).

GM foods are foods that contain or consist of GMOs, or are produced from GMOs.

How GM foods are assessed for safety

The safety assessments of GM foods are carried out by the Food Standards Agency with the Advisory Committee on Novel Foods and Processes (ACNFP). Assessments include a detailed study of:

  • whether the foods could be toxic
  • their nutritional value
  • whether they could cause allergic reactions

GM foods are only authorised for sale if they are judged:

  • not to present a risk to health
  • not to mislead consumers
  • not to have less nutritional value than their non-GM counterpart

How GM foods are labelled

We support giving consumers choice. We recognise that some people will not want to buy or eat GM foods however carefully they have been assessed to ensure their safety.

In the UK, foods must say on their label if they:

  • contain or consist of genetically modified organisms (GMOs)
  • contain ingredients produced from GMOs

This means that all GM foods, including flour, cooking oils and glucose syrups from a GM source, have to be labelled as GM.

For GM foods sold ‘loose’, information must be displayed immediately next to the food indicating that it is GM.

Foods produced with the help of GM technology do not have to be labelled. An example of this is cheese produced with the help of GM enzymes which are used to clot the milk in the production process. These are not ingredients in the cheese.

Products such as meat, milk and eggs from animals that are fed on GM animal feed also do not need to be labelled.

FSA Explains

Genetic modification can be achieved by introducing a gene from one living thing into another. This could mean using genes from a different variety of the same species, or from a different species altogether. For example, genes from a plant that has good resistance to a certain pest can be used to improve the resistance of another type of plant.

To do this, the specific gene that causes pest resistance must be identified and isolated from the first plant. It can then be inserted into the second plant and used to grow new plants that are pest resistant.

Genetic modification can also be achieved by altering DNA which is the material that genes are made from.

The way a gene works can now be changed by ‘switching it off’ to stop something happening. For example, a gene involved in softening a fruit could be switched off. This means that although the fruit will ripen in the normal way, it will not soften as quickly. This can be useful because it means that damage is minimised during packing and transportation.

How to negotiate compensation

Discover how to build a winning team and boost your business negotiation results in this free special report, Team Building Strategies for Your Organization, from Harvard Law School.

When considering how to negotiate salary, job candidates sometimes make decisions that go against their best interests. Research suggests guidelines for effective salary negotiation.


How to negotiate compensation

The question of how to negotiate salary seems to preoccupy negotiators more than any other negotiation topic—and with good reason, considering how dramatically even a small salary increase can impact our lifetime earnings. The following three salary bargaining tips from leading negotiation experts will help you gain more from your new-job negotiations.

Get Out of Your Own Way

In job and salary negotiations, we sometimes “get in our own way,” write Deborah M. Kolb and Jessica L. Porter in their book Negotiating at Work: Turn Small Wins Into Big Gains (Jossey-Bass, 2015). We may fail to recognize opportunities to negotiate, focus only on our weaknesses, and make the first concessions in our own heads before the negotiation even begins. These internal dialogues are where the first concessions in the negotiation are made, write Kolb and Porter.

Kolb and Porter suggest ways to address the question of how to negotiate salary. Begin by gathering information so that you will feel that what you are asking for is defensible. Prepare to explain the value you would bring to the organization. Develop alternatives to the current negotiation to increase your flexibility at the table, and remember that the other party’s alternatives may be less attractive than yours.

In addition, examine your vulnerabilities and plan ahead to compensate for them. For example, if you are insecure about a gap in your work history, think about the important things you were doing during that time and prepare to share them with enthusiasm.

How to negotiate compensation

Claim your FREE copy: Salary Negotiations

Consider the Context

Large, established companies often measure job candidates against well-defined job categories with a set range of salaries. In addition, you may negotiate compensation with recruiters or human-resources personnel rather than with your future boss. In this environment, when determining how to negotiate salary, try to figure out what pay category someone with your education level and experience would receive, then build a case for a salary at the high end of that range.

If an interviewer asks you to name your price, do you know how should you respond? In their book 3-D Negotiation (Harvard Business School Press, 2006), David Lax and James Sebenius recommend making a “non-offer offer,” or a statement that could anchor the discussion in your favor without seeming extreme.

Suppose your research suggests that you would most likely fall into the $70,000 to $80,000 pay range, but the next-highest category seems within reach. Rather than saying, “I think I deserve $80,000,” consider saying, “Correct me if I’m wrong, but I’ve heard that people like me typically earn $80,000 to $90,000.” Notice that this statement is not a demand. Yet due to the powerful impact of the $80,000-to-$90,000 “anchor”—a reference point that may or may not be relevant to the discussion—it could very well steer the numbers toward your upper goal.

Now consider how you might adjust your salary negotiation strategy to a start-up that is recruiting you to become its third employee. You obviously won’t be shuttled off to the HR department, nor will your salary be determined by existing pay scales. In this case, you may have more latitude to structure a creative package that includes stock options.

Adapt Your Style for Maximum Success

Individual differences in negotiating style determine how to negotiate salary and what we achieve, Michelle Marks of George Mason University and Crystal Harold of Temple University found in a study published in the Journal of Organizational Behavior.

The researchers surveyed 149 professional employees who had been hired in the previous three years about their negotiations for their current position, including their attitudes toward negotiation and risk, their negotiation strategies and outcomes, and their level of satisfaction with the process of negotiating for their jobs.

The researchers identified five types of negotiating strategies: collaborating (engaging in problem solving to reach the best possible outcome for both sides); competing (trying to maximize one’s own outcomes with little concern for others); accommodating (putting the other party’s concerns first); compromising (trying to reach middle ground); and avoiding (dodging negotiation altogether).

Independent of the power the applicants had at the table, choice of negotiation strategy turned out to be the critical factor in determining effective salary negotiation. Those who chose to negotiate salary, rather than accepting the offer on the table, increased their starting pay by an average of $5,000, primarily by using competing and collaborating strategies. Those who behaved competitively did better than those who focused on collaboration, but collaborators were more satisfied than competitive bargainers with the negotiation process. By contrast, compromising and accommodating strategies were not linked to salary gains.

The study’s authors conclude that it pays to negotiate assertively for a salary increase. They also encourage employers to recognize that giving employees wiggle room to bargain up their starting pay could help create a more satisfied and productive workforce.

When determining how to negotiate salary, what strategies have you used?

Negotiating salary for a new job is stressful. The chance to do so only happens every so often, and when the moment comes, it feels both high stakes and extremely personal.

People are generally most concerned with feeling unprepared or worrying about an unpredictable outcome, says Andres Lares, managing partner at Shapiro Negotiations Institute.

These nerves are normal and healthy, but it could help to think less about what you could lose in a negotiation and more about what you can do to prepare, Lares tell CNBC Make It: "Even if you can't get everything you want, it's about doing everything you can to walk away knowing you've done your best."

He recommends thinking through all the possible scenarios that could come up in the negotiations process, and to have a script ready for how you'll respond in each case. Here are a few ways to do that.

Discussing salary throughout the hiring process

First of all, when and how you should bring up pay during job interviews will depend on your situation. If the job description already lists the range, or if you're confident about your number and have a lot of interviews lined up, you might bring it up in first or second rounds, says Octavia Goredema, an author and career coach.

You could ask the hiring manager to share their budget for the job, or you might be strategic about naming your desired range. Tap online resources and your professional network to get an idea of your absolute minimum salary, your desired target and a stretch number you want to negotiate up to.

By the time you have that offer in hand, you have a lot of leverage to negotiate. "You wouldn't be in this room or on this call if you couldn't do that role. Recruiters wouldn't have time to waste if they didn't think you could deliver on it," Goredema says. "Now we're discussing not only what's required of you, but what you're looking for."

If the offer is way below your minimum

If HR makes you an offer that's significantly lower than what you want, like in the tens of thousands of dollars, Lares says it's worth pointing out.

Leading with gratitude can make a difficult conversation more palatable: "Thanks for thinking of me for this role and sharing the pay. Unfortunately, that's significantly lower than what I would have expected for this."

Next, gauge whether they can be flexible on the offer. Remind yourself, and the other party, that a negotiation is working together to reach a compromise. You can frame it as: "I want to be respectful and not waste your time, but I'm also interested and want to make this work. What's the flexibility on pay?"

Or, it's possible the hiring manager doesn't understand your qualifications or years of experience. Remind them of your candidacy and ask: "Is there a different title or level you're hiring for that's a better fit and aligns with my expected pay?"

If the offer is on the lower end of your range

If the offer is a few thousand dollars short of your actual desired number, it's time to make your counteroffer. At this point, you should have a firm number in mind based on market data and what you personally expect from the role.

Again, Lares says, first thank them for the offer. Express your interest in the role and the expertise you'll bring into it. It can help to focus on all the other reasons why you're excited to take the job, like the chance to grow a team or launch a new product, says Mabel Abraham, a Columbia Business School professor. You can mention how salary is just one component in your decision-making process, and then state (or re-state) your desired salary and why it's in line with the market as well as your qualifications.

Finally, emphasize that you want to work with the other person to find a mutually agreeable number, Lares says. You can keep it open-ended: "What can we do to bring the offer closer to my expectations?"

If the pay matches or exceeds what you want

Good news: HR makes you an offer, and it's in line with what you want. Congrats! But don't accept it right away. Thank them for the offer and say you need time to think it over, Lares says.

Consider if everything in the compensation package aligns with what you want. Is there room to negotiate beyond salary like a signing bonus, vacation time, work-from-home flexibility, health coverage, child-care support or something else?

This tends to be a major part of the negotiations process where women lose out, says Abraham, who studies gender inequities in the workplace. As much as a racial and gender wage gap exists for base pay, it widens even more when accounting for non-salary benefits, she says. For example, one recent analysis commissioned by The Wall Street Journal found women are less likely than men to own company stock, and when they do, they own fewer shares. The difference could mean hundreds of thousands of dollars in "lost" earnings over time.

If you choose to continue negotiating additional non-salary perks, focus only on the benefits most important to you and understand how much you're willing to be flexible.

What to do if you think you low-balled yourself early on

Maybe you've gotten to the offer stage and realize the range you gave earlier was actually too low. But now the company is offering you that number. Is it too late to revise your salary expectations?

Lares says you can bring it up, but frame it less about the money and more about not fully understanding the job itself.

You can say something like: "At the beginning of the hiring process, this was my understanding of the job. Now at this point in the interview process, this is my understanding of the job. In light of that, I think this second role is worth Y. I want to be collaborative — am I understanding this correctly?"

Leave the conversation open to a possible misunderstanding, Lares says. "If you approach the conversation as, 'let's make sure we're talking about the same role,' it allows you to be more sensitive in the way of asking for more money when you do come to an understanding."

Whether you call it a compensation negotiation, a job offer negotiation, or a salary negotiation, they’re all stressful, scary, and consequential.

Many people in the tech industry–from CTOs to engineering prodigies to developers with a track record of delivering the goods–don’t negotiate at all. In our experience, those who do negotiate typically focus on the wrong things and underplay their hand. They don’t know what to ask for or how to push for more without killing the offer.

We close the information gap and even the playing field, allowing you to negotiate the best deal for your unique situation and positioning you for success.


Negotiation Advisory: We coach behind the scenes

We work closely with you to navigate the practical details and nuances of negotiating a better offer. This includes knowing what to say, when and how. Whether to push for more and how much. Getting beyond impasses. We’ll ghostwrite emails and provide talking points that build understanding and respect, not friction.

How to negotiate compensation

Negotiation Representation: We advocate on your behalf

Some clients would rather stay above the fray with a potential employer and have us take care of the negotiation on their behalf. In this case, we’ll strategize all communications with you, but interact directly with your prospective employer(s). You’ll retain total control but avoid any of the negotiation dirty work.

How to negotiate compensation

Going into any negotiation, it’s crucial to understand what’s important to you. We created the Lifestyle Calculator to help you do just that.

How to negotiate compensation TRY NOW

How to negotiate compensation

Salary Negotiation Successes

How to negotiate compensation

I won’t do another negotiation without 10x again. They helped me get clauses in my contract I didn’t even know I needed.

How to negotiate compensation

10x provided us comfort throughout negotiating a complex package. This was a challenging deal and would not have been successful without 10x who helped increase our comp substantially.

How to negotiate compensation

There’s only one thing I’d do differently next time. keep my mouth shut before involving 10x.

How to negotiate compensation

I’ve never felt so empowered in a job search. With 10x, I have negotiation experts in my corner helping me make the best and boldest moves.

How to negotiate compensation

When a great opportunity came my way, I wasn’t equipped to navigate the negotiation on my own. 10x expertly guided me in the negotiation, yielding an offer better than I could have hoped for.

Value Proposition

How to negotiate compensation

Increase your compensation

On average, our clients see a 35% increase in total compensation over their initial offer. In some cases, we’ve been able to negotiate a 100% increase.

How to negotiate compensation

Better total package

Salary, bonuses and equity are important (and we provide guidance on all that), but there’s a lot more to consider when negotiating a new job, such as title, reporting structure and benefits such as flex time.

How to negotiate compensation

Elevated stature

Whether we coach you through the process or we negotiate on your behalf, our approach will establish you as a sophisticated, business-savvy professional and position you for success.

How to negotiate compensation

Stress-free negotiation

We’re experts at this. We know how to find leverage, work around impasses and push for more without coming across as demanding or overly aggressive.

How to negotiate compensation

Insider knowledge

Our years of experience negotiating on the behalf of tech talent gives insight and data that individual candidates don’t have easy access to.

How to negotiate compensation


You can count on us to ensure that you’ll get the absolute best deal possible. You’ll also start your new job knowing that you conducted yourself in the best way possible, which is just as important.

How to negotiate compensation

Salary negotiations can be tough at any level, from associate to C-suite. Compensation packages are made up of a lot of moving parts, and people’s values change as their lifestyle changes — aka, what made you happy once may not be what you need now, and vice versa.

Here are the steps to consider when you’re getting ready to ask for the raise—recently updated for a post-Covid reality.

1. Get that good data

Your boss is (probably) not going to give you a raise just because you want one. They’re going to give you a raise because you’re worth more money. And the best way to prove it to them is with data — you can use it to clearly justify the amount you’re asking for.

There are two kinds of data you might want: internal (info about your company and your coworkers) and external (info about other companies and people in your industry).

Internal data

First, if you don’t know it already, learn about the internal pay structure of your company. Ask your manager how pay ranges are determined — do they have explicit “pay bands” that everyone at a given level would fall into? If so, where are you in your current band? If you’re asking for a promotion, what band should you fall into if they give it to you?

If they don’t use pay bands, ask them where your position falls relative to others in the company. (Even two-person start-ups can have that talk!)

External data

Especially if you’re asking for a promotion, external data is also your friend. Gathering it starts with talking about money — and salary — with your friends and the people in your network . That’s a good way to learn what other companies tend to pay for the role you’re considering.

Next, look for reputable compensation reports by leading firms (like Radford ) — a lot of companies actually pay for and use these when they set salaries. and PayScale are also good resources that are easy to use. Just take sites like Glassdoor with a grain of salt — they do serve as a good reference point, but they’re built on self-reported (read: inflated) salaries.

2. Bundle your priorities

Take a page from cable companies’ playbook (as painful as that may be) by negotiating salary, bonus, benefits, equity, flexibility — and anything else that matters to you — as a bundle. Negotiating piece by piece can accidentally make both of you feel like you lost, because you’re compromising on every individual ask. Plus, it can make it seem like you’re asking for lots of things (read: too much), instead of one fair, complete package.

With good communication, it’s totally possible to uncover which items matter more to your boss, which items matter more to you, and where the best deal is for both of you. Then work that info into your bundle.

3. Focus on the mutual win

Especially if you’re asking for a promotion, it helps to position yourself psychologically on the same side of the table as your manager. They hired you to generate value for the company — and when you’re compensated fairly , you’re more likely to feel valued, stay at the company, and contribute productively. That’s something you both want.

Even if your role doesn’t affect the company’s revenue directly, there’s a mutual win in there somewhere. It exists, or you wouldn’t be there — but it might need clarifying. So translate as much of your work as possible into explicit value: risk avoidance, cost reduction, brand value.

And if you start to feel yourself or your manager slipping into a defensive mindset, bring it back to what matters. For example, you could say something in the negotiation about how exciting it will be to collaborate in new ways and make a greater impact on the company together.

The research also shows that women are still at higher risk of being penalized for negotiating, but that taking a communal approach helps reduce that risk. (Major “ugh” vibes, but you gotta do what you gotta do.)

4. Remember your “why”

If you’re nervous or need some extra motivation to walk out of that room with the salary you want, remember why you’re there: First, to stand up for yourself and your value and get paid what you deserve.

But second, research shows that for a lot of women, we negotiate more effectively when it’s for something greater than ourselves. So if that helps you, pump yourself up by remembering how your higher pay will create more economic stability for people you care about, including Future You (she’s important!), your family members, or even recipients of your donations to causes you believe in.

5. Look forward to the future

Don’t forget. Money today makes money tomorrow. The keyword here is compounding. When anyone earns less or leaves the workforce (unfortunately, Covid-19 has disproportionately affected women in this way ) , you simply earn less over the long term. As Sallie Krawcheck recently wrote , investing money now compounds upon itself to increase your wealth overall. Debt works in the opposite direction, compounding what you owe.

So if leaving the workforce is something you’re considering, widen the lens of your negotiation to get what you need at work to STAY IN THE GAME. An occasional “return to office” plan for your role with more days working from home? A flexible schedule? Interim support while workloads are high to keep burnout low? The important end game is to make sure you either a) don’t need to leave the workforce at all or b) minimize the length of time you need to leave work. If your work situation feels untenable, remember to negotiate not just for an increased salary, but time and flexibility.

Science. It’s got your back.

These techniques are all grounded in science, but before making any decision, clear away the myths, so you can find the science that specifically applies to your situation. Get clear on the science on commuting (spoiler, the big house far away isn’t worth it unless your commute is from the couch to the desk), the reputation of the company culture you’re considering, and when money does (and, more importantly, doesn’t) correlate to our happiness .

May you do your best work, on terms that work for your full life, and pay you well. You got this.

How to negotiate compensation

A hiring recruiter named Mercedes S. Johnson recently went viral on social media for posting about how she offered a candidate an $85,000 salary when the company had a $130,000 budget for the role — a full $45,000 difference.

And people were angry.

Always negotiate your salary, yes. YES. But also, be an employer that pays fairly and doesn't play BS games (games that lead to women and POC being paid less, something companies are legally obligated to care about…)

— Ask a Manager (@AskAManager) January 29, 2022

In the post, Johnson wrote, “I offered her that because that’s what she asked for and I personally don’t have the bandwidth to give lessons on salary negotiation.” This post sparked a fierce online debate on both sides of the situation from what was meant to be a recruiter’s inspirational post.

Some said the applicant should’ve asked for more or negotiated a better offer, while others defended the recruiter, saying she was doing her job by offering the prospective employee the salary that the employee said was acceptable.

Johnson has since been fired and wrote an apology posted on her Twitter. Still, the incident highlights the lack of salary transparency at many companies — and their habit of putting the responsibility of salary negotiation upon potential candidates instead of offering a compensation range upfront. There are also power dynamics at play, because companies hold all the cards in what are often one-sided hiring processes, which contribute to long-standing systems of pay inequality.

“This is not the fault of the recruiter or the candidate,” says Kimberly Brown, a career and leadership expert. “It also falls on the company. When you see something like this, it means the company has no pay equity structures in place. They’re not looking at the roles and making sure people are paid equitably across the organization.”

Candidates traditionally think they’re not empowered in the hiring process, explains Brown, but they can be. Let’s talk about pay — and how you can take charge of salary negotiations.

4 Expert Tips for Negotiating Your Salary

1. Ask for the Salary Range

The very first question candidates should ask recruiters should be about salary range, according to Brown.

“I always encourage candidates to ask what is the range that the company can support for a role,” Brown says.

Do research to figure out a competitive range so you have a sense of what others are making for similar roles at other companies in the same sector or industry.

That way you can say, ‘Based on my research, it looks like this role should pay between [this amount and that amount]. Is that in line with your company’s salary expectations?’

2. Bring Up Salary Expectations Right Away

Ask what the salary is early in the hiring process, ideally in one of the initial conversations that happen during the phone screening, Brown says.

“Years ago, we’d say it was taboo to mention salary so early from a candidate perspective. But I find that you don’t want to go through an entire interview process only to find out at the end that the salary is not aligned with your expectations. Be empowered and ask that question in the beginning.”

It can be awkward, nerve wracking, and maybe even intimidating. But it’s better than getting a low offer that you don’t want to take later in the process.

3. Negotiation Doesn’t Stop After the Initial Conversation

“Negotiation begins the moment the company interacts with you,” says Brown. “And that comes to understanding your skills, your experience, and making sure you’re articulating your value after every single step in the process.”

Once you know what your value is and the market pay range for the role you’re applying for, stick to that number. Reiterate how you’re qualified and how the role is a fit for your background and career history. Point out what you can bring to the team by telling recruiters the value you’ve brought to your previous organizations.

If an offer comes back low, be prepared to push back and say, “I’m looking for a salary that’s much closer to [the number you have in mind].”

4. Practice So You Feel Empowered

If you feel like your confidence might waver when you’re in discussions, practice your conversations out loud. Phrase your expectations in your own words and say them until you feel comfortable. Practice either alone or with a friend until it feels natural.

The goal is for you to be able to say (or type, if an offer is made via email) your numbers confidently to a recruiter.

Do not get excited and accept an offer the moment they give you a number, advises Brown. Instead say how excited you are about the opportunity and ask how long you have to review the offer. Ask for a breakdown of the benefits package, and consider the overall compensation of the salary combined with the benefits.

For example, many companies offer reimbursements for continuing education, transportation benefits in metropolitan areas, or a 401(k) match. Also factor in any signing bonuses, relocation packages, performance-based bonuses, and stock options. The salary number is only one part of an overall offer.

Why Do We Need to Negotiate Our Salaries Early and Often?

Oftentimes, there aren’t proper hiring processes within a given company, and recruiters don’t have the support they need, Brown says. And in the situation with Johnson, it’s more important than ever to negotiate salaries.

The silver lining of this public recruiter situation is that it’s sparked an entry point to having more open conversations and asking tough questions about hiring practices, such as:

  • Are women and people of color getting equitable offers?
  • Do companies know how much their limited women and people of color are making in comparison to their male-identified and non-BIPOC peers?
  • Are companies doing enough to attract and retain employees, starting with their recruitment processes?

If anything, situations like Johnson’s viral post show the importance of negotiating salary early and often, Brown says.

Pro Tip

Salary negotiation begins the moment a company interacts with you. Take every opportunity to reiterate your value throughout every step of the hiring process.

They also showcase the importance of advocacy on the candidate side. It starts with empowering yourself from the beginning, and ultimately negotiating your offer to the best of your ability. You can drive your own process by doing your research and knowing your value for every job application.

That’s a start to getting a job offer that’s in line with your expectations. What you can negotiate after your initial conversation is the cherry on top.

Share this article:

Be Sure to Consider Your Entire Compensation Package When Negotiating

Employer Won’t Budge on Base Pay? Try Elsewhere

You’ve gone through several rounds of interviews and have finally landed the job of your dreams. The problem is; your dream job doesn’t come with a dream salary.

But before you pass on the position, there are many non-salary benefits that you can negotiate. Combined, they might make your potential position seem quite palatable. The good news is these benefits come at a low — or no — cost to your company. Here are the top ten benefits that you can and should ask for during the negotiation process.

10. A Better Title

Let’s face it: the title “secretary” just isn’t sexy. Nor does it look amazing on your resume.

But “corporate executive assistant” sounds a little better. So ask if you can have a title change that accurately reflects what your workload will be. Not only will you feel more content having a better title, but that fancy-sounding title will also help you when you start looking for another job in the future.

9. A Wardrobe Allowance

No, we’re not talking about those Manolos you’ve been eyeing or that Brioni men’s suit that costs thousands of dollars.

You can petition for a clothing stipend to be built into your contract — especially if you’re in the position of meeting with lots of high-end power clients. After all, the company will want you to look your best since you are representing them.

8. Transportation Reimbursement

It’s not cheap to commute into work. And if you’re traveling by planes, trains and automobiles, the costs add up quickly.

Calculate the travel expenses you plan to incur each month, and ask for a stipend to help ease this expense. Your company might add this onto your contract if it means you’ll be in the office each day — and on time.

7. Housing Subsidy

If you will be commuting a few hours into work each day, it’s a good idea to ask for some sort of housing subsidy.

Different from asking for your company to cover your transportation costs, this perk comes in the form of a company apartment that you might be able to crash in if you’ll be pulling late nights at the office. Or you might be able to get your boss to pick up the tab if you stay overnight at a hotel.

6. Guaranteed Severance Package

Times are tough, and there are no guarantees that the job you’re saying yes to today will still exist in a year from now.

So ask the hiring manager if you can get a guaranteed severance package written into your contract should the company become bankrupt or lays you off due to no fault of your own. This protects you should you lose your position with the company, and it might make them think twice before laying you off, especially if you’ve negotiated a generous severance package.

5. An Office

Well, you might not snag the corner office as soon as you sign your contract, but that doesn’t mean you can’t try.

Depending on your job level, you can try to avoid the bleak gray cubicle life by asking for a snazzier spot in which to work. For some employees, having a window with fresh sunlight streaming in — and not looking sallow in fluorescent lighting — is an awesome perk that can make a real difference.

4. Tuition Reimbursement

Everyone wants to grow and be challenged in their positions. One great way to do just that is through continuing education paid for by your company.

From workshops to seminars, conferences to even paying for your Master’s degree, you can ask your boss to help continue your education and foot the bill. Many companies are willing to do this, since they view it as a direct investment back into the company.

3. Daycare Reimbursement

Babysitting costs can be a killer, especially when they can almost eat up an entire paycheck.

So ask what child care options the company offers. Maybe there’s onsite child care or an allotted amount given to workers with young children. If nothing of that nature exists, inquire about getting a partial amount of your child care costs paid for by your company.

2. Flexible Scheduling

One of the best non-salary perks is by far a flex schedule.

Maybe you won’t be able to work full-time from home, but you might be able to score a part-time telecommuting schedule working 2-3 days from home. The savings you’ll find in not having to commute in each day — plus having a more relaxed schedule — might be enough to make up for the lower base salary.

1. Additional Vacation Time

Maybe the company only offers 7-10 days of paid vacation each year. Find out what the company offers in terms of vacay days and ask them if they would double it. Getting a few extra vacation days to lie on a white sandy beach staring at crystal blue water might be worth more to you than a higher salary.

How to negotiate compensation

You’ve either received a job offer or you’re expecting one. How you approach and conduct the salary negotiation are vitally important. Not only will they determine what you’re paid, but they’re also a demonstration of your sales skills to the potential employer.

Rather not negotiate your salary? Consider the data: it demonstrates that failing to negotiate your salary means you will have to work eight years longer to make the same amount as your counterparts who do negotiate. It also costs on average a half a million dollars in earnings by the age of 60. So while you may prefer to avoid a salary negotiation, these stark statistics should make you think twice.

1. Be Prepared

Your salary negotiation actually starts in the first qualifying interview. The recruiter, hiring manager or HR person making the contact is likely to ask what your current salary is or what your expectation is. Many experts recommend simply deflecting the question with a statement like, “I only share that information with my accountant.” You can then shift the conversation to your future expectations. To do that, you need to know your market value. What are successful salespeople in your industry paid? You can find that out by doing some research on sites like Payscale, Salary and Glassdoor. The best time to do this is now, before that first call from a recruiter. You can phrase your response in a non-confrontational way such as, “Correct me if I’m wrong, but my understanding is that people with my skills and experience are paid in the range of $X to $X.”

2. Extra Research

Once you’re past the qualifying call, you need to know more about the potential employer. Basic facts can be gotten from the internet: Company size, structure and ownership; gross revenues; number of employees; main divisions and products. Through sites like Glassdoor, which includes “reviews” of the company from current and former employees, you may find out about the culture and work environment. Take these with a grain of salt as many are written by unhappy people who quite or were fired (though perhaps for good reasons). Do you know anyone — maybe on LinkedIn — who worked for that company? Don’t be shy about reaching out to a connection who worked for the company or one of their main competitors in a private message to ask direct questions. Most people are flattered to be treated as an expert and will give advice. You may need to ask your interviewer(s) directly to find out things such as how many salespeople in the company are making quotas, what the average compensation is in their sales force, what their year-over-year sales growth (or decline) has been for the past five years, what the turnover rate is among salespeople. For public companies, much of the financial information will be in their annual report. Read it. This will give you an idea percentage of revenue is spent on sales and a bit about what kind of place it is to work.

3. Choose a Negotiation Strategy

A study on salary negotiation styles reported in the Harvard Business Review found that there are five basic negotiating strategies: collaborating (engaging in problem solving to reach the best possible outcome for both sides); competing (trying to maximize one’s own outcomes with little concern for others); compromising (trying to reach middle ground); accommodating (putting the other party’s concerns first); and avoiding (dodging negotiation altogether). The study found that choice of negotiation strategy turned out to be the most important factor in determining effective salary negotiation. Those who chose to negotiate salary, rather than accepting the offer on the table, increased their starting pay by an average of $5,000 and most of the “winners” primarily used either competing or collaborating strategies.

4. Set Your Walkaway Number

Using the research you’ve gathered and your desire to accept a job with the potential employer — which may include considerations such as location, lifestyle and future opportunity — decide the minimum compensation you’ll accept. If the company meets or exceeds that number, great! If they don’t, you can turn them down knowing that you made the best decision for you.

5. Consider and Counter

When you receive an offer number, ask for time to consider it. Don’t dawdle. A day or two is sufficient if you’ve done your research, and it lets them know that you move quickly and follow up thoroughly — two traits they should be looking for in a salesperson. Your counter will be 10-20% above their offer: 10% if you don’t believe they have a burning need to hire you, 20% if you think they do. Maybe you have a unique experience that exactly fits the role, or you have industry connections they want to tap. Don’t counter by phone. Write an email containing your counter along with a brief but compelling business case justifying the increase. At the same time you’re writing that email, create a negotiation script you’ll use when they call to discuss the offer. Write down their offer, your counter, your walkaway number and your top-three desired non-salary benefits. This will keep you focused during the final stage and — the research says — could get you thousands of dollars immediately. If they’re unwilling to come off their number, consider asking for a signing bonus and relocation allowance to help make up the difference.

Read more of our captivating blogs.

Chris Donnelly

A senior business leader with over 18 years of high level performance in Sales & Sales Management, Business Development, Marketing and Product Strategy. A dynamic corporate presenter and top level relationship builder with broad, real-world experience helping organizations achieve goals and exceed expectations.

Specialties include: Sales Leadership and Management, Sales Strategy, Driving Results, Solving Business Problems, Stakeholder Presentation Specialist, Growth Strategy Development, Relationship Developer, Business Development, Contract Negotiation, Influencer, Product Strategist, Public and Private B2B Sales Specialist, Public & Private Education, K-12 Curriculum, Literacy & Intervention, Brand Positioning, Customer and Market Research, Marketing, Communications.

These four smart strategies will help you successfully negotiate your pay.

Talking to an employer — or a prospective one — about money is never easy. Some people find it so challenging, in fact, that they quickly accept the first salary offer that comes with a new job. Or they hesitate to ask for a raise, even when they’re 110% certain they deserve one.

That’s not the wisest way to go. Most employers fully expect to negotiate and build funds into their compensation budget for just that reason. That’s why it’s critical to face your fears and tackle them head on.

Here are the four hurdles to overcome when negotiating salary — and advice on how to do it.

Hurdle: Determining What You’re Worth

Tackle it: This may be the easiest of all because, thanks to the almighty Internet, there’s plenty of information at your fingertips. Start your research by looking at websites like PayScale, or the one run by the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics. Professional associations are a good resource, as is asking colleagues and co-workers for “ballpark” salary info in your company or field. (While discussing salary is no longer as taboo as it once was, some companies still have rules that prohibit workers from talking about wages. So be sure you know the relevant laws and policies.) When figuring out an appropriate salary, consider your education, training and credentials, years of experience and geographic location (pay varies from place to place). Aim to come up with a “salary range” for your specific job, and be realistic — but a bit ambitious — in setting your target salary.

Hurdle: Articulating Your Value

Tackle it: Being a self-promoter doesn’t come naturally to a lot of people. But if you don’t appreciate what you bring to the table, how can you expect someone else to? When preparing to negotiate with an employer, start by making a list of your skills and qualifications. Be ready to offer specific examples of what you’ve accomplished in past roles and what you believe you’ll be able to achieve going forward. Don’t exaggerate, but this isn’t the time for modesty either. Once you’ve finished your list of skills, experience and achievements, commit it to memory. Then practice, practice, practice so you will feel comfortable talking about how great you are. Ask friends or family to role-play so you’ll feel super confident making your case when the time comes.

Hurdle: Knowing What (and What Not) to Say

Tackle it: When interviewing for a job, it’s best to delay conversations about compensation until you actually have an offer. But this can be tricky. A prospective employer might ask what you’re currently earning (though inquiring about salary history has been outlawed in many states.) Or, more commonly, you might be asked for your salary expectations. If that happens, do your best to deflect the questions — and avoid being the first to name a number. (If you do, you could end up with an offer of less than what the employer was prepared to pay!) Instead, respond by asking what the position pays and waiting for a response. If you’re pressed, give a range and an explanation of how you came up with it. Say something like, “According to my research, the market rate for a Marketing Manager with my level of experience in this city is $60,000 – $70,000. I would like to be considered for a salary within this range.” Then reiterate the value you bring to the company and the expertise and skills that you have.

Hurdle: Thinking Only About Your Paycheck

Tackle it: Salary is only one piece of your total compensation package, so don’t focus exclusively on that. While benefits like health care and matching 401K tend to be standard, employers sometimes have more flexibility when it comes to negotiating paid time off, flexible schedules and remote work options. Think about the benefits that are most important to you, then confidently and politely ask for them. Remember, the worst that can happen is that you’ll be turned down. Once you do get an offer that’s satisfactory, ask for it in writing. Take a day or so to think it over before signing on the dotted line. This is standard business practice, so no one will be put off.

Of course, all of this is much easier said than done, so make sure to put time and effort into preparing as best you can. Do that by taking the AAUW Work Smart Online, a free and easy course that will give you all the information and tools you need to get the salary you deserve.

Negotiating a salary is a crucial part of accepting a new position, but botching this step can cost a candidate the job. And even if the fallout isn't quite as severe, the outcome of salary negotiations can damage the employee’s ability to succeed at work.

The problem is, few of us have negotiating skills. According to Dennis Theodorou, a managing director at JMJ Phillip Executive Search, “people look for a job every three years on average and negotiate a salary once or twice every three years, which means they’re not experts in salary negotiations.”

Below are some of the negotiation strategies that have the potential to backfire.

Key Takeaways

  • Don't negotiate your salary until you have a firm offer.
  • Don't try to get one company to match another company's offer.
  • Don't rely on the estimates you see on a salary website.
  • Don't fixate only on money. Other perks have value.
  • Don't try to reopen negotiations after you've accepted a verbal offer.

Negotiating Too Early

The first mistake candidates make is trying to negotiate a salary before the company has even extended an offer of employment.

Steven Rothberg, president and founder of College Recruiter in Minneapolis, MN, tells Investopedia, “The best time to negotiate your starting salary and other components of your total compensation is after receiving but before accepting the offer of employment.”

Approaching this topic too soon could be a deal-breaker.

Trying to Leverage a Counter Offer

You may have interviewed with more than one company. However, don’t assume that a company is willing to match another employer’s offer, and don’t make the salary the determining factor.

Kristin Scarth, a career services manager at Employment BOOST in Detroit, warns that trying to leverage one job offer against another offer might be a short-sighted approach. “No two jobs are apple-to-apple, and if you're trying to get one company to come up another $5,000 just because you have a better offer, it doesn't mean that they’re going to comply—and it doesn’t mean that you should choose the highest-paying job.

Scarth advises candidates to weigh the pros and cons of each company and choose the organization that offers the best overall employment situation.

Relying on Published Estimates

It's important to do your homework on a company you're about to interview with, but don't rely on the estimates published on salary websites, or try to use them as a bargaining tool.

Theodorou says that many people request a certain amount because a salary website stated it as the going rate. “This never works out. If you're making $65,000, and the new job is offering $70,000, and your rebuttal is that Google says that you should be making $82,000, this situation will likely not end well,” warns Theodorou.

Salary websites can be useful research tools, but they don't claim to be providing precise figures for every opening.

Various factors determine starting salary offers, including experience, company size, industry, and location. According to Katie Weigel, a division director with Robert Half Finance & Accounting, “You should know if what you are asking for is at or above competitive compensation for your location.”

If your requirements seem unreasonable to the potential employer, Weigel says, it could cost you that job, especially if the hiring manager has interviewed other candidates that made favorable impressions.

Regarding a salary range, Theodorou warns that asking for more than a 5% to 10% raise when switching jobs usually doesn’t produce the desired result. “We see roughly 3% to 5% when getting a new job that’s local, and 5% to 10% when having to relocate,” she said.

However, she notes that there are exceptions. For example, if you currently manage three people, and the new job involves managing 50 people, there is a reasonable expectation of a higher salary.

Negotiating Solely for Money

If more money is out of the question, Rothberg recommends negotiating other aspects of the job, particularly those that can help you achieve a healthy work-life balance.

“Rather than asking for Friday afternoons off, ask if you can work an extra hour the other four days of the week so that you're still working 40 hours a week," he suggests.

Pulling a Bait and Switch

One terrible salary strategy is to agree to a verbal offer and then ask for more after receiving the written offer.

According to Steven Lindner, executive partner of The WorkPlace Group in New York City, “Agreeing to a lower compensation just to get a foot in the door, hoping that once they meet you and see how terrific you really are that they will pay you what you really want is a waste of everyone's time.”

Lindner also says this is a surefire way to have the job offer rescinded.

Once you have the job, don't threaten to quit to get a pay raise. Your employer may take you up on the offer. Even if you get the raise, you'll be seen as someone with one foot out the door.

Missteps on the Job

Sometimes employees try to renegotiate their salaries by threatening to leave if they don’t get a raise. Lindner says this is a sure way to end up in the unemployment line. “Managers prefer to advocate for individuals who are engaged, passionate, and committed to them and the business,” he says.

If you show that money is your primary concern, your managers will know you will leave as soon as a better offer appears.

By failing to follow the company’s guidelines for promotions and raises, these workers may end up jeopardizing their careers. "Sure, you may get the raise from your current employer but according to most companies polled, they will make note of this occurrence, never forgetting it, and will likely be looking to replace you,” says Lindner.

The Bottom Line

While salary is an important part of accepting a new job, don’t let it become an obstacle that prevents you from seeing the big picture. While it’s normal to want a job that pays well, failing to understand when, how, and why to negotiate your salary may cause the company to look for other candidates.

“McElvany’s asking too much,” Sam Bensen told me. Sam was founder of Bensen Steel Co., a steel service center in Illinois. Jack McElvany, his controller, had been with him for eight years, and had started prowling around Sam’s turf, looking for a “fair share,” even (gasp!) equity. Sam, it was clear, was circling his wagons against a nonfamily employee with a sudden taste for a piece of the action.

I was helping Sam reorganize his management team, so he could begin backing away from operating responsibility and allow some room for his son, Dale, to grow as a successor. Dale had joined the company two years before, and Sam figured that might be the cause of Jack’s discontent.

Dale was working his way through the sales department and doing a good job, as far as I could see. He was a little immature, with a penchant for fast cars and young female friends, and Sam was convinced Jack resented the kid. He asked me to talk to him and find out for sure.

Jack was upset, but, as I expected, not about Dale’s status as “crown prince.” He knew that in family companies, blood is thicker than bearing-grease.

“He’s okay,” Jack told me. “He has a lot to learn, but he’ll probably handle it. Dale will get the company unless he totally blows it. That’s fine. The problem is, time’s passing really fast and I’m stuck in a rut here. If I even try to bring it up with Sam, be blows a seal.”

I asked Jack about his salary, and how he felt about having stock in the company. “The pay’s okay, for now,” he answered, “but I’m at a ceiling. Sam won’t talk about where we’re going or what might be there for me if we make it. As for stock, sure, I would like some as protection, I guess, but Sam will never go for it. Actually, I don’t even know if it’s appropriate- — I probably wouldn’t let go of it if I were in Sam’s place.”

The situation was all too familiar. Sam, thinking like a business owner — aggressive, ambitious, independent, semi-addicted to risk-taking — was assuming his key man thought the same way. What I was hearing from Jack was very different. Jack, like most key employees I’ve met, didn’t want to be in business for himself. Sure, he expected to get more if he were to take the risk and put in the effort of staying around, but it didn’t have to be the whole store. Jack just wanted to be paid well and to participate fairly in the company’s eventual success.

“I’m looking for some income potential, and a nest egg for the future,” Jack explained. “If Sam and Dale do fine, that’s great. But I’ll have a lot to do with that and I’d like to benefit, too. Besides, I didn’t just roll off the watermelon truck, you know. This is my second family company. If they decide to sell, I want to be covered. It’s their right, but I’ll have a lot of years invested here.”

Sam Bensen was guarding his business, his ownership, and control of it — with the fierceness of a sleep-starved grizzly. Rightly so. He built the place. But by assuming Jack was insecure and greedy, and that his questions were an attack, Sam could scare off one of the key people be needed to nurture and develop his business.

What Sam needed, and what we put together, was a new compensation prograin that met three simple objectives:

    The key managers (Dale included) would be paid a base salary competitive with similar positions elsewhere. This was their “guarantee,” the amount competition would have to beat to hire them away. Because Sam didn’t have any really accurate estimate of managers’ salaries in his industry, we used Sam’s salary as the index. (Jack’s responsibilities were about 60 percent of Sam’s; his base was set at 60 percent of Sam’s salary. Bases for Dale and two other key people were set in the same way.)

The pool would be distributed according to a key managers’ percentage of total management salaries, adjusted to percentage of goal achievement. (Thus, assuming a $450,000 pre-tax profit and a prior year’s net worth of $2.8 million, 15 percent of the $2.3 million, or $345,000, would be the company’s share and $105,000 went to the bonus pool. Then Jack, whose salary was 40 percent of total management salaries, therefore would have a maximum bonus potential of $42,000 if he reached 100 percent of his individual goals.)

The growth participation was a key feature of Sam’s new compensation system, but not the most important part. In fact, all three components were essential: keeping good people by paying as well as the competition; providing short-term incentive by using profit growth to break the compensation ceiling; and offering financial “protection” by allowing participation in long-term growth.

Sam Bensen’s program is only one example of a compensation philosophy. The specifics can take almost as many forms as there are companies. In growth participation agreements, for instance, “phantom stock” (sometimes called “shadow stock”) can be used to distribute numbers of pseudo-shares instead of a set percentage of growth. This gives the employee rights to appreciation that equals the change in the value of an equivalent number of shares of company stock. This approach avoids distributing ownership rights and prevents dilution of real stock ownership.

There are other options. Valuation can be based on a formula rather than book value. Often, employment contracts include potential for even greater participation, and require trade-offs like non-compete clauses. Sometimes, using real stock is appropriate, with the caution that the company and other shareholders should be well protected through buy/sell agreements and stock restrictions.

Whatever approach is taken, however, the important thing to remember is that family business “hired guns” usually have legitimate needs that must be met — and they don’t necessarily include becoming the boss, or taking over ownership of the company.

Donald Jonovic, founder of Cleveland’s Family Business Management Services, is author of the book, Someday It’ll All Be Yours . . . or Will It?

When Jerry Sweeney was promoted, she assumed the new role would come with a significant pay rise.

After a lengthy application process and with extra responsibilities added to her workload, finding out her employer (a retail chain) would only be paying her an extra 70 cents an hour came as a shock.

But she didn't even consider asking for more money.

"I didn't think it was something you could do," she explains.

"You don't see it, it's not something people tell you. You might see it in a movie, but I've never seen it in action."

Mara Olekalns, a Professor of Management at the Melbourne Business School, says Jerry's experience is all too common — especially among women new to the workforce.

"Men just see far more of the world as negotiable than women do … so part of the problem is [women's] failure to recognise that opportunity to negotiate."

So what are women missing out on?

There's a pay gap benefitting men in almost every industry in the country, with almost 40 per cent of Australians' pay determined by negotiation.

Professor Olekalns says women's reluctance to talk about pay is one contributing factor to the pay gap, and is urging women to consider how negotiating pay early in their career will benefit them in the long run.

"Just by negotiating, you can usually improve on a salary offer by about 15 per cent. That might not seem a lot in that moment, but it's the threshold for everything that comes afterwards.

"If you start 15 per cent below men and then you think about promotions and salary increases, the gap just continues to widen."

When to ask about pay

It can be nerve-racking to ask about pay when going for a job — and when you do it depends on a few things.

When should you bring up pay?

After Jerry's initial experience, she moved on to another retail role with higher pay, before pursuing her passion and applying for an entry-level job in web design.

The pay there was $9,000 less than what she was making in her previous job. So she decided to do something about it.

She first brought up the possibility of a higher rate in the interview, and then again after the company offered her the job.

Career strategist Kelly Magowan says if you're after a higher rate, asking early if the way to go, as a pay rise when you're six months in is much harder to achieve.

"When you're being offered a new job, your negotiation power is at the highest because they don't want to go and offer the second preference … you're their pick."

Harman Puri, a 21-year-old from Melbourne, has negotiated her salary in almost every role she's been in and says she never accepts the first offer put forward by a company.

"If they're going to go ahead and offer you the job then that means you were the best candidate out there.

"They know you'll bring value to their company so you need to re-establish that value and set your salary accordingly. You need to hold value to yourself."

Go in prepared

Twenty-nine-year-old Claire*, from Melbourne, says when she negotiated the terms of her promotion in the financial services industry, she had a huge amount of research backing her.

"I went in with a number in mind, I got some examples of similar roles that were advertised for that amount and I also did some sneaky talking to people that had comparable roles in the team.

"I asked for an amount I thought I wouldn't get … and had a business case prepared for why I was worth that much.

"It came back approved so I actually ended up getting paid about $5,000 more a year than I had expected purely for just having the audacity to ask and going in prepared and well researched and confident."

You can research the average pay for someone in your position by browsing through job postings, using wage calculators on FairWork's website or through a quick search online.

Don't worry about appearing 'pushy'

Professor Olekalns says women are often concerned with how they'll be perceived if they're too pushy about money.

"Women will worry much more that if they negotiate, they're going to somehow damage long-term relationships because of this stereotype that negotiation is something that's highly competitive and perhaps a little bit aggressive and dominating."

She suggests open-ended questions as one way to tackle this, such as: "Can you do a little better than that?" or "Is that really all that's on offer?"

Another strategy is working your research into your initial question; for example, saying: "That's a little less than I expected based on industry norms" or "That's seems low based on my past experience and what other people with my qualifications are getting".

Are you open about pay?

Talking about how much you earn — especially with a co-worker — can feel uncomfortable. But experts say it's worth it.

This is your comprehensive guide to getting paid! Make your first salary negotiation a bit less awkward by knowing when and how to proceed.

Don’t take that job!

… at least, not until you’ve scrutinized your pay rate and every detail of your offer.

Many students fall into the trap of accepting their first entry-level job offer without realizing what a bit of research can do to drastically change the concessions in their favor. Even fewer realize just how crucial it is to negotiate their pay rate early on.

In 2016, The National Association of Colleges and Employers released an article on the importance of salary negotiations in closing the gender pay gap. While the article’s main goal reflects the importance of women knowing their value in the workplace to close the discriminatory gap, it also recognizes the significance in a practice capable of closing gaps between pay and cost-of-living, expectations, national averages, and more. Moreover, according to NPR, failing to negotiate early on could cost you between $1 million and $1.5 million in lost earnings over time.

While many employers are open to the practice, it’s important to note when and when not to engage in negotiations.

Consider negotiating:

  • Once you have the offer letter in hand. The interview is not the time and place to do it. The letter will include the figure being offered.
  • If you know your value. When negotiating your salary, you can’t just pitch a number. You need a grounds for your counteroffer.
  • If the job requires a specific, unique skill set. With the exception of entry-level roles requiring undifferentiated skills sets like barista, line-cook, waiter, and cashier, most jobs needing some form of unique knowledge will allow for negotiations.

Avoid negotiating:

  • When applying for a government job. Unless the salary is significantly lower than your state’s average for that position, this is unlikely. Government employers do a fairly good job at providing great benefits and fair pay that is usually fixed and commensurate on experience.
  • If the offer is well below your BATNA. That is, your “Best Alternative To a Negotiated Agreement.” You’ve hopefully done your research or had the opportunity to interview at several places. If they’re offering something substantially lower (think 20%) to other alternative offers or fair pay for the position, it may not be worth the hassle. Your best decision may be to kindly decline.
  • If it’s a genuinely generous offer. If the benefits and pay package offered are competitive, leave it as-is. You may have found a great company that truly appreciates your potential, and you shouldn’t risk it by asking for more.

Once you’ve deemed the situation appropriate for negotiations, you need to develop a strategy.

Developing a strategy:

Start by researching the salary offered and whether it is in-range with state and national averages. The Bureau of Labor Statistics can provide you with this information when searching by job position. But if you want estimates straight from the source, try asking past and current employees of the company. The networking feature on Handshake can connect you with alumni who may have worked at that company or in a similar position.

Secondly, analyze the job description and research the company to determine what might be their most preeminent needs.

Lastly, Determine which skills you hold can best assist the company in its endeavors or exceed the requirements of the position.

Your first counteroffer:

Base your first counteroffer on the information you’ve compiled.

  • Is the pay on the lower end of the average range? Do your skills exceed what’s required of you? Start with a figure that’s no more than 10-20% above their initial offer. Remember, you’re applying for entry level, and you shouldn’t expect something on the higher range. Consider negotiating lower if 10-20% places you above the average.
  • Is the pay in-line with average pay, but still believe you can negotiate based on your skills? Consider a range between 5-7% above. You don’t want to risk your chances with a company that is genuinely interested in your financial well-being.

With your number in mind, head into the negotiation room confident with the research and work you have done. But, remember, the negotiations should be a collaborative effort. One where both parties come together to compromise on one another’s necessities. State your case clearly, and communicate to your potential employers why hiring you at your offered figure will be worthwhile.

Any counteroffer will almost certainly come with another counter. Stay within the appropriate ranges, be willing to budge a little bit, and come to an agreement when both parties are satisfied. Even if it wasn’t the figure you hoped for, don’t be scared to negotiate the rest of your package. Believe it or not, vacation time, travel expenses, flexible schedules (coming in to work later, for example), student loan repayment (if offered), and relocation costs are all example benefits you can negotiate.

Do your due diligence and negotiate only the aspects of the package you wish to improve, you might and up walking away with something much better than you expected!

How to negotiate compensation

In our work at venture-backed startups, we are amazed at how hard new employees will negotiate pay, benefits, workspace, duties, titles, etc. and just totally accept their equity compensation.

So, we have prepared six questions that will make you look really smart and help you understand your equity compensation. It may also make you a lot richer when your Company is acquired.

Assumption: You have been offered an incentive stock option for 100,000 common stock shares at an exercise price of $0.05 per share that vests 25% after the first year and then monthly for the next three years.


1. How many shares are outstanding on a fully-diluted basis?

2. Can I receive restricted stock, rather than incentive stock options?

3. Based on the current burn rate, when does the Company plan to raise the next round of equity?

4. Will the Company refresh when the next round is raised?

5. What is the liquidation preference that is in front of the common shares?

6. Is there any acceleration of vesting upon a change in control?


1. Your slice of the pie. Obviously, there is a huge difference in the size and value of your slice if the pie (total shares outstanding) is 1M shares vs. 100M shares. Fully-diluted just converts all preferred stock shares and warrants to common stock shares.

2. The answer will probably be no, but ask the question anyway. Restricted stock just means that you actually own the stock (vs. an option to purchase the stock) with restrictions (vesting schedule). It is a much better deal for taxes.

3. The answer to this is important, as it is a back-door way to ask when does the Company run out of money?

4. When the Company raises additional equity, they issue more shares, so the pie grows and your slice shrinks. This is just an intelligent sounding way to ask if they plan to make you whole by issuing you additional options. This is worth negotiating.

5. Preference is the amount paid to the investors when the Company is acquired, before any amount is paid to stockholders. It is often 1X which means if there was $10M invested in the Company, that amount (plus dividends) is the first money paid, before anything flows down to stockholders, including option holders.

6. Sometimes, companies will accelerate your un vested stock options upon an acquisition. This can be huge to negotiate if you anticipate an acquisition in the near future.

Good luck and remember if you have gotten to the point where there is an offer on the table, the Company wants you and this will be the best­ and maybe only time to negotiate your equity compensation.

How to negotiate compensation

Studying for an MBA degree can be the first step on your journey to the C-suite. The comprehensive business education that the degree program provides will equip you for careers across an array of industries and for roles in upper management and at the executive level.

If your professional trajectory is geared toward the C-suite, there will be multiple steps on the career ladder that you need to climb before you get there. One essential and unavoidable component of this process is negotiating compensation, which, as an article published by careers website Monster pointed out, can become more complicated at the upper management and executive level. This can be attributed to the fact that benefits and bonuses can comprise a more significant portion of your compensation.

If you are eager to learn more about this potentially delicate process and ensure that your negotiations are successful, review the effective tips below:

1. Find the right time

This first tip is crucial and applies across the board: Be sure not to initiate compensation negotiations too early in the hiring process. Joann S. Lublin, writing in The Wall Street Journal, interviewed a number of executives about the negotiation process, many of whom reported that bold assertions and demands regarding pay too early could signify to employers that your desire for compensation outweighs your dedication to the work. In fact, any discussion about money, whether it is your current compensation package or expectations for the future, should not be a feature of the first meeting. Lublin interviewed the CEO of DHR International, Geoff Hoffman, who recounted a time that a candidate boasted about his current pay within minutes of arriving for his interview. Hoffman explained that the moment essentially ruined the candidate’s chances of success and the hiring committee decided to employ another individual.

The “right” time for negotiation is typically after an initial job offer has been extended.

However, as Bartie Scott explained in Inc., you may find that the employer you are interviewing for asks what you are expecting in terms of salary, benefits, bonuses and stock options within the first interview. The key to navigate this potentially tricky question is to explain that you are eager to discuss more about the role before discussions about money begin. Scott noted that it is acceptable to explain to the employer what you currently make, but it is wise not to elaborate any further than that. Remaining somewhat guarded at this stage is important because even if the employer asks you about money, making early demands can reflect poorly on you.

2. Take a critical look at the compensation offer

When an initial compensation offer has been given to you, it is important to take the time to examine it with a critical eye, an article published by Monster explained. Salaries at the executive level are not always composed entirely of base compensation. Some benefit packages may have a smaller base salary but with additional compensation provided via stock or ownership options. Once you have ascertained the sources of your income, it is crucial to research, ideally with the help of a financial planner, how much everything translates to in terms of tangible worth—monetary or otherwise. This is particularly important if a significant portion of the compensation offer is in the form of stocks and shares. Andrew Avellan, a financial planner and founding partner of Philadelphia Wealth Management Co., elaborated on the importance of financial research when it comes to your compensation offer:

“Calculate what each package might be worth using several predictable outcomes,” he explained, “such as stock price with good growth, no growth or loss, as a way to attempt to put some math around a decision.”

3. Be cognizant of your language and tone

After an opening offer has been extended by the employer, and once you have scrutinized the offer, it is time to begin the negotiation process, which must be handled with care. Amy Gallo, writing in the Harvard Business Review, advised ensuring that the language you use is upbeat and solutions-oriented. Do not simply state what you want without being open to suggestions and revisions. The key is to strike a balance of tone—be courteous, yet firm, especially if you feel that the hiring managers are being unfair.

4. Provide room for negotiation

The negotiation process involves compromise, and it is unlikely that you will be successful if you refuse to negotiate. Bartie Scott, writing in Inc., advised conducting research and having a clear idea in mind of the lowest amount you could possibly accept and then creating a compensation range with that as the base minimum. As with salary negotiations at any level, always begin by suggesting a figure that is above what you will likely receive and then negotiate down, being sure not to accept a figure below your determined base minimum. Scott also explained that, at the executive level, it is important to negotiate on benefits and perks that may be overlooked in the initial compensation package, such as a company car and expenses-paid travel.

Consider Villanova University

Before you are able to begin negotiating salaries at the executive level, there are a number of career steps you will need to take to get there. An important first step on this professional journey could be returning to the classroom to study for your MBA. If you are eager to take this step but are unsure if you will be able to accommodate study in your busy schedule, consider applying to Villanova University’s online MBA program. Led by renowned faculty, the online program offers you the same high-level education offered on campus, but with the ease and flexibility of working at a time that suits you best. Learn more about Villanova University’s online MBA program.

It is impossible to talk about compensation management without referring to the process of negotiation and bargaining that is an integral part of compensation management. As anybody who has worked in the formal or even the informal sector knows, the process of negotiating one’s salary and perks is fundamental to the process of hiring and selection. In this article, we look at some of the strategies employed by professionals’ world over when they negotiate with their prospective employers regarding their compensation.

Have a Plan in Place

The first element of negotiation is to plan for the process by deciding on how much more you want and how much you think the employer is willing to give. The fine art of knowing how much you should ask for and at what point should you strike the deal is something that experienced professionals know and rookies should learn. Without having a clear idea of the target level of compensation that you are aiming for, the negotiation process would turn out to be an exercise in futility.

Communicate Your Needs

Once you have arrived at a figure that you think you deserve, the next step is to communicate the same to the prospective employer without delay. The important point to note here is that the way in which you articulate your needs is as important as the need to drive a bargain. For instance, without expressing yourself clearly to the HR manager of the prospective employer, there is little chance that he or she would understand your needs and respond appropriately. Hence, once you have sorted out the target compensation that you want, you should also have a strategy to communicate it to the employer.

Timing is Everything

You need to remember that there is something called being too early when you negotiate and too late as well. Hence, the timing of your articulation forms the basis for a successful negotiation. For instance, if you start your demands early on in the hiring process, the prospective employer might stall the process or even put a stop to your hiring. On the other hand, if you put forward your demands as you are about to join the firm, there is precious little anyone can do about your demands. Hence, you should have a keen eye for when you should communicate your demands.

The three aspects of having a plan, communicating the need and then timing it in such a way as to derive maximum advantage are essential to the negotiation process. Of course, there are many firms that do not entertain any sort of negotiation and there are firms that put up pretence of negotiation when in reality, they do not budge at all. In these cases, it is better to adopt a wait and watch policy and make your move once they get into the details of your compensation.

In conclusion, a successful negotiation hinges on the willingness of both the parties to hear each other and an ability to arrive at a common denominator in a spirit of accommodation. Hence, do not be overtly rigid and at the same time do not give in to the employer totally.

How to negotiate compensation

Most women don’t negotiate for a higher salary during the job recruitment process, unlike men, a phenomenon that continues to puzzle researchers.

In 2020, 57% of women reported they had never negotiated their salaries, according to a survey of 1,200 workers conducted by HR consultant Randstad examining the effects of the pandemic

One reason offered up by researchers is a lack of confidence.

Women also just don’t know they’re meant to ask, according to Luvvie Ajayi Jones, author and digital strategist, speaking on a January episode of LinkedIn’s Hello Monday podcast with Jessi Hempel.

Ajayi Jones said it took her almost a decade of working to find out she was meant to negotiate salary.

“Nobody ever told me that I’m supposed to ask for more money, that the first offer is never the best offer,” she said.

Salary can be a difficult conversation to have during the recruitment process, but applicants should know they are generally in a position of power when they are first offered a job, she said. In the US, the average employer spends $4,000 during the recruitment process and uses around 24 working days to hire one new employee, according to a 2019 cost-per-hire estimate by jobs site Glassdoor.

“When people find the right person that they want for something, having to go back and find a plan B is expensive, it takes more time, and it’s labor-intensive,” Ajayi Jones said.

It’s worth betting that a firm will agree to your counter-offer versus going through the whole process again with another candidate.

As for how to start the negotiation: “You take the personal out of it,” she said. “It is not a personal choice for you to ask for more money, it is a business decision, that if you don’t do it, you’re not doing business well.”

“When somebody drops a number at you, the other thing is, you don’t ever have to give a quick answer,” she added. “You don’t have to say yes or no immediately.” Instead, buy yourself some time and figure out how much you actually want to earn.

If you’re uncomfortable negotiating verbally, try sending a written counter-offer. And “if for some reason you do have to do it verbally, you have to practise this if you’re uncomfortable about it because you want to drop a number with an exclamation point and not a question mark,” she said.

And don’t be afraid of silence. “Just give them the number,” she said. “Because they’ve already offered you this job, they already know you’re valuable, they already know you’re the person they want, right, so you don’t have to justify yourself anymore.”

“In negotiation, the person who can stand silence more, wins.”

And it is important that women do ask for more, she said.

In the US alone, women in 2021 were paid an average of 82 cents for every dollar earned by working men. In the UK, the gap in average hourly earnings between men and women was 15.4% in 2021, according to the UK’s Office for National Statistics.

“I think it’s a form of economic justice for women to know that not only is it expected of you to ask for more money, when you do it you make your life better and someone else’s life better,” Ajayi Jones concluded. “Think about the fact that you being bold, you being authentic, you asking for money is a form of economic justice, it’s a form of activism and philanthropy.”

You encounter lots of eager and excited people as you interview for open positions. Anyone who takes the time to come in and meet is going to be interested in the opportunity. But candidates not only want to get the job. They also want you to pay them the salary they have in mind.

Negotiating a salary that is acceptable to your company and new hire can be tricky. In this guide, you’ll learn how you can determine what to offer and the approach you should take to negotiating salaries with different types of candidates.

Money isn’t everything

Happy employees do their best work. Employees who are concerned about money lose motivation and explore other job opportunities.

Negotiating a salary with a new hire isn’t the same as negotiating for a used car. Your goal shouldn’t be to get the candidate to settle on the lowest possible number. Strive to come to an agreement that works for your company and pleases the candidate so they’re inspired to do great work everyday.

Saving a little money on payroll likely won’t affect your company much. But convincing a great person to join the team can have a lasting impact.

How the modern job seeker thinks about salary

Everyone goes into a job interview with a salary range in mind. The bottom end is the bare minimum they’ll accept and the top end is often an optimistic number they hope to get but aren’t counting on. When asked about desired salary, candidates will usually respond with a number that falls somewhere in the middle of their range.

A candidate’s salary range can be influenced by a number of factors. Most people will use their current (or previous salary) as the bottom number. They’re hoping to move onto a job that will pay slightly more or may be willing to accept the same compensation with a different company.

They’ll then research what similar positions pay in their industry and area. Between professional social networks and the various websites that provide salary data, today’s job seeker is more informed than ever before.

The rare birds who don’t prioritize salary

From time to time, you’ll encounter a candidate who values other qualities in a job over salary. They might be looking for work-life balance, an appealing culture or simply a fresh start with a new company or career. These candidates will still have a desired salary in mind but it won’t be the deciding factor in whether or not they accept your offer.

How companies should determine what to offer

Like your candidates, you should also have a salary range in mind when the hiring process begins. The obvious starting point is to offer what you pay employees who work in a similar role. You never want to pay someone significantly more or less than their counterparts. The reality is people get to know each other in the workplace and pay rates are eventually shared.

If you’re hiring for a new position, determining a salary range isn’t so simple. You should first get familiar with the market and learn what the going rate is for the skills and experience you are seeking. You can do similar research as your candidates, as well as ask for insight from knowledgeable people in your company and network.

Then you should consider your budget. Can your company afford to pay what a reasonable candidate will ask for? If not, you should probably reevaluate the position’s requirements.

Ask about salary sooner than later

If you do have the budget to pay someone what they’ll likely ask for, you can proceed with interviews. Since both you and your candidates have salary in mind, it’s often best to address the elephant in the room right away. You can ask about desired salary during your first communications with a candidate or even include the question on your online application using your recruiting and hiring software. If someone has an unrealistic number in mind, you can move onto other candidates early in the hiring process.

If you do your research, you’ll often find your salary range aligns with your candidates. Negotiations will be quick and painless since both parties will be working toward a similar figure.

Coming to a mutually-beneficial agreement

The interviews are finished and everyone agrees on the best candidate. You reach out and make an offer within the salary range you set at the beginning of the hiring process. Some people will accept the offer, while others will negotiate. If you receive a counteroffer that is still in your range, it’s often best to say yes and end the negotiations right there. You don’t want to lose someone bartering over a small amount of money.

But what if the candidate wants more than you budgeted for? In these cases, honesty is the best policy. If you interviewed other good applicants, you can tell the candidate they’re your first but not only choice and they’re asking for more than your budget allows. If you have wiggle room, you can offer a bit more but don’t go outside your range when you have other options.

Pleasing an ideal candidate

If the candidate is clearly your best option, you should make an effort to come to an agreement with them. Again, be honest and tell them their desired salary is outside your budget but don’t immediately say no. Meet with your team and attempt to come up with an offer the candidate will accept. Perhaps you can free up some funds that can be used to be meet the candidate’s number. If not, get creative and sweeten the deal with stock options, a flexible schedule, or other perks that won’t break the bank. Making an effort to meet your candidate’s desired salary can often be enough to convince them they’re being presented with a great opportunity – even if your final offer is a below what they asked for.

A solid plan makes for easy salary negotiations

Some people negotiate and others don’t. If you make a fair offer, most the time it will be accepted. Research standard pay for the position you’re hiring for and budget accordingly and your offer will likely be exactly what the new hire had in mind.

More in — Recruiting & hiring

25 Great Job Interview Questions You Might Not Have Considered Asking
4 min read

Asking Situational and Behavioral Questions in Job Interviews
3 min read

How to Provide Candidates With a Positive Interview Experience
6 min read

How to negotiate compensation

Making an offer to a job candidate is a question of balance. This is not about winning, it’s about reaching agreement on a salary that makes both you and your candidate feel valued and fairly compensated. Compensation negotiation includes careful planning and high-level strategy.

Starting your salary discussions from of a place of respect is crucial. As a hiring manager, making these offers strategically is important to the long-term success of your business and this role. What are the most important things to keep in mind when you are extending a salary offer? These salary negotiation tips for employers will advise you on making a fair offer for both yourself and your potential hire.

1. Establish salary ranges

For each position you’re hiring for, be sure to have a lower and upper band to orient your approach to the salary negotiation. Your lowest offer should still be in line with industry standards and be attractive to your candidate. Industry standards can be found from government resources like the Bureau of Labor Statistics, or private survey sites like Glassdoor or Know that your candidate will be using these resources to determine their salary requirements and negotiating salary as well.

Align your hiring team

With Workable’s hiring plan, you’ll move out of the spreadsheets and into one centralized workspace, where info is always current and next steps are always clear.

2. Be transparent but not to your own detriment

Candidates want to be clear about how much they’re worth, and how much they can accept that’s fair to you, and more than fair to them. How can you address these requests, while still being true to the constraints on your company financially? “Ask what the candidate is looking for or expecting in terms of comp,” says Molly Howard, Director of Operations at Ovuline as her top salary negotiation tip for employers. “This sounds silly, but ends up avoiding a lot of the uncertainty down the road. And, surprisingly, most people answer.”

3. Put people first, numbers second

How can you appeal to your candidate’s wants and needs before even beginning a salary negotiation? By understanding what’s important to your candidate — compensation, vacation, health benefits, flexibility. One of our hiring tips for employers is to create a package that is more than just competing for the best number. Create a package that makes both you and your candidate feel good. Many of these other parts of compensation, like work-from-home, can come at little cost to your company. Howard suggests asking “what else are you looking for in a comp package?” before negotiating salary. “This gives me insight into how a candidate is thinking about comp — if it’s all about $, or if there are other things that are important.”

4. Additional monetary compensation

Other advice for employers to create a compelling offer without sacrificing base salary include a signing bonus, performance bonuses, or shares in the company that accrue at various milestones. Howard suggests leaning into these options early in your salary negotiation, so that your candidate can evaluate the full value of their package. “Talk through stock options preemptively, if that is part of the comp,” she says, another of her salary negotiation tips for employers, “so that the candidate can evaluate the amount of worth and value they have before they have dug in a particular number. I like to do this by talking through the offer in a call just after I send the offer letter, when possible.”

Other advice from Howard includes giving some time for a candidate to consider what you’re presenting to them. Being a resource for your candidate during this time will give them the opportunity to ask questions and adjust the offer.

“Give people time to process the offer and don’t be too pushy at the get go if it seems like there is hesitancy on the candidates part,” she says. “I say something like, ‘I know this is a lot of information at once. I’m here for you during this process. Why don’t you go home/think on it and we can connect in a few days.’”

Due to Covid-19, work is evolving. In June 2020, a study by Gartner predicted that 48 percent of employees will be working remotely for some (if not all) of the time post-pandemic, compared to 30 percent pre-pandemic. And in May, Facebook announced it would allow employees to permanently work from home—with a catch. Facebook employees' salaries will be based on their local cost of living if they don’t live near the corporate HQ.

These and other new work arrangements brought on by Covid-19 will most certainly affect salary negotiations. And though you still need to strategize and prepare to successfully negotiate a high salary and compensation package, now that many positions are remote ones there are a new set of rules for salary negotiating.

Here are five tips for negotiating a lucrative salary for a remote position.

1. Highlight ROI

Throughout the interview process, address questions with answers that depict the return on investment (ROI) your decision making and team building has brought to your past employers. Showing repeatedly how you've made companies money will go a long way toward getting the salary you want. This is true now more ever, as employers are frantically trying to cut costs in a down economy.

2. Establish demand

Find out why the company you're interviewing with is looking to hire in your lower-cost-of-living area and not in the local immediate area of its headquarters. If the answer revolves around reducing costs, you might have a harder time convincing this particular employer why they should pay you more. But if the answer is the talent pool is scarce for the position they're looking to fill, then you might've found leverage to keep your high-salary request alive. So, establish exactly why an employer is looking in your area, and then point out how you’re perfect for the position.

3. Shift from local to global

As you learn more about the job, inquire about the geographical locations of the teams you'll be interfacing with and the cultural knowledge you'll need to bring to the position. The more global the nature of your job, the more it'll warrant additional compensation, regardless of where you live. Creating value and working productively remotely with a multicultural team and/or multi-geographic team is a compensated skill set all in its own class. Leverage this as you learn more about the job.

4. Focus on skills and results

When you focus on your skills and results, it’s easier for the compensation decision to be based on those skills and results, as opposed to other factors. It’s questionable for companies to focus pay grades on a lifestyle choice such as location. Companies wouldn’t offer higher salaries to people because they're married or have kids, would they? Or offer a higher salaries to people with expensive hobbies like race car driving, right? So why should where you decide to live affect your salary? Compensation should be based on the skills and the results you bring to the table. Period.

5. Consider non-monetary components

Will the company pay for your MBA? What about extensive time-off allotments? Are the medical benefits second to none? Will the company give you a childcare allowance working from home? These are options to consider introducing to the discussion alongside your high-salary requests based on research. These options don’t automatically have to be in lieu of a higher compensation. Stay firm and seek out those benefits that matter most to you.

A final note

The bottom line is you, the job seeker and employee, shouldn't have to take a financial hit when it comes to salary negotiations for remote work. No matter where you live, you should be paid fairly—your market worth—whether you're working remotely for a Fortune 500 company or a boutique leader in your field. So don't be afraid to negotiate, using the above tips to get what you deserve.

Lisa Rangel is the Founder and Managing director of Chameleon Resumes LLC (a Forbes Top 100 Career Website). She is a Certified Professional Resume Writer, Job Landing Consultant, and Recruiter. Lisa has been a moderator for LinkedIn’s Premium Group since 2012. Chameleon Resumes reviews the goals of each client to ensure career documents serve their goals while meeting the needs of the prospective employers. Rangel has authored 16 career resources, and has an active YouTube Channel with regular tips and advice.

How to make caramel syrup

How to make caramel syrup

Some of the links below are affiliate links. This means that, at zero cost to you, I will earn an affiliate commission if you click through the link and finalize a purchase.

Starbucks Caramel Syrup for Coffee and Tea

If you love the flavor of Starbucks caramel syrup in your favorite coffee and tea drinks then this caramel simple recipe is for you.

Starbucks caramel syrup, pumped into coffee drinks like a Caramel Frappuccino or my recipe for an Iced Caramel English Breakfast Tea Latte, doesn’t quite taste like most homemade caramel coffee syrup recipes.

In fact, Starbucks caramel syrup tastes a lot like butterscotch candy.

How do I know this? Well, I tasted a few spoonfuls of Starbucks caramel syrup straight from the bottle and honestly, the flavor is unmistakable.

Because of this, my caramel simple syrup recipe calls for one additional ingredient to take the caramel flavor up a notch so it tastes pretty close to the real Starbucks caramel syrup.

How to make caramel syrup

By the way, if you want to make your favorite caramel-flavored Starbucks drinks at home, but don’t want to make this copycat syrup recipe, you can actually buy a bottle of the exact syrup your barista uses.

Caramel Syrup & Caramel Sauce both start with the making of caramel. I am sure most of you are ardent fans of caramel in the form of toffee. But do you know that it is so easy to make at home? I use caramel syrup to make my Christmas cake and caramel cake and the sauce as a topping for desserts and filling and glaze for cakes. Though they sound so intimidating, both of these are pretty easy to make. I don’t know why, but I have never done a proper video for these two. I did a syrup recipe years back, but not the sauce. So I decided to combine both in a single video for you to try.

Caramel Syrup & Caramel Sauce

Caramel Syrup & Caramel Sauce both has sugar as the main ingredient. While caramel syrup is made with just two ingredients, caramel sauce needs some extra ingredients to make it rich and fit for topping. You can’t use syrup as topping as it is going to be slightly bitter in taste.

Types of Caramel

There are two versions of caramel. One is dry and the other is wet. If you are a beginner, it is better to start with wet caramel, as it is easier to make. Both involve caramelizing the sugar. In dry caramel, just sugar is heated and allowed to melt and caramelize. The problem with this method is the sugar might burn easily if you take your eyes off the pan. The wet method is made with adding a little water to sugar and it is very forgiving. And best suited for beginners. So start your caramel journey with wet caramel and then you can progress to dry caramel.

Avoiding crystallization of sugar

While making caramel, there is a difficulty involved. The sugar would crystalize and make your syrup or sauce grainy. There are some methods you can incorporate to avoid it. By adding lemon juice, lemon peel or cream of tartar or a tbs of liquid glucose, you can avoid it. I haven’t used any of it in the recipe, but if you face the issue, do add any of the mentioned ingredients to your sauce or syrup.

How to make caramel syrup

It’s something we all hear over and over again about food.

Well, let me tell you…it’s SOOOOO true when it comes to caramel.

It’s easy to pick up a jar of caramel sauce from the grocery store, but it won’t taste nearly as good as the freshly homemade stuff.

And as much of a scary reputation that it has, it’s totally doable for cooks of all levels. There are a lot of comments below from people who have had success with this recipe, and you don’t even need a thermometer to make this homemade caramel sauce!

How to make caramel syrup

Caramel is a great finishing ingredient for cheesecakes, over ice cream, or for dipping with apples. I also loving using it for this Caramel Apple Crisp, one of my all-time favorite desserts.

How to Make Caramel Sauce:

To get started, place a cup of granulated sugar in a saucepan, and give it a little shake so the sugar lays flat in an even layer. Then add 1/3 cup of water, which should moisten all of the sugar:

How to make caramel syrup

Turn the heat to medium and cook (do not stir!) until the sugar dissolves into a clear syrup.

It will look cloudy at first, but eventually give way to a clear, bubbling liquid. You can see some spots of cloudiness below where the sugar is dissolving, as well as some clear spots:

How to make caramel syrup

Continue to cook the caramel, and watch as it begins to take on an amber color:

How to make caramel syrup

Do not leave the caramel’s side, and have 3/4 cup of heavy cream standing by.

Once the caramel has gotten a golden color, like honey, turn off the heat and immediately add the heavy cream:

How to make caramel syrup

This will stop the caramel from continuing to cook.

Now add two tablespoons of butter:

How to make caramel syrup

Continue stirring until the caramel has an even texture.

(And if the caramel seizes up when you add the cream and butter, do not worry! It should smooth out with more stirring and residual heat).

The caramel sauce will look foamy, like this:

How to make caramel syrup

Eventually as the heat dissipates, the caramel will settle down:

How to make caramel syrup

Right now the mixture will look very thin and runny, but the caramel sauce will thicken as it cools.

I find the caramel has the best drizzling consistency at room temperature.

How to make caramel syrup

The caramel is now ready to be enjoyed! I love using it in this Caramel Apple Crisp recipe.

For another caramel dessert, this Salted Caramel Chocolate Ganache Tart is also fantastic!

I’d got into a bit of a habit of buying a bottle of caramel coffee syrup in my weekly shop recently. It really does make sitting out my garden with a cup of coffee feel a little bit special and indulgent.

How to make caramel syrup

Those little bottles of syrup can be pricey though and it does add up. Even the supermarket version comes in around $6.50 for 250 ml. That’s fairly steep for something that involves around 30 cents worth of ingredients and less than 15 minutes to make, including the cleanup.

More importantly to me at the moment though is that I noticed that in addition to the expected sugar and water it included 5 numbered ingredients representing artificial colour, flavour, stabilizers and food acids. Additives that I actively try to exclude from my diet.

Knowing that the syrup really only required the sugar and water to create a caramel flavour I set about making my own version and working out the right level of dilution for using the caramel coffee syrup in my cuppa. The resulting mix is extremely close in colour, consistency and flavour to the version I had been buying but at a fraction of the price and without any additional compounds that aren’t required in the process, or my body.

When making the syrup at home it does need to be stored in the fridge to keep it fresh but will keep fine in there for a month or two. I find this quantity works well for us and it’s so quick and easy to make a fresh batch when I need to that I prefer not to make up a bigger quantity. Of course, if you do need a bigger batch it’s very easy to multiply up the recipe. It would make an excellent kitchen gift packaged into a cute glass bottle.

I use raw sugar in all my baking, I prefer the flavour and it’s what I have in the cupboard but it does make this recipe slightly more complicated as the colour will be amber as soon as the sugar melts even though it has yet to caramelize and develop it’s flavour so I need to rely more on the fragrance and timing.

If you remove it too early you have a simple sugar syrup that is useful for making cocktails but not that delicious flavour you want in your coffee. To make it a little easier if you are new to making caramel I would suggest you use processed white sugar. That way the colour will be an excellent guide to the progress of your caramel as it turns from a clear liquid to that gorgeous golden amber.

This is a rich, sweet caramel sauce that can be made at the last minute that is great on bread pudding, gingerbread, apple pie, chopped apples, ice cream, and anything else you want to put it on.


Recipe Summary


  • 1 cup packed brown sugar
  • ½ cup butter
  • ¼ cup milk
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract (Optional)
  • Step 1

Bring brown sugar, butter, and milk to a gentle boil and cook until thickened, 1 to 2 minutes. Remove from heat; add vanilla extract.

Reviews ( 321 )

Most helpful positive review

I AM POSTING BECAUSE THE MOST HELPFUL CRITICAL REVIEW IS INCORRECT! TRY THIS! (in my eyes; none of that happened when I followed the recipe exactly) I have made it twice now and would definitely make it again- doubling and cutting the recipe in half worked great. I also tried both evaporated and regular milk, both of which will work fantastic.. I’ve seen many similar reviews on here but wanted to write this one because this is so good and simple anyone can do it, The most critical review that says they put the sauce in the fridge and it separated/didn’t taste right almost stopped me from making this after I didn’t listen reviews on a brownie recipe and having bad results. THAT’S NOT THE CASE! Maybe it was the heavy cream, maybe she put it in the fridge warm/hot (always cool everything before refrigerating). Or maybe she just didn’t cook it long enough as 2 minutes isn’t the total cooking time. After bringing it to a full boil and cooking, it took more like 5-7 minutes which made it just right. It stayed perfect in the fridge. Great texture before and after refrigeration; just like a caramel dipping sauce. Just a little microwaving and its ready to drizzle. SO glad I made this. Literally so simple and tastes just like the caramel sauce on the french roast at iHop!

Most helpful critical review

I made it just as specified in the recipe and found it was a bit thin, even after it had cooled. I reheated and boiled it another 3 minutes and that helped. It is good tasting, but next time I will use evaporated milk or cream as others suggest, and hope it will be a bit thicker.

  • 5 star values:

I AM POSTING BECAUSE THE MOST HELPFUL CRITICAL REVIEW IS INCORRECT! TRY THIS! (in my eyes; none of that happened when I followed the recipe exactly) I have made it twice now and would definitely make it again- doubling and cutting the recipe in half worked great. I also tried both evaporated and regular milk, both of which will work fantastic.. I’ve seen many similar reviews on here but wanted to write this one because this is so good and simple anyone can do it, The most critical review that says they put the sauce in the fridge and it separated/didn’t taste right almost stopped me from making this after I didn’t listen reviews on a brownie recipe and having bad results. THAT’S NOT THE CASE! Maybe it was the heavy cream, maybe she put it in the fridge warm/hot (always cool everything before refrigerating). Or maybe she just didn’t cook it long enough as 2 minutes isn’t the total cooking time. After bringing it to a full boil and cooking, it took more like 5-7 minutes which made it just right. It stayed perfect in the fridge. Great texture before and after refrigeration; just like a caramel dipping sauce. Just a little microwaving and its ready to drizzle. SO glad I made this. Literally so simple and tastes just like the caramel sauce on the french roast at iHop!

We used Evaporated milk… Doubled the recipe and It came out amazing. Everyone loves it! Only thing is, I believe this is actually butterscotch sauce. What I have read is that caramel sauce is made with white sugar and butterscotch is made with brown. FYI!

This easy Keto Sugar Free Caramel Syrup and Sauce is a workhorse in the kitchen. Made in less than 15 minutes, this versatile sauce is perfect for mixing into coffee drinks and making salted caramel desserts.

How to make caramel syrup

We’re suckers for a good caramel and our sugar free caramel syrup does not disappoint. We’ve made plenty of recipes before with a version of this keto caramel sauce, like our Keto Magic Bars, but it was time that this caramel had its very own dedicated post.

This also means that this caramel recipe has been tested so many times that it’s practically foolproof. We’ve tried all sorts of sweeteners, different kinds of milk, and different kinds of butter. We know what works best and what doesn’t. We hope that this caramel becomes a sweet staple in your kitchen as it has ours.

Let’s get to the specifics!

Ingredients in Sugar Free Caramel Syrup

You only need a few simple ingredients for this one-pot keto caramel. These are the ingredients that we’ve found work best after testing this recipe 20+ times. All of the versions were delicious but not all of them kept well.

Erythritol tends to crystalize in the refrigerator and we wanted to keep the caramel sauce, well, saucy and also smooth. We give substitutions below but do note that the end product will be either slightly or vastly different.

Coconut milk – full-fat canned coconut milk

Vegan butter – we use Miyokos unsalted butter

Allulose – we’ve found that allulose is the perfect low-carb sweetener for caramel sauce. In the past, we’ve used granulated erythritol, brown erythritol, monk fruit, and coconut sugar (although the coconut sugar is not low-carb).

Brown erythritol – just a pinch for added color, it also gives the caramel a luscious brown sugar flavor

Vanilla extract – pure vanilla extract is best, bonus points if it’s bourbon vanilla 😍

Sea salt – not table salt, please

How to make caramel syrup

How to make Keto Caramel

Depending on how long you cook the caramel, you can control the viscosity from a liquid that’s grea4t for making caramel flavored drinks to a thicker sauce for drizzling over ice cream to a very thick caramel used for making candies and desserts. Like we said, super versatile.

This may just be the easiest caramel to make too. All you need is a heavy-bottomed pot. We love this 2.5-quart cast-iron saucepot. Cast-iron sauce pots are rare and we couldn’t justify a $200+ pot from a higher-end cast-iron maker but we stumbled across this one on Amazon and we love it!

Here’s how to make sugar-free caramel syrup:

  1. Place all of the ingredients in a 2.5-quart heavy-bottomed pot over medium-high heat. Bring to a boil while whisking occasionally. Once boiling, reduce to a simmer while stirring frequently.
  2. Depending on how thick you want your caramel to be, cook until the mixture is caramel colored and resembles one of the following states:
  • For a thin caramel syrup – cook until the sauce barely coats the back of a spoon and easily drips off. The sauce will be lighter in color. You’re aiming for a consistency of coffee syrup, the kind they have at coffee shops.
  • For a thicker caramel sauce – cook until a medium golden color forms and the sauce coats the back of a spoon without easily dripping off. It should look glassy.
  • For a very thick caramel – for making harder candies and desserts – cook until a darker amber color forms and the caramel pulls away from the sides of the pot when stirred. It should coat the back of a spoon in a thick coat.

***The caramel sauce will thicken even more when it cools so be careful not to overcook. If you do overcook it, you can still save it as long as it’s not burnt. To save a caramel that’s too thick, bring it back to a simmer over medium heat and add a bit more coconut milk. That should do the trick.

  • How to make caramel syrup
  • How to make caramel syrup

Sugar-free sweetener options

Granulated Erythritol – works great if you’re using the entire batch immediately while warm. Otherwise, the caramel will crystalize when cooled.

Brown Erythritol – the same as above, the flavor and consistency are fantastic while warm but it will get very grainy when cooled.

Granulated Allulose – a straight-up replacement for regular white sugar. It gets sticky just like sugar and doesn’t crystalize so you can serve the caramel cold or refrigerate it until ready to use.

Monk Fruit – we aren’t super fans, maybe it’s just us, but we don’t care for monk fruit in any recipes.

Salted caramel syrup by Top Creamery is made of pure quality salted raw materials from Europe that perfectly blends pleasingly when mixed with your beverage. Premium caramel taste, lingering on your mouth that your clients will absolutely love.

Regarding the cost, this brand of syrup is the choice of multiple franchise companies. The production cost relative to the manufacturing process is noticeably lower than those directly imported as finished goods from abroad.

Top Creamery maintains its product quality by importing the highest grade of raw materials from well-known origin Countries. This syrup can be served for hot and cold applications to middle and high-end customers.

Product Details

Net Weight — 1000ml
Shelf Life — 12months from the production date
Storage Condition — Room Temperature
Made With High-Quality Imported Ingredients

Why Order Our Salted Caramel Syrup?

TOP Quality / Best In The Market — to bring our customers the best fruit syrups in the market, our products are carefully selected and tested from reputable suppliers by our Research and Development Team; and

Cost-Effective — quality and cost efficiency are ingredients of our business. Hence, we offer the best milk tea supplies in the market to help you grow your business.

This syrup has added sweetener content and needs fewer amounts for your coffee application to balance the sweetness, flavors, and coffee taste, thus delivering a cost-effective result for your business. A cost-effective product means more profit for your business to spend on your marketing. Isn’t it exciting?

Coffee Recipes Measurement Guides

Hot Application
8oz – 15ml
12oz – 20ml
16oz – 30ml

Cold Application
16oz – 30ml
22oz – 40ml

Hot Salted Caramel Coffee Application
For an 8oz serving – Pour 15ml Salted Caramel syrup into 120ml of steamed milk and one (1) espresso shot.
For a 12oz serving, pour 20ml Salted Caramel syrup into 150ml of steamed milk and two (2) espresso shots.
For a 16oz serving – Pour 30ml Salted Caramel syrup into 150ml of steamed milk and two (2) espresso shots.

Iced Salted Caramel Coffee
For 16oz serving – Pour 30ml Salted Caramel syrup into 150ml of milk with 300grms of ice and two (2) espresso shots.
For 22oz serving – Pour 40ml Salted Caramel syrup into 150ml of milk with 500grms of ice and two (2) espresso shots.

Salted Caramel Frappuccino
For 16oz serving – Mix in a blender for approximately 40seconds 30ml Salted Caramel syrup, 60ml of milk, 30grms of frappe base with 400grms of ice, and two (2) espresso shots.
For 22oz serving – Mix in a blender for approximately 40seconds, 40ml-50ml Salted Caramel syrup, 60ml of milk, 40grms of frappe base with 600grms of ice, and two (2) espresso shots.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

Where to use Salted Caramel Syrup?

Milk tea
Coffee (Hot & Cold)
Flavors for other beverages

How is your product different from others in the market?

We pride our milk tea products to be the best in the market today — with ingredients sourced from Europe, our Research and Development Team ensures that we import high-quality raw ingredients and produce the taste every milk tea store owner and milk tea patrons would love.

We also support locals as we source our sugar ingredients from the fresh produce of selected farms in the country. In effect, we reduce the cost of our finished products because we lessen taxes, labor costs, and transportation costs. These are all calculated for our company to attain one of our missions, which is — to help grow your business.

I’m interested in buying your product. Would it be possible to ask for a free sample of this product?

For now, we do not provide a free sample of this product. However, we would love to conduct a demo on preparing this product here in our kitchen studio located in Las Piñas and get a free taste of it. Also, you may want to arrange for a purchase of this product for your own tasting.

Can I order online? If so, how many days will I receive my order?

Yes, you can order/ contact us directly via Facebook or through this website.
Regarding the shipping and delivery, it differs: customers within Metro Manila usually receive their order within five (5) business days, provided that they reach the minimum amount of purchase (P10,000). Please check our Shipping and Delivery Policy for further details.

For further inquiries, please visit our FAQs page here.

If you need assistance from our main office, please do not hesitate to call us at 02-2415040 or email us directly at [email protected] and we will make your inquires our priority.

For feedback or comments about this product, please do not hesitate to contact us. Your opinion matters to us.

Sharing Is Caring! If you liked this, share this with your friends & family.

Well, I made it a point to get the step by step pictures of making Caramel, but I forgot to take a final picture. That’s why you see the Christmas Fruit Cake picture here 😉

Ever since I posted the Traditional Kerala Fruit Cake Recipe, every year during Christmas, I get queries about Caramel syrup. Most of the time the queries would be about how to reach the correct colour, or why the syrup became hard once it’s cooled and so on…

So, I thought I’d share the step by step pictures of making Caramel syrup here. Before that, let me tell you something, I’m very bad at science. When I finished 10th grade, I was so happy to say goodbye to science once and for all.

Honestly, I’m a bit embarrassed to say this, but both my parents have a Science background. To top it off, my Appa has Masters in physics and did a short stint as a Physics Professor before becoming a Banker. He also tends to look down upon non-science people in a way that reminds me of Sheldon Cooper from The Big Bang Theory 😉 But, it’s just not my flavour!

What I’m trying to say is, my explanation of making Caramel syrup is very much in layman terms, please DO NOT ask me about how and why, but I can assure you, it works. I’ve been doing this for almost 10 years now. Now you cannot use the excuse of “not knowing how to make caramel” as an explanation for not baking Christmas Fruit Cake. You can also use the same method to make caramel syrup for Caramel Custard Pudding.

Sharing Is Caring! If you liked this, share this with your friends & family.

How to make caramel syrup

Spike your dark roast with this creamy caramel coffee syrup made from nothing but simple pantry staples! No additives here.

I don’t know about you, but this time of year when Starbucks is busting out the PSL’s and other yummy flavored coffee drinks, I get a mad craving for fancy coffees like this one that I can make at home for less cost. It’s no surprise that with the holidays coming up I veer toward traditional flavors, like this irresistible caramel syrup that tastes incredible in coffee and on homemade ice cream too.

How to make caramel syrup

Actually, this coffee syrup recipe is more of a caramel sauce than a syrup since this caramel recipe involves heating whipping cream with dark, handsome brown sugar and a touch of vanilla. No matter what you consider it, I call it DEE-LISH!

You might be surprised to find out how easy it is to make this caramel sauce. So simple, in fact, that you’ll probably want to double the recipe and pour it into a few pretty jars as co-worker gifts or handmade holiday hostess gifts for all those fiestas you’re sure to attend over the next few months.

How to make caramel syrup

I shared a jar with my neighbor last week and a photo of my caramel sauce gift appeared soon after on her husband’s Facebook feed. It’s just that good!

This is friend-making material, folks. Unforgettable, show-stopper kind of caramel coffee syrup goodness.

This keto caramel syrup is the missing ingredient you didn’t know you were looking for. Use this sugar free dessert syrup to create a keto caramel sundae with low carb ice cream, or to add a sweetly sophisticated caramel drizzle to a mug cake.

Smooth and sweet, this syrup is an exceptionally delicious sugar-free addition to your keto cupboard. and if you start drinking it out of the bottle? We don’t judge!

  • Low carb: 1g net carb per serving
  • Sweet and beautifully golden caramel
  • A keto syrup you can trust: no sugar, no sugar alcohols and no sucralose
  • Thick and rich: great for creating keto sundaes and low carb caramel desserts

How to make caramel syrup


Soluble Corn Fiber (Non-GMO Resistant Dextrin), Natural Caramel Flavor, Natural Caramel Color, Monk Fruit Extract.

Not a low calorie food. See nutrition information for calorie, sugar, and saturated fat content.

Product Information

ChocZero’s syrup line is perfect for adhering to a low carb lifestyle. We stand behind our product and pick only the highest quality, all natural ingredients available.

Satisfaction guaranteed: We’re confident that you will love how our syrup tastes. If you try us and don’t love it we’ll refund orders up to $35.

Want to make a delicious latte at home? Try this homemade salted caramel syrup that is perfect for coffee. It’s easy to make and only requires a few ingredients.

This shop has been compensated by Collective Bias, Inc. and its advertiser. All opinions are mine alone. #SKSHarvest #SeasonalSolutions #CollectiveBias

How to make caramel syrup

I normally drink hot tea in the morning. It’s been my morning drink of choice since I was a kid. My favorite is earl grey with milk and sugar.

I do enjoy coffee though, especially on a cool evening. I often find myself getting in the habit of getting a coffee out. They are delicious and it’s quick and easy but there is a lot of waste, cost, and mystery ingredients.

Hover over this image to shop for the glass bottles I used!

I have found that when I make really good quality, french pressed coffee at home I don’t feel the need for as much sweetener as you find in coffees you get out. Espresso-based drinks can often have more of a bitter taste that needs to be covered up with sugar, unlike french press coffee which isn’t burned.

It is still nice to be able to have fun flavored coffee though. I’ve tried some of the naturally flavored coffee syrups and most aren’t that exciting. The ones that taste best aren’t very natural.

I decided to try and make my own instead, that way I had control of ingredients and could experiment to find a great flavor. The one we are enjoying right now is salted caramel coffee syrup. It’s delicious and it’s pretty easy to make. It’s also perfect with a slice of coffee cake.

To store my syrup I used SKS Clear Glass Beverage Bottles w/ White Metal Plastisol Lined Lug Caps. They were very affordable and work perfectly for this recipe.

How to make caramel syrup

These glass bottles filled with some salted caramel coffee syrup would make great holiday gifts for a coffee lover. Just add a cute tag, throw in some delicious coffee and you have a wonderful gift.

I really liked ordering from SKS Bottle and Packaging. They offer over 6,000 containers and closures online. They everything from blue, amber, and clear glass bottles to green, amber, and natural plastic bottles and jars. It’s a great place to check out when creating some DIY projects and gifts.

How to make caramel syrup

One of the things I really like is most SKS glass jars are made in the USA and are 100% recyclable. That’s something that is very important to me.

It was really easy to order the bottles. The website is easy to use and includes all of the information you need.

How to make caramel syrup

The bottles came quickly and were well packaged so nothing was damaged. It was also very efficient packaging, while everything was well packed there wasn’t extra unneeded packaging and waste involved.

I’m really happy to have found SKS Bottle and Packaging. I’m sure I will be ordering more in the future. I’m also excited to come up with more projects for the SKS Clear Glass Beverage Bottles I purchased for this recipe. They are perfect for sauces, dresses, and more so I’m sure I will find many uses for them.

Now that you know a good option for how to store and/or give this coffee syrup as a gift, it’s time to learn how to make the recipe.

Save money, and make your own coffee syrup at home! My salted caramel coffee syrup tastes just like Starbucks; perfect for your at-home lattes & hot cocoa!

Make Your Own Coffee Syrup At Home

Have you ever tried to make your own simple syrup? It’s SO easy to do, you just need a few pantry ingredients, and you can make so many different flavors!

Starbucks Copycat Coffee Syrup

I am a coffee lover. The stronger the better and espresso drinks are my jam. My most beloved piece of equipment is my Breville Espresso machine and if I ever had to evacuate my house quickly, I’d grab it.

I also love Starbucks, and a great coffee cafe in general. Anytime I am traveling or exploring new areas, I ALWAYS search for coffee cafes and must hit them up.

Give me a hot latte or cortado and I’m a happy girl. I’m one of those weirdos who will choose a hot coffee over iced any day. I do love an iced latte or iced espresso on a hot afternoon, but I typically choose hot over iced coffee.

How to make caramel syrup

Ingredients in Salted Caramel Syrup

As I mentioned earlier, you do not need many ingredients to make this delicious simple syrup (get it? SIMPLE!).

This particular recipe has just 3 ingredients (plus water):

How to make caramel syrup

The Key Players

Salted Caramel Hot Cocoa

This syrup tastes very much like your favorite caramel sauce, only in syrup form! It’s so easy to add to your favorite beverages in the Summer (iced tea, too!) and Winter (salted caramel hot cocoa, whatttt. ).

I think this is even better than Starbucks Salted Caramel syrup and you get to enjoy it from the comfort of your own home!

Tips for Making Caramel Syrup

Just a few things to know when you’re making this recipe:

  • It takes a little while for the sugar and water to boil down to the caramel sauce
  • When the syrup begins to caramelize (anytime between 20-45 minutes), it happens fairly quickly, so keep a good eye on it the last 5-10 minutes
  • BE VERY CAREFUL when adding the final ingredients to the caramel sauce. You’ll be adding them to boiling hot caramel and it can splatter a bit
  • When adding the 2nd half of the water, be sure to add warm/hot water, this will help to avoid the splatter and keep the caramel sauce from hardening up. If you find that the sauce hardens when you add the water, just put the sauce pan back on low heat and stir until it dissolves back into liquid
  • Store your syrup in a sealed container in the fridge for up to a month

How do I Know When the Caramel is Ready?

Below are some pictures of the simple syrup as it’s cooking down to the caramel sauce. You can see the differences in color and I’ve added the approximate times below each photo.

As soon as the sauce turns that beautiful amber color of caramel (3rd picture), remove it from the heat.

How to make caramel syrup

This is about 15 minutes in…

How to make caramel syrup

This is about 25 minutes in…

How to make caramel syrup

This is about 5 minutes later – approximately 30 minutes from first boil. I’ve had it take up to 45 minutes to get to this color. It’s this amber color that makes it caramel-y.

How to Make Salted Caramel Coffee Syrup

All you need is a sauce pan, a spatula or wooden spoon, and these simple ingredients and you’ll be ready to enjoy your iced or hot beverage sweetened with delicious syrup in no time!

  • How to make caramel syrupAuthor: Franco Salzillo
  • Updated: January 17, 2022

Caramel syrup is one of the most versatile sweet condiments you can have around. For starters, you can use it to substitute chocolate sauce in any recipe.

That goes for pastries, cakes, muffins, cupcakes, cookies and even coffee drinks . You can also top pancakes and waffles with caramel syrup and ice cream too.

I won’t lie, there are plenty of caramel syrups on the market, and they are, more often than not, pretty good. The thing is, they’re not as natural as you would want them to be.

They’re packed with artificial flavors, thickeners and other chemicals, and that’s not ideal. Homemade caramel syrup is on another level, so it’s well worth making.

Some people are afraid of making caramel, though, and with good reason. Sugar can get burned fast, so you need some skill and practice.

Having said that, making caramel and caramel sauce or syrup is easy if you know what you’re doing. Here’s a foolproof recipe to get you started; it has worked for me every time.

How to make caramel syrup

What you’ll need

For this recipe, you’ll need regular granulated sugar, a whole cup of it. We’re using a splash of water too. These two straightforward ingredients alone will become the caramel. The thing with caramel, though, is that it’s a bit unstable, so we must add a few more ingredients to create a syrup.

Heavy cream and butter stabilize the caramel syrup and provide extra creaminess and texture. A dash of vanilla extract seals the deal for me. A nice homemade caramel syrup that opens a work of possibilities.

Store your caramel sauce in a bottle with a lid in the fridge. It has a long shelf-life. Still, you might want to make a fresh batch every couple of weeks just in case.

How to make caramel syrup

Looking for syrup to make salted caramel latte? If you are looking to make your own caramel coffee the same as you will be served in Costa Coffee, then this is the syrup you’re looking for. Costa only use the Monin brand, so any flavoured coffee you have tried there can be easily recreated with the same flavoured syrup from the Monin range.

This gorgeous salted caramel syrup is made using only the very finest natural ingredients with no artificial additives, resulting in an amazing flavour that can be used in a wide variety of different drinks. Monin syrup is popular for use in coffee, hot chocolate, cocktails, milkshakes, smoothies and more. This flavour does not contain nuts.

Salted Caramel has become hugely popular in recent years, and this is the same syrup used to make Salted Caramel coffees in Costa. If you’re looking for something slightly different, also try the Toffee Nut flavour.

Allergen advice: This Monin syrup does not contain allergens.

Ingredients: Sugar, water, natural flavouring, salt, colour: E150a.

Average nutritional value per 100ml:
Energy: 1358kJ/325Kcal
Fat: 0g, saturated fat: 0g
Carbohydrates: 80,4g, Sugar: 80,4g
Proteins: 0g
Salt: 1g

We offer fast shipping to your door throughout the UK and Ireland, plus easy and secure online shopping.

  • Leading UK brand
  • 1 Litre plastic bottle
  • Huge range of gorgeous flavours
  • 0% VAT
  • Made using only natural ingredients
  • Can Be Used With Milk

Standard Delivery:
Please allow up to 5 days (Monday-Saturday, excluding public holidays) for deliveries via Royal Mail/Courier. Only available on certain smaller non-fragile items.

Next Business Day Delivery:
Orders must be placed before 4pm. Orders placed after 4pm on a Friday, weekend or Bank Holiday will be processed the next working day. Please note that a signature is required on delivery.

Before 9am, 10am and 12 noon Next Business Day Delivery:
Orders must be placed before 4pm. Orders placed after 4pm on a Friday, weekend or Bank Holiday will be processed the next working day. Please note that a signature is required on delivery.

Saturday Morning Delivery:
Orders must be placed before 4pm. Orders placed after 4pm on a Friday, weekend or Bank Holiday will be processed the next working day. Please note that a signature is required on delivery.

Highlands, Islands & Other Regions:
Delivery rates are calculated based upon the size and value of your order. All deliveries, unless indicated otherwise, are made by courier and are shipped on the fastest available service. The delivery times for these services will vary depending on the region

What Is The Shelf Life After Opening?

Shelf life after opening varies depending on storage conditions and whether a pump is used. Store Monin products at normal room temperature – between 65-80⁰F/ 18-27⁰C. Avoid high humidity, direct heat and sunlight as much as possible. If using pumps, use the pump capper or cover pumps with foil overnight to prevent mold from entering through pump opening.

When stored in a dry, clean location at a temperature of 65-80°F, the shelf life after opening and with the cap on will be 90-180 days.

When stored in a dry, clean location at a temperature of 65-80°F, the shelf life when using a pump or pour spout will be 30-60 days. (Product and pump must not be exposed to any moisture.)

Do Any Monin Flavours Contain Nut Allergens?

Yes, the following Monin products contain nut allergens:

  • Macadamia Nut Syrup
  • Toffee Nut Syrup
  • Hazelnut Syrup
  • Sugar Free Hazelnut Syrup
  • Coconut Fruit Purée

Allergens are handled following strict FDA guidelines and internal HACCP (Hazard Analysis of Critical Control Points) programme.

Current formulas of the following products are considered allergen-free and do NOT contain nut allergens.***

  • Almond (Orgeat) Syrup
  • French Hazelnut Syrup
  • Roasted Hazelnut Syrup
  • Pistachio Syrup
  • Praline Syrup
  • Coconut Syrup

***WARNING: Product formulas change from time to time. Product back labels contain allergen information if applicable and are the most accurate source for ingredient information. Always check the physical label of the bottle in hand before consuming if allergy concerns exist.

Our French toast with caramel syrup is a weekend delicacy. Thich Texas cut toast is dipped in a cinnamon and vanilla egg batter then cooked over a hot griddle until golden, and drizzled in homemade caramel syrup. Perfection!

This caramel syrup would be amazing drizzled over our crispy waffles or puffy German pancakes.

How to make caramel syrup

Watch our step by step video!

How to make caramel syrup

I love French toast, and think that our recipe is pretty delicious. I flavor the egg and milk batter with vanilla and cinnamon, and always use French bread or thick sliced Texas toast. Sprinkled in powdered sugar and served with fresh fruit—perfection. Or is it?

The BEST French Toast With Caramel Syrup

How to make caramel syrup

I wasn’t sure anything could make it better until I tried drizzling homemade caramel syrup over those golden slices of French toast.

This syrup recipe is from GoToRecipes on Instagram, and is so easy to customize. I flavored mine with vanilla for a caramel flavored syrup, but you can use coconut or almond extract for more variations.

Homemade Caramel Syrup

How to make caramel syrup

The Ingredients

There is nothing healthy about this syrup, but it is SO GOOD.

You’ll need 1 stick of butter (1/2 cup), 1 cup of sugar, 1 cup of heavy whipping cream, 1 teaspoon vanilla and 1 teaspoon of baking soda.

Combine the first 3 ingredients in a large pot and simmer for 5 minutes once it comes to a boil. Then stir in the vanilla and baking soda.

Note: the mixture rises as it bubbles, so use a bigger pan than you think you’d need.

How to make caramel syrup

This syrup is best served warm. You can easily microwave it for a few seconds to reheat and bring it back to a syrup consistency.

Want a thicker caramel syrup?

Simmer it for 7 minutes instead of 5. It’s that easy! Store syrup in a jar in the refrigerator.

Both the 5 minute version and the 7 minute version are delicious drizzled over vanilla ice cream or cinnamon rolls.

I’ve also seen this recipe made with buttermilk which also looks delicious.

How To Make The BEST French Toast

How to make caramel syrup

The Best Bread for French Toast

Like I mentioned before, I always use French bread or Texas toast for making French toast. I love the thicker sliced bread. French bread is delicious too!

Adding Flour to French Toast Batter

A tip I’ve learned over the years is to add a bit of flour to the batter. The flour brings it all together, making the mixture more of a batter and coats the bread evenly. It really makes it fluffy and delicious!


Combine eggs, milk, vanilla, flour and cinnamon then dip the bread on both sides. Butter a hot griddle and cook until golden brown on both sides.

How to make caramel syrup

Caramel Syrup. Is your mouth watering yet? This syrup is seriously one of the greatest things that will ever happen to breakfast!

It only requires 3 ingredients, takes less than 10 minutes to make, and is great for pancakes, French Toast, Waffles, Crepes, and even Ice Cream!

How to make caramel syrup

Kneader’s Bakery uses it on their Chunky Cinnamon French Toast, which is were I fell in love with it.

How to make caramel syrup

Favorite Breakfast items to Pair with Caramel Syrup:

  • Sweet Cream Pancakes
  • Funnel Cake Waffles
  • Perfect French Toast
  • Easy Fast Waffles
  • Fluffy Buttermilk Pancakes
  • Chunky Cinnamon French Toast
  • Crispy Mickey Waffles
  • Sweet Cream Waffles

How to make caramel syrup


  • 1/2 Cup Light Corn Syrup
  • 1/2 Cup Brown Sugar
  • 1/2 Cup Heavy Cream

How to make caramel syrup

Helpful Kitchen Tools

  • Medium Sauce Pan
  • Whisk

How to Make Caramel Syrup

  • Add the corn syrup, brown sugar, and heavy cream to a medium sauce pan.

How to make caramel syrup

  • Whisk over medium-high heat until the sugar dissolves.

How to make caramel syrup

  • Keep the syrup warm on the stove until ready to drizzle over your favorite pancakes, French Toast, or waffles!

How to make caramel syrup

More Breakfast Recipes To Try:

  • Sweet Cream Pancakes
  • Perfect French Toast
  • Crispy Waffles
  • Butter Pecan Cinnamon Rolls
  • Sweet Cream Waffles
  • Red Velvet Cake Mix Cinnamon Rolls

Watch to video here:

How to make caramel syrup

How to make caramel syrup

A delicious Caramel Syrup that is great for pancakes, French Toast, waffles, crepes and even ice cream! Made with only 3 ingredients in under 5 minutes.

How to make caramel syrup

There are few dessert toppings finer than caramel syrup! This can be used as an ice-cream topping, as an added extra ingredient in your iced coffee to make your own version of homemade caramel machhiato, drizzled over baked sweet breads etc.


  • 1 cup sugar
  • 1/4 cup water
  • 1 tbsp. corn syrup or golden syrup
  • 2 tbsp. butter (at room temp)
  • 1/2 cup heavy cream
  • 1/2 tsp. sea salt
  • 1 tsp. vanilla essence


First, warm up the cream and set it aside.

In a heavy pan, stir together the sugar, syrup and water. Heat on low flame, stirring constantly until the sugar dissolves completely. As soon as the mixture begins to boil, stop stirring and allow it to boil undisturbed until it changes colour to a deep golden or amber. You can lift the pan and gently swirl the syrtup to mix it but DO NOT STIR.

As soon as the amber colour is achieved, remove the pan from the heat and quickly pour in the warm cream. Be careful as it will bubble up furiously! Stir the mixture until smooth and then add in the butter and salt. Mix everything until well combined (you can put the pan back on the heat and mix it there to make it easier).

Allow the syrup to cool, then add the vanilla essence and stir. This syrup will keep for up to a month refrigerated.

To reheat, you can warm this up in the microwave or place the jar in a bowl of hot water for some minutes.

Congratulation for winning
Congratulation for winning number one on the Halal food Facebook and blog competition. I like your cooking they are interesting. I have shared the site with family and. Friends.

Hii dear…what is the
Hii dear…what is the measurement for 1cup as there
Are many types of cups so I don’t know which type
In many recipees there is given cups
Measurement please guide me on

alt=”Fauzia's Kitchen Fun” width=”32″ height=”32″ />Fauzia’s Kitchen Fun says:

Follow these easy instructions to create sweet salted caramel sauce at home. This salted caramel recipe requires only 4 easy ingredients. It’s perfect for cakes, cupcakes, cookies, pound cake, ice cream, cheesecake, scones, apple pie, and more!

How to make caramel syrup

What once intimidated me became the subject of my 2nd cookbook: Sally’s Candy Addiction. As it turns out, homemade candy isn’t all that difficult. And salted caramel is one of the easiest recipes. This truly the best salted caramel I’ve ever had and there’s only 4 ingredients required: sugar, butter, heavy cream, and salt.

This salted caramel is a reader favorite recipe, marking its spot in the top 10 most popular recipes on my website. It’s sweet, sticky, buttery, and tastes phenomenal on anything it touches. (Though you really only need a spoon to enjoy.) Trust me, after trying this 1 time, you’ll be hooked like the rest of us!

How to make caramel syrup

How to Make Salted Caramel

Use the written out instructions below, but here’s the basic process: The first step is to melt sugar, which is called caramelization. This requires 1 small pot and a wooden spoon or heatproof spatula. Stir until melted. Stir in butter, let the mixture cook, then stir in heavy cream and let it boil for 1 minute. Finally, add the salt. That’s it, the caramel is done.

Remember to use caution when cooking over the stove as the hot liquid, butter, and cream may splatter. If needed, kitchen gloves come in handy.

No Candy Thermometer Salted Caramel

Unlike most caramel recipes, this salted caramel doesn’t require a candy thermometer. Instead, I encourage you to follow the recipe and use your eyes to determine when to add the next ingredient. The caramel thickens as it cools.

How to make caramel syrup

What to Eat with Salted Caramel?

You will love homemade salted caramel with recipes like cinnamon rolls, cheesecake, and apple pie bars. Use it as a caramel dip for apples, spoon over ice cream, or pour into decorated jars and gift it for the holidays.

The possibilities for salted caramel are endless:

50 Ways to Eat Salted Caramel

I have plenty more ideas too: here are 50 Ways to Eat Salted Caramel.

How to make caramel syrup

What is the Texture of This Salted Caramel?

The caramel is liquid as it comes off heat. As the caramel cools, it solidifies into a chewy texture. After refrigerating, the caramel is hard and you must heat it up to bring it back to a liquid consistency. Do you need a thinner caramel? Feel free to add 2 more Tablespoons of heavy cream to the recipe.

How to Store Salted Caramel

I receive this question a lot and I’m so happy to answer it. After the caramel cools down, pour it into a glass jar or container. Refrigerate for up to 1 month. The caramel solidifies as it cools, but you can reheat in the microwave or on the stove so it’s liquid again. You can freeze the salted caramel, too. Freeze in an airtight container for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator or at room temperature, then warm up before using.

What About Caramel Apples?

This caramel is not thick enough to coat apples for caramel apples. Instead, I recommend my homemade caramel apples recipe.

Quick Salted Caramel Video

How to make caramel syrup

Has it ever happened to you that you used caramel syrup instead of caramel sauce and the dish turned out to have a completely different taste?

If you ever got confused between both the caramel types, their flavor, and how to serve them, then you have clicked the right article.

So, what is the difference between caramel sauce and caramel syrup? The main difference is ingredients, taste, preparation, serving, and consistency.

Now, let’s learn what exactly is caramel sauce and syrup to end this long charade of confusion.

What’s Caramel Sauce?

Caramel sauce is a rich mixture of sugar and water that you can easily use as a topping.

This is a huge hit if you want to use it in desserts, coffees, cookies, bars, and ice creams. Caramel sauce requires a slightly more complicated process than caramel syrup but it is so worth it.

How to make caramel syrup

What’s Caramel Syrup?

Caramel syrup is the opposite of caramel sauce. With a slightly bitter taste, you can make this syrup with only two ingredients.

Nothing enhances the flavor of a cappuccino or latte than caramel syrup. So, if you are missing your favorite Starbucks coffee then try making this at home to recreate the flavor.

Caramel Sauce vs Caramel Syrup: Comparison Table

Let’s give a look at this easy-to-understand comparison table that enumerates all the differences in an organized manner.

Category Caramel sauce Caramel syrup
Ingredients Sugar, water, cream, and butter Sugar, and water
Preparation After caramelization add in the cream, and then butter After caramelization, add in more water to make it thin and let it come to a boil
Taste Sweet, buttery, rich Bitter
Consistency Thick Thin
Serving As a topping Mixed in the dish

Caramel Sauce vs Caramel Syrup: What’s the Difference?

By now, you might have realized that there are several differences between caramel sauce and caramel syrup. So let’s read more about them in detail.


Caramel syrup uses only two ingredients that are sugar and water.

It only involves the caramelization process and then it’s done. However, caramel sauce requires a number of ingredients to achieve the desired result.

Without the addition of a dairy product like cream, you cannot make the caramel sauce.

It gives all the richness to it. Hence, this is not vegan so the vegans should know the difference between them otherwise they’ll be deceived.


The preparation method of both the caramel is also quite different. We’ll give you a step-by-step guide so you can make your choice of caramel any day.

Here’s how to make caramel syrup:

  1. In a pan, combine water and sugar over medium heat.
  2. Bring to a point where the mixture starts bubbling and the color of the mixture changes to deep brown.
  3. Then, add more water and allow it to amalgamate with the mixture as it comes to a boil.
  4. You’ll want a water-like consistency because once it cools down, the mixture will thicken up a bit.

Here’s how you can make the caramel sauce:

  1. In a heavy bottom pan, dissolve sugar and water and let it come to a boil.
  2. In another pan, add the cream and let that too come to a boil.
  3. Once the caramelization is done, and the color of the caramel becomes deep brown, pour in the cream.
  4. Whisk with a wooden spatula and stir vigorously till they are combined.
  5. You need a mixture that has no lumps in it.
  6. Once you reach this stage, add in the butter and whisk it.


The caramel sauce has a sweet and buttery taste as compared to caramel syrup which is quite bitter in taste. The addition of a dairy element such as cream adds richness to caramel sauce. The same richness is missing in caramel syrup.

Technically, the sugar molecules break down as the temperature continues to rise, which makes caramel syrup bitter. However, in caramel sauce, we stop the caramelization by adding in the cream, hence, the flavor remains sweet and buttery.

Moreover, the kind of sugar you use also makes a difference in the flavor. For instance, with brown sugar, you’ll have a richer flavor than with white sugar.


The caramel sauce has a thick consistency because of the cream.

Additionally, it will thicken more after it cools down. So, if your caramel sauce is quite thin, you can add a tablespoon of cream to it to balance it out.

On the other hand, caramel syrup has a thin consistency because of the presence of water. The addition of a dairy product changes the consistency of the overall caramel.


Caramel sauce is perfect for topping ice creams and desserts because of its rich and sweet flavor. It is also easier to mix and dissolve. Caramel syrup, on the other hand, is excellent for mixing in desserts or coffees.

Sometimes, you’ll see caramel on the sides of coffee bottles, it is caramel syrup and it provides a hint of bitterness which elevates the flavor. Bear in mind that you cannot use caramel syrup as a topping because of the bitter flavor.

However, caramel syrups are versatile as you can use them in both hot and cold coffees. While caramel sauce clumps down if you don’t use it with any hot liquid.

It doesn’t work well with cold beverages. So you’ll have to add the hot liquid to mix it properly and then add ice cubes to make it cold.

Related Questions

Can I use caramel syrup instead of caramel sauce?

No, you cannot use them interchangeably. Their process, ingredients, flavor, and texture are completely different from one another.

You can easily blend in the sauce and dissolve, hence, it is often used as a topping. On the other hand, caramel syrup has a thin consistency. Thus, you cannot use caramel syrup instead of caramel sauce.

What’s the difference between caramel sauce and caramel syrup in Starbucks?

Starbucks is famous for the many flavors it provides to enhance the taste of the coffee.

The coffee sauces are thicker and include dairy in it, so these are not suitable for vegans. The caramel sauce is a great accompaniment in hot coffees.

On the other hand, caramel syrup is liquid and has a thin consistency. Moreover, it is more versatile and works well with iced coffees.


I am a foodie and I also love cooking. This is my food blog, here you will find some really useful tips and recipes!

How to share a printer

How to share a printer

With Windows 10, you can print to a shared printer from any device on your network.

In Windows 10, you can take a printer, plug it into one computer, and then print it to another computer. It’s all made possible because of network printer sharing. We covered this before in our article on sharing printers in Windows 7, but some of the steps and screens have changed slightly in Windows 10. Read on for more details.

Sharing Printers over the Network in Windows 10

Before you can share a printer, it must first be set up, connected, and powered on. Click Start > Settings > Devices, then open the Devices and Printers link. Right-click your printer, then click Printer properties.

Click Start > Settings > Devices, then open the Devices and Printers link. Right-click your printer, then click Printer properties.

How to share a printer

Select the Sharing tab, then check the box to share your printer.

How to share a printer

Users should consider that if you are sharing a printer with multiple devices running a mixture of Windows client architectures – 32 or 64 bit-you should enable the “Render print jobs on client computers” option. This will ensure other users can easily install the printer when connecting over the network.

How to share a printer

Connect to a Windows 10 Shared Printer

After setting up your shared printer, you can connect to it multiple ways. The first method is from within Devices and Printer. Click the Add Printer button, then click the link, The printer that I want isn’t listed. Choose the Select a shared printer by name radio box, browse to the printer on your network, and click open.

How to share a printer

You will be prompted to install the driver. Click Next to complete the installation of the printer.

How to share a printer

That’s it! The printer will now show up in Devices and printers as a local device.

How to share a printer

Another way you can connect to a shared network printer is from within File Explorer. Open the Network folder, browse the shared printer’s computer, right-click it, then click Connect.

How to share a printer


And there you have it. Sharing printers over a Windows 10 network is a great way to hook up multiple devices to the same printer. This lets you print files and documents without emailing them between devices. This is just one of the ways you can easily share files, storage, and printers in Windows 10.

Have a question about printer shares on the network? Ask in the comments below or visit our Windows 10 forum.

How to share a printer

Knowing how to share a printer in Windows 10 can prove invaluable. Without printer sharing, the only way for multiple users to all print from a single device is to manually connect their own computers. In this guide, we’ll show you a much easier way.

By sharing a printer over a network, only one PC or laptop needs to be connected per se. As long as it remains connected, anyone on the same network can use the printer without needing to set it up on their own computer.

  • Here’s how to edit images in Microsoft Paint
  • See how to hide desktop icons in Windows 10

Again, you will need to fully set up and connect at least one computer to your printer before you start sharing it. This will also be the computer you use to enable sharing.

We’ve broken down the process into simple steps below. It doesn’t require any special software or even anything complex, as Windows 10 has printer sharing built-in, though you should make sure that your printer is switched on and connected before you start.

How to share a printer in Windows 10

1. Open the Start Menu, and start typing “Printers & scanners.” Press the Enter key once the Printers & scanners settings page is highlighted to open it.

2. Click the printer you want to share, then click “Manage.”

3. Click “Printer properties.”

4. Click the “Sharing” tab, then check the “Share this printer” box.

5. Optionally, you can edit the name of the printer, which is what other users on the network will see when they look for a printer to use.

Either way, make sure the “Render print jobs on client computers” option remains checked, then click “OK.”

That’s all you need to do, as far as sharing the printer goes. Other users who want to use the shared printer can now access it through the “Add a printer or scanner” tool in the Printers & scanners section of Windows 10’s Settings app.

Sharing printer over the Internet with the software

As I’ve already mentioned, the standard Windows options allow you to connect your printer to network only within a local area. So, I’ll start the write-up with more versatile solutions like FlexiHub and USB Network Gate. These third-party tools work across any distance and make it possible to redirect printers over the Internet.


If you don’t know which solution to choose to share a USB device over network, you may use an efficient printer sharing software – FlexiHub. It allows access and helps to share a printer on Windows, macOS, Linux, and Android platforms.

How to share a printer

Share printer with FlexiHub

  1. Register a free FlexiHub account here or directly in the app later. How to share a printer
  2. Start a FlexiHub trial by choosing the number of connections How to share a printer
  3. Install and open the software on both machines participating in the connection. To log in enter your registration e-mail and password. How to share a printer
  4. In the FlexiHub interface find the printer you are going to connect to and click the “Connect” button. How to share a printer
  5. That’s it! You may manage the printer like it is plugged to your computer directly! How to share a printer
  6. Your printer will be redirected to the machine, and you can use it as if it were connected physically to the computer.
  • The app works via wireless network;
  • All connections are protected with advanced encryption;
  • The app enables you to share any USB and Serial devices – scanners, web cameras, projectors, mobile phones, etc.
  • Free version doesn’t allow to access remote devices;
  • The software has to be installed on all of your machines which will connect to the remote printer.

USB Network Gate

Looking for an easy and effective way to share printer over LAN?

USB Network Gate

How to share a printer

Few easy steps:

  1. Download and install USB Network Gate. Install it on other computers as well.
  2. Once you install it, the printer to be shared will be displayed in the Devices window. If you need to change the port, add encryption into the connection or encipher data transfer – press the gearwheel icon next to Share. Once the setup is complete, click Share. Now the printer can be seen on all machines with USB Network Gate.
  • 14-days trial version has a complete functionality;
  • App is available for Mac and Linux also;
  • Licensing works as standard software – you will only have to pay once;
  • Unlike FlexiHub, it is capable to share printers over LAN as well.
  • Once the trial period is over you will need to buy a license for $159.95;
  • The app has to be installed on every computer that needs access to the printer.

How to share a USB printer over the network in Windows 10

Windows 10 has a feature that allows you to share a USB printer over the network. With its help, a printer plugged into one of your networked machines can be accessed from any other PC in your LAN or Wi-Fi. The set-up is somewhat similar to the one we’ve talked about in the article on how to share a printer in Windows 7, yet, in Windows 10, there are a few small differences. Please, keep on reading to find out more about the details.

Here is a quick guide on how to share a printer:

    Before proceeding to share a USB printer on the network, make sure said printer is hooked up to a computer, connected to a power supply, and turned on.

Note: If you plan to share a USB printer with both Windows 32-bit and Windows 64-bit machines, be sure to tick the box Render print jobs on client computers to avoid problems with installing the printer on a client-side.

Turn your USB printer into a network printer that everyone can use with just a few clicks on Windows 10.

On Windows 10, you can share a USB printer with other computers in the network even if the device does not have Wi-Fi or Ethernet connectivity. This is possible thanks to the print server feature available on Windows 10, which allows you to share a USB printer quickly in the network.

Printer sharing is nothing new, it’s a feature that has been part of the operating system for a long time, and you can still use it on Windows 10.

In this guide, you will learn the steps to share a printer on Windows 10 over the network.

Share printer on Windows 10

To connect a USB printer to a Wi-Fi network without extra accessories, you can use Windows 10 “printer sharing” with these steps:

Open Settings on Windows 10.

Click on Devices.

Select the USB printer to share.

Click the Manage button.

Click the Printer properties link.

Open the Sharing tab.

Check the Share this printer option.

(Optional) Change the printer share name as needed.

Click the Apply button.

Click the OK button.

Once you complete the steps, the USB printer will now be available in the network for anyone to connect.

Install a shared printer on Windows 10

The process of Installing a shared printer is easy, but it’s not the same as it would be to install a wireless printer.

To install a shared printer to another computer, use these steps:

Open Settings.

Click on Devices.

Click the Add printer & scanner button and wait a few moments.

Click the “The printer that I want isn’t listed” option.

Check the Select a shared printer by name option.

Confirm the printer network path. For example, \\computerName\printerName . If the name doesn’t work, you can also use the IP address for the computer sharing the printer if the name doesn’t work.

Click the Next button.

Use the default printer name.

Click Next to install the shared USB printer on Windows 10.

Click the Finish button.

After you complete the steps, the print jobs will travel through the network to the computer with the printer server configured, and then the jobs will be directed to the USB printer. Users will only be able to print as long as the computer sharing the printer is turned on.

Although most modern printers come with a print server built-in, you may still find printers that only feature USB or parallel cable connectivity, and Windows 10 offers an easy solution to enable you to share a printer with other people over the network.

Pureinfotech relies on your support. Consider contributing with the button below to keep bringing great content.

We may earn commission for purchases using our links to help keep offering the free content. Privacy policy info.

All content on this site is provided with no warranties, express or implied. Use any information at your own risk. Always backup of your device and files before making any changes. Privacy policy info.

Other countries

FAQs & Troubleshooting

How to share a printer


Date: 10/22/2020 ID: faqp00100016_000

Share your printer in Windows 7 (Shared printer)

Follow the instructions below to share your printer.

STEP 1: Server PC Settings

  1. Install the printer driver. (The latest printer driver is available in the [Downloads] section of this website.)
  2. Click Start => Devices and Printers => Printers and Faxes.
  3. Right-click Brother XXXXXX (your model name) and then click Printer properties.
  4. Open the Sharing tab and check Share this printer.
  5. Click OK.

STEP 2: Client PC Settings

  1. Click Start => Control Panel => Network and Internet.
  2. Click Network and Sharing center.
  3. Click Change advanced sharing settings.
  4. Check Turn on network discovery and Turn on file and printer sharing, click Save changes.
  5. Click Start => Devices and Printers.
  6. Click Add a printer.
  7. Click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer.
  8. Choose a printer and click Next.
    (If you cannot find the printer you want, click here.)
  9. Click Next.
  10. Choose Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it and click Next.
  11. Click Finish.

If you cannot find the printer you want, it’s possible that there is some problem in the network connection. We recommend you run the Ping command in Command Prompt. (Click Start => All Programs => Accessories => Command Prompt.)

If you confirm that there is no problem in the network connection, try the following:

  1. Click The printer that I want isn’t listed.
  2. Choose Select a shared printer by name and enter \\ server PC name \ Server printer name.
  3. Click Next.
  4. Click Next.
  5. Click Finish.

You can check the PC name by right clicking on the Computer icon on the Desktop => Choose Properties => Advanced System Settings.

United States

FAQs & Troubleshooting

How to share a printer


Date: 10/20/2020 ID: faqp00100003_000

Share your printer in Windows 10/Windows 8/Windows 8.1 (Shared printer)

Follow the instructions below to share your printer.
Screens may differ slightly depending on the version of your OS.

STEP 1: Server PC Settings

  1. Install the printer driver. (The latest printer driver is available in the [Downloads] section of this website.)
  2. Open the printer folder. (To learn how to open the printer folder, see “How to open the Devices and Printers window.”)
  3. Right-click Brother XXXXXX (your model name) and then click Printer properties.
  4. Open the Sharing tab and check Share this printer. (If you see the Change Sharing Options button, click on it.)
  5. Click OK.

STEP 2: Client PC Settings

  1. Open the Control Panel.
  2. Click Network and Internet. (Windows 10/Windows 8/Windows 8.1 only)
  3. Click Network and Sharing Center.
  4. Click Change advanced sharing settings.
  5. Check Turn on network discovery and Turn on file and printer sharing, click Save changes.
  6. Open the Control Panel.
  7. Click Hardware and Sound (Windows 10/Windows 8/Windows 8.1 only) => Devices and Printers.
  8. Click Add a printer.
  9. Choose a printer and click Next.
    (If you cannot find the printer you want, click here.)
  10. If the warning message appears, click Install driver.
  11. Click Next.
  12. Click Finish.

If you cannot find the printer you want, it’s possible that there is some problem in the network connection. We recommend you run the Ping command in Command Prompt.

    Windows 10:
    Right-click the start button and then select Command Prompt.

If you confirm that there is no problem in the network connection, try the following:

  1. Click The printer that I want isn’t listed.
  2. Choose Select a shared printer by name and enter \\[server PC name]\[server printer name].
  3. Click Next.
  4. If the warning message appears, click Install driver.
  5. Click Next.
  6. Click Finish.

Follow the steps below to check the Computer name.

  1. Open the Control Panel.
  2. Click System and Security (Windows 10/Windows 8/Windows 8.1 only) => System.
  3. Click Advanced system settings.
  4. Click Computer Name tab and check the computer name.

Related Models

PT-D800W, PT-E800W, PT-P750W, PT-P900W, PT-P950NW, TD-4420DN, TD-4550DNWB

Вы можете разрешить общий доступ к своему принтеру другому компьютеру Mac или UNIX. Компьютеры должны быть подключены к одной локальной сети с Вашим компьютером Mac, а пользователи Mac должны работать в OS X v10.4 или более поздней версии.

Общий доступ к принтеру предназначен для несетевых или не подключенных по беспроводной сети принтеров, которые обычно подключены непосредственно к Вашему компьютеру. Нет необходимости предоставлять общий доступ к сетевым, беспроводным или AirPrint-совместимым принтерам, поскольку они уже являются общим ресурсом сети.

На Mac выберите меню Apple

> «Системные настройки», нажмите «Общий доступ» , затем установите флажок «Общие принтеры».

В разделе «Принтеры» выберите принтер, который хотите сделать общим.

Если Вы открыли общий доступ к своему принтеру, то по умолчанию им могут пользоваться все пользователи в Вашей сети («Все пользователи»). Если Вы хотите предоставить доступ только определенному кругу лиц, выполните шаги 3 и 4.

Нажмите кнопку «Добавить» внизу списка пользователей, затем выполните одно из следующих действий.

Выберите пользователя из списка «Пользователи и группы», который включает всех пользователей Вашего компьютера Mac.

Выберите пользователя из списка «Пользователи сети» или «Сетевые группы», которые включают всех участников Вашей сети.

Выберите пользователя из списка контактов. Создайте пароль для пользователя, затем нажмите «Создать учетную запись».

Когда Вы добавляете в список «Пользователи» новых пользователей, параметр доступа к общему принтеру для пользователей в Вашей сети («Все пользователи») сбрасывается в значение «Нет доступа». Если Вы хотите вернуть доступ всем пользователям, нажмите всплывающее меню «Все» и выберите «Печать возможна».

Чтобы удалить пользователя, выберите его имя и нажмите кнопку «Удалить» . Пункт «Все пользователи» удалить нельзя.

FAQ: How to do printer sharing on Windows XP?

The File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks component allows other computers on a network to access resources on your computer by using a Microsoft network.

  • Click Start ->Settings ->Printers and Faxes
  • Then right click the printer icon that you want to share out and choose Sharing.
  • Choose the option Share this printer and type in the Share Name in the text box.
  • Then there will be a hand appear under the printer icon .Connect from Windows XP (Client side)
    • Click Start ->Settings ->Printers and Faxes
    • Double click Add Printer
    • Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer when prompt
    • Then input the path for the shared printer like \\computer_name\printer or using the browse function to locate the share printer.
    • Follow the instructions to complete the setup.
      For using Access Control List, you must disable Simple File Sharing first.
    • Click Start ->Settings ->Printers and Faxes
    • Then right click the printer icon that you want to share out and choose Sharing.
    • Choose the option Share this printer and type in the Share Name in the text box.
    • Then change to the Security tab.
    • Click the Add button to define the users that can access this folder.
    • From the Select Users or Groups windows click Advanced.
    • Click Find Now to show all the user account exist on your PC. Then highlight the user and click the OK button to add the user in the list. (If you didn’t create any user on your Windows XP before, you can refer to How to create user account in Windows XP?.)
      Note: The user account created in Windows XP must be the same user name with the client PC
    • Then highlight the Everyone group and click Remove. (Everyone group must be removed as it will allow guest to access this folder).
    • Now you can adjust the Allow and Deny access right for this user.
    • Press OK to confirm this operation.
    • Then there will be a hand appear under the printer icon .Connect from Windows XP (Client side)
        You must logon the windows using a account which is exist in the Windows XP ACL.
      • Click Start ->Settings ->Printers and Faxes
      • Double click Add Printer
      • Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer when prompt
      • Then input the path for the shared printer like \\computer_name\printer or using the browse function to locate the share printer.
      • Follow the instructions to complete the setup.

      Note: Even the Simple sharing is easy to use but it is more risky to be attacked by virus or hackers with the use of Simple sharing in Windows XP to share out the printer than using Access Control List (ACL).



      Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Nam viverra euismod odio, gravida pellentesque urna varius vitae. Sed dui lorem, adipiscing in adipiscing et, interdum nec metus. Mauris ultricies, justo eu convallis placerat, felis enim ornare nisi, vitae mattis nulla ante id dui.

      Printer Sharing

      This document discusses several ways to configure printer sharing.

      The Basics

      A “server” is any machine that communicates directly to a printer. A “client” is any machine that sends print jobs to a server for final printing. Clients can also be servers if they communicate directly with any printers of their own.

      By default, CUPS uses the Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) to send jobs from a client to a server. When printing to legacy print servers you may also use the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) protocol when printing to older UNIX-based servers or Server Message Block (SMB) when printing to Windows ® servers.

      Clients can automatically discover and access shared printers via DNS Service Discovery (DNS-SD a.k.a. Bonjour ® ). SMB browsing can also be used to manually discover and access shared printers when Samba is installed.

      Configuring the Server

      You must enable printer sharing on the server before clients can print through it. The simplest way to do this is to use the cupsctl(8) command on the server:

      By default, the above command will allow printing from other clients on the same subnet as your server. To allow printing from any subnet, use the following command instead:

      Next, tag each printer that you want to share using the lpadmin(8) command on the server, for example:

      You can require authentication for shared printing by setting the policy on each printer, for example:

      Automatic Configuration using IPP


      This method of configuration does not work on macOS 10.7 or later because sandboxed applications do not always have direct network access.

      CUPS can be configured to run without a local spooler and send all jobs to a single server. However, if that server goes down then all printing will be disabled. Use this configuration only as absolutely necessary.

      The default server is normally the local system (“localhost”). To override the default server create a file named /etc/cups/client.conf with a line as follows:

      The server name can be the hostname or IP address of the default server. If the server is not using the default IPP port (631), you can add the port number at the end like this:

      The default server can also be customized on a per-user basis. To set a user-specific server create a file named

      /.cups/client.conf instead. The user client.conf file takes precedence over the system one.

      Finally, you can set the CUPS_SERVER environment variable to override the default server for a single process, for example:

      will run the Firefox web browser pointed to the specified server and port. The environment variable overrides both the user and system client.conf files, if any.

      Manual Configuration of Print Queues


      This method of configuration does not work on macOS 10.7 or later because sandboxed applications do not always have direct network access.

      The most tedious method of configuring client machines is to configure each remote queue by hand using the lpadmin(8) command:

      The printer name is the name of the printer on the server machine. The server name is the hostname or IP address of the server machine. Repeat the lpadmin command for each remote printer you wish to use.

      It’s easier than you think to share printer in Windows 7.

      There are 2 basic ways to make a printer available to the PCs on your home network.

      1. You can attach it directly to your computer on your network and share it with all the others on your network.
      2. Connect the printer as a stand-alone device on the network itself.

      Let’s share a printer on your home network!

      Let’s say you have a USB printer, you can only use one computer to print to it? Nope, you can share it through Windows and have other computers on your network print to it.

      Note: The USB printer is available to all computers on the network as long as the host computer is powered on and connected to the network. If it is offline or turned off then the other computers on the network won’t be able to print to the USB printer.

      Thanks to a feature called HomeGroup in Windows 7, printer sharing is a breeze! Click here to set up HomeGroup!

      HomeGroup automatically shares certain files and your printers.

      Once you set up HomeGroup in Windows 7, let’s connect to a share printer in Windows 7.

      or Share a printer manually.

      How To Connect to a Shared Printer?

      1.) On the computer the printer is physically connected to, click the Start button , click Control Panel.

      How to share a printer

      2.) The Control Panel window opens, type homegroup in the search box, and then click HomeGroup.

      How to share a printer

      3.) HomeGroup window appears, make sure the Printers check box is selected. (If not, select it, and then click Save changes.)

      How to share a printer

      4.) Next, let’s go to the computer you want to print from.

      Click HomeGroup and click Install printer.

      Note: If you don’t already have a driver installed for the printer, click Install driver in the dialog box that appears.

      Note: After the printer is installed, you can access it through the Print dialog box in any program, just like a printer that’s directly connected to your computer. The computer that the printer is connected to must be turned on to use the printer.

      Network Printers

      Network printers have a huge advantage over USB shared printers. They don’t have to be connected to a computer. They are always available because they are connected to the wireless router through an Ethernet cable or using a built-in wireless adapter.

      Wired printers have an Ethernet port, which you connect to your router or hub via an Ethernet cable.

      Wireless printers typically connect to your home network using Wi-Fi or Bluetooth technology.

      Some printers offer both options. The instructions that came with your model should tell you exactly how to install it on the network.

      How to Share a Printer in Windows 7 Manually

      1.) Click Start, then click Devices and Printers.

      How to share a printer

      2.) The Devices and Printers window appears, right-click the printer you want to share and click Printer properties.

      How to share a printer

      3.) The printer properties window opens, click the Sharing tab and click Change Sharing Options. (If it shows)

      How to share a printer

      4.) Check Share this printer and type a Share name:

      In my example, I named my share printer CNS Network Printer

      Note:  You can click additional drivers to install extra drivers for users that are running different versions of Windows. This way, if a Windows XP computer connects to this share printer, it will automatically provide them with the Windows XP driver.

      How to share a printer

      5.) From another computer you can access this shared printer using HomeGroup on a Windows 7 PC. If you are using Windows XP, you can go to the run command and type \\IP address\share name.

      For example: The computer that is sharing my printer has an IP Address of So I would type on the run prompt: \\\CNS Network Printer

      “CNS Network Printer” is the share name I typed when setting up the printer earlier on step 4

      “Didn’t find what you were looking for? Use this search feature to find it.”

      This article contains instruction on sharing printers from a GNU/Linux system.

      Client support

      Protocol Linux Windows macOS
      Discovery (DNS-SD/mDNS) CUPS with Avahi Native support since Windows 10 Bonjour
      Internet Printing Protocol CUPS Control Panel > Programs > Turn Windows features on or off > Print and Document Services > Internet Printing Client Native support
      SMB shared printer Samba with CUPS Native support Native support
      Line Printer Daemon protocol CUPS Control Panel > Programs > Turn Windows features on or off > Print services >
      LPD Print Service and LPR Port Monitor
      Native support


      Creating class for multiple printers

      In CUPS, a class is a group of printers which appears to clients as a single printer. When a client selects to print to the class, CUPS selects any printer in the group to accept the print job. This may be especially useful when one printer from the class must be removed. If it is excluded from the class, end users will not notice any change because the print job will be queued to another printer in the class. Creating and managing classes can be done from CUPS Web GUI.

      Printer sharing

      alt=”Tango-view-fullscreen.png” width=”48″ height=”48″ />This article or section needs expansion. alt=”Tango-view-fullscreen.png” width=”48″ height=”48″ />

      DNS-SD advertisement

      To announce the printer to the network over DNS-SD/mDNS (Bonjour in Apple world), Avahi must be installed and running on the server.

      To enable it, either select Share printers connected to this system in the web interface, or manually set Browsing On in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf :

      Note that “browsing” at the print server is a different thing from “browsing” at a remote networked host. On the print server, cupsd provides the DNS-SD protocol support which the avahi-daemon broadcasts. The cups-browsed service is unnecessary on the print server, unless also broadcasting the old CUPS protocol, or the print server is also “browsing” for other networked printers. On the remote networked host, the cups-browsed service is required to “browse” for network broadcasts of print services, and running cups-browsed will also automatically start cupsd .

      The cups.service service will be automatically started when a USB printer is plugged in, however this may not be the case for other connection types. If cups.service is not running, avahi-daemon does not broadcast the print services, so in that case the systemd unit service file must be modified to start on boot, and then the service must again be “enabled/installed” with the new dependency. To do this, edit the service file [Install] section to add a dependency, and then enable and start the cups.service service.

      Sharing via Internet Printing Protocol

      The server can be configured using either the web interface or by manually editing /etc/cups/cupsd.conf .

      Open up the web interface to the server, select the Administration tab, look under the Server heading, and enable the “Share printers connected to this system” option. Save your change by clicking on the Change Settings button. The server will automatically restart.

      On the server computer (the one directly connected to the printer), allow access to the server by modifying the location directive. For instance:

      Also make sure the server is listening on the IP address the client will use:

      There are more configuration possibilities, including automatic methods, which are described in detail in Using Network Printers and cupsd.conf(5) .

      After making any modifications, restart cups.service .

      If CUPS is started using socket activation, create a drop-in snippet for cups.socket so that socket activation also works for remote connections:

      Sharing via Samba

      Samba is an implementation of the Windows file and printer sharing protocols, even the most vintage ones.

      To configure Samba on the Linux server, edit /etc/samba/smb.conf file to allow access to printers. File smb.conf can look something like this:

      That should be enough to share the printer, yet adding an individual printer entry may be desirable:

      Please note that this assumes configuration was made so that users must have a valid account to access the printer. To have a public printer, set guest ok to yes , and remove the valid users line. To add accounts, set up a regular GNU/Linux account and then set up a Samba password on the server. See Samba#User management.

      After this, restart smb.service and nmb.service .

      See Samba’s documentation Setting up Samba as a Print Server for more details.

      Sharing via Line Printer Daemon protocol

      Remote administration

      Once the server is set up as described in #Printer sharing, it can also be configured so that it can be remotely administered. Add the allowed hosts to the block in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf , using the same syntax as described in #Sharing via Internet Printing Protocol. Note that three levels of access can be granted:

      To give remote hosts access to one of these levels, add an Allow statement to that level’s section. An Allow statement can take one or more of the forms listed below:

      Deny statements can also be used. For example, to give full access to all hosts on your local network interfaces, edit /etc/cups/cupsd.conf to include this:

      You might also need to disable the HTTPS requirement, when using the default self-signed certificate generated by CUPS:

      This should avoid the error: 426 – Upgrade Required when using the CUPS web interface from a remote machine.


      Kerberos can be used to authenticate users accessing a remote CUPS server. This assumes that your machine has a keytab and it will need a ticket for “HTTP”. Instead of using http://localhost:631 you must use – encryption is required for auth (hence https) and the full hostname is needed so that Kerberos/Negotiate can work. In addition, the server must be configured in /etc/cups/cupsd.conf to use a DefaultAuthType of Negotiate .

      If you are using Samba’s winbind NSS support, you can add an AD group name to /etc/cups/cups-files.conf – in the following example sysadmin might be an AD group:


      See CUPS/Troubleshooting for general troubleshooting tips.

      Cannot print with GTK applications

      If you get a getting printer information failed message when you try to print from GTK applications, add this line to your /etc/hosts :

      Permission errors on Windows

      Some users fixed NT_STATUS_ACCESS_DENIED (Windows clients) errors by using a slightly different syntax:

      How to share a printer

      Workgroups connect alternate computers on the same network to a primary computer, which enables file and printer sharing through the network for fast and wireless access to important devices and files. The printer connects to your domain PC and can be used by other users as long as the printer remains connected to the PC. Prior to wireless printing the printer must be properly configured for sharing; otherwise, it remains inaccessible to other users.

      Click the Windows icon on the desktop and click “Control Panel.” Enter “Network” in the search field and click “Network and Sharing Center.”

      Click “Change advanced sharing settings” and click the arrow next to the network’s profile.

      Click “Turn on file and printer sharing” and click “Save changes.” Enter your administrator password in the pop-up password window and select “Yes.”

      Click the Windows icon on the desktop and click “Devices and Printers.” Right-click the printer connected to your computer and select “Printer Properties.”

      Click “Sharing” and click the blank check box next to “Share this printer.” Click “OK.”

      Click “Devices and Printers” from the Start (Windows) menu on the alternate computers and click “Add a printer.”

      Click “Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer” and click the shared printer’s name. Click “Next” to connect to the domain PC’s printer.

      This post shows students and new users steps to share a printer in Windows 11. In Windows 11, you can add a new printer, and share it with others on the same network, whether at home or in the office.

      There are two methods one can use to share a printer. If you have a network printer, and is connected to your network via a router or switch, then all PCs should be able to directly connect to the printer and add it individually.

      However, if the printer is not a network printer, but attached or installed directly to one PC in the home, then you can share it on the PC it’s connected to with other PCs in the home or office. For others to add and print to the printer, make sure the printer is connected to the primary PC either wirelessly or by using a USB cable, and then turn on the printer.

      Also make sure the primary PC is turned on, connected to the printer, and connected to the network.

      Once all the requirements are checked above, use the steps below to share the printer so other can print to it.

      To get started with sharing printer on Windows 11, follow the steps below.

      How to share a printer in Windows 11

      Again, one can share a printer connected to a PC with other users in a home network or office. You’ll need to know the name of the primary PC ( the PC the printer is connected to).

      To share a printer, it should already be installed and connected to the primary PC. If you haven’t installed the printer, use the post below to learn how to add a printer on Windows 11.

      Once the printer is installed and ready, use the steps below to share it with others.

      Windows 11 has a centralized location for majority of its settings. From system configurations to creating new users and updating Windows, all can be done from its System Settings pane.

      To get to System Settings, you can use the Windows key + i shortcut or click on Start ==> Settings as shown in the image below:

      Alternatively, you can use the search box on the taskbar and search for Settings. Then select to open it.

      Windows Settings pane should look similar to the image below. In Windows Settings, click Bluetooth & devices , then select Printers & scanners on the right pane of your screen shown in the image below.

      Next, click on the tile of the printer you want to share. If you have multiple printers installed on your PC, they should all be listed on this pane.

      Once the printer detail pane opens, select Printer Properties tile as highlighted below.

      On the pop up windows, under the Sharing tab , click Change Sharing option as highlighted below.

      Finally, check the box next to: Share this printer to share the printer. In the Share name box, type in a shared name that other PCs will see when connecting to the printer. The name can be descriptive to identify the particular printer.

      If you want, edit the share name of the printer. You’ll use this name to connect to the printer from a secondary PC.

      The printer should be shared and ready for other PCs to connect and add it.

      How to connect to a shared printer on Windows 11

      Now that the printer is shared above, if you want to printer to it from another PC in the same network, use the steps below.

      Read this post below to learn how to add a printer on Windows 11

      When adding a shared printer on another PC,

      1. If you don’t see the printer you want, select The printer that I want isn’t listed
      2. In the Add printer dialog box, select Select a shared printer by name , and then enter the computer or device name of the primary PC and the share name of the printer using one of these formats:
        • \\computername\printername
        • http://computername/printername/.printer
      3. When prompted to install the printer driver, select Next to complete the installation.

      By default, you need the user name and password of the primary PC to access the printer.

      Once all is connected and added, you should be able to print to the printer from the secondary PCs on your network.

      That should do it!


      This post showed you how to share a printer on Windows 11 as well as connecting to a shared printer. If you find any error above or have something to add, please use the comment form below.

      You can print from another computer on the network using the port on a print server. The machine does not need to be connected to the network when printing.

      To use a Windows print server, specify the printer share settings on the print server, and then install the printer driver to the machine.

      To use other print servers, see the operation manual for the print server.

      Log on to Windows of the server computer as an Administrator, and install the printer driver.

      Display the “Devices and Printers” screen.

      Windows 10 (version 1703 or later) , Windows Server 2019

      On the [Start] menu, click [Windows System] [Control Panel].

      Click [View devices and printers].

      Windows 10 (earlier than version 1703), Windows Server 2016

      Right-click [Start], and then click [Control Panel].

      Click [View devices and printers].

      Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012/2012 R2

      On the Charm Bar, click [Set] [Control Panel].

      Click [View devices and printers].

      Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2

      On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].

      Windows Server 2008

      On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].

      Click [Printer] on [Hardware and Sound].

      Right-click the machine's icon, and then click [Printer properties].

      For Windows Server 2008, right-click the printer's icon, and then click [Properties].

      Select the “Share this Printer” check box on the “Sharing” tab.

      To share the printer with the user who uses Windows of the other version, click “Additional Drivers “.

      When you select “Shared” check box to install alternative driver, this procedure is not required.

      How to share a printer

      Those who have multiple computers in their home or workplace may want to share a printer for convenience or cost efficiency. This page contains different ways you may make a printer available to multiple computers using various methods. Before you share a printer on a network, decide which configuration you want to use. Below are the different setups and their advantages and disadvantages.

      Wireless printer

      How to share a printer

      Many of today’s printers (often middle to high-end models) have the capability of connecting directly to a user’s network. This attribute gives these printers the distinct advantage of ease of use as they are the simplest to set up and detect. In fact, from Windows Vista onward, printers with wireless capabilities are more or less plug and play, detectable by a computer’s word processor or Internet browser. The only downside to this configuration is that it requires a wireless network to be set up.

      Once the printer is configured and connected to your wireless network, you can install and connect the printer to each of your computers.

      Printer connected to a computer or server

      How to share a printer

      The most common solution for sharing a printer (because of the ease and price) is to connect it to a host computer. Essentially, the host computer “shares” the printer by allowing other computers on the network to print through it over a LAN (local area network) or Internet connection. The primary disadvantage of this method is that the host computer must always be turned on for other machines to use the printer. To print through another networked computer, you must already have a network, and a printer installed on the host computer.

      Dedicated print server

      Another option is a hardware device called a print server. Print servers enable you to connect a small appliance to your network that delegates and queues print jobs for multiple machines. Print servers allow you to print when the main computer connected to your printer is turned off (network printer setup), but adds to the cost and setup time.

      You can network your Windows 10 PCs and tablets to share files and printers. Windows 7 and 8.1 users can still use homegroups.

      How to share a printer

      You want to share your Windows documents, photos, videos, and printers with other people or with other computers. In Windows 7 and 8.1, you could create and manage a homegroup to share these items with other computers on your home network. Unfortunately, Microsoft retired the homegroup feature in Windows 10, so it is no longer an option.

      Fear not, though, because there are other ways you can share files and printers in Windows 10. Read on for that, and scroll down for homegroup directions if you’re still using a Windows 7 or 8.1 PC.

      How to Share Files in Windows 10

      How can you share files and printers in Windows 10 without homegroup? Open File Explorer and right-click on the file or files you wish to share. From the pop-up menu, select Share.

      Share Through Email

      The Share window offers a few options. To share your files by email, select an existing contact or click the link to Find more people and choose the contact with whom you want to share the file.

      You can send the files directly from File Explorer, without having to use any other app. Confirm the email with the attached files you wish to share and then send it.

      Share With Nearby Computer

      To instead share your file with a nearby computer, make sure the feature is turned on, and then select the name of the computer at the Share window. A notification appears on that computer. The user of that computer then clicks the Save button to automatically save the files to the local Documents folder by default.

      Share With a Service

      Another option is to send the file to an app or online storage service. From the Share window, select the service you want to use for sharing the file, such as Box, Dropbox, or OneDrive, then save the file. You will then need to open that service in your browser to share the file with other people.

      How to Share Printers in Windows 10

      To share a printer on your network, go to Settings > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select the printer you want to share and click the Manage button. At the Manage window, click the link for Printer Properties.

      When the Printer Properties window opens, click the Sharing tab. Check the box to Share this printer. Change the default share name if you wish, then click OK.

      To access and use the shared printer on another computer, go to Settings > Devices > Printers & scanners on that computer. Click the button to Add a printer or scanner.

      Your shared printer should appear. Select it and click the button to Add device. The printer then appears as Ready on the Bluetooth & other devices menu.

      You can now set it as the default if you wish or just select it any time you want to print to it.

      How to Share Files and Printers in Windows 7, 8.1

      Now let’s say you’re still using Windows 7—which will soon no longer be supported—or Windows 8.1. The good news is that homegroup still runs for these operating systems, so you can share files and printers through this built-in feature.

      Create a Homegroup in Windows 7

      In Windows 7 or 8.1, open Control Panel in icon view and click the icon for homegroup. At the homegroup window, click the button to Create a homegroup.

      In Windows 7, select the items you want to share via your homegroup: Pictures, Music, Videos, Documents, Printers. Click Next.

      At the next screen in Windows 7, write down, copy, or print the password for your homegroup. Click Finish.

      Create a Homegroup in Windows 8.1

      In Windows 8.1 after you click the button to Create a homegroup, click Next at the initial Create a homegroup window. Select the items you want to share in Windows 8.1 by clicking the drop-down box next to each one and changing the status to Shared. Click Next.

      At the next screen in Windows 8.1, write down, copy, or print the password for your homegroup. Click Finish.

      Change Homegroup Share Settings

      At the next screen, you can opt to share your content with media devices on your network. To do this in Windows 7, check the box to Stream my pictures, music, and videos to all devices on my network.

      Then click the link to Choose media streaming options. At the next screen, name your media library, click the Allow all button. Then click OK.

      In Windows 8.1, click the link to Allow all devices on this network such as TVs and game consoles to play my shared content. At the next screen, name your media library, click the Allow all button. Then click Next.

      How to Join a Homegroup

      Now let’s say you want to join a previously existing homegroup, or maybe you want someone else to join the one you just created. In order to participate in file and printer sharing, the other Windows computer must be on the same network and be a member of the same workgroup as the computer on which you created the homegroup.

      Change Homegroup Name

      You can check and change the name of the homegroup on a Windows 7 or 8.1 computer the same way. Open Control Panel in icon view and select System. In the section for Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings, make sure the workgroup name for your two computers is the same.

      If not, click the link to Change settings. At the System Properties window, click the Change button, change the workgroup name to match that of your other computer. Click OK. You’ll be prompted to reboot your computer.

      Go to Control Panel on the connecting computer and click the icon for Homegroup. Windows should be aware that there is already a homegroup on your network. Click the Join now button.

      Choose the items you want to share from your current computer. At the next screen, type the password for your homegroup. Click Next.

      Click Finish to exit the homegroup setup. You can now start sharing your files and printers among the two Windows computers. You can repeat the same steps for any other computers that needs to be added to the homegroup.

      How to Access Shared Files

      To access a shared file, open File Explorer (or Windows Explorer), scroll down to the bottom of the left pane, and you should see a new section called Homegroup. Click to see the other computers in your homegroup.

      Select one of the computers, and the right pane displays the various folders for documents, music, photos, and other items you chose to share. Double-click a shared folder to access its contents. You can then copy shared files between the two computers.

      You can tweak the settings and perform other tasks for your homegroup. On any device in the homegroup, go to Control Panel and double-click the icon for homegroup. From this window, you can change what you’re sharing, view or print the password, change the password, leave the homegroup, change advanced sharing settings, and start troubleshooting if you bump into any problems.

      Like What You’re Reading?

      Sign up for Tips & Tricks newsletter for expert advice to get the most out of your technology.

      This newsletter may contain advertising, deals, or affiliate links. Subscribing to a newsletter indicates your consent to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy. You may unsubscribe from the newsletters at any time.


      Here’s what happens when a printer gets shared:

      You install a local printer onto a computer, then go to printer properties, and enable printer sharing. That’s it. you’ve just created a print server.
      -That printer will be published to active directory as a shared printer.
      -It will Not be automatically installed on anyone’s computers, it’ll simply be ‘avaliable’.
      -Other computers connect to it by installing it as a “network printer”

      You’re taking the word too literally. Print Server is just a term for any computer that hosts shared printers. When the second computer installs the network printer, it downloads the drivers from the first computer, and when it prints, it sends all its print jobs to the first computer, which processes the jobs.

      Past that, it gains more depth. Windows Server operating systems come with a role called “Print Server”. This is mainly just a more feature-rich GUI that allows you to manage printers more effectively, as well as which printers are getting pushed out by which GPO’s.

      Normally, a computer doesn’t ‘automatically’ connect to a shared printer. There are two ways to accomplish this:
      1: Manually install a network printer, browse the network, and install it. It will automatically contact the computer that hosts it (the print server) and retrieve out the driver.
      2: Deploy via group policy. Through this method, you assign users or computers to a startup or logon script in a GPO. From the print server, you assign printers to the GPO, and when that user logs on, those printers will automatically be installed. See: http:/ / en-us/ library/ cc722179(v=ws.10).aspx

      -ANY computer that shares a printer is a “print server”
      -Permissions to those printers, as well as the print queue, are managed from the print server
      -The Print Server role in Server2k3/2k8 extends this role to deploy through group policy
      -Deploying through group policy is the only way for clients to connect to printers automatically (without browsing to them)

      Printing is an everyday job for us. Projects, office work, homework, etc. The basic fact is that we almost require printing every day. Now, what if we require sharing printer connected to our home Linux machine. So I decided to write a guide about it which is fairly simple. So, let’s start.

      Add Your Printer To Computer

      ​First basic thing is to install or add your printer. Connecting printer in Linux machine is very simple as almost all Linux distros have printer supports. Open the printer app from your app menu and look if the printer has been added.

      If the printer is already added or configured, it will be listed quickly on the opening printer app. If not, go to Openprinting and install your driver and again launch your printer option. Your printer should now be listed under add option, click forward on your printer config. Add the description and done. Open printer driver page has a vast variety so it is very unlikely that you don’t find your printer.

      Print anything to check your printer.​Now as the printer is added let’s share it so you can access it on other systems. It is also simple. Right-click on your printer and select the shared option.

      Here it is done. You have successfully shared your printer on a network in Linux. Now you will need to access it on other systems. Here is how to do it.

      Accessing A Printer On Another Computer

      I assume you are on LAN or somehow connected to your system from which we have shared our printer. Now here is what you have to do. Again open the printer tool as we did earlier and hit the ADD button. Your shared printer will be listed under the network printer. Click the remote hostname with the preferred printer, forward and fill out the description as we did earlier, apply and done. Voila! Print now!​

      If your printer is not listed, click on a find network printer. Enter the IP address of the printer and hit find. URI would be automatically filled. Again do as the old-time fill description and apply. Done!


      Printing is nowadays very easy on Linux based distros. You can print anywhere using a network shared printer in your favorite distros. Drivers are also no more a problem nor the old-time configuring problems. Go print the world of your dreams(just kidding, print what you need, save papers, save trees :). Happy printing.

      Mohd Sohail is a web developer and a Linux sysAdmin. He also loves to write how-to articles, applications reviews and loves to use new Linux distributions.

      View Comments

      Printing is NOT easy on Linux distros. For example, the published driver for the common Epson Work Force (and other) printers does not work on Ubuntu. Worse, we have to configure the printer to start with. Microsoft and Mac got us all used to plug ‘n play, and that’s what we expect from Linux distros that claim to be “user friendly.” I’ve now tried a half dozen of the top rated. Either they did not find my wifi network in the first place, or, wired or not, they could not find my printer, even when I typed in the host address for the configuration tool provided. In the one instance when I got recognition and response, the driver (apparently) spit blank page after blank page out of my printer in response to a print command, stoppable only by shutting down the printer. When Linux grows up (but that’s been promised for years) it will be an awesome competitor for MS and Mac. In the meantime, it’s a royal pain in the ass. (And no, I’m not a Microsoft shill; I hate Microsoft; that’s why I keep trying to make Linux work!)

      I share your frustration, but the blame is on the printer companies, not on Linux “not being mature”.

      I had no problem with my Brother mfc-j470dw via usb or wifi even from my ipad. But my wifi board in the printer seems to be super non responsive even hangs the printer firmware So trying to share it from my main Mint 20.1 box. So far I have it marked shared on my main box and set up on my No2 box also mint 20 looks great only hick No 2 box seems to print into /dev/nul.

      Me again. What about firewall blocking? What ports need to be opened? this is so so convoluted and a wast of time when it fails to work out of the box and we need security.

      The given procedure to share printer on network in Linux is very nicely explained in this article which is very effective for the printer as well as Linux users.

      How to Share a Non-Networking Printer

      Environments with multiple computers�either home or business�can benefit from the space and cost savings of sharing a printer over a network. To meet this demand, printer manufacturers have integrated both wired and wireless networking capabilities into their printers and networking manufacturers have developed both wired and wireless print servers.
      Yet, both of these options require you to either purchase a print server or a new printer. Depending on the situation, purchasing a new printer or a print server may be the appropriate course of action, but is there an option that doesn�t involve purchasing new equipment? Yes there is. Windows users can share a USB printer to their entire network in just a few minutes.

      This is how it is done:

      A. Setting up the shared printer from the computer hosting the printer:
      • Click on the Start icon and select Control Panel. How to share a printer
      • Double-click the Printers and Faxes icon.How to share a printer
      • Right-click on the printer that you want to duplicate and select Properties.How to share a printer
      • Click on the Sharing tab and click �If you understand the security risks but want to share printers without running the wizard, click here.�How to share a printer
      • Select �Just enable printer sharing.� Then click OK.How to share a printer
      • Select �Share this printer� and designate the name of the printer as you want it to appear to other computers networking to this printer. Click OK.How to share a printer
      B. Installing the shared printer onto the target computer
      (the computer not connected to the printer, but networked to the host computer).

      var bizrate=;

How to make raspberry vinegar

How to make raspberry vinegar

–Make this recipe in a mason jar, or something similar with an air-tight lid.
–Rinse and drain raspberries, removing any moldy bits; add to jar. Pour in vinegar, cover tightly. Store in cool dark place undisturbed for two weeks.
–Pour raspberries and liquid through a wire strainer that is lined with cheesecloth. Store finished raspberry vinegar in a tightly covered jars or bottles in cool, dark place (your pantry/cabinet should be fine). Keeps indefinitely; at least one year.

–MAKE A BIG BATCH. Triple the recipe using a 2-quart jar. This yields 5 cups of raspberry vinegar.
–GIFT IT. This beautiful vinegar can be divided into smaller bottles, tied with a bow, and given as gifts. Downloadable gift tags available in original post at

When I was in California visiting my sister, Nelda, she shared this easy recipe for making homemade raspberry vinegar. There’s no cooking or stirring or fussing. Combine two ingredients, wait two weeks, and you’ll have this beautiful vinegar ready to use in salad dressings and other recipes.

It has a long shelf life.
This vinegar will keep for a long time–at least a year. Some say it is still good after several years.

It makes a great gift.
The long shelf life makes this vinegar suitable to make up and keep on hand to use and give as gifts. In fact, you could make some raspberry vinegar now and get a headstart on holiday gifts. Wouldn’t it be great to have this ready to give when December comes along? I’ll share some recipes using this vinegar in upcoming posts that you could print and include with a gift bottle of this gorgeous stuff. You’ll find downloadable gift tags at the end of this post, too.

It’s good for you.
Raspberries are an antioxidant food, which means they help prevent damage to the body by protecting its cells and membranes. They contain several phytonutrients that give raspberries their beautiful color, and at the same time do everything from preventing bacterial growth in the intestines to preventing cancer. You can enjoy the health benefits of raspberries by eating them fresh or by preserving them in food products such as homemade raspberry vinegar.

It’s versatile.
Raspberry vinegar can be used in a variety of salad dressings to add a fresh, delicious flavor. For recipes, check out my post about Two Raspberry Salad Dressings – Raspberry Vinaigrette and Raspberry Poppy Seed.

Step-by-step photos for making Raspberry Vinegar.

Step 1. Assemble white wine vinegar, fresh or frozen raspberries (make sure they’re unsweetened), and a jar with a lid. In these photos, I’m making a triple batch using a 2 quart (half gallon) mason jar.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Step 2. Rinse and drain the raspberries and add them to the jar. I used a canning funnel to make the task easier and tidier.

How to make raspberry vinegar

view on Amazon: canning funnel

Step 3. Pour the vinegar into the jar.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Step 4. Screw on the lid and label it with the current date and the date 2 weeks away when the vinegar will be ready.

Step 5. Store the jar in a cool, dark place for 2 weeks. No need to stir or shake it. Just let it be. You don’t have to do a thing for 2 whole weeks. (Told you it was easy!)

How to make raspberry vinegar

After 2 weeks, the liquid in the jar will have this gorgeous color. The raspberries will look pretty anemic, because the liquid has absorbed their color.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Step 6. Line a wire strainer with cheese cloth and place it over a bowl.

Step 7. Pour the contents of the jar into the strainer.

How to make raspberry vinegar

The raspberry vinegar in the bowl is ready to transfer into bottles or jars and use or give as gifts. The “pickled” raspberries can be discarded; however, they are edible and can be stored in the fridge and added to salads. I’m not wild about them, personally; but you might want to taste one and see what you think.

Mason jars are widely available and an easy container option. However, it’s easier to pour from bottles, and they look prettier for gift giving. You can use any kind of bottle or jar, as long as they have an air-tight top. Cork top bottles are not recommended, because the cork is porous and will allow the liquid to slowly evaporate.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Make it a gift! Homemade gifts from the kitchen are always appreciated. Not only is this raspberry vinegar beautiful and impressive, it is also inexpensive to make. And, you can see how easy it is. Anyone can make this. You can’t go wrong.

How to make raspberry vinegar

All you need is a tag and a little ribbon, and your gift is ready to give. I’ve designed 3 tags for you to choose from. Download, print, and you’re ready to go.

Download printable jar labels/tags.

  • Print these on card stock, cut them out, punch a hole in the corner, and hang them from the jar neck with a ribbon, string, or rubber band.
  • Print them on sticker paper and stick them to the jar or lid. Or, print them on regular paper and stick them on with tape.

If you don’t have a printer or specialty papers, you can have a store with printing services download and print them for you (Kinkos, Office Depot, Staples, etc.)

To download and print a full sheet of tags, simply click an image below.

How to make raspberry vinegar

How to make raspberry vinegar

How to make raspberry vinegar

Below are links to some recipes that use this raspberry vinegar. If you give this vinegar as a gift, you can print out these recipes to accompany the vinegar.

F ashionable in the 1980s, fruit vinegars such as raspberry are finding new friends as we learn to use them with discretion. They make a brightly flavoured dressing for salad leaves but are useful elsewhere, too.

The recipe

Place 450g of raspberries in a stainless steel or glass bowl and crush lightly with a fork or potato masher. Pour over 450ml of white wine vinegar, stir then cover and set aside for at least 2 days. Give the fruit an occasional stir. Drain the fruit through muslin and leave for 2 or 3 hours – longer if you have time. Pour the liquid into a stainless steel saucepan and tip in 80g of sugar. Bring to the boil, then lower the heat and simmer for about 10 minutes, scraping off any foam. Leave to cool, pour into sterilised bottles and store in a cool dark place. It will last for a year.

The trick

Use a stainless steel bowl and pan – not aluminium, which would react with the vinegar. Sterilise the bottles with boiling water and dry them thoroughly before use. Use white wine or cider vinegar. It needs to have at least 5% acetic acid in order to keep. Leave the vinegar for a couple of weeks before using. Add more sugar if required.

The twist

Use the vinegar over vanilla ice cream. Crazy as it sounds, it is seriously refreshing. Use to deglaze cooking pans after sautéing lamb or liver. It gives a fruity depth to the caramelised flavours in the pan. Pour over ice then fill up with mineral water or lemonade. Beat into salad dressing with olive oil and black pepper and use to dress spinach or mixed leaf salads. Mix the raspberries with red or blackcurrants, adding a little more sugar.

Tangy raspberry vinegar with a hint of sweetness is the perfect accent in salad dressings and other dishes.


Recipe Summary


  • 6 ½ cups fresh raspberries
  • ¾ quart vinegar
  • .666 cup white sugar
  • Step 1

In a stockpot, combine the raspberries, vinegar and sugar and bring to a rolling boil, stirring constantly. Remove from heat, cover and chill for one month.

Remove vinegar mixture from refrigerator and strain through cheesecloth. Bring the mixture to a boil in a large pot and simmer for 5 minutes. Pour into sterilized jars. Ready to use immediately.

Reviews ( 5 )

Most helpful positive review

Excellent! I made this with the wild raspberries that grow in my yard. Red and Black. It is easy and delish! I gave it as gifts and have been asked for the recipe over and over.

  • 5 star values:

Excellent! I made this with the wild raspberries that grow in my yard. Red and Black. It is easy and delish! I gave it as gifts and have been asked for the recipe over and over.

I made a small version of this the other day and let it sit in the fridge until today, and then I mixed it with Red Raspberry Wine Vinaigrette Dressing from this site. In all reality I think the vinegar could have been just fine on its own without any other ingredients. Someone is asking why there is sugar in this recipe, and that’s because I think it offsets the tartness/acidity of the vinegar and fruit in nice style. I do believe that tomorrow with my salad I’ll just mix this with lemon olive oil and be just fine with that. I would definitely make this again! Thank you, sal!

because raspberries are tart and vinegar is tangy. the sugar adds the “hint of sweetness” desired in any berry vinaigrette.

Easy peasy. Tastes great on spinach and cranberry salad.

This is simple and most delicious. I will certainly make it again. I’ve found it to be very good on salad, blended with a little Balsamic vinegar and olive oil.

This fabulous tasting raspberry vinegar is so easy to make!


Recipe Summary


  • 1 (16 ounce) bottle white wine vinegar
  • 1 cup fresh raspberries
  • Step 1

Rinse and drain the raspberries and pour into a large glass bottle. Pour in the vinegar, tightly cover the container, and let sit in a cool dark place for two weeks before using.

Reviews ( 6 )

Most helpful positive review

I was pleasantly surprised at the raspberry scent from this. it was predominant even over the vinegar odor. I used this in a raspberry chicken recipe (it worked very well) & can’t wait to make my own raspberry vinaigrette, Not sure if I shouldn’t have added a bit of sugar w/ the raspberry. only time will tell. By the way, be sure & pick a container that allows for easy removal of the raspberries. I put mine in the decorative container I planned on storing the vinegar in & because of the small spout, I had a hard time removing the raspberries (which is essential to keep mold from growing). Next time I will make it in a mason jar, allow to set for 2 weeks, remove the raspberries & then pour the vinegar into a more decorative container.

Most helpful critical review

My grocer discontinued carrying raspberry vinegar so I looked forward to great results with this recipe. Regretfully this recipe only captures the fragrance of raspberry vinegar. It lacks the full bodied flavor I grew accustomed to. The flavor is so light that it’s nonexistent. Next time I’ll try using red wine vinegar.

  • 5 star values:

I was pleasantly surprised at the raspberry scent from this. it was predominant even over the vinegar odor. I used this in a raspberry chicken recipe (it worked very well) & can’t wait to make my own raspberry vinaigrette, Not sure if I shouldn’t have added a bit of sugar w/ the raspberry. only time will tell. By the way, be sure & pick a container that allows for easy removal of the raspberries. I put mine in the decorative container I planned on storing the vinegar in & because of the small spout, I had a hard time removing the raspberries (which is essential to keep mold from growing). Next time I will make it in a mason jar, allow to set for 2 weeks, remove the raspberries & then pour the vinegar into a more decorative container.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Josh Eggleton’s raspberry vinegar is delicious tossed over a simple salad with some goats cheese and crusty bread. The longer this raspberry vinegar is left to mature in the bottle, the better.

  • Raspberry Recipes
  • Italian sauce Recipes
  • Summer dessert Recipes
  • Easy vegetarian Recipes
  • Ragù Recipes
  • show more
  • hide more

Related recipes

Related recipes

How to make raspberry vinegar

How to make raspberry vinegar

How to make raspberry vinegar

How to make raspberry vinegar

How to make raspberry vinegar




  • 240g of fresh raspberries
  • 320ml of white wine vinegar
  • 320ml of distilled vinegar


  • Sterilised jars
  • Rolling pin


  • 240g of fresh raspberries
  • 320ml of white wine vinegar
  • 320ml of distilled vinegar
  • Raspberry Recipes
  • Italian sauce Recipes
  • Summer dessert Recipes
  • Easy vegetarian Recipes
  • Ragù Recipes
  • show more
  • hide more

It can take decades of dedication and dogged effort to win a Michelin star. Josh Eggleton, though, was ‘shocked’ to win his first Michelin star at the age of 27, after only a few years of being a Head Chef.

Raspberry vinegar is a great condiment to have around the house making a great base for salad dressings. This fruity raspberry vinegar is delicious drizzled over salads, steam vegetables or Asian greens. Add a dash to sparkling mineral water for a refreshing drink. Add to sweet and sour dishes for a delicious zing. Marinate berries or pour over ice cream, Our Raspberry Vinegar can be used as you would use a Balsamic. Yum!

All-natural ingredients, no artificial flavours, colours or fillers. ​Gluten-Free and Vegan.

Ingredients; Sugar, White Vinegar, Raspberry juice concentrate

Made in Daylesford to Josh&Sue’s family recipes.


“I could seriously drink this vinegar. It makes even the simplest salad taste amazing with EV olive oil. I’ve got one bottle in the go and two in the cupboard. Forget balsamic – this is way better! ❤️” MANDY R.

“This stuff is so delicious! I’m on my third bottle and it’s just the best dressing for a salad.” Rachel T

“Absolutely love this vinegar! Has transformed my salads.” Denise B.

“Oh how I love this stuff! This will elevate your salads to a whole other level. I combine it with olive oil, balsamic vinegar, salt and pepper, to make the most gorgeous salad dressing. Friends always ask, “ What’s that flavour in the dressing?” And my husband, who would begrudgingly eat salad at best, now devours it. It’s my ‘secret’ ingredient that makes my cooking skills seem way better than what they are. Brilliant product.” Lisa B

Perfect for salads, with sparkling wine and on roasts

Suitable for vegetarian and vegan diets. Awarded Gold*** in the Great Taste Awards 2014 and 2018, our famous raspberry vinegar adds a crisp, fresh finish to any salad. Mix a dash in sparkling wine or drizzle over Yorkshire puddings for the ultimate Sunday roast dinner. And for the ultimate salad dressing, blend with a fine British Rapeseed Oil.

Recipe Idea

How to make raspberry vinegar

Our vinegars are great for sweet or savoury dishes. Here are a few simple tips you could try:

Spirit vinegar, Sugar, Raspberries (33%)
Infused using 33g raspberries per 100g

Store in a cool place away from direct sunlight

Typical values
(As sold)
Per 100ml Per 10ml Serving
Energy 758kJ / 179kcal 76kJ / 18kcal
Fat <0.5g <0.5g
of which saturates <0.1g <0.01g
Carbohydrate 41g 4.1g
of which sugars 41g 4.1g
Fibre <0.5g <0.5g
Protein <0.5g <0.5g
Salt <0.1g <0.01g

We offer a variety of delivery options depending on your order size and delivery location, you can view all available services and more information here.


From £2.90 – UK mainland delivery (under 2kg) – Delivered within 7 working days

From £6.80 – UK mainland delivery (over 2kg) – Delivered within 3 working days

From £9.95 – Channel Islands & European delivery – Delivered within 7-10 working days

From £22 – Worldwide delivery – Delivered within 10-14 working days

Customer Reviews

One of my “can’t do without” products, absolutely amazing.

Wonderful flavour and not too acidic

My favourites are to mix with yoghurt and mayo for a creamy dressing or use in french dressing. Livens up any salad or veg.

. internet search and found Womersley. looking for Raspberry Vinegar. adapting a recipe for Cranachan, Scots traditional dessert for Burns Night 2022.
I also want to try creating a non dairy trifle, using fresh raspberries, non dairy Greek Yoghurt, non dairy custard, Greek honey.
Using the raspberry vinegar in lieu of sherry.
Yet to attempt this.
I am new to Womersley.
Impressed already!
Environmentally friendly packaging, history and recipe opportunities.
I am still studying Womersley!

I never used to be as big a fan of salads prior to tasting the raspberry vinegar from Womersley, which is why my dietary lifestyle has had an overhaul now for the better. The sublime taste of the sweet vinegar keeps me savouring my greens and I’m even carrying a small bottle of the dressing to make salads at my mum’s and sisters place, so I don’t miss out. Everyone who’s sampled it with me…just keep asking where to get it from. On a side note, I always find the emails from the owners, just as healthy and full of cheer. I can’t imagine anyone not ordering from Womersley.

How to make raspberry vinegar

The sweet tartness of raspberries marries perfectly with the fresh taste and fragrance of thyme. This raspberry and thyme vinegar can be used on both savoury and sweet salads too. Super easy to make it’s a great addition to your larder.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Raspberry and Thyme Vinegar

Flavoured vinegars are very popular these days. The supermarket and deli shelves are full of all things flavoured. But these things come at a price, so why not make your own flavoured vinegar.

I promise you it’s really easy. And this raspberry and thyme vinegar is so useful. Just a dash in a salad or even a fruit salad and it can make the most humble of ingredients sing and your taste buds dance with pleasure.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Ingredients for this flavoured vinegar

Scottish Raspberries

Scottish raspberries are legendary, sweet and just a little tart they say summer even more than strawberries to me. I love picking them in the garden and admit to still cramming more in my mouth like a kid than I actually get into the basket.

Can you use frozen raspberries?

Yes, you can use frozen raspberries to make this raspberry and thyme vinegar. Just make sure they are completely defrosted before using them.


Thyme is a hardy herb but with a delicate flavour. There are so many varieties of thyme including a delightful lemon thyme which would work wonderfully in this recipe if you can find it. Best still grow your own, like most herbs thyme is pretty robust and if it can survive up here on Walton’s Mountain it can survive almost anywhere.

What type of vinegar to use?

I use white wine vinegar for this raspberry and thyme vinegar recipe. As it’s a delicate flavour combo of raspberry and thyme I don’t want to overpower their flavour with a stronger vinegar.

NEVER use malt vinegar or plain white vinegar when you are making these sorts of flavoured vinegar. They are fr too strong and would kill the flavour you are so carefully adding. You can use champagne vinegar if you have it or possibly cider vinegar.

But for this recipe I would choose white wine vinegar.

A little sugar

Just to add a tiny bit of sweetness here. Don’t worry it doesn’t make this into something remotely sickly.

How to make flavoured vinegar

There are two ways of making infused vinegars, popping everything in a jar and leaving it for a week to infuse or this method which is much quicker.

Just bring everything to a boil then simmer for 10 minutes, remove from heat and let it sit in the pan to infuse overnight before decanting into sterilised bottles.

How to use this raspberry and thyme vinegar

This is a great vinegar for salad dressings where you want something light but with a kick of fruity flavour. Perfect for a simple green salad.

You can use this vinegar on a fruit salad too. You’d be amazed how the flavours in a simple fruit salad will perk up with just a few drops of this delightful raspberry and thyme vinegar.

Raspberry vinegar drink

You can even use this simple raspberry vinegar as a refreshing summer drink. Just dilute the fruit vinegar with double the amount of water and serve over ice on a hot day.

Drinking fruit vinegars, especially raspberry vinegar was very popular many years ago. They were often referred to as Shrubs.

Of course, that was before the advent of all our modern day fizzy drinks and sugar laden squashes and cordials.

How to make raspberry vinegar

How long will this infused vinegar keep?

This vinegar will keep for 6-8 months in a cool dark cupboard. The colour will darken with age. If left in sunlight the colour will fade.

This super easy recipe for raspberry and thyme vinegar is from my eBook Gourmet Gifts For Christmas .

Looking for more raspberry recipes? Then check these out;

Finally, if you do try this recipe don’t forget to leave a comment/star rating below as I just love to hear from readers. Want more Larder Love? Then follow me on Instagram , Facebook , Pinterest and Twitter and sign up for my newsletter too of course.

Photos And Tips Above Most of my recipes have step by step photos and useful tips plus videos too, see above.

How to make raspberry vinegar

A few leaves are scattered across the yard. It’s more to do with the crazy weather this year. First it rained, and rained, and rained some more. Then the rain stopped. As in, stopped so much the swamp behind my house dried up. It’s so strange not to see water out there. Anyway, the leaves make me think of fall being near. It’s time to preserve as much of summer as possible. Making raspberry vinegar is a way to have the flavor of summer berries all throughout a cold, grey winter. It will brighten it too.

The color of the vinegar is incredible. It’s stunning and almost glows. I knew it would be red yet, wow, I had no idea of exactly how red. I need to make a whole lot more and give bottles of it away as gifts. Look out friends and family, you may be getting homemade raspberry vinegar for Christmas. So when you see me at the store buying a bunch of bottles, this is why.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Saving berries can be easy or difficult. There is always the option to make jelly, jam, or preserves. However I haven’t had the urge to do that yet. I’ve had mixed results with freezing berries. I’ve tried both air drying then simply putting them in a bag and also spreading them out on a sheet to freeze individually. Sometimes the frozen berries were great and other times not so much. So I went for infusing them.

How to make raspberry vinegar

How is the raspberry vinegar? The flavor is as bright as the color. It has glorious essence of berries infused into white wine vinegar. There’s a hint of lemon plus a tiny touch of sweetness. A salad with it and olive oil would be fabulous. Using it to make a dressing has so many possibilities. I’m already dreaming about different herbs to blend with it. Thyme, tarragon, and rosemary are a good start.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Do you save summer produce? If so, what method? Is it canning, freezing, dehydrating, pickling, or some other way? Scroll down to find a list of various methods and recipes for preserving fruit and vegetables by Sunday Supper tastemakers. Also look at my Refrigerator Pickled Jalapeños with Herbs and Zucchini Relish. Big thanks to Stacy at Food Lust People Love and Heather at Hezzi-D’s Books and Cooks for hosting this event.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Whip up a quick and easy home made raspberry vinegar to drizzle over your salads.


  • 500 g ‘leftover’ or ‘surplus’ raspberries
  • 500 ml white wine vinegar
  • 100 g white sugar
  • 17.6 oz ‘leftover’ or ‘surplus’ raspberries
  • 17.6 fl oz white wine vinegar
  • 3.5 oz white sugar
  • 17.6 oz ‘leftover’ or ‘surplus’ raspberries
  • 2.1 cups white wine vinegar
  • 3.5 oz white sugar


  • Cuisine: English
  • Recipe Type: Condiment
  • Difficulty: Easy
  • Preparation Time: 30 mins
  • Cooking Time: 0 mins
  • Serves: 4


  1. In a non-reactive bowl, crush together the fruit and the vinegar. Cover and steep for 2 or 3 days in a cool place.
  2. Strain gently and slowly through cheesecloth or muslin.
  3. To the resulting juices, add 100g white sugar and bring to the boil in a stainless steel pan (this is essential, aluminium will ruin everything), stirring until the sugar has melted.
  4. Skim off any scum, turn down the heat and simmer gently for 10 minutes.
  5. Cool, then pour into sterilized bottles.

You might also like


Be the first to comment

Do you want to comment on this article? You need to be signed in for this feature

How to make raspberry vinegar

Spring is here and it is the best season together with summer to make some delicious infused vinegar. And with the salad season about to embark on us, how can we make this a lille more exciting…?

Making infused vinegar is super simple, and is so much cheaper than buying it from a store. Plus it could make a lovely gift for your loved ones.

How to make raspberry vinegar

How to make raspberry vinegar

before we start.

What vinegar should I use?

I prefer to use a good quality vinegar, something like white or red wine or a nice apple cider vinegar. Keep the cheap or ordinary ones to make your cleaning products.

What jar will I need?

Depending on what you are going to add to your vinegar you will need a jar with a large spout, for example for this version I needed a jar that would accommodate the raspberries easily. You will need to transfer the contents into a bottle when the infusion time has passed, so any clean jar will do.

Should I sterilise my jar?

Yes, is it really important to sterilise by just leaving your jars in an hot oven for 10 minutes, or if you have a very good dishwasher you could sterilise them on the hottest cycle (there is controversy over this method but I always find that it works fine in our home).

How long should I leave it to infuse?

A minimum of 3 weeks but not much more than 5 weeks so the ingredients don’t start to perish.

Do I need to transfer it after the infusing time?

Yes, and it is very important or your vinegar will not last – I have made that mistake before and it was very disappointing! Transfer to a nice bottle and add some a lovely label to it to remind you of the flavour you have created.

Sweet tangy raspberry vinegar mixes with honey an olive oil for a light summery homemade salad dressing that is made in minutes and blows bottled salad dressing out of the water.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Sweet tangy raspberry vinegar mixes with honey an olive oil for a light summery homemade salad dressing that is made in minutes and blows bottled salad dressing out of the water.

Now, I’m not going to stand here and tell you that I only ever make my own dressings, and that bottled dressings are bad. I am a huge proponent of Hidden Valley Ranch, and I love me a nice green salad with a little bit of Kraft Zesty Italian on it.

But let’s face it. Those dressings are loaded down with artificial flavors and sweeteners and God knows how much sodium.

They’re good, but sometimes you want to know exactly what it is you’re stuffing your face with.

This dressing is quick and simple and absolutely delicious. It’s a little off the beaten path – raspberry vinegar can be difficult to find, but it’s sold on Amazon, and in specialty food stores if you have some in your area.

And it’s totally worth the extra hassle to get your hands on the vinegar. You don’t need a ton of it to make the recipe, and it’s so good on a field greens salad, or just drizzled over strawberries.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Shopping List for Raspberry Vinegar Dressing

Raspberry Vinegar


Olive Oil

Salt and pepper

See – I told you it was simple!

All you have to do is throw all of the ingredients into a bottle with a lid and shake until it homogenizes.

This is a delicate dressing, so it’s not going to stand up to a huge hearty salad with tons of ingredients, but on a salad of spring mix or arugula with some goat or feta cheese, cherry tomatoes, grilled corn and lightly grilled chicken, this dressing is a game changer.

Some benefits of Raspberry Vinegar:

Raspberry vinegar is made from the extracts of raspberries, which are known to have many awesome health benefits.

They’ve been shown to help lower risk of stroke and heart disease.

They are high in antioxidants.

They are high in Vitamin C, which helps produce collagen, which in turn helps prevent and repair sun damage to skin.

They’re low in calories, but high in fiber, which helps you feel fuller, longer.

They contain less sugar than most fruit – just 5 grams of sugar per cup of fruit, and they are naturally sweet, which can help prevent sugar cravings.

Overall, they’re basically the perfect food, and I try my best to eat my body weight in raspberries each summer.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Making and storing dressing:

Like most dressings, you can just add all of the ingredients to a jar, and then shake it to combine. Taste and adjust for seasoning. That’s one of the best parts of a homemade dressing. You can make it your own.

Because the dressing is solely honey, vinegar and oil, it lasts much longer than dressings that have other things in them such as shallots or garlic. The dressing will last in the fridge, covered, for about 10 days.

There’s not really anything to substitute in this recipe – you could definitely make it with a different fruit vinegar. Blueberry vinegar would be awesome.

You can always sub red or white wine vinegar as well, for a simple homemade vinaigrette.

How to make raspberry vinegar

I am going to write up this post as quick as I can: getting it done is one of many things on my ever-growing to-do list for today. Why the rush? Well, my friends, Hurricane Irene is on her way. While I am certainly hoping for the best, if the dire predictions we’re seeing in the media come to pass, it’s not going to be pretty. I live 90 miles North of NYC: we’ll most likely lose power, and it might be a little while before we get it back.

My friend Jessica, who also happens to live here in the Hudson Valley, put together this great list of Hurricane Readiness Tips. Please have a look if you’re in the path of this storm…there’s still a small window of time left to prepare.

Once I make sure everything on that list is done, and all my other goals for today are met (including making sure my chickens and beehive are as secure as possible), you can bet I am going to be relaxing attempting to relax with a cocktail. I am not a big drinker but something tells me the anxiety I am currently feeling is only going to mount by tonight. This Raspberry Shrub, made with homemade raspberry vinegar, has been a favorite discovery this summer: I think I’ll be clutching the Prosecco version pretty tight later today and possibly in the days ahead, as well.

Back in July, I used fresh raspberries to make a raspberry vinegar.

How to make raspberry vinegar

To do this, you just take 2 cups of fresh raspberries and put them in a 1 pint glass jar. Then pour white vinegar into the jar, completely covering the raspberries. Cover the jar with layer of plastic wrap before screwing on the lid (the vinegar can eat away at the metal lid otherwise), then let this hang out in a cool, dark place for about 2 weeks.

If you want to make a larger amount of raspberry vinegar, use more jars and the amount of raspberries and vinegar needed to fill them.

At the end of two weeks, pour the raspberries and vinegar through a fine mesh strainer over a bowl. Using a wooden spoon, carefully push on the raspberries to dispel all the liquid (don’t push so hard that you end up with pureed raspberry in your vinegar, though), then compost or discard the raspberries.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Stored in a clean glass jar (I ended up with 1 cup total), your raspberry vinegar will keep for a very long time. Store it in your pantry with the rest of your vinegars…no need for refrigeration. Such an easy process, right? So go snatch up some berries before the season’s over (how about before the hurricane comes if you’re on the East Coast!) and make some 🙂

Raspberry vinegar can be used in homemade salad dressings and marinades, but, as I happily learned from Bon Appetit, you can also use it to make Raspberry Shrub.

What’s a shrub, you ask? Here we are not talking plants, we’re talking about a beverage that’s sweet and fruity with a vinegar component. The word shrub is derived from the Arabic word “sharab“, which I’ve seen translated both as “syrup” and as “drink”. Shrubs have been enjoyed throughout history: they were a very popular refresher in American colonial times, in fact.

Research tells me that this isn’t a traditional shrub recipe (I’ve included links at the end of the post to “real” shrubs, if you’re interested). But it’s easy and unexpectedly delicious, so I hope you have a chance to try it some time…preferably not during a hurricane.

Homemade berry vinegar is easily made in your home kitchen preserving the goodness of fresh seasonal fruit.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Homemade Berry Vinegar

By Sue Lau | Palatable Pastime

Homemade Berry Vinegar is my recipe of the day for Berry Week. I love making vinegars every year- sometimes with berries, sometimes with other fruits, occasionally with herbs and then there is pepper vinegar, the staple of the south.

There isn’t a whole lot involved with making these vinegars from scratch as it takes just the fruit, a supply of white wine vinegar, and some canning jars.

What Type of Vinegar Should I Use?

As a word of caution, I don’t advise trying this with cider vinegar, white vinegar or anything else as the flavors will either be harsh, off, or just discolored in the vinegar itself. You want a nice clear vinegar to showcase the lovely color of your fruit, but white vinegar is just harsh flavored.

Where Should I Store My Vinegar?

After you set up the vinegar, you will want to store it in a nice dark place. Basements and cellars are great as they are cool and dark. You really don’t want to store in a hot place. If you don’t have something handy, you can always create a dark place inside a heavy paper grocery bag and set off to the side somewhere where the room temp is nice. Stay away from the laundry room with it if you store things there as the dryer will put off heat.

Sitting quietly in their dark world, vinegars will look wonderful in about 3-4 weeks. The fruit itself may appear like the color has faded, but that’s ok.

How To Finish It Up

Strain the berries off and try to avoid any sediment in the bottom of the jar if you have that as it will make the vinegar cloudy.

The vinegar is safe to keep at room temp because of the vinegar content.

Don’t keep the berries in the vinegar as it will degrade. Sometimes, when doing herb vinegars, I will keep a sprig of tarragon in it but even that can look not so pretty after awhile.

Enjoy your berry vinegar as you would any other, or try putting it in your favorite homemade vinaigrettes for a more delicious and complex flavor.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Tuesday Berry Week Recipes

It’s Berry Week so all week long you will be seeing berry oriented recipes on various participating blogs. I will be participating three days this week as time allows. Check my events calendar on the right margin for more details.

Condifrutta are delicate and flavourful dressings, made with glucose/fructose syrup, wine vinegar, natural aromas and extracts.

They are perfect for the most varied dishes. Their spicy and fruity notes, the sweet and sour aftertaste and the low acidity make them extremely pleasant and suitable for all tastes.

Ideal for:

  • Fresh and aged cheese
  • Mousses
  • Yoghurt
  • Custard ice cream
  • Waffles
  • Fruit salad
  • Fresh or cooked fruit
  • Cocktails

Ingredients: 70% concentrated grape must, wine vinegar, 3% concentrated raspberry juice, aroma. Contains sulphites.

Net: 250ml

COURIER DELIVERY (Tuesday-Saturday)


Please ensure you select the correct shipping option at the checkout.


All orders received before 1pm can be dispatched the same day (Mon-Fri), unless a specific future date is selected using the drop down calendar on the basket page of our website.

For future date deliveries select the Express delivery option that best suits your needs, End of Day. Pre-12pm or Pre-10.30am. We deliver Tuesday through until Saturday, we do not deliver on Sunday.


All of our parcels are shipped on an express next working day service as standard, on the day before you have selected to receive it, usually with DPD or DHL. In accordance with all UK courier terms and conditions it is not guaranteed that your parcel will arrive the next day. Please consider this when planning for an event or party whereby goods absolutely have to be delivered on time.

If your parcel is time sensitive then please use the EXPRESS BY 10.30 AM or EXPRESS BY 12 PM option.


Any attempt to change your delivery address or divert your parcel once it has been despatched is done so at your own risk. Please make sure all delivery information is correct when placing your order. We cannot be liable for loss or delay of parcels whereby the customer has requested to change the delivery address whilst their order is in transit. There is a minimum of a 24 hour delay when choosing to divert your parcel to a DPD pick-up shop so choosing this option or ‘leave in a safe place’ is done at your own risk. We cannot be liable for theft or spoilage of goods whereby you were not available to personally receive them.


If you have selected Saturday as a delivery date please be aware that over the weekends we have no access to courier phone or email support so it is essential that you provide any ‘additional delivery information’ in the “notes” section when placing your order so you parcel is successfully delivered.


You can collect your order from our warehouse between 8am – 5pm Monday – Friday. Simply select the PICK UP option after the basket page of our website at the checkout. Your order can be ready to collect within 30 minutes. Please feel free to call us to arrange if the date you selected on the basket page refers to courier delivery (Next Day). +44 (0) 1732 756 587


For the shipping fresh and frozen goods w e use high quality mixed recyclable insulated packaging to keep your products perfect through the courier network.

To keep frozen goods at the correct temperature we use a safe alternative to dry ice. These gel packs freeze to a temperature of -45 ° and stay frozen for an extended period of time. Completely food safe and fully recyclable/reusable.

All ingredients that we sell are hand selected choosing from the best products available. Our fresh meat, fruit and vegetables are vacuum packed in fully recyclable bags to protect them during transit and also to keep them fresher for longer once you receive them.


For the shipping of fresh and frozen goods w e use high quality mixed recyclable insulated packaging to keep your products perfect through the courier network.

To keep frozen goods at the correct temperature we use a safe alternative to dry ice. These gel packs freeze to a temperature of -45 ° and stay frozen for an extended period of time. Completely food safe and fully recyclable/reusable.


The vast majority of shipments arrive frozen but we cannot guarantee this. In the event that your order has defrosted it should still be at a very low temperature when you receive it and therefore fine to put in your freezer. Refreezing is only unsafe if the product has reached 8 °c . It is worth mentioning that supermarkets routinely sell defrosted food as “fresh”, with the advice that it may be frozen when you get home.

All frozen products arrive in extremely high quality, fully insulated packaging.


All fresh truffles are sent in a foil resealable pack with an absorbent paper. This is suitable for storing in your fridge. If storing truffles for more than a few days we recommend wrapping them in paper towel or using a Tuberpac. Fresh truffles are always best consumed as soon as possible.

How to make raspberry vinegar

I have been having fun making homemade flavored vinegars. My blueberry vinegar was a big hit, so I decided to try making raspberry vinegar. It takes several weeks to make it, but it is very easy to make, and well worth the wait!

This post may contain affiliate links.

Raspberry Vinegar Recipe

  • 1 c. fresh or frozen raspberries
  • 2 c. white vinegar

Rinse and drain raspberries in a colander, removing any bad berries. Place rinsed raspberries into an empty pint or quart sized canning jar or other jar that has an airtight lid.

Pour in the vinegar and cover with a lid. Place in your pantry cupboard for 2 weeks. The raspberries will slowly lose their color, turning white when the vinegar is done.

After 2 weeks, remove the jar from the cupboard and then strain the vinegar through a fine mesh strainer. Discard the raspberries, pour the vinegar back into the jar, and the vinegar is ready to use.

The original recipe says that you can store the vinegar in your pantry for up to 1 year, or you can store it in your refrigerator. Vinegar does not spoil if you leave it out of the refrigerator, so it can be left out for months without worrying it will go bad.

I sent of my raspberry vinegar some to my sister and she said she ate it on her spinach salad without adding any oil to it. She loved it. If you want to add oil to it, to make an easy raspberry vinaigrette, just mix 1/4 c. raspberry vinegar with 3 tbsp. olive oil and salt and pepper to taste, and you have homemade raspberry vinaigrette.

Flavored vinegars make great holiday gifts for friends and family and only require a few ingredients to make.

Like this recipe? Try my recipe for canning raspberry jam from fresh raspberries.

Related Recipes

Follow my canning and preserving board on Pinterest.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Cranberry Sauce with Raspberry Vinegar recipe is an updated twist on the traditional versions of cranberry sauce. Your family will love this easy to make version. Cranberry Sauce with Raspberry Vinegar is a perfect accompaniment to your holiday turkey that is bursting with flavor. This recipe is sure to become your family’s classic cranberry sauce. Very delicious!

How to make raspberry vinegar

Please check out my Thanksgiving Turkey Dinner Menu which includes Cranberry Sauce with Raspberry Vinegar.

  • 1 1/4 cups granulated sugar
  • 1/2 cup raspberry vinegar
  • 1/4 cup water
  • 1 (12-ounce) package cranberries (fresh or frozen)*
  • 1 cinnamon stick
  • 1 tablespoon orange peel (zest), thinly sliced

In a large saucepan over medium heat, combine sugar, raspberry vinegar, and water; bring to a boil, stirring just until all sugar dissolves.

Add the cranberries, cinnamon stick, and orange peel (zest). Reduce heat to low, cover partially with a lid, and let simmer approximately 10 minutes or until ALL the cranberries burst. Be careful when boilinng, because the sauce can foam up and can spill, so you have to watch it.

NOTE: Cranberries have a lot of natural pectin, the ingredient that makes cooked fruit gel. To release that pectin, you need to cook the berries until they burst and can form a bond with the sugar. Boil the mixture until it is thickened and then do not refrigerate the mixture until it is cooled to room temperature.

Remove from heat and let the sauce cool completely (sauce will thicken as it cools) before refrigerating. Discard cinnamon stick.

Cover and refrigerate.

NOTE: Can be made up to one week in advance.

Yields 2 1/3 cups.

* Discard any cranberries that are soft, shriveled, withered, or discolored, and remove any stems. They should be shiny and plump and range in color from bright light red to dark red. One 12-ounce bag equals approximately three cups of whole berries.

More Interesting and Delicious Cranberry Recipes:

Cranberry Relish
Ben Weller, my son-in-law, makes this wonderful family recipe for Thanksgiving and Christmas dinner. He uses the traditional method of grinding with an old hand-crank grinder. His mother, Joan Weller, told me (in confidence) that you do not really need to use a food grinder (you can use a food processor). It was her way of keeping her sons busy and out of the way when she was fixing the holiday dinner.

Cranberry Holiday Spread
This delicious holiday spread is very easy-to-make and is sure to delight your family and friends. Makes a great appetizer to serve before your large Thanksgiving or Christmas dinner.

Cranberry Salsa Dip
This fantastic recipe was shared with me by Carol Reich of Hillsboro, Oregon. Carol won a Dip Contest on the Satellite Sisters Radio Show with this outstanding and also beautiful-to-look-at recipe.

Cranberry-Jalapeno Granita
This granita would be delicious served during the Thanksgiving and Christmas holidays. Granitas are as cool and delicious as ice cream, but they are much lighter, more refreshing, and a lot easier to make.

Zucchini Cranberry Bread with Pecans
Here is a very pretty quick bread to make now and then freeze for later use. During the holidays, you will be very thankful to have a few of these loaves in your freezer to give as gifts and to serve your guests. This is also a great recipe to use those “large” zucchini that seem to grow overnight!

How to make raspberry vinegar

Pick from the hedgerow rather than a prepared punnet and make raspberry vinegar.

Learn how to make raspberry vinegar to soothe sore throats, enjoy with pancakes or simply make water a little more interesting. The hedgerow is practically groaning with goodies at the moment. So pick your raspberries rather than buying a supermarket punnet. Take a basket with you on your dog walk and see what you can find. But you will have to resist eating all of the raspberries before you get them back to the kitchen.

For more treats picked straight from the hedgerow, The Field has plenty of inspiration. For a soothing bedtime brew, try our recipe for rosehip tea. Or if you are after something a little stronger, try elderberry vodka. It is guaranteed to make any get-together a real knees-up. And if your hedgerows have presented you with a rather random harvest, put it all in the maslin pan and make wild fruit jam. A generous dollop on freshly baked bread fresh out of the oven is a real British treat.


Could you supply me with a recipe for raspberry vinegar? It was readily available many years ago and was enjoyed on pancakes, drunk as a cordial and even used as an antiseptic. Nobody seems to remember these recipe gems from yesteryear. Can you help?
MDP, Louth, Lincolnshire

Fruit vinegars are simple to make. Pour 1 litre (13/4 pints) white wine vinegar over 1 litre (13/4 pints) raspberries which have been gently bruised with the back of a spoon. Allow to stand for four days, stirring daily. Strain through a jelly bag, adding 450g (1lb) of caster sugar per litre of liquid. Heat gently till just simmering. Allow to cool, then bottle and cork tightly. Store in a cool, dry place. Drink diluted with water. It is also effective for soothing sore throats, either taken neat or with a little hot water.

Prefer to listen to this article? No problem! Four Season Foraging now offers free audio versions of articles with the help of a text-to-speech website. Simply click the play button on the right!

In case you missed it, I recently wrote a blog post called Berries Galore, in which I discussed various ways to cook and bake with berries. Among other things, I included directions on making berry-infused vinegar. Well, my red raspberry vinegar is complete, so here are some recipes!

Vinegar Infusion

How to make raspberry vinegar

Infusing Red Raspberries in White Wine Vinegar

Due to its high acid content, vinegar functions as an amazing preservative. When infusing berries, it is recommended to use white wine vinegar for the flavor. However, apple cider vinegar will suffice as a budget version. To start, gently wash and dry your berries. Then sort through them and pick out any bad ones. You will need equal parts clean, dry berries to vinegar. Place the berries in a sterilized glass jar. If desired, gently mash the berries with a wooden spoon or fork. This will expedite the infusion process, but it’s not really necessary. Then pour in the vinegar. Make sure that it completely covers the berries. Screw on the sterilized lid and store in a cool, dark place. Add a label with the contents of the jar and the date. Let sit two to four weeks, tasting periodically to test the flavor. When it’s ready, strain into another sterilized glass jar and put a new label on it. Use in salad dressings, marinades, sauces, and cocktails. For best flavor, use within 6 to 12 months.

*Note: if using a metal lid, make sure to put plastic wrap or wax paper between the lid and the jar. Otherwise the acid from the vinegar will corrode the metal.

Raspberry Ginger Vinaigrette

How to make raspberry vinegar

Salad with Raspberry Ginger Vinaigrette


1/4 cup red raspberry-infused vinegar

1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

1/2 tsp fresh ginger, grated

1 tsp lemon juice

Salt and pepper, to taste


Place all ingredients in a glass jar, cover with lid, and shake.

Adjust ingredients to taste.

If desired, let sit at room temperature for a couple hours to allow ginger to infuse.

Use as salad dressing. Any remainder can be refrigerated.

*Notes: It should stay good in the fridge for several weeks. (I’m not sure because I always use it quickly!) It’s normal for the olive oil to separate and solidify. Just take it out of the fridge and let sit at room temperature before using again. How quickly it liquefies will depend on how warm the room is.

*If using a metal lid, make sure to put plastic wrap or wax paper between the lid and the jar, or the acid from the vinegar will corrode the metal.


This word can evoke lots of things. but in this case I’m talking about the drink! Shrubs are mixed drinks made with a sweetened fruit-infused vinegar. This practice dates back to 17th century England, and was carried over to colonial America. They have made a resurgence in recent years among mixologists. Shrubs can be made with soda water, or added to cocktails. Typically the fruit-infused vinegar is first sweetened with sugar, but in my version I’m adding simple syrup to the drinks.

Simple Syrup

Simple syrup is a basic ingredient for many cocktails. It is simply equal parts sugar and water that’s mixed together, heated, and stirred until dissolved. Typically people use white sugar, but I actually prefer honey. Either one will work! Store any unused simple syrup in the fridge for up to one week.

Ginger-Infused Simple Syrup

1/2 cup simple syrup

1 rounded Tbsp finely chopped fresh ginger OR 2 rounded Tbsp finely chopped fresh ginger (for extra-gingery version)

Combine ingredients in non-reactive pot, such as stainless steal or glass.

Cover and bring to simmer. Reduce heat to low and simmer covered for 30 minutes.

Strain the syrup into a glass jar. Store in fridge for up to one week.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Raspberry Mint Shrub Drink

Raspberry Mint Shrub

This is a perfect summertime drink! Cool and refreshing with a nice tang, you’ll keep coming back to it time and again!

1 cup fresh mint leaves, loosely packed

1/4 cup simple syrup

1/4 cup raspberry-infused vinegar

1 Tbl lime juice

12 fl oz plain sparkling water

Find a glass that can comfortably hold a pint of liquid, and loosely pack it halfway with fresh mint leaves.

Pour simple syrup over the mint, and muddle with a wood or stone pestle.

Stir in raspberry-infused vinegar and lime juice.

Add sparkling water and stir until just mixed.

If desired, add ice and garnish with mint leaves and lime.

How to make raspberry vinegar

Raspberry Ginger Shrub

Raspberry Ginger Shrub

The ginger in this drink produces a pleasant warming feeling and a nice bite at the end! If you like more of a subtle ginger flavor, I recommend following the regular ginger-infused recipe. If you’re a big ginger fan, definitely go for the extra!

1/4 cup ginger-infused simple syrup

1/4 cup raspberry-infused vinegar

1 Tbl lemon juice

12 fl oz plain sparkling water

Find a glass that can comfortably hold a pint of liquid. Add simple syrup, raspberry-infused vinegar, and lemon juice. Stir until well mixed.

Add sparkling water and stir until just mixed.

If desired, add ice and garnish with lemon.

*Recipe note: to make these into “adult drinks,” simply add a shot of hard liquor such as gin, tequila, or vodka after the simple syrup, raspberry-infused vinegar, and lemon/lime juice are mixed. Then add plain sparkling water minus the amount of hard liquor used (typically 1.5 fl oz.) Enjoy!


There are so many things that can be done with berry vinegar. What recipes can you come up with? I encourage you to try and comment below with your findings!